Education PDF

NA
RA
YA
N
CH
AN
GD
ER
M
RA
E
RE
I SH
JA
I will develop this draft from time to time

Copyright © 2019 Narayan Changder
Published by Narayan Changder
https://www.gatecseit.in
First printing, September 2019

Cover credit: Manash Kumar Mondal (BSC, MCA. M.Tech, NTA NET-CSE)
Preface to the second edition
Every effort has been made to make this book error-free. l welcome all constructive criticism
of the book.
Disclaimer
The aim of this publication is to sup-
ER
ply information taken from sources be-
lieved to be valid, reliable and authen-
ticate. The author bear no responsibil-
ity for any damage arising from inad-
GD
verent omissions, negligence or inac-
curacies (typographical or factual) that
♣
may have found their way into this PDF
booklet.
Due care has been taken to ensure that
AN
the information provided in this book
is correct. Author is not responsible
for any errors, omissions or damage
arising out of use of this information.
CH
nt
Importa
he in-
e rs , s earch t in-
i th t h e answ o u w ant to
w f y n-
n o t s atisfied an s w ers. I le t, p lease co
If rect book book
for cor in this n Face
ternet i o n s i m o
N
s t h
ew que contact hangde
r/
clude n r. You can r a y a n c
tact au
tho .com/na
w w.f a cebook
w
YA
https://
RA
NA
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
Contents
GD
1
AN
Basic fact about education systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
CH
2 Motivation and emotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3 Child development and pedagogy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
4 Histry of education in subcontinent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

N
5 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
YA
6 Curriculam developement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
7 Educational philosophy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
RA
8 Educational sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
9 Principle of teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
10 Psychological disorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

NA
11 Secondary education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
12 Environmental studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
13 Higher education system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
14 ICT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
15 Modern history of education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

16 Psychology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
17 Research methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
18 School and classroom management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
19 Teaching and research aptitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
20 Teaching aptitude in education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
21 Educational movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
M
22 Educational policies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
23 Elementary education in early history Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
RA
24 Islamic education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
E
RE
I SH
JA
ER
1. Basic fact about education systems
GD
AN
CH
1. tests measure the extent of students B. Shaping
learning in a given content area.
C. Prompting
A. Aptitude
D. Positive practice
B. Diagnostic 5. If a student is rude to you, which strategy
C. Readiness would you adopt as a teacher?
N
D. Achievement A. Punish the student

2. “Anything can be taught at any stage of B. Argue with the student
YA
development”, was said by

C. Express shock at such behaviour
A. Jean Piaget
D. Remind the student of classroom rules
B. Jerome Bruner
6. What will be the IQ of a 25 years old boy
RA
C. David Ausubel whose mental age is 16?

D. Albert Bandura A. 50
3. is the degree to which a test measures B. 64
what it is supposed to measure?
NA
C. 75
A. Validity
D. 100
B. Usability
7. Social change would bring a change in
C. Reliability which of the following?
D. Objectivity A. Human relationship
4. means reinforcing each small step to- B. Structure of the society
wards a desired goal or behaviour.
C. Attitudes, ideals and values
A. Cuing
D. All of the above
1. D 2. B 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. B 7. D 8. B
8 Chapter 1. Basic fact about education systems
8. Which of the following are the characteris- A. Their experiences

tics of a person with scientific attitude? B. Inherited potentitalities
A. Brevity C. Interaction of nature and nurture
B. Objectivity D. Social pressure on the individual
C. Adventure 15. For , ‘Experimentation’ the standard
D. Sharp memory procedure to know the truth?
9. The concept of ‘SUPW’ was elucidated by A. Science

B. Geography
A. Adiseshiah Committee C. Archeology
M
B. Ramamurthi Committee D. Public Administration
C. Sampurnanand Committee 16. The amendement got “Fundamental
Duties” added to the Constitution of India?
RA
D. Ishwar Bhai Patel Review Committee
A. 41st Amendment
10. Who became the first Minister of Education
in the Indian government? B. 42nd Amendment
A. Shri M. C. Chagla C. 43rd Amendment
B. Dr. K. L. Shrimali D. 44th Amendment

17. Cause and effect relationships are studied
C. Shri Humayun Kabir
E
by studies.
D. Maulana Abul Kalam Azad
A. Clinical
RE
11. On which list is education in Indian Con-
B. Comparative
stitution?
C. Experimental
A. State list
D. Developmental
B. Central list
18. The development of a student’s personality
SH
C. Concurrent list is affected the most by

D. None of the above A. Discipline at institute
12. Computer Assisted Instruction is based on B. Emotional climate at home
principle
C. Inherited assets and liabilities
A. Operant Conditioning
D. Social orientation of peers and elders
I
B. Classical Conditioning 19. Which of the following situations would

JA
C. Pavlovian Conditioning the best for maximum transfer of learning?

D. Respondent Conditioning A. Similar tasks requiring different re-
13. Which of the following is Doordarshan’s sponses
Educational Television Channel? B. Similar tasks requiring the same re-
A. Vidya sponse
C. Different tasks requiring different re-
B. Gurukul
sponses
C. Gyan Bharati
D. Different tasks requiring the same re-
D. Gyan Darshan sponse
14. Which of the following affects an individ- 20. Which one of the following is the most im-
ual’s development at a given time? portant elements in teaching?
9. D 10. D 11. C 12. A 13. D 14. C 15. A 16. B 17. C 18. B 19. D 20. D
No one can stop your success except yourself. We ⇒https://www.gatecseit.in
guarantee many common qestions in all examination. Good luck 9
A. Subject matter 26. is the apex institution involved in the
B. Student’s knowledge planned and coordinated development of
the teacher education system in the coun-
C. Teaching techniques and aids used try.
D. Relationship between teachers and stu- A. UGC
dents
21. You want to ensure participation of more B. NCTE
ER
students in class. Which of the following C. NCERT
methods of teaching would you adopt?
D. None of these
A. Role-play
27. What makes an adolescent revolt against
B. Recitation
GD
Authority?
C. Discussion
A. He thinks that he is mature enough
D. Demonstration
B. He thinks that he is intelligent enough
22. To make learning effective, a goal must be
meaningful in terms C. He believes that he does not need any
AN
advice
A. Intellectual ideas
B. Standards of others D. His want for recognition and indepen-
dence of thought and action
C. Objectives of the curriculum
28. You want to develop cooperation and team
CH
D. The needs and purposes of students spirit in students? Which activities would
23. Which of the following items of informa- you propose?
tion are important about students to moti-
A. Art
vate them for studies?
A. Personality B. Quiz
C. Debate
N
B. Learning style
C. Socio-cultural background D. Project work
YA
D. All of the above 29. What is the main purpose of punishment

24. is the process in which you identify to students?
the common aspects or basic relationships A. Reform the offender
in a variety of specific situations?
RA
B. Demonstrate authority
A. Reasoning
C. Protect others from doing the same
B. Abstraction
C. Generalization D. Retaliate for the wrong that has been
done
NA
D. Problem Solving
30. Why is Environment Awareness necessary
25. If you want to improve the ability to ob-
at all stages of education?
serve in children, which of the following
would you recommend? A. Important for human survival
A. Sharpening the senses B. Environment varies from region to re-
B. Training mental faculties gion
C. Generating interest in subject C. Man must control and change environ-

ment
D. Developing a framework for experi-
ences D. None of the above
21. C 22. D 23. D 24. C 25. B 26. B 27. D 28. D 29. A 30. B 31. B
31. “Recall the face of the poorest and weakest A. Obey teacher’s command
man whom you may have seen, and ask B. Submit home-work on time
yourself, if the step you contemplate is go-
ing to be of any use to him”. Who said these C. Improve their own capabilities
lines? D. Score best grades in the class
A. Zakir Husain 37. How can a teacher develop creativity in
himself and the learners?
B. Mahatma Gandhi
A. Set new tasks
C. Lal Bahadur Shastri B. By praising any creative work
M
D. Sardar Vallabh Bhai Patel C. By playing thought provoking games
32. Having variety of question sets in a ques- D. By giving new up-to-date information
tion paper increases it 38. What is the best way for a teacher to re-
RA
solve the problems in a class?
A. Validity
A. Ask for other teacher’s opinion
B. Difficulty
B. Depends on one’s own opinion
C. Reliability
C. Use the view that Principal gives
D. Objectivity D. Think on suggestions offered by the
33. is the quality of a good teacher. children and implement the good ones
E
39. How would you make your students inde-
A. Sense of humour
pendent?
RE
B. Physical strength A. Ignoring their petty fights
C. Control over emotions B. Solving their problems for them
D. Good command over the subject C. Give responsibility to everyone
34. Which of the following is true about the D. Giving orders and expecting obedience
SH
ways of learning for students? 40. Why is ‘learning by doing’ important?

A. Each child has a unique learning style A. Maintains discipline
B. Speed of learning is same for all students B. Keeps children busy

C. Promotes meaningful learning
C. Children follow the way other students
learn D. It develops interest among children
I
41. For a teacher teaching a class wit large

JA
D. All children immediately follow strength, which of the techniques is best?

teacher’s instruction
A. Lecture and class notes
35. How should a teacher be related to his
peers? B. Group work with a lecture
C. Debate, discussions, practicals
A. Follow independent views
D. Self study and asking questions
B. Should copy other teacher’s style 42. Talking and indiscipline in classroom is an
C. Should not intervene in other’s work indication of
D. Suggest each other the effective ways A. Indisciplined students

to teach B. Confusion about things taught
36. A teacher should encourage the students C. Not summarising lecture points
to D. Boredom casued by repetitiveness
32. C 33. D 34. A 35. D 36. D 37. C 38. D 39. C 40. D 41. A 42. D
43. You have a mixed class of boys and girls. 49. Learning in the mother-tongue helps a stu-
Which method would you adopt to improve dent to what is being taught.
co-operation between them? A. Create
A. Talking about equality in lessons B. Interpret
B. Asking parents to discuss equality C. Reproduce
C. Making boys and girls share a bench
ER
D. Easily comprehend
D. Setting tasks which have to be done to- 50. Which educational psychologist believed in
gether the fact that ‘All children have the potential
to learn’?
44. You are training in public speaking and de-
GD
bate. Which of the following characteristics A. John Dewey
can you not expect to develop? B. Friedrich Frobel
A. Concept C. Maria Montessori
B. Voice modulation D. Johann Friedrich Herbart
AN
C. Control over emotions 51. A student is ‘Exceptional’ when his perfor-
mance is significantly
D. Using language creatively
A. Below the average student
45. What is the use of text book in a class?
B. Above the average student
A. Set new standards
CH
C. Similar to the average student
B. To delimit what is to be taught
D. Above or below the average student
C. To explain ideas and concepts 52. When is the best time to evaluate a stu-
D. To achieve learning objectives dent’s performance?
46. Which subject tries to understand the role A. When the instruction have begun
N
of man in changing his environment? B. When the instruction have ended

A. History C. Throughout the instructional process
YA
B. Biology D. Only at the end of major units of instruc-

C. Geography tion
53. When was the National Adult Education
D. Political Science
Programme (NAEP) launched?
RA
47. Why is teacher training necessary?

A. 1975
A. Understand methods of school organi-
B. 1976
sation
C. 1977
B. Upgrade knowledge of content
NA
D. 1978
C. Increase teaching skills
54. When is ‘National Teachers Day’ cele-
D. All the above brated?
48. Study of improves a students ability to A. January 15
experiment and analyse
B. February 28
A. Science C. September 5
B. History D. October 5
C. Language 55. What advantage do objective type tests
have over essay tests?
D. Mathematics
43. D 44. C 45. D 46. C 47. D 48. A 49. D 50. B 51. D 52. C 53. D 54. C 55. C
A. They are easier to interpret A. Reprimand them

B. They take less time to prepare B. Stop teaching for a while
C. The sampling content can be wider C. Give a command seeking attention

D. Provide them a chance to be physically
D. They require less technical knowledge
active
56. Equalisation of educational opportunity is 62. ‘National Policy on Education’ 1986 was
provided in of Indian Constitution. reviewed by
A. Article 41 A. Ramamurti Committee
M
B. Article 42 B. Adielsehiah Committee
C. Article 44 C. Sampurnanand Committee
D. Article 45 D. Iswar Bhai Patel Committee
RA
63. Suppose you get a Hindi Medium student
57. How can forgetting be minimised?
who has learnt English. He is given five
A. Recitation sentences to be translated from Hindi to En-
glish. As an evaluator, which aspect would
B. Cramming
you to try to evaluate in him?
C. Overlearning A. Synthesis
D. Discrimination
E B. Application
58. What would you do if you find two students C. Knowledge
of your class fighting?
RE
D. Understanding
A. Ignore the fight 64. The issue of ‘academic burden on students’
was examined by .
B. Punish both of them
A. Mathur Committee
C. Ignore the aggressor
SH
B. Yashpal Committee
D. Punish the aggressive child
C. Adielshiah Committee
59. Where is the First Central Institute of Vo-
D. Iswar Bhai Patel Committee
cational Education located?
65. is the apex institution in the area of
A. Bhopal training educational planners and adminis-
B. Mumbai trators?
I
A. SIE
C. Calcutta
JA
B. NCTE
D. Coimbatore
C. NIEPA
60. The major disadvantage of punishment in
education is that D. NCERT
66. is the major cause of difference in the
A. It prevents team work classroom behaviour of boys and girls.
B. It generates unpleasant feelings A. Job aspirations
C. It causes embarrassment in children B. Educational levels
D. It does not solve the problem perma- C. Societal expectations
nently D. Developmental differences
61. What would you do if you notice that stu- 67. Which of the following pairs is incorrectly
dents tend to doze off in your class? matched?
56. C 57. C 58. B 59. A 60. B 61. C 62. A 63. D 64. B 65. C 66. C 67. B
A. Piaget - Moral Development 73. undertook the innovative project ‘Lok

Jumbish People’s movement for Education
B. Thorndike - Theory X and Y
for All’?
C. Maslow - Hierarchy of Needs
A. Bihar
D. Skinner - Programmed Learning
B. Rajasthan
68. What is the biggest advantage of interac-
C. Uttar Pradesh
ER
tion between the teacher and the students?
D. Madhya Pradesh
A. It satisfies the teacher
74. Can a teacher suspend a student?
B. It facilitates effective learning
A. Yes
GD
C. It results in better group relations B. No
D. It encourages the students to ask ques- C. Doubt
tions
D. May not sure
69. cannot be adopted for effective class-
75. A blackboard cannot be used for
room teaching.
AN
A. Show schematic diagrams
A. Use of technological aids
B. Improvement of a paragraph
B. Improving classroom climate
C. Making reports based on information
C. Manipulating teaching methods
D. Summary of relationships between facts
CH
D. Teaching latest trends and advances
70. Majority of the students in a class misbe- 76. Exams are held to
have, what does it tell you? A. Assess learners skills
A. Too many rules B. Identify learning problems
B. Lack of a code of conduct C. Identify the level of learning
N
C. Presence of distractions in the class D. Rank students for selection

D. General indiscipline amongst students 77. Which of the following policies was intro-
YA
duced in 1975?
71. Young adolescents rebel to express their
A. Macauly Report
A. Their creativity B. Radhakrishnan Report
RA
B. Their desire for freedom C. Kothari Commission Report

D. Curriculum for the 10 year school
C. Their personal inadequacy
78. The purpose of the textbook is to provide
D. External discipline imposed
72. You have an aggressive student in your
NA
A. A material to teachers to base teaching

class. Which of the following would you on
adopt to handle him?
B. Reading and reference materials for the
A. Punish him teachers
B. Allow him the opportunity to act aggres- C. A learning material based on a syllabus
sively to a learner
C. Put him in a highly frustrating and en- D. A material forming the basis and con-
barrassing situation tent for examinations
D. Make him aware of the harmful conse- 79. What is the purpose of the assignments in
quences of aggression the text book?
68. B 69. D 70. D 71. B 72. D 73. B 74. B 75. C 76. A 77. D 78. C 79. B
A. To aid teachers 86. What is the importance of having devel-

B. To provide practice to the learners oped senses?
C. To act as a guidance for the unit tests A. To achieve happiness
D. To helpd learner revise and review the B. For physical well being
chapter C. Other learnings depend on them
80. The aim of the Charter Act of 1813 was
D. For all round mental development
A. To spend money on education 87. Which subject explains and appreciates the
B. To spread education worldwide contribution of the past to the present?
M
C. Government control on education A. History
D. To make English education common B. Economics
81. If your purpose is , group work is not a C. Sociology
RA
good idea.
D. Geography
A. Division of work and responsibility
88. Education in the Vedic period was
B. To overcoming learning difficulties
A. Mostly in Sanskrit
C. To improve coordination and sharing
B. Given in Gurukuls by a sage
D. To identify different aspects of a prob-
C. Meant for the removal of inequality
lem
E
82. ‘Generation gap’ refers to D. Confined to the princely classes and
Brahmins
RE
A. Problems of teenagers
89. is not an objective of Formal Educa-
B. Attitude of adults to teenagers
tion.
C. The growing awareness of adolescents
A. Self-paced learning
D. Difference in values of different age
B. Teacher-centered learning
SH
groups
83. Choice of a vocation depends C. Learning discipline-based content
A. Ease of admission D. Comparing high and low achievers
B. Interest and skills of the learner 90. A student in your class is guilty of stealing.
What would you do?
C. Subjects a student learnt at school
A. Send the child to the police
I
D. Income generated by the occupation

JA
84. is suitable to slow learners. B. Publicly demand an apology

A. Role playing C. Punish and make the child repay
B. Creative writing D. Find the cause of the behaviour and ex-
plain the effects of stealing
C. Learning by rote
91. EFA Programme is involved in
D. Mechanical repetition of an action
85. Why should a teacher be an idealist and set A. Removing poverty
examples? B. Removing illiteracy
A. Teacher is an adult C. Providing primary education to all
B. Teacher is a paternal figure D. Improving administration of schools
C. Students do not have values 92. is not an objective of the Adult Literacy
D. Students usually imitate teachers Program.
80. A 81. D 82. D 83. B 84. C 85. D 86. C 87. A 88. B 89. A 90. D 91. C 92. B
A. Flexibility of time to learn A. Edgar Dale

B. Training women entrepreneurs B. Jeanne Clum
C. Providing work related literacy kits C. Ponting Barry
D. Providing literacy and health Education D. Jereme Krusner
99. Which of the following would you use to
ER
93. What is the most important contribution shape the habits?
that a teacher can make in the classroom?
A. Training
A. Develop interest in the lesson
B. Teaching
B. Set high achievement levels
GD
C. Indoctrination
C. Impart knowledge of the subject
D. None of these
D. Reduce tension and make learning cre-
100. A consultant or a team conducts the eval-
ative
uation process in a particular way, which
94. How would you improve student participa- of the following decides that
AN
tion in classroom activity?
A. Business analysis
A. By holding tests
B. Terms of reference
B. By giving written assignments
C. Project management
C. By group activity and reporting
CH
D. Quality management
D. By reading textual information
101. You have a student who has failed in a
95. What type of teachers are appreciated?
particular class. How will you motivate
A. Friendly this student to study sincerely in the same
B. With charming personality class?
N
C. The one exercising strict control over A. By friend’s counselling

his students B. By teacher’s counselling
YA
D. The one who understands the problems C. By guardian’s counselling

of students and helps them
D. By psychological counselling
96. The scheme of Restructuring and Re-
organization of Teachers was approved in 102. As a principle, how would you behave
RA
the year? with below average students?
A. 1987 A. Generously
B. 1988 B. Won’t pay any attention
C. 1989 C. Same as with other students

NA
D. 1990 D. Won’t allow them in the next class

97. is called perceptional level learning. 103. A teacher should be towards his stu-
dents?
A. Seen to unseen
A. Tolerant
B. Simple to complex
B. Supreme
C. Known to unknown
C. Outspoken
D. Concrete to abstract
98. The ‘Cone of Experience’ was developed D. Sympathetic
by 104. NLM stands for
93. D 94. C 95. D 96. A 97. A 98. A 99. A 100. B 101. D 102. A 103. A 104. C
A. National Liberty Mission A. Froebel

B. National Labour Mission B. Montessori
C. National Literacy Mission C. Prof. A.H. Whitehead
D. National Literacy Movement D. All of the above
105. Its your first day in a class, what would 111. How do we get knowledge and how can
you do? we be sure it is true and not error? This
area of philosophy is called
A. Smile at everyone
A. Epistemology
B. Evaluate the subject
M
B. Beyond Philosophy
C. Introduce yourself to the students
C. Neurology
D. Ask the students to stay disciplined
106. How would you dress yourself as a D. None of the above
RA
teacher? 112. All levels of education are provided from
the nursery to the University stage in
A. Dignified
A. Arya Samaj
B. Traditionally
B. Shantiniketan
C. Comfortably
C. Brahmo Samaj
D. Fashionably
E D. Ashram at Pondicherry
107. Why are class tests conducted?
113. In today’s society school should give
A. To revise
RE
A. Vocational base
B. As a writing practice
B. Ornamental base
C. To train students to think logically
C. Both of the above
D. To evaluate educational achievement
D. None of these
SH
108. The statement by the then Prime Minister

Rajiv Gandhi that a new education would 114. Following attributes would correctly de-
made so as to Prepare Indians for the 21st fine learning
Century in the year A. Belief, creativity, and endurance
A. 1985 B. Intution, intelligence and memorisation
B. 1988 C. Change of behaviour, practice and ex-
I
C. 1993 perience
JA
D. 1997 D. Understanding, imagination and work-

manship
109. Who had observed that the art of educa-
115. The 1968 national policy teacher educa-
tion would never attain clearness in itself
tion adopted by the Indian Government laid
without philosophy? He was
stress on the following aspects of teacher’s
A. Fichte education
B. M.K. Gandhi A. Promotion and retirement facilities for
C. John Dewey teachers.
D. Gautam Buddha B. Travel allowance and family pensions

for teachers.
110. The opinion that “our aim should be to
produce men who possess both culture and C. Adequate emoluments and academic
expect knowledge” given by freedom for teachers.
105. C 106. A 107. D 108. A 109. A 110. C 111. A 112. D 113. A 114. A 115. C
D. In-service training and correspondence 120. Rama Krishna Mission was founded by
education for teachers. A. Guru Nanak Dev
116. If we believe in the dualistic theory of the
B. Swami Dayanand
mind versus body nature of man, have to
arrive at the econsequence that C. Swami Vivekanand
A. Learning an education should cater to D. Raja Ram Mohan Roy
ER
observable behaviour of man 121. Annie Besant inspired the opening of
schools in many cities in
B. Learning is purely a matter of material
changes in the behaviour of man A. Early nineteenth century
C. Education is purely a matter of mental B. End of nineteenth century
GD
training and development of the self C. Early twentieenth century
D. Education is mechanisation in process D. End twentieenth century
and theoretical in development 122. In ancient India religions and moral aims
117. Article 45 under the Directive Principles were dominated by
AN
of State policy in the Indian Constitution, A. Kshatriya system of education
provides for
B. Brahmnic system of education
A. Free and compulsory primary education
C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Education for weaker sections of the D. None of the above
CH
country
123. The concept of totalitarian education in
C. Giving financial assistance to less ad- the West was in favour of
vanced states
A. Making the state responsible to evolve
D. Rights of minorities to establish educa- education as a means of satisfying individ-
tional institutions ual’s needs and interests
N
118. Vivekanand was a B. Making the education of the individual

A. Poet as an instrument for realising the ends of
the state
YA
B. Philosopher
C. The education of the individual for de-
C. Religious guru velopment of his total personality
D. All of the above D. Treating education as a binding factor
RA
119. The National Educational Policy of 1979, of international understanding

recommended also about the public schools 124. Regarding co-education at the secondary
stage, the 1952-53 Education Commission
A. suitable ratio has to be maintained for
has suggested that
admission of middle class and poor student
NA
also. A. To maintain separate schools for boys

and girls
B. they must be allowed the autonomy that
was bestowed on them by the past system B. To start, resource, in several states could
of education not afford
C. their uniquencies and traditions have to C. There should be objection to extend co-
preserved the interests of the best talents educational school
of the country D. The situation in our country warrants
D. they should be brought under laws and establishment of more boys schools than
regulations of the government public edu- co-educational school.
cation system 125. Who formed Brahmo Samaj
116. C 117. B 118. B 119. A 120. C 121. B 122. C 123. B 124. B 125. A
A. Raja Ram Mohan Roy C. Raja Ram Mohan Roy

B. Guru Nanak D. Swami Dayanand Sarswati
C. Ramanand 129. Ahinsa & Truth in Gandhiji’s opinion is
D. Kabir A. Two side of a coin
126. Tagore was a B. Can’t translate
A. Poet C. Can’t inter-wined
B. Musician D. Have no relation between the two
C. Philosopher 130. “The affection brought about a lossening
M
up of the rigidity of Hindu Society and has
D. None of these
been an admirable modern influence on
127. The topic method in education should be Hindu thought” said by
interpreted
RA
A. Kabir
A. a substitute for the project method of
teaching B. Swami Dayanand
B. a concentric approach of teaching the C. Swami Vivekanand

classroom D. Rabindranath Tagore
C. a method of development of the syllabus 131. Intellectual aim in education was empha-
in a subject
E sised in
D. a method suited better for arts subjects A. Greek
RE
as compared to science subjects B. India
128. Arya Samaj was founded by
C. Sparta
A. Kabir
D. Athenian
B. Swami Satyanand
I SH
JA
126. A 127. A 128. D 129. A 130. C 131. A

ER
2. Motivation and emotion
GD
AN
CH
1. The manufacture of adrenalin and nora- A. Motivation and Emotion
drenalin is controlled by.
B. Perception and Attention
A. Nervous system
C. Learning and Memory
B. Endocrine system D. Personality and Intelligence
N
C. Regulatory system E. None of these

D. Circulatory system 5. Both the terms “emotion” and “motivation”
YA
E. Homeostasis came from the same Latin root.
2. Repression is a common mode of resolving. A. Movement
A. Anxieties B. Move
RA
B. Tensions C. Moment
C. Conflicts D. "Movere"
D. Motives E. None of these

6. According to Lewin,tensions are emotional
NA
E. None of these
states which accompany.
3. The defence mechanisms are reactions to.
A. Needs
A. Frustration
B. Motives
B. Psychosexual behaviour
C. Goals
C. Aggression
D. Anxieties
D. Goal-directed behaviour
E. None of these
E. None of these 7. In avoidance-avoidance conflict,the individ-
4. Dynamic psychology is the psychology of. ual is compelled to choose between.
1. A 2. C 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. A 7. B
20 Chapter 2. Motivation and emotion
A. One positive and one negative alter- A. Binnet,s scale

native
B. Thurstone,s scale
B. Two negative alternatives C. TAT (Thematic Apperception Test )
C. Two positive alternatives D. Semantic Differential scale
D. Two negative alternatives and two pos- E. None of the above
itive alternatives
13. The desire to be with one,s own kind is
E. None of the above termed as.
8. A releaser is a highly specific stimulus that A. Gregariousness
M
“triggers” or initiates.
B. Consumatory behaviour
A. Response
C. Imprinting
B. Social Behaviour
RA
D. Coolidge Effect
C. Gregariousness E. None of the above
D. Species-specific behaviour 14. The type of conflict in which the goal of the
E. None of the above individual has both positive and negative
valence of approximate equal intensity is
9. Who assumed that human motives are ar- known as.
ranged in hierarchy of potency?
E
A. Approach-avoidance conflicts
A. Neal Miller(1959)
B. Avoidance-avoidance conflicts
RE
B. Janis & Mann (1977)
C. Approach-approach conflicts
C. Jerome Singer(1962)
D. Multiple approach-avoidance conflicts
D. A.H Maslow (1970)
E. None of the above
E. Schacter(1967)
SH
15. A young woman who turns herself into a

10. Corpus luteum and placenta of pregnant religious worker has a strong.
women secret the hormone. A. Approach gradient
A. Estrogens B. Social Motive
B. Androgens C. Hypervigilance
I
C. Progestins D. Encephalization
JA
D. Adrenalin E. None of the above

E. None of the above 16. The author of the hierarchical theory of
motivation is.
11. According to Maslow ,the self-actualizing
tendency is. A. O.H Mowrer
A. Instinct B. McClelland
B. Imprinting C. J.W Atkinson
C. Growth Motivation D. A.H Maslow
D. Deficiency motivation E. None of the above

17. When progress towards a goal is blocked
E. None of the above and underlying tension is unresolved we
12. Need for achievement can be measured by. speak of.
8. D 9. D 10. C 11. C 12. C 13. A 14. A 15. B 16. D 17. A 18. A

A. Frustration A. Social Motive

B. Critical period B. Biological Motive
C. Goal C. Personal Motive
D. Restriction D. An Instinct
E. None of the above E. None of the above
ER
18. Survival needs to activate the organism to.
24. When the motive has a biological or physi-
A. Provide for physiological deficits ological basis,it is called a/an.
B. Seek pleasure A. Drive
GD
C. Avoid pain B. Incentive
D. Gain status and recognition
C. Imprinting
D. Libido
19. Motives can be.
AN
A. Inferred from behaviour
25. Motives are never observed directly but
B. Observed directly
they are inferred from.
C. Used to explain behaviour
A. Stimulus
CH
D. Used to predict behaviour
B. Conflict
C. Tension
20. A motivated behaviour is directed towards.
D. Behaviour
A. Situation
B. Object E. None of the above
N
C. Goal 26. The first stage of motivational cycle is.
D. Group A. Drive state

YA
E. None of the above B. Instrumental behaviour

21. Needs drives or motives. C. Goal
A. Can be directly observed
RA
D. Frustration
B. Cannot be directly observed E. None of the above
C. Are always dormant
27. In studying motivation,we attempt to an-
D. Are the same swer.
NA
E. None of the above A. The broadest “why” question of be-

22. Gregariousness is a/an. haviour
A. Social motive B. The innate releasing mechanism
B. Biological motive C. Fixed-action pattern
C. Psychological motive D. Displacement behaviour
D. Personal motive E. None of the above
E. Internal motive 28. The level of arousal is maintained by a
23. Individual,s life goal is. structure in the brain stem called the.
19. A 20. C 21. B 22. A 23. C 24. A 25. D 26. A 27. A 28. C 29. A
A. Pons 33. Social conformity can be described as a re-

B. Lymbic system vers.
C. Reticular activating system A. J-curve

D. Cerebellum B. S- curve
E. None of the above C. U-curve
29. Motivation can be understood as an inter- D. T-curve
action between.
E. V-curve
A. Arousal and Effort
34. F.H Allport (1935) described social confor-
M
B. Vactor and Valence
mity as the.
C. Life space and Approach gradient
A. S-curve hypothesis
D. Approach gradient and avoidance gra-
RA
dient B. V-curve hypothesis
E. None of the above C. U-curve hypothesis

30. A desire to achieve success and to meet D. J-curve hypothesis
some inner standard of excellence is a good
definition of the. E. None of the above
A. Achievement Need(n ACH) 35. As motivation is closely related to effort the

E emotion is related to.
B. Fixed-Action pattern
A. Arousal
C. Displacement behaviour
RE
B. Instinct
D. Encephalization
E. None of the above C. Displacement behaviour
31. The”need for success”expectancy for suc- D. Conflict
cess and the”incentive value of success”and
SH

three motivational factors which determine
the strength of. 36. Fritz Heider ,an Austrian psychologist has
given a great deal of insight into.
A. Social Motives
A. Imprinting
B. Biological Motives
C. Personal Motives B. Critical period
I
D. Achievement Need C. Interpersonal relationships

JA
E. None of the above D. Coolidge Effect

32. The need to achieves is jointly determined E. None of the above
by.
37. A motive ethnologically means that.
A. The expectation of success and the fear
of failure A. Which moves
B. The blocking of behaviour and fear of B. Which distracts
failure C. Which drives
C. The drive stimulus and approach gradi-
D. Which stimulates
ent
D. The innate releasing mechanism and
frustration 38. Since motives activate the organism they
are also known as the.
30. A 31. D 32. A 33. A 34. D 35. A 36. C 37. A 38. C
A. Outer dynamics A. External physiological status and envi-

ronment
B. Drive stimulus
B. Internal physiological status and the en-
C. Inner dynamics
vironment
D. Approach gradient C. Displacement behaviour and encepha-
E. Substitute behaviour lization
ER
39. The second stage of the motivational cycle D. Approach gradient and avoidance gra-
is called the. dient
A. Goal E. None of the above
GD
B. Instrumental Behaviour 44. The relative strength of the drives of
hunger thirst and sex have been studied
C. Driving State experimentally in the white rat by.
D. Relief A. Learning Method
AN
E. None of the above B. Obstruction Method
40. Prolactin a hormone from the anterior pi- C. Activity wheel
tuitary gland plays an important role in
D. The choice and Preference Method
motivating.
E. Questionnaire Method
A. Maternal behaviour
CH
45. The technique by which the strength of
B. Imprinting need is measured in terms of readiness with
C. Instinct which a task is learned under different con-
ditions of motivation is known as.
D. Consummatory behaviour
A. Activity wheel
N
B. The choice and Preference Method

41. Behaviour of the mentally ill persons is
greatly influenced by their. C. Learning Method
YA
D. None of the above

A. Conscious motives
46. The technique for the measurement of need
B. Innate Releasing Mechanism by which the strength of a need is measured
C. Unconscious motives in terms of the magnitude of an obstacle or
RA
the number of times an obstacle of a given

D. Fixed-action pattern magnitude will be overcome in order to ob-
E. Displacement behaviour tain a needed object is known as.
42. Generally we infer needs and desires from. A. Learning Method
NA
A. Covert behaviour B. Obstruction method
B. Approach gradient C. Activity wheel
C. Drive stimulus D. The choice and Preference Method
D. Overt Behaviour E. None of the above

47. A tension within an organism which tends
E. None of the above to organize the field of the organism with
43. Physiologists use the term homeostasis to respect to certain incentives or goals and
describe the body,s tendency to maintain a to incite activity directed towards their at-
balance or equilibrium among it,s. tainment is called.
39. B 40. A 41. C 42. D 43. B 44. B 45. C 46. B 47. A

A. Need 52. The expectations or goal that one sets to

achieve in future keeping in view his past
B. Imprinting
performance is called.
C. Libido
A. Valence
D. Valence
B. Vector
E. Vector C. Vigilance
48. An intraorganic activity or condition of tis-
D. Level of Aspiration
sue supplying stimulation for a particular
type of behaviour is known as. E. None of the above
M
53. “The need for achievement” was first de-
A. Need
fined largely on the basis of clinical studies
B. Motive done by.
RA
C. Drive A. Murray (1938)
D. Conflict B. Janis and Mann (1977)
E. Tension C. Solomon (1974)
49. Maslow viewed that motivated behaviour D. Corbit (1974)
is. E. None of the above
A. Need related
E
54. The achievement motivation theory of Mc
B. A vector Clelland is explained in terms of.
A. "Affective Arousal model of moti-vation
RE
C. A valence
B. Action Specific energy
D. An approach gradient
C. Innate Releasing Mechanism
E. Coolidge Effect
D. Displacement Behaviour
50. “A goal refers to some substance,objects or
SH
environmental condition capable of reduc- E. Opponent Process Theory

ing or temporarily eliminating the complex 55. Intrinsic Motivational Theory was pro-
of internal conditions which initiated ac- pounded by.
tion”, This definition of “goal” was given
A. Mc Clelland
by.
B. Maslow
A. Janis & Mann (1977)
I
C. Harry Harlow
B. Ruch(1970)
JA
D. Solomon
C. Solomon and Corbit (1974)
E. Corbit
D. Neal Miller (1959)
56. Psychoanalytic theory of motivation was
E. None of the above developed by.
51. Cannon called the concept of internal equi- A. Sigmund Freud
librium and function as.
B. Maslow
A. Imprinting
C. Harry Harlow
B. Instinct D. Mc Clelland
C. Homeostasis E. None of the above
D. Substitute Behaviour 57. The goals which the person tries to escape
are called.
48. C 49. A 50. B 51. C 52. D 53. A 54. A 55. C 56. A 57. D
A. Positive goals A. Janis (1977)

B. Vectors B. Soloman (1974)
C. Valences C. Deci (1975)
D. Negative goals D. Mann (1977)
E. None of the above E. Corbit (1974)
ER
58. A person,s need for feeling competent and 63. Most of the research on intrinsic motivation
self-determining in dealing with his envi- has concentrated on the interaction has
ronment is called. concentrated on the interaction between.
A. Intrinsic Motivation
GD
A. Intrinsic and extrinsic rewards
B. Instinct
B. Instinct and imprinting
C. Imprinting
C. Action-specific energy and balance
D. Coolidge Effect sheet grid
AN
E. None of the above D. Substitute behaviour and consumma-
59. When the motive is directed towards goals tory behaviour
external to the person such as money or
grade, it is called.
64. An individual,s affective orientation to-
A. Extrinsic Motivation wards particular outcomes is called the.
CH
B. Intrinsic Motivation
A. Vector of the outcome
C. Imprinting
B. Approach gradient of the outcome
D. Instinct
C. Valence of the outcome
D. Avoidance gradient of the outcome
N
60. Steers and Porter (1975) in their text enti-

tled “Motivation and work behaviour” iden- E. None of the above
tified. 65. Dipboye (1977) distinguished between the
YA
A. Two major components of motivation strong and weak versions of.
B. Four major components of motivation A. Achievement theory

C. Five major components of motivation B. Two-factor theory
RA
D. Three major components of motivation C. Valence theory

E. None of the above D. Consistency theory
61. The conditions which influence the arousal E. None of the above
NA
direction and maintenance of behaviour rel-

66. Motives are.
evant in work settings are called.
A. Work Motivation A. Internal sources of behaviour
B. Drive stimuli B. External sources of behaviour
C. Substitute behaviour C. Natural sources of behaviour
D. Consummatory behaviour D. Both subjective and objective sources

of behaviour
62. Intrinsic motivation as currently conceived E. None of the above
is championed by. 67. Motives move a person from.
58. A 59. A 60. D 61. A 62. C 63. A 64. C 65. D 66. A 67. A
A. Within A. Directional aspects of behaviour

B. Outside B. End result of instrumental behaviour
C. Beginning C. Destination after conscious activities
D. Birth D. Occasional halts
E. Death E. None of the above

68. Literally motivation means the process of 73. When a motive is aroused and the organism
inducing. is driven to a goal,a condition is produced
within the organism called.
M
A. Movement
A. Conflict
B. Excitement
B. Tension
C. Tension
C. Anxiety
RA
D. Conflict
D. Jealousy
69. Motivation is defined as a state of the organ-
74. The tension increases when the goal is.
ism in which bodily energy is mobilised and
selectively directed towards parts of the. A. Free
A. Stimulus
E B. Easy to achieve
B. Response C. Obstructed
RE
C. World D. Static
D. Environment E. None of the above

75. Those internal mechanisms of the body
which by controlling numerous highly com-
SH
70. “Mobilisation of bodily energy” is other- plicated physiological processes,keep it in

wise known as. a state of equilibrium are known as.
A. Drive A. Homeostases
B. Need B. Nervous System
C. Motive C. Nutrition
I
D. Incentive D. None of the above

JA
E. None of the above 76. Homeostasis is the overall term for equilib-
rium preserving tendencies with an organ-
71. The selected part of environment refers ism preserving tendencies with an organ-
to the end results of behaviour sequence ism by which.
which are known as.
A. Neurophysiological condition is main-
A. Aims tained
B. Objectives B. Psychological condition is maintained
C. Goals C. Psychological condition is maintained
D. Destinations D. Psychophysical condition is maintained
E. None of the above E. None of the above
72. Goal refers to. 77. Curiosity comes under.
68. A 69. D 70. A 71. C 72. A 73. B 74. C 75. A 76. A 77. B
A. Social Motives 83. Which one of the following is not a psycho-

B. Personal motives logical motive?
C. Non-homeostatic motives A. Need for achievement
D. Both(b) and (c) B. Need for affection

E. None of the above C. Need for belonging
ER
78. Sex is a. D. Need for Oxygen
A. Biological motive E. None of the above
B. Physiological motive 84. ‘The competition of two or more contra-
GD
C. Both (a) and (b) dictory impulses usually accompanied by
D. Psychological motive emotional tension is called a/an.
E. None of the above A. Conflict

79. Maslow,s idea about the structure of needs B. Anxiety
is known as.
AN
C. Neurosis
A. Self-actualisation theory of motivation
D. Psychosis
B. Physiological theory of motivation
E. Phobia
C. Psychological theory of motivation
85. An object or thing which directs or stimu-
CH
D. Psychophysical theory of motivation
lates behaviour.
A. Instinct
80. “Intrinsic motivation theory” was devel-
oped by. B. incentive
A. Halow (1950) C. Need
N
B. Sigmund Freud (1902) D. Motive

C. Mark and Ervin (1970) E. Drive
YA
D. Dollard (1939) 86. A pituitary hormone associated with the

E. Bandura (1973) secretion of milk is known as.
81. A person who is motivated displays. A. Prolactin
RA
A. Unconscious Behaviour B. Adrenalin

B. Conscious Behaviour C. Estrogens
C. Haphazard Behaviour
D. Progesterones
D. Goal-directed Behaviour
NA
E. Insulin
E. Erratic Behaviour
87. A motive that is primarily learned rather
82. The process of maintaining the biochemical
than basing on biological needs is known
balance or equalibrium throughout human
as.
body is referred as.
A. Physical Motive
A. Osmosis
B. Circulation B. Psychological Motive
C. Hoeostasis C. Neurophysiolgocial Motive

D. Nervous System D. Psychological Motive
E. Diffusion E. None of these
78. C 79. A 80. A 81. D 82. C 83. D 84. A 85. B 86. A 87. D 88. A
88. During 1950s,psychologists began to be dis- 93. Injections of glucose (Which)raise blood
enchanted with the drive reduction theory sugar level).
of motivation as an explanation of.
A. Facilitate eating
A. All types of behaviour
B. Expedite eating
B. Only certain types of physiological be-
C. Both expedite and facilitate eating
haviour
D. Inhibit eating
C. Only certain types of psychological be-
haviour E. None of the above
D. Both physiological and psychological 94. Injections of insulin (which lower blood
M
behaviour sugar level).
E. Social behaviour A. Increase food intake

89. The hypothalamus plays an important role B. Decrease food intake
RA
in the regulation of. C. Expedite food intake
A. Food intake D. Facilitate food intake
B. Water intake E. None of the above
C. Alcohol intake 95. Studies indicated that the hypothalamus
D. Both food and water intake contains cells (glucoreceptors) sensitive to
E
the rate of which.
A. Glucose passes through them
90. Lateral hypothalamus (LH)is otherwise
RE
known as. B. Glucose stimulates them
A. Stimulating Centre C. Glucose inhibits them
B. Circulatory Centre D. Glucose both stimulates and inhibits
them
C. Feeding Centre
SH
D. Water centre E. None of the above

96. An empty stomach produces the periodic
contractions of muscles in the stomach wall
91. Research evidences indicated that ventro- which we identify as.
medial hypothalamus (VMH).
A. Stomach ache
A. Facilitates eating
I
B. Stomach pain
JA
B. Expedites eating
C. Stomach ailment
C. Both facilitates and
D. Hunger Pangs
D. Inhibits eating expedites eating
97. Obesity is though to stem from distur-
92. Electrical stimulation of ventromedial hy- bances during the.
pothalamus (VMH) cells.
A. Phallic stage of psychosexual develop-
A. Inhibits eating ment
B. Facilitates eating B. Oral and Anal stages of psychosexual
C. Expedites eating development
D. Both expedites and inhibits eating C. Genital stage of psychosexual develop-
ment
89. A 90. C 91. D 92. A 93. D 94. A 95. A 96. D 97. B
D. Latency period of psychosexual deve- A. Moral Anxiety

lopment B. Realistic Anxiety
E. None of the above C. Objective Anxiety
98. Dehydration of the osmoreceptors can be
D. Neurotic Anxiety
produced by depriving the organism of.
104. Always we want to protect ego from the
A. Food
ER
ensuring anxiety For doing this ego adopts
B. Water adopts some strategies which are called.
C. Blood A. Defense mechanisms
D. Sugar B. Sex energy
GD
E. Alcohol C. Instincts
99. Water deficit in the body increases the con- D. Dreams
centration of. 105. Defense mechanisms help the person in
protecting ego from open expression of Id
A. Pottasium
AN
impulses and opposing.
B. Insulin
A. Superego directives
C. Sugar
B. Death Instinct
D. Sodium
C. Lie Instinct
CH
E. Glucose
D. Unconscious mind
100. Realistic anxiety is otherwise known as. 106. Defence mechanism operate at uncon-
A. Objective anxiety scious level They occur Without awareness
of the individual Hence they are.
B. Subjective anxiety
A. Self-explanatory
N
C. Psychin anxiety
B. Self-deceptive
D. Ego defenses
C. Self-expressive
YA
101. In “moral anxiety” ego’s dependence

upon. D. Self-dependant
A. Superego is found 107. A child scolded by his father may hit his
younger siblings This is an example of.
B. Id is found
RA
A. Displacement
C. Sex is found
B. Rationalization
D. Unconscious is found
C. Regression
102. Neurotic anxiety is one in which there oc-
D. Repression
NA
curs emotional response to a threat to ego

that the impulses may break through into. 108. “A young women after fighting with her
husband returned to her parent,s home only
A. Consciousness
to allow her parents to “baby” her and fulfil
B. Unconsciousness her every wish like that of a child”. This is
an illustration of.
C. Subconsciousness
A. Repression
D. Super ego
103. Sometimes the superego gives threats to B. Regression
punish the ego.This causes an emotional C. Fixation
response called.
D. Reaction Formation
98. B 99. D 100. A 101. A 102. A 103. A 104. A 105. A 106. B 107. A 108. B
109. B
109. The last stage of psychosexual develop- 115. “Penis envy” is found in girls in.
ment is.
A. Oral Stage
A. Phallic Stage
B. Anal Stage
B. Genital Stage
C. Genital Stage
C. Oral Stage
D. Pohallic Stage
D. Anal Stage
110. Sigmund Freud has regarded the first three 116. Homosexuality is a derivative of.
stages of psychosexual development i.e the A. Electra Complex
period of 5 or 6 years of life ,to be decisive
M
B. Oedipus Complex
for the formation of.
A. Intelligence C. Libido
B. Personality D. Death Instinct
RA
C. Emotion 117. The Oral Anal and Phallic stages of Psy-
cho sexual Development are called.
D. Ego
111. In the book”Group Psychology and the A. Pregenital Period
Analysis of the Ego”Freud has explained B. Sexual Genesis
the formation of.
C. Life Instinct
E
A. Personality
D. Latency Period
B. Group
RE
118. The genital stage is generally character-
C. Society ized by object choice s rather that by.
D. Gang
A. Libido
112. Freud had published a book “Totem and
Tahoo”in 1913 By publishing this book he B. Narcissim
SH
has shown his concern for. C. Personality

A. Social Psychology D. Superego
B. Abnormal Psychology 119. In Anal Stage of Psychosexual Develop-
C. Industrial Psychology ment pleasure is derived from.
D. Child Psychology A. Thinking
I
113. Who viewed “A person is grown with B. Libido

JA
sex,lives in sex and finally dies in sex”?

C. Emotion
A. J.Herbart
D. Expulsion and Retention
B. Sigmund Freud
120. The “Super ego”is the equivalent of what
C. Alfred Adler
is more commonly known as the.
D. C.G Jung
A. Conscience
114. Who said that after birth,the child has a
strong frustrating experience? B. Personality
A. Sigmund Freud (1917) C. Libido
B. Otto Rank (1929) D. Narcissism
C. Alfred Alder (1920) 121. The psychoanalysis performed in a con-
D. C.G Jung (1919) trolled setting is known as.
110. B 111. B 112. A 113. B 114. B 115. D 116. B 117. A 118. B 119. D 120. A
121. C 122. A
A. Psychotherapy A. Unconscious
B. Chemotherapy B. Conscious
C. Hypoanalysis C. Preconscious
D. Hyperanalsis D. Death Instinct
122. A state of deep unconsciousness with non- 128. In a special book,Freud analyzed the psy-
ER
responsiveness to stimulation is known as. chology of error and found the source of
errors in the conflict between.
A. Coma
A. Ego and Super ego
B. Fixation
B. Unconscious wish and conscious cen-
GD
C. Hypnotism sorship
D. Trauma C. Conscious wish and unconscious cen-
123. In 1895,Freud an Breuer published a book sorship
entitled. D. Ego and Preconscious
AN
A. Studies in Hysteria 129. The parts of the body that are capable of
reacting to sexual stimuli are called.
B. Interpretation of Dreams
A. Erotogenic Zones
C. Moses and Menotheism
B. Abnormal Zones
D. Psychopathology of Everyday Life
CH
C. Sensitive Zones
124. Studies of Freud and Breuer reported suc-
cessful treatment of hysterical symptoms D. Secular Zones
by a method called. 130. The main erotogenic zone of our body is.
A. Hypnosis A. Mouth
N
B. Free Association B. Genitals

C. Catharsis C. Anal Zones
YA
D. Dream Analysis D. Lips

125. The success of the cathartic method was 131. According to Freud the entire activity of
regarded by Freud as evidence of the. men is bent upon procuring pleasure and
avoiding pain.This activity is controlled by.
RA
A. Unconscious
A. Reality Principle
B. Conscious
B. Pleasure Principle
C. Subconsious
C. Primary Narcissism
D. Libido
NA
D. Secondary Narcissim
126. From the experiences in hypnotism and 132. The urethral development stage is an in-
catharsis,Freud,s theory of. troductory period to the.
A. Unconscious was derived A. Oral Stage
B. Conscious was derived B. Phallic Stage
C. Narcissim was derived C. Genital Stage
D. Dream was derived D. Latency Stage
127. Dreams represent demands or wishes 133. The very term “Phallic “is derived from
stemming from the. “Phallos”which means.
123. A 124. C 125. A 126. A 127. A 128. B 129. A 130. B 131. B 132. B 133. A
134. A
A. Penis in erection A. Repression

B. Sexual urge B. Regression
C. Ego-conflict C. Rationalization
D. Self-Love D. Sublimation
134. Urethral eroticism is mainly. 138. The term “defence mechanism” was intro-
A. Autoerotic duced by.
B. Conscious A. Freud in 1894
C. Unconscious B. Jung in 1902
M
D. Egocentric C. Alfred Adler in 1905
135. According to Freud,the negative Oedipus D. Sullivan in 1935
complex may lead to. 139. Moving away from the reality is called the
RA
A. Heterosexuality mechanism of.
B. Homosexuality A. Withdrawal
C. Narcissism B. Denial
D. Castration C. Daydream
136. The idea of developmental stages was bor- D. Introjection
E
rowed by Freud from. 140. Syllabus of advance classes cannot be cov-
A. Biology ered with as it requires great time.
RE
B. Sociology A. Recitation method
C. Anthropology B. Lecture method
D. Physics C. Discussion method

SH
137. The diversion of a part of the sexual en- D. Project method

ergy into non-sexual activities is called.
I
JA
135. B 136. A 137. D 138. A 139. B 140. D

ER
3. Child development and pedagogy
GD
AN
CH
1. The word “Pedagogy” means? 5. A scoring guide use to evaluate the quality
A. to guide the child of students is called
B. to lead the child A. rubrics

C. to educate the child B. checklists
N
D. to understand the child C. inventories

2. Pedagogy is the study of D. rating scales
YA
A. Education 6. As people grow older, the of learning

B. Guiding Students declines.
C. Learning Process A. power
RA
D. Teaching Methods B. speed

3. The philosopher who worked in mathemat-
ical and scientific didactic was C. quality
A. Jean Piaget D. quantity

7. Which from the following should be used to
NA
B. John Dewey
increase correct responses and appropriate
C. Lev Vygotsky behavior?
D. Martin Wagenschein
A. Ignorance
4. The use of technology to enhance learning
process is called in education. B. Strictness
A. IT C. Reward
B. ICT D. Praise
C. Information technology 8. Which from the following should be used
D. Communication technology to decrease minor inappropriate behavior?
1. B 2. D 3. D 4. B 5. A 6. B 7. D 8. D
34 Chapter 3. Child development and pedagogy
A. Praise A. not likely

B. Reward B. less likely
C. Strictness C. more likely
D. Ignorance D. equally likely
9. The book Emile or “On Education” on the 15. Responses that produce a discomforting ef-
nature of education and man is written by fect become to occur again in that sit-
uation.
A. Plato
A. not likely
B. Aristotle
M
B. less likely
C. Rousseau
C. more likely
D. John Dewey
D. equally likely
10. According to Emile, the noblest work in
RA
education is to make a/an 16. According to Rousseau, at what age a per-
son ready to have a companion of the op-
A. thinker posite sex?
B. entrepreneur A. 15
C. good citizen B. 16
D. reasoning man C. 17
E
11. Teachers should present information to the D. 18
students clearly and in interesting way, and
17. The field of study concerned with the con-
RE
relate this new information to the things
struction of thought processes, including re-
students
membering, problem solving, and decision-
A. don’t know making is called
B. already know A. Pedagogy
SH
C. willing to know B. Education

D. not willing to know C. Epistemology
12. According to John Dewey, school is a D. Cognitive Development
institution, and education is a process. 18. Jean Piaget proposed stages of Cogni-
A. social, social tive Development.
I
B. social, philosophical A. 1
JA
C. philosophical, philosophical B. 2
D. environmental, psychological C. 3
13. According to John Dewey, schools must D. 4
prepare students for 19. The more often a particular ability is used
A. research the it becomes.
B. future life A. weaker
C. present life B. stronger
D. entrepreneurship C. less important

14. Responses that produce a satisfying effect D. more important
in a particular situation become to oc- 20. The longer a particular ability is unused the
cur again in that situation. it becomes.
9. C 10. C 11. B 12. A 13. C 14. C 15. B 16. B 17. D 18. D 19. B 20. A
A. weaker A. Sensorimotor stage

B. stronger B. Preoperational stage
C. less important C. Formal operational stage
D. more important D. Concrete operational stage
21. The more parts of your brain you use, the 27. Children are usually egocentric during
ER
more likely you are to information. and stages.
A. use A. Sensorimotor, Preoperational
B. miss B. Formal operational, Sensorimotor
GD
C. retain C. Preoperational, Concrete operational
D. misuse D. Concrete operational, Formal opera-
22. The conclusion of a deductive argument is tional
28. According to Jean Piaget, children are no
A. certain
longer egocentric when entering
AN
B. probable
A. Sensorimotor stage
C. experience
B. Preoperational stage
D. observation
C. Formal operational stage
23. The truth of the conclusion of an inductive
CH
argument is D. Concrete operational stage
29. According to Piaget’s theory of cogni-
A. certain
tive development, the Concrete operational
B. probable stage starts at age
C. experience A. 1
N
D. observation B. 3
24. The process of reasoning from one or more C. 5
YA
given statements to reach a logically certain

conclusion is called D. 7
30. The most recent response is most likely to
A. Inductive Reasoning
A. forget
B. Deductive Reasoning
RA
B. reoccur
C. Qualitative Reasoning
C. compromised
D. Quantitative Reasoning
25. The reasoning in which the given state- D. not occur again
NA
ments are viewed as supplying strong ev- 31. Rousseau advocated an educational method
idence for the truth of the conclusion is which consisted of removing the child from
called
A. school
A. Inductive Reasoning
B. burden
B. Deductive Reasoning
C. society
C. Qualitative Reasoning
D. past memory
D. Quantitative Reasoning 32. Who advocated removing children from
26. According to Jean Piaget, children develop their mothers’ care and raising them as
abstract logic and reasoning skill during wards of the state?
21. C 22. A 23. B 24. B 25. A 26. C 27. A 28. D 29. D 30. B 31. C 32. A 33. A
A. Plato A. analysis
B. Socrates B. evidence
C. Aristotle C. experience
D. John Locke D. information
33. The famous book “The Republic” was writ- 39. According to John Locke, a child’s mind
ten by does not contain any
A. Plato A. memory
B. Aristotle B. imagination
M
C. Socrates C. observation
D. John Locke D. innate ideas
RA
34. “All who have meditated on the art of gov- 40. The philosopher who for the first time men-
erning mankind have been convinced that tioned the importance of play (or sports) in
the fate of empires depends on the educa- education was
tion of youth.” This is the saying of
A. Plato
A. Plato
B. Aristotle
B. Aristotle
C. Socrates
E
C. Socrates
D. John Locke
D. John Locke 41. The process of selecting units from a pop-
RE
35. The Waldorf education approach empha- ulation to estimate characteristics of the
sizes a balanced development of population is called
A. head and heart A. research
B. heart and hands B. sampling
SH
C. head and hands C. inference

D. head, heart, and hands D. analyzing
36. Plato believed that talent and intelligence 42. We calculate average marks of a student in
are the way as we calculate
A. distributed genetically A. variance
I
B. distributed gender-wise B. arithmetic mean

JA
C. not distributed genetically C. geometric mean

D. not distributed gender-wise D. standard deviation
37. A priori knowledge is knowledge that is 43. The is a measure of how spreads out
known independently of points are from the mean.
A. analysis A. variance
B. evidence B. arithmetic mean
C. experience C. geometric mean
D. information D. standard deviation
38. A posteriori knowledge is knowledge that 44. The standard deviation is the of the
is known by variance.
34. B 35. D 36. C 37. C 38. C 39. D 40. B 41. B 42. B 43. D 44. D
A. cube A. in need
B. cube root B. in demand
C. square C. important
D. square root D. everlasting
45. The concept of pragmatism in educational 51. According to John Dewey, children should
ER
philosophy says that education should be experience in school to make them bet-
about ter citizens.
A. virtue A. practical implementation
B. obedience
GD
B. democracy
C. life and growth
C. discipline
D. shaping good citizens
D. rules
46. The idea of practical learning means edu-
cation should apply to the 52. Progressivism believes that education
AN
comes from the experience of the
A. society
A. child
B. practice
B. teacher
C. real world
C. society
CH
D. abstract knowledge
47. An aspect of pragmatism is experiential D. principal
learning, which says, education should 53. The idea of teaching the whole child in the
come through “philosophy of pragmatism in education”
means teaching students to be good
A. practice
A. citizens
N
B. experience
C. knowledge B. thinkers
YA
D. observations C. learners
48. In case of spending money, the virtue is D. scientists
between wastefulness and stringiness. 54. Progressivism believes that children learn
A. real in a/an
RA
B. prodigal A. isolation
C. lavishness B. community
D. generosity C. competition
NA
49. According to Aristotle, virtue is a/an D. closed environment

state between excess and deficiency.
55. A normal human being has senses.
A. real
A. 5
B. natural
B. 7
C. artificial
C. 9
D. intermediate
50. The concept of perennialism in education D. 11
means school curricula should focus on 56. Which from the following is NOT among
what is the five senses?
45. C 46. C 47. B 48. D 49. D 50. D 51. B 52. A 53. A 54. B 55. A 56. D
A. smell 63. The term heuristic means in decision

B. vision making.
A. calculations
C. touch
B. thoroughness
D. thought
57. The application of ideas, knowledge and C. brain storming
skills to achieve the desired results is called D. mental shortcuts
A. critical thinking 64. Robert Sternberg, a famous psychologist,
argued that creativity requires differ-
B. problem solving
M
ent types of intelligence.
C. deductive method
A. 1
D. reasoned arguments
B. 2
58. According to Socrates of Meno, virtue is
RA
C. 3
A. reachable
D. 4
B. teachable
65. According to Robert Sternberg, the three
C. unreachable different types of required intelligence for
D. unteachable creativity are
59. The curriculum of educational institutes A. analytical, critical and practical
E
should be based on B. abstract, synthetic and analytical
A. theory
RE
C. synthetic, analytical, and practical
B. practice D. analytical, observational and practical
C. theory and practice 66. A common technique to help people begin
D. theory, practice and research the creative process is
A. calculations
SH
60. The new curriculum should be introduced

A. abruptly B. thoroughness
B. gradually C. brain storming
C. relatively D. mental shortcuts
D. continuously 67. According to Plato, the highest goal in all
of education is knowledge of the
I
61. Evaluation of the process of curriculum de-

A. good
JA
velopment should be made

A. abruptly B. science
B. relatively C. philosophy
C. gradually D. mathematics
D. continuously 68. Plato argued that are fit to rule.
62. Curriculum revision should be a/an A. only educationists
process. B. only philosophers
A. gradual C. only psychologists
B. abrupt D. educationists and philosophers
C. relative 69. The book “A Brief History of Time” is writ-
ten by
D. continuous
57. B 58. D 59. C 60. B 61. D 62. D 63. D 64. C 65. C 66. C 67. A 68. B 69. A
A. Stephen Hawking A. Plato

B. Robert Sternberg B. Socrates
C. John Dewey C. Aristotle
D. Aristotle D. Edward Thorndike
70. The branch of philosophy focuses on the 76. The advocators of philosophy of Pragma-
ER
nature of reality is tism believe that reality is
A. Pedagogy A. stagnant
B. Metaphysics B. imagination
GD
C. Epistemology C. related to mind
D. Connectionism D. constantly changing
71. Idealism is a philosophical approach that ar- 77. The psychologist who for the first time
gues that are the only true reality, and proposed the concept of connectionism in
AN
the only thing worth knowing. learning was
A. ideas A. Plato
B. observations B. Aristotle
C. experiences C. Robert Sternberg
CH
D. physical objects D. Edward Thorndike
72. Realism is a philosophical approach that 78. According to Edward Thorndike, learning
argues that ultimate reality is the world of is about responding to
A. ideas A. change
N
B. observations B. stimuli
C. experiences C. analysis
YA
D. physical objects D. experiment

73. Who is called the father of both Realism 79. Anything that causes a reaction is called
and the scientific method?
A. stimulus
RA
A. Plato
B. learning
B. Aristotle
C. connectionism
C. Socrates
D. physical objects
D. Edward Thorndike
NA
80. The connection between stimulus and re-

74. The philosopher who is called the father of sponse is called
Idealism is
A. receiving-accepting paradigm
A. Plato
B. stimulus-response paradigm
B. Socrates
C. receiving-accepting bond
C. Aristotle
D. stimulus-response bond
D. Edward Thorndike 81. The the stimulus-response bond (S-R
75. The philosopher who for the first time bond), the better a person has learned the
taught logic as a formal discipline was lesson.
70. B 71. A 72. D 73. B 74. A 75. C 76. D 77. D 78. B 79. A 80. D 81. C 82. C
A. stable A. law of effect

B. weaker B. law of exercise
C. stronger C. law of readiness
D. unstable D. law of connectionism
82. There are laws of connectionism. 88. The Law of Effect can be effectively used
in
A. 1
A. teaching methods
B. 2
B. accelerate learning
M
C. 3
C. classroom management
D. 4 D. curriculum development
83. The three laws of connectionism are the 89. For an effective teaching, the teacher must
RA
laws of be a subject matter expert that includes
A. effect, stimulus and response A. command over the subject
B. effect, exercise and readiness B. the ability to convey knowledge
C. stimulus, response and exercise C. the ability to apply ideas from one dis-
cipline to another
D. exercise, readiness and response
E
D. all of the above
84. According to the law of effect, if a stimulus
results in a positive outcome, the S-R bond 90. The satiation technique of classroom man-
RE
is agement is a technique where instead of
punishing negative behaviors, the teacher
A. stabilized might decide to actually the negative
B. weakened behavior.
SH
C. unsterilized A. divert
D. strengthened B. ignore
85. According to the , the more you do C. encourage

something, the better you are at it. D. discourage
A. law of effect 91. The extinction technique of classroom man-
I
agement is a technique where teacher

B. law of exercise any negative behavior.
JA
C. law of readiness A. divert

D. law of connectionism B. ignore
86. According to the , S-R bonds are C. encourage
stronger if an individual is ready to learn.
D. discourage
A. law of effect
92. The use of a physical punishment for class
B. law of exercise management is called
C. law of readiness A. time out technique
D. law of connectionism B. satiation technique
87. The says, we are motivated to gain re- C. extinction technique

wards and avoid punishments. D. corporal punishment
83. B 84. D 85. B 86. C 87. A 88. C 89. D 90. C 91. B 92. D 93. A
93. The technique of classroom management 99. In education, is used to make inference
where the teacher punishes negative behav- about the learning and development of stu-
iors by removing an unruly student from dents.
the rest of the class is called A. diagnosis
A. satiation technique B. evaluation
B. time out technique C. assessment
ER
C. corporal punishment D. measurement
D. extinction technique 100. An assessment that is conducted prior to
the start of teaching or instruction is called
94. The study of the physical, social and mental
GD
aspects of aging is called A. initial assessment
A. Genetics B. formal assessment
B. Esthetics C. formative assessment
C. Gerontology D. summative assessment
AN
101. An assessment that is carried out throught
D. Clinical psychology
the course is called
95. As people gets older, the ability of applying
A. initial assessment
or maintain attention
B. formative assessment
A. decreases
CH
C. diagnostic assessment
B. increases
D. summative assessment
C. stays constant
102. An assessment is if it consistently
D. remains unaffected achieves the same results with the same
96. The brain as people gets older. (or similar) students.
N
A. remains unaffected A. Valid

B. Invalid
B. stays constant
YA
C. Reliable
C. expands
D. Unreliable
D. shrinks
103. A/An assessment is one which mea-
97. There is in working memory as people sures what it is intended to measure .
RA
gets older.
A. Valid
A. no change
B. Invalid
B. degradation
C. Reliable
NA
C. upgradation
D. Unreliable
D. a slight change 104. Educational psychology is concerned with
98. According to the philosophy of Idealism in the scientific study of
education, the subject matter of curriculum A. education
should be
B. human learning
A. mind
C. teaching methods
B. science
D. philosophy of education
C. mathematics 105. According to famous philosophers, teach-
D. physical world ing is a/an
94. C 95. A 96. D 97. B 98. A 99. C 100. A 101. B 102. C 103. A 104. B 105. A
A. art 111. Which from the following is NOT a formal

assessment?
B. science
A. Project
C. technique
B. Quizzes
D. none of these
C. Interview
106. Progressive education emphasizes learn-
ing by D. Observation
112. In John Dewey’s student-centered ap-
A. doing
proach of learning, the role of the teacher
B. writing is of a
M
C. reading A. facilitator
D. enjoying B. delegator
RA
107. According to John Dewey, educational C. instructor
process has two sides: D. formal authority
A. economical and sociological 113. Which from the following is termed as
student-centered learning method?
B. sociological and philosophical
A. Cooperative learning
C. economical and philosophical
B. Inquiry-Based Learning
D. psychological and sociological
E
C. Both (A) and (B)
108. According to John Dewey, which side of
D. Direct Instruction
RE
the educational process is the basis?
114. The role of teacher in inquiry-based learn-
A. sociological
ing is of
B. economical
A. delegator
C. philosophical B. instructor
SH
D. psychological C. facilitator
109. Education is a process in which knowl- D. formal authority
edge and skills are transferred
115. In direct instruction method or lecture
A. from a few persons to a large number method the teacher is considered as
of people A. partner
I
B. from a few persons to the next genera- B. delegator

JA
tion
C. facilitator
C. from a generation to the next genera-
D. formal authority
tion
116. In cooperative learning method, the role
D. from a few persons to few persons of teacher is of
110. An assessment that is generally carried A. delegator
out at the end of a course to assign students
a course grade is called B. facilitator
A. Formative assessment C. facilitator and delegator

D. delegator and formal authority
B. Summative assessment
117. In cooperative method teachers act as a
C. Diagnostic assessment delegator means the teacher act as a/an
D. Contemporary assessment to the students.
106. A 107. D 108. D 109. B 110. B 111. D 112. A 113. C 114. C 115. D 116. C
117. C
A. foster A. believing in gods

B. partner B. not believing in gods
C. resource C. believing in the rotation of the Earth
D. evaluator D. not believing in the rotation of the Earth
118. Dialectic or dialectical method is a dis-
ER
course between opposing parties to estab- 124. According to Socrates, physical objects
lish the truth through and events are of their ideal form.
A. dialogues A. signs
B. investigation B. parts
GD
C. presenting proves C. images
D. reasoned arguments D. shadows
119. Dialectic method of inquiry was con- 125. According to the theory of forms (or the-
tributed by ory of ideas) material world is a/an of
AN
the real world.
A. Plato
A. sign
B. Aristotle
B. part
C. Socrates
CH
C. image
D. John Dewey
120. Epistemology is the branch of philosophy D. shadow
concerned with the theory of 126. The first institution of higher learning
in the Western world, “Academy”, was
A. learning
founded by
B. knowledge
N
A. Plato
C. education
B. Aristotle
D. philosophy of education
YA
C. Socrates
121. What was the relation between Socrates
and Plato? D. John Dewey
127. The “Academy” was founded in
A. Plato was student of Socrates
RA
A. Chakis
B. Socrates was student of Plato
B. Athens
C. Socrates and Plato were brothers
C. Stagira
D. Socrates and Plato were colleagues
NA
122. What was the relation between Plato and D. Macedonia

Aristotle? 128. Bloom’s taxonomy is a set of learning
domains.
A. Aristotle was student of Plato
A. 1
B. Plato was student of Aristotle
B. 2
C. Plato and Aristotle were brothers
C. 3
D. Plato and Aristotle were colleagues
123. The “Apology” the Plato’s recollection of D. 4
the speech given by Socrates when Socrates 129. The three domains of Bloom’s taxonomy
was charged with are
118. D 119. C 120. B 121. A 122. A 123. B 124. D 125. C 126. A 127. B 128. C
129. C
A. Cognitive, Affective and Pedagogy 136. To break information into parts and to ex-
amine the information is called
B. Pedagogy, Affective and Psychomotor
A. analyzing
C. Cognitive, Affective and Psychomotor
B. evaluating
D. Cognitive, Pedagogy and Psychomotor
C. originating
130. The cognitive domain involves
D. synthesizing
A. manner
137. To compile the information into pattern
B. learning and propose a plan is called
M
C. knowledge A. analyzing
D. physical movement B. evaluating
131. The affective domain involves C. originating
RA
A. manner D. synthesizing
B. learning 138. When the topic or an area of a course
contains a lot of information, it is recom-
C. knowledge
mended to use
D. physical movement
A. lecture method
132. The psychomotor domain involves
B. assignment method
E
A. manner
C. cooperative method
B. learning
D. inquiry-based method
RE
C. knowledge 139. The skill when students try to build ab-
D. physical movement stract knowledge is called
133. The simplest skill in cognitive domain of A. evaluating
Bloom’s taxonomy is B. originating
SH
A. evaluating C. synthesizing
B. synthesizing D. characterizing
C. remembering 140. Formative assessment is an assessment
learning.
D. understanding
A. of
I
134. The most complex skill in cognitive do-

main of Bloom’s taxonomy is B. to
JA
A. evaluating C. by
B. synthesizing D. for
141. An assessment use to identify difficulties
C. characterizing
in the learning process is called
D. understanding
A. initial assessment
135. The most complex skill of Bloom’s taxon-
B. formative assessment
omy is
C. diagnostic assessment
A. evaluating
D. summative assessment
B. originating
142. An assessment use to determine a per-
C. synthesizing son’s ability in a particular field of studies
D. characterizing is called
130. C 131. A 132. D 133. C 134. A 135. B 136. A 137. D 138. A 139. D 140. D
141. C 142. B
A. evaluation A. Canalization
B. aptitude test B. Discontinuity
C. measurement C. Differentiation
D. diagnostic test D. Range of
143. Reliability of an assessment relates to the 149. In order to develop the spirit of labour in
ER
of an assessment. students.
A. quality A. The teacher himself should indulge in
B. relevance labour
GD
C. usefulness B. The teacher should deliver lectures on
the importance of labour
D. consistency
144. Validity of an assessment relates to the C. Students should be given opportunities
of an assessment. to do labour from time to time
AN
A. quality D. Students should be given examples of
labouring people
B. relevance
150. A child has been admitted to your school
C. usefulness who belongs to a backward family/back-
D. consistency ground from the cultural viewpoint You
CH
will.
145. A process of looking at what is being as-
sessed is called A. Keep him in a class in which there are
many more students of backward back-
A. rubrics
ground from the cultural viewpoint
B. evaluation
B. Send a teacher to know more about the
N
C. assessment backward cultural background of the child

D. measurement C. Keep him in a normal class but will
YA
146. Which act of teacher foster a sense of au- make special arrangements for teaching
tonomy in the learning process? him keeping his special needs in view
A. delegator D. Advise him to take up vocational edu-
cation
B. instructor
RA
151. All of the following can be the sings that

C. facilitator
a child is gifted except.
D. formal authority
A. Early development of a sense of time
147. A major strength of ecological theory is
B. Interest in encyclopaedias and dictionar-
NA
its framework for explaining.

ies
A. Environmental influences on develop-
ment C. Uneasy relationships with peers
B. Biological influences on development D. Easy retention of facts
C. Cognitive development 152. If heredity is an important determinant of

a specific behaviour what predication can
D. Affective processes in development we make about expression of the behavior
148. The process whereby the genetic factors in identical twins reared apart compared
limit an individual,s responsiveness to the to its expression in fraternal twins reared
environment is known as. apart?
143. D 144. B 145. B 146. A 147. A 148. D 149. C 150. C 151. C 152. C
A. Fraternal twins will express the be- D. Childhood is a unique period of growth
haviour more similarly than identical twins and change
B. There will be little similarity in the ex- 157. In preparing a fifth grade class to take a
pression of the behaviour in either set of standardized reading test the teacher is best
twins advised to.
C. Identical twins will express the be- A. Tell the children the test is very impor-
haviour more similarly than fraternal twins tant and they should do the best they can
D. The behaviour will be expressed as sim- B. Ditto key questions from a previous test
ilarly by identical twins as it is by fraternal and allow the pupils to answer them
M
twins C. Coach the below grade level readers as
153. Frobel,s most important contribution to the rest of the class will do well anyway
education was his development of the. D. Give the pupils practice in answering
RA
A. Vocational school questions similar to the type that will ap-
pear on the test
B. Public high school
158. A normal child of twelve years of age is
C. Kindergarten most likely to.
D. Latin School A. Have difficulty with gross motor coor-
154. Of the following the main purpose of state dination
certification of teachers is to.
E
B. Have feelings of anxiety about pleasing
A. Monitor the quality of teacher training adults
RE
institutions C. Confine his/her interests to here and
B. Provide for a uniform standard of entry- now
level teacher competency throughout the D. Be eager for peer approval
state
159. Creative writing should be an activity
C. Exclude from the profession those not planned for.
SH
trained in pedagogy
A. Only those children reading on grade
D. Exclude from the profession those who level
are mentally unhealthy
B. Only those children who can spell and
155. The key difference between evolutionary also can write cohesive sentences
and cultural change is that evolutionary
C. Only those children who want to write
I
change alters whereas cultural change

alters for the newspaper of the class
JA
A. Reproduction environment D. All children

160. Of the following the most promising step
B. Heredity environment
for a teacher to take in order to improve
C. Environment behavior class discipline is to.
D. Development learning A. None specific infractions of class rules
156. The current view of childhood assumes in the marking book
that. B. Evaluate his/her materials methods and
A. Children are similar to adults most ways approaches to children
B. Children are best treated as young C. Consult the class and agree upon a grad-
adults uated series of punishments
C. Childhood is basically a "waiting period D. Call parent teacher meeting to discuss

the situation
153. C 154. B 155. B 156. D 157. D 158. D 159. D 160. B
161. The question Will the shy child who never 166. You find a student to be intelligent You
speaks turn into a quiet shy adult or will the will.
child become a sociable talkative person?is
A. Remain pleased with him
concerned with which developmental is-
sue? B. Not give him additional homework
A. Maturation C. Motivate him so that he can make more
ER
progress
B. Continuity and discontinuity
D. Inform his parents about the fact that
C. Cultural universals versus cultural rela-
he is intelligent
tivism
167. If some students are not in a mood to study
GD
D. Nature and nurture
in the class you will.
162. A child from a disorganized home will ex-
perience the greatest difficulty with. A. Force them to study
A. Well-structured lessons B. Tell those students to leave the class and

enjoy
AN
B. Independent study
C. Warn them that they must study else
C. Programmed instruction you will report the matter to the Principal
D. Workbooks D. Tell them some interesting things re-
163. Most psychologists believe that develop- lated to their interests or your own subject
CH
ment is due.
A. Largely to nature 168. The term identical elements is closely as-
sociated with.
B. Largely to nurture
A. Group instruction
C. To nature and nurture acting separately
B. Transfer of learning
D. To an interaction of nature and nurture
N
C. Jealousy between twins

164. The normal twelve year old child is most D. Accounts for the gradual evolution of
YA
likely to. the child,s cognitive social and other capac-

A. Have difficulty with gross motor coor- ities
dination E. Similar test questions
RA
B. Have anxiety feelings about pleasing 169. Organismic theories of development hold
adults that.
C. Confine his/her interests to the here and A. Psychological structures and processes
now within the child help determine his/her de-
NA
D. Be eager for peer approval velopment
165. The reason why students run from school B. Physical structures and processes
is. within the child do not help determine
his/her development
A. Lack of interesting class teaching work
C. Passively developed structures and pro-
B. Lack of interest in studies on the part of
cesses within the child help determine
students
his/her development
C. Not giving punishment to students
D. Slowly developed structures and pro-
D. Callous attitude of teachers towards the cesses within the child help determine
problem his/her development
161. D 162. B 163. D 164. D 165. D 166. C 167. D 168. E 169. B 170. A
170. A Person believes that nurture strongly B. Allocate a seat for him in a corner or the
influences the development of his child He class
would not agree to the importance of.
C. Give him tasks of watering trees clean-
A. Genetic factors ing the blackboard making toys of clay etc
B. Exposure to peers D. None of above
C. The types of toys at home 173. Knowledge of child psychology is a must
for a primary teacher That is because.
D. The warmth displayed by the parents
171. If student is too shy to participate in the A. It helps in making children disciplined
M
class you will. B. The examination result is improved
A. Not ask questions to him C. It becomes a convenient mode for moti-
B. Ask only those questions from him vating children
RA
whose answers can be given by him D. It helps the teacher in understanding
C. Not ask those questions from him the behavior of children
whose answers are beyond his means and 174. The current movement of behavior mod-
due to which he may become an object of ification wherein tokens are awarded for
ridicule in the class correct responses is a reflection of.
D. Ask questions to him only when he is A. Herbart,s Five Steps
keen to answer them
E
B. Lock,s Tabula rasa
172. How will you bring a hyperactive child on
the right path? C. Thorndike,s Law of Effect
RE
A. Make him sit in front of the class and D. Thorndike,s Law of Exercise
keep a strict vigil on him
I SH
JA
171. A 172. D 173. C 174. D

ER
4. Histry of education in subcontinent
GD
AN
CH
1. When did decline start in the history of C. Eastern coast of South Asia
India?
D. Northern coast of South Asia
A. 1671
5. Who made it possible to get the goods of
B. 1756 Hindu estates reach European markets?
C. After the death of Harsh
N
A. The Arabs
D. Before the arrival of Muslims B. Muslims
2. Which was the educational language of
YA
C. Hindus
Hindus?
A. Hindi D. British
B. Sanskrit 6. The noble and brave traders of Arab used

RA
to come to the areas of

C. Urdu
A. Asia
D. Persian
3. When did the trade affairs start between B. Britain
South Asia and Arabs? C. Northern coast of Asia
NA
A. Before the prevalence of Islam D. Lanka and Malaber

B. Before the arrival of Muslims 7. When did the people of llafi tribe murder
C. After the death of Harsh the governor of Makran and made the habi-
tat in the area of Raja Dahir?
D. None of these
4. Where did Arabs have established their A. 702
trade centers? B. 705
A. Western coast of South Asia C. 801
B. Western coast of North Asia
D. 701
1. C 2. B 3. A 4. A 5. A 6. D 7. A 8. B
50 Chapter 4. Histry of education in subcontinent
8. The raja of Sarandeep Sirilanka sent some 9. Who confessed that during his visit of Hind,
orphan girls to Hajaj but attacked and Budhism was in decline?
captured them.
A. Haven Singh
A. Hajaj’s Army B. Hajaj bin Yousaff
B. Dahir’s Army C. Harsh
C. British Army D. Raja Dahir
D. Abbasid’s Army
M
RA
E
RE
I SH
JA
9. A
ER
5. Communication
GD
AN
CH
1. Listening to a lecture is 4. Listening is badly affected by
A. information listening A. high speed of speaking
B. evaluative listening B. a sizable hearing loss-physiological
problem
C. emphatic listening
N
C. message overload-excess of listened ma-

D. none of these
terial
2. As a chairman of UPSC while selecting a
D. all of the above
YA
teacher you should, be

5. Following are the experimental learning ac-
A. fair and impartial
tivities adopted by a teacher. Arrange them
B. able to judge the personality of candi- in cyclic order.
dates
RA
1. Accommodation
C. encouraging to those appearing for in- 2. Converging
terview 3. Assimilation
4. Diverging
D. all of these
A. 1,2,3,4
NA
3. Teaching on TV is superior to class room

instruction because B. 2,3,4,1
A. teaching materials can be filmed for C. 3,1,2,4
reuse
D. 4,3,2,1
B. experts for teaching a difficult topic can 6. Which of the following groups of students
be arranged and others can be benefited can be most benefited computer based edu-
from them cation programme?
C. very large classes are made possible and A. Small group of low IQ
thus. it; is economically advantageous
B. Heterogeneous groups in IQ
D. all of these
1. A 2. D 3. D 4. D 5. D 6. D
52 Chapter 5. Communication
C. Large group of moderate intelligence 12. All are the components of listening except
D. All of the above A. hearing
7. Which of the following is not a successful
B. answering
communicator?
A. One who presents material in a precise C. attending-being attentive
and clear way. D. understanding and remembering
B. One who knows a lot but is somewhat 13. Better classroom management means
reserve in his attitude.
A. per group work and better interaction
C. One who sometimes becomes informal
M
among pupils
before the receiver and develops rapport
B. prior preparation of teacher in the mak-
D. One who is able to adapt himself accord-
ing of suitable aids
ing to the language of the communicatee
RA
C. punctuality of the teachers in coming in
8. Closed circuit television is useful the class and finishing the course in time
A. for large group communication D. all of these
B. only for poor students of the class 14. All are the examples of the media of two
C. only for a restricted audience residing way communication except
at a particular place
E A. padyatra
D. none of the above
B. streetplays
9. Which of the following teachers will you
RE
like most? C. public meeting
A. a teacher who often amuses his students D. procession and rallies
B. a teacher of highly idealist philosophy 15. Arrange the following activities of interac-
C. a disciplined teacher tion in logical order
SH
D. a loving teacher 1. Analysis of the work done

10. Televised educational programme is useful 2. Planning and preparation
because 3. Presentation of material
4. Modification and improvement
A. it affords the opportunity for large audi-
ence in the same auditorium or in different A. 1,2,3,4
I
locations to view it clearly B. 1,3,4,2

JA
B. it can magnify the microscopic forms of

C. 2,3,1,4
life and can be presented on TV
C. it can present the natural phenomenon D. 4,1,2,3
of the world in natural form 16. Visualization in the instructional process
D. all of these can not increase
11. Which of the following methods of commu- A. stress and boredom
nication is the most effective?
B. interest and motivation
A. multi-media method
C. retention and adaptation
B. presenting written material
D. curiosity and concentration
C. presenting written material along with
film projector 17. The latest development in the hardware
technology is the introduction of
D. can not be determined
7. B 8. C 9. D 10. D 11. A 12. B 13. D 14. B 15. B 16. A 17. C 18. A
A. M channels A. to accept or reject an idea given to the

listener
B. Z channels
B. to evaluate the speaker’s credibility and
C. FM channels
personality
D. Star channels
C. both of above
18. Software computer can not be used
ER
D. none of these
A. for demonstration
23. CHEER stands for
B. for reading and writing
A. Child Health Education Electronic
C. as a machine for evaluating students Recording
GD
progress
B. Children Enrichment Education
D. as a systematic programmed learning Through Radio
techniques
C. Children for Engineers and Energy Re-
19. Overhead projector is superior to short cir- quirement
AN
cuit TV in a classroom teaching because
A. it is easy to use
24. The most important aspect of
B. it is cheap and self devised communication- listening, can be improved
by
C. information presented though it is eas-
CH
ily retained A. making the attention fully paid
D. pictures in it may be shown in a desired B. making voice effective and impressive
sequence and with a minimum of lost mo-
C. making the communicated material
tion (material)
novel-interesting and need based
20. All of the following are the limitations of
N
televised Instruction except D. all of these

25. The process of communication enhances
A. it does not permit the exchange of ideas
through:
YA
between the teachers and taught

A. belongingness
B. it does not properly help the students in
making the materials clearly understood B. security and freedom to make choices
C. experts consume much time in planning C. informality of meeting and avoidance
RA
and preparation of the programme of pressure

D. televised lesson moves at a fixed speed D. all of these
and thus can not take the individual differ- 26. SITE stands for
ences of students into account
NA
A. South Indian Trade Estate

21. Which of the following skills has the largest
share in communication time in schools/- B. Satellite Instructional Television Experi-
colleges? ment
A. Writing C. System for International Technology
and Engineering
B. Reading
D. None of these
C. Speaking
27. A student helps a teacher to solve the prob-
D. Listening lem while the teacher was delivering the
22. The main purpose of evaluative listening is lecture. He was
19. D 20. B 21. D 22. C 23. B 24. D 25. D 26. B 27. B

A. a realistic listener A. Communicator should be soft spoken

B. an emphatic listener B. Communicator should have fine senses
C. an evaluative listener C. Communicator should have tolerance
power
D. an informational listener
D. Communicator should have good per-
28. Which of the following can not be a good
sonality
way of communication in promoting liter-
acy among villagers? 34. Communications bandwidth that has the
highest capacity and is used by microwave,
A. Providing material on TV and film pro- cable and fibre optics lines is known as:
M
jector
A. bus width
B. Large group discussion
B. hyper-link
C. Reading and writing
C. broadband
RA
D. Demonstration D. carrier wave
29. Educational TV was first introduced in In- 35. An electronic bill board that has a short text
dia in the year or graphical advertising message is referred
A. 1960 to as:
B. 1961 A. strap
E B. banner
C. 1962
C. bulletin
D. 1963
RE
30. Level C of the effectiveness of communica- D. bridge line
tion is defined as: 36. A negative reaction to a mediated commu-
nication is described as:
A. source noise
A. flak
B. channel noise
SH
B. non-conformity
C. semantic noise
C. passive response
D. psychological noise
D. fragmented feedback
31. Recording a television programme on a 37. The function of mass communication of
VCR is an example of: supplying information regarding the pro-
A. time-shifting cesses, issues, events and societal develop-
I
ments is known as:

B. mechanical clarity
JA
A. correlation
C. content reference
B. gratification
D. media synchronisation
C. surveillance
32. A good communicator is the one who offers
to his audience: D. content supply
38. The science of the study of feedback sys-
A. concise proof
tems in humans, animals and machines is
B. repetition of facts known as:
C. plentiful of information A. cybernetics
D. a good amount of statistics B. selectivity study
33. Which of the following statement is cor- C. response analysis
rect?
D. reverse communication
28. C 29. B 30. B 31. D 32. C 33. B 34. C 35. B 36. B 37. D 38. A 39. D
39. Networked media exist in inter-connected: A. CNBC

A. social environments B. Zee News
B. political environments C. India News
C. economic environments D. NDTV 24×7
D. technological environments 45. Feed-back of a message comes from:
ER
40. The combination of computing, telecommu- A. Media
nications and media in a digital atmosphere B. Satellite
is referred to as:
C. Audience
A. convergence
GD
D. Communicator
B. digital combine
46. Collection of information in advance be-
C. integrated media fore designing communication strategy is
known as:
D. online communication
AN
41. A dialogue between a human-being and a A. Feed-back
computer programme that occurs simulta- B. Opinion poll
neously in various forms is described as:
C. Feed-forward
A. binary chat
D. Research study
CH
B. digital talk 47. The aspect ratio of TV screen is:
C. interactivity A. 4:1
D. man-machine speak B. 4:2
42. ‘SITE’ stands for: C. 4:3
N
A. South Indian Trade Estate D. 4:4

B. Satellite Instructional Television Experi- 48. DTH service was started in the year:
ment
YA
A. 2001
C. State Institute of Technology and Engi-
B. 2002
neering
C. 2003
D. System for International technology
RA
and Engineering D. 2004

43. Which one of the following can be termed 49. National Press day is celebrated on:
as verbal communication? A. 14th November
A. Dipak wrote a letter for leave applica- B. 16th November
NA
tion.
C. 18th November
B. Prof. Sharma delivered the lecture in
the class room. D. 20th November
50. The total number of members in the Press
C. Signal at the cross-road changed from
Council of India are:
green to orange.
A. 25
D. The child was crying to attract the at-
tention of the mother. B. 26
44. Which is the 24 hours English Business C. 28
news channel in India?
D. 29
40. A 41. C 42. B 43. B 44. A 45. B 46. B 47. C 48. D 49. B 50. C 51. A
51. The right to impart and receive information A. 1995

is guaranteed in the Constitution of India
B. 1996
by Article:
C. 1997
A. 19(1) (a)
B. 19(2) (a) D. 1998
58. Community Radio is a type of radio service
C. 19(2)
that caters to the interest of:
D. 19(16)
A. News
52. Use of radio for higher education is based
M
on the presumption of: B. Education
A. Replacing teacher in the long run C. Entertainment
B. Everybody having access to a radio set D. Local audience
RA
C. Enriching curriculum based instruction 59. Orcut is a part of:
D. Other means of instruction getting out- A. Interpersonal Communication

dated
B. Intrapersonal Communication
53. Communication with oneself is known as:
C. Group Communication
A. Interpersonal communication
E
D. Mass Communication
B. Intrapersonal communication
60. Firewalls are used to protect a communica-
RE
C. Grapevine communication tion network system against:
D. Group communication A. Fire-attacks
54. Which broadcasting system for TV is fol- B. Virus attacks
lowed in India?
C. Data-driven attacks
SH
A. PAL
D. Unauthorized attacks
B. NTCS
61. Which one of the following Telephonic
C. NTSE Conferencing with a radio link is very pop-
D. SECAM ular throughout the world?
55. All India Radio before 1936 was known as: A. TPS
I
JA
A. Indian Radio Broadcasting B. Video teletext

B. Indian Broadcasting Service C. Telepresence
C. Broadcasting Service of India D. Video conference
D. All India Broadcasting Service 62. Which is not 24 hours news channel?
56. The biggest news agency of India is: A. Aajtak
A. PTI B. ZEE News
B. UNI C. NDTV 24x7
C. NANAP D. Lok Sabha channel
D. Samachar Bharati 63. The main objective of F.M. station in radio
57. Prasar Bharati was launched in the year: is:
52. B 53. A 54. A 55. B 56. A 57. C 58. D 59. A 60. D 61. D 62. D 63. D 64. A
A. Entertainment only A. Orkut

B. Information, Entertainment and B. Twitter
Tourism C. Facebook
C. Tourism, Interaction and Entertainment D. Amazon.com
D. Entertainment, Information and Inter- 70. In communication, a major barrier to recep-
action
ER
tion of messages is
64. In communication chatting in internet is: A. Audience income
A. Parallel communication B. Audience attitude
B. Verbal communication
GD
C. Audience education
C. Grapevine communication D. Audience knowledge
D. Non verbal communication 71. Post-modernism is associated with
65. The country which has the distinction of A. Radio
having the two largest circulated newspa-
AN
B. Television
pers in the world is
C. Magazines
A. China
D. Newspapers
B. Japan
72. Didactic communication is
CH
C. Great Britain
A. Relational
D. The United States
B. Intra-personal
66. The chronological order of non-verbal com-
munication is C. Inter-personal
D. Organisational
A. Colours, signs, codes, symbols
N
73. In communication, the language is

B. Signs, symbols, codes, colours
A. The verbal code
C. Codes, colours, symbols, signs
YA
B. The iconic code

D. Symbols, codes, signs, colours
C. The symbolic code
67. Which of the following statements is not
connected with communication? D. The non-verbal code
RA
A. Information is power. 74. Identify the correct sequence of the follow-

ing:
B. Medium is the message.
A. Source, message, channel, receiver
C. Telepathy is technological.
B. Source, channel, message, receiver
NA
D. The world is an electronic cocoon.

C. Source, message, receiver, channel
68. Communication becomes circular when
D. Source, receiver, channel, message
A. the channel is clear 75. Media that exist in an interconnected series
B. the source is credible of communication - points are referred to
as
C. the feedback is absent
A. Multimedia
D. the decoder becomes an encoder
69. The site that played a major role during the B. Nodal media
terrorist attack on Mumbai (26/11) in 2008 C. Networked media
was
D. Connective media
65. B 66. B 67. C 68. D 69. B 70. B 71. B 72. C 73. A 74. B 75. C 76. D
76. The information function of mass commu- 83. Effective communication needs a support-
nication is described as ive
A. publicity A. Social environment
B. diffusion B. Political environment
C. diversion C. Economic environment
D. surveillance D. Multi-cultural environment
77. An example of asynchronous medium is 84. A major barrier in the transmission of cog-
A. Film nitive data in the process of communication
M
B. Radio is an individual’s
C. Television A. Coding ability
D. Newspaper B. Social status
RA
78. In communication, connotative words are C. Expectation
A. Simple D. Personality
B. Explicit 85. When communicated, institutionalised
stereotypes become
C. Cultural
D. Abstract A. Myths
E
79. A message beneath a message is labelled as B. Reasons
A. Sub-text C. Convictions
RE
B. Inter-text D. Experiences
C. Internal text 86. In mass communication, selective percep-
tion is dependent on the receiver’s
D. Embedded text
80. In analog mass communication, stories are A. Ethnicity
SH
A. Static B. Receptivity
B. Dynamic C. Competence
C. Interactive D. Pre-disposition
D. Exploratory 87. Photo bleeding means
81. Public communication tends to occur A. Photo cutting
I
within a more
JA
B. Photo cropping
A. Formal structure
C. Photo placement
B. Political structure
D. Photo colour adjustment
C. Complex structure
88. While designing communication strategy
D. Convenient structure feed-forward studies are conducted by
82. Transforming thoughts, ideas and mes-
A. Media
sages into verbal and non-verbal signs is
referred to as B. Satellite
A. Encoding C. Audience
B. Decoding D. Communicator
C. Mediation 89. In which language the newspapers have
highest circulation?
D. Channelisation
77. D 78. C 79. A 80. A 81. D 82. D 83. A 84. A 85. D 86. B 87. D 88. D 89. B
A. Urdu A. Total Rating Points

B. Hindi B. Time Rating Points
C. Bengali C. Thematic Rating Points
D. English D. Television Rating Points
90. Video-Conferencing can be classified as 96. The English word ‘Communication’ is de-
ER
one of the following types of communica- rived from the words
tion : A. Communist and Commune
A. Visual one way B. Communis and Communicare
B. Visual two way C. Communism and Communalism
GD
C. Audio-Visual one way D. Communion and Common sense
D. Audio-Visual two way 97. Chinese Cultural Revolution leader Mao Ze-
dong used a type of communication to talk
91. MC National University of Journalism and
to the masses is known as
Communication is located at
AN
A. Group communication
A. Bhopal
B. Mass line communication
B. Mumbai
C. Dialogue communication
C. Chennai
D. Participatory communication
CH
D. Lucknow
98. Conversing with the spirits and ancestors
92. All India Radio (A.I.R.) for broadcasting was is termed as
named in the year
A. Face-to-face communication
A. 1916
B. Interpersonal communication
B. 1926
N
C. Intrapersonal communication
C. 1936
D. Transpersonal communication
D. 1946
YA
99. The largest circulated daily newspaper

93. In India for broadcasting TV programmes among the following is
which system is followed?
A. The Hindu
A. PAL B. The Times of India
RA
B. NTSE C. The Indian Express

C. NTCS D. The Deccan Herald
D. SECAM 100. In the process of communication, which
NA
94. The term ‘DAVP’ stands for one of the following is in the chronological
order?
A. Division of Audio-Visual Publicity
A. Medium, Communicator, Message, Re-
B. Department of Audio-Visual Publicity ceiver, Effect
C. Directorate of Advertising & Vocal Pub- B. Message, Communicator, Medium, Re-
licity ceiver, Effect
D. Directorate of Advertising & Visual Pub- C. Communicator, Medium, Receiver, Ef-
licity fect, Message
95. The term “TRP” is associated with TV D. Communicator, Message, Medium, Re-
shows stands for ceiver, Effect
90. D 91. A 92. C 93. A 94. D 95. D 96. B 97. B 98. D 99. B 100. D 101. A
101. Bengal Gazette, the first Newspaper in In- A. critical

dia was started in 1780 by B. formal
A. James Augustus Hicky C. informal
B. Dr. Annie Besant D. corporate
C. Lord Cripson 108. Communication issues at the interna-
tional level are addressed by
D. A.O. Hume
A. ITU
102. Communication via New media such as
computers, teleshopping, internet and mo- B. ILO
M
bile telephony is termed as C. UNDP
A. Entertainment D. UNESCO
B. Communication 109. Referential framing used by TV audience
RA
connects media with
C. Interactive communication
A. falsity
D. Developmental communication
B. reality
103. Classroom communication of a teacher
rests on the principle of C. passivity
A. Edutainment D. negativity
E
110. The communicated knowledge in a class-
B. Infotainment
room is considered as
C. Enlightenment
RE
A. cultural capital
D. Entertainment B. limited judgement
104. is important when a teacher commu- C. autonomous virtue
nicates with his/her student.
D. non-pervasive treasure
SH
A. Apathy 111. Users who use media for their own ends
B. Empathy are identified as
C. Antipathy A. Active audience
D. Sympathy B. Passive audience
105. Classroom communication is normally C. Positive audience
I
considered as D. Negative audience

JA
A. effective 112. Classroom communication can be de-

scribed as
B. affective
A. Discourse
C. cognitive
B. Exploration
D. non-selective
C. Institutionalisation
106. Telephone is an example of
D. Unsignified narration
A. circular
113. Ideological codes shape our collective
B. mechanised A. Creations
C. linear communication B. Perceptions
D. non-linear communication C. Productions
107. Means of grapevine communication are D. Consumptions
102. C 103. A 104. B 105. C 106. C 107. C 108. D 109. B 110. A 111. A 112. A
113. B 114. A
114. In communication myths have power but 120. Photographs are not easy to
are A. Decode
A. imprecise B. Change
B. uncultural C. Secure
C. unprefered D. Publish
ER
D. insignificant 121. The grains that appear on a television set
115. The first multi-lingual news agency of In- when operated are also referred to as
dia was A. snow
A. API B. Sparks
GD
B. Samachar C. Rain Drops
C. Samachar Bharati D. Green Dots
D. Hindustan Samachar 122. In circular communication, the encoder
becomes a decoder when there is
AN
116. Organisational communication can be
equated with A. Noise
A. mass communication B. Feedback
B. group communication C. Criticality

CH
D. Audience
C. inter personal communication
123. The mode of communication that involves
D. intra-personal communication a single source transmitting information to
117. If two propositions having the same sub- a large number of receivers simultaneously,
ject and predicate terms are such that one is called
is the denial of the other, the relationship A. Mass Communication
N
between them is called

B. Group Communication
A. Contrary
C. Interpersonal Communication
YA
B. Sub-contrary
D. Intrapersonal Communication
C. Contradictory
124. A smart classroom is a teaching space
D. Sub-alteration which has
RA
118. Break-down in verbal communication is A. Projector and screen

described as
B. PC/Laptop connection and DVD/VCR
A. Entropy player.
B. Short Circuit C. Smart portion with a touch panel con-
NA
trol system.
C. Unevenness
D. All of the above
D. Contradiction
125. The term “Yellow Journalism” refers to
119. The Telephone Model of Communication
was first developed in the area of A. Sensational news prints in yellow paper.
A. Dispersion theory B. Sensational news about arts and culture.
B. Information theory C. Sensational news about terrorism and

violence.
C. Technological theory
D. Sensationalism and exaggeration to at-
D. Minimal effects theory tract readers / viewers.
115. D 116. B 117. C 118. A 119. B 120. A 121. A 122. B 123. A 124. D 125. D
126. C
126. In the classroom, the teacher sends the A. Context

message either as words or images. The
B. Reception
students are really
C. Transmission
A. Agitators
D. Non-regulation
B. Encoders
133. The choice of communication partners is
C. Decoders influenced by factors of
D. Propagators A. Utility, secrecy, dissonance
127. Effectiveness of communication can be
B. Proximity, utility, loneliness
M
traced from which of the following
A. Attitude surveys C. Secrecy, dissonance, deception
B. Performance records D. Dissimilarity, dissonance, deviance

134. Every communicator has to experience
RA
C. Selection of communication channel
A. Status dislocation
D. All of the above
128. Which of the following are the character- B. Manipulated emotions
istic features of communication C. Anticipatory excitement
A. Communication is a continuous process D. The issue of homophiles
B. Communication is a circular process
E
135. As a teacher, select the best option to en-
C. Communication involves exchange of sure your effective presence in the class-
room.
RE
ideas, facts and opinions
D. All of the above A. Being authoritarian
129. The term ‘grapevine’ is also known as B. Use of peer command
A. Informal communication C. Making aggressive statements
SH
B. Upward communication D. Adoption of well-established posture

C. Downward communication 136. What are the barriers to effective commu-
nication?
D. Horizontal communication
130. Which of the following is not a principle A. Dialogue, summary and self-review.
of effective communication B. Personal statements, eye contact and
simple narration.
I
A. Strategic use of grapevine

C. Use of simple words, cool reaction and
JA
B. Participation of the audience

defensive attitude.
C. One-way transfer of information
D. Moralising, being judgemental and com-
D. Persuasive and convincing dialogue ments of consolation.
131. Aspects of the voice, other than the speech 137. What do communicated words carry in a
are known as: classroom situation?
A. Para language A. Power, structure and tradition
B. Physical language B. Diversion, criticism and irrationality
C. Delivery language
C. Inspiration, controversy and introspec-
D. Personal language tion
132. Every type of communication is affected D. Insipidity, irrationality, and non-
by its: acceptance
127. D 128. D 129. A 130. C 131. A 132. A 133. B 134. C 135. D 136. D 137. A
138. A
138. Figure out the components of non-verbal 139. Which of the following are the basic fac-
communication in a classroom from the fol- tors of effective listening?
lowing :
A. Opinionation, stare and glare and inter-
A. Facial expression, kinesics and personal ruptions
space B. Me-too-ism, glancing sideways, and of-
B. Speed of utterance, feel good factor and fering advice
ER
acoustics C. Aggressive questioning, continuous
C. Facial expression, cultural space and cues and frequent movement
seating arrangement D. Acknowledgement of thoughts, reflec-
GD
tion, and asking open-ended questions
D. High sound, physical ambience and
teacher-learner distance
AN
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
139. D
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
6. Curriculam developement
GD
AN
CH
1. What is Curriculum? 5. Responsible for the curriculum planning
A. Overall activities of an Institution and development in Pakistani is?
B. Objectivity A. Objectivity
C. Classroom B. Curriculum wing

N
D. Affective C. Affective ness

2. Important factor of curriculum is help to D. Students
achieve the?
YA
6. Which domain of objectives is not being

A. Objectivity evaluated through our present system of
B. Classroom examination?
C. Affective A. Objectivity
RA
D. Students B. Classroom
3. Which of the following is the nature of cur- C. Affective
riculum?
D. Students
A. Conservative
NA
7. Syllabus is a part of?

B. Critical
A. Student
C. Creative
B. School
D. All of these
C. Parents
4. Curriculum provides guidance for?
D. Curriculum
A. Student
8. Benefits A.V Aids are that they?
B. School
A. Create interest
C. Parents
B. Reduce verbalization
D. Teacher
1. A 2. A 3. D 4. A 5. B 6. C 7. D 8. D
66 Chapter 6. Curriculam developement
C. Stimulate self activity A. Constitution in a country

D. All of above B. Provision of latest knowledge
9. Curriculum presents instructional material C. Preparation of students for service
is stated by.
D. None
A. Smith
16. Curriculum is supposed to?
B. Wheller
A. Achieve the objectives
C. Jack Kerr
B. Be organized by the school
D. None
C. Both
M
10. Relationship of subjects at different levels
is called? D. None
17. Curriculum reflects the culture of?
A. Centralization
RA
A. Society
B. De centralization
B. Home
C. Horizontal organization
C. School
D. Vertical organization
11. An outline of the topics of a subject to be D. Area
covered in specific time is called? 18. A. Learning means?
E A. Change in behavior
A. Curriculum
B. Course B. Teaching process
RE
C. Syllabus C. Curriculum
D. None D. None
12. Curriculum organization used for different 19. The outline of the contents is?
concepts at the same class is? A. Course
SH
A. Vertical B. Syllabus
B. Horizontal C. Programe
C. Logical D. All of the above
D. None 20. Component of curriculum is?
13. The category of Audio Visual Aids is?
I
A. Evaluation
A. Radio
JA
B. Objectives
B. Television C. Teaching strategies
C. Tape recorder D. All of the above
D. All of these 21. Models of curriculum presently being used
14. Major concern of curriculum is? at any stage in Pakistan is?
A. Personal A. Activity
B. Change in individuals behavior B. Subject
C. Preparation of students for service C. Integrated
D. None D. All of the above
15. The importance of curriculum in the sys- 22. The selection of the particular design is in-
tem of education is just like a? fluenced by?
9. A 10. D 11. C 12. B 13. D 14. B 15. A 16. C 17. A 18. A 19. B 20. D 21. D
22. C 23. A
A. Types 29. Percentage of knowledge gained through

B. Elements observation is?
C. Foundation A. 75 %
D. Principle B. 50%
23. Intelligence level of gifted student is? C. 34 %
ER
A. 140 and above D. None of the
B. 110 30. The base on which the subject activities
and experience are planned is called?
C. 90
A. Course
GD
24. The scope of curriculum include. B. Behavior
A. Programme of studies C. Design
B. Programme of Activites D. Logical sequence
AN
C. Programme of Guidance 31. Keeping in view the types of students in a
class are generally grouped as?
D. All of the above
25. The concise Oxford Dictionary defines cur- A. Average
riculum as a? B. Below average
CH
A. Course of learning C. Above average
B. Chariot race course D. All of the above
C. Course of study 32. Logical order content organization is to ar-
D. None of the above range the content according to?
26. The model of curriculum could not move A. Course
N
above elementary stage is?

B. Behavior
A. Core curriculum
YA
C. Design
B. Activity curriculum
D. Logical
C. Subject curriculum
33. Summative evalution takes place?
RA
A. In the beginning
27. Detailed contents of the subjects for class
are called? B. At the end
A. Course C. In the middle
B. Behavior D. None of the
NA
C. Design 34. Without suitable curriculum,aims of educa-

tion
D. Logical sequence
28. A curriculum is the sum total of a school A. Can be achieved
efforts to influence a child? B. Cannot be achieved
A. Course C. Can be changed
B. Behavior D. None of the above
C. Design 35. How many basic components of curriculum
D. Logical sequence have?
24. D 25. B 26. B 27. A 28. B 29. A 30. C 31. D 32. D 33. D 34. B 35. B
A. 2 A. Formative Evaluation
B. 4 B. Summative Evaluation
C. 6 C. Diagnostic Evaluation
D. 8 D. A B C
36. Curriculum development refers to the total 42. On way of finding out,what is going on in
process of curriculum? a class room is?
A. Designing A. Observation
M
B. Implementing B. Education psychology
C. Evaluating C. Foundation of curriculum
D. All of the above D. Is the purpose of life?
RA
37. Which one is not the component of the cur- 43. When what why and how to teach is the
riculum? main task of?
A. Design A. Observation
B. Evaluation B. Education psychology
C. Curriculum design C. Foundation of curriculum
E
D. Abilities D. Is the purpose of life?
38. Effectiveness of curriculum is determined 44. The force that effect that effect the devel-
RE
by? opment of curriculum are called?
B. Evaluation B. Education of curriculum
SH

39. The arrangement of the elements of cur- 45. Philosophy and curriculum are concerned
riculum can be defined as? with the question of what?
I
B. Evaluation B. Education psychology

JA

40. The term “core curriculum” is sometimes 46. Philosophical foundation of curriculum is
simply called? concerned with?
A. Core A. Ideas
B. Code B. Psychological foundation
C. Cope C. Society
D. None D. Content
41. The method used to evaluate the curricu- 47. Student needs and interests are important
lum is? in?
36. D 37. A 38. B 39. C 40. A 41. D 42. A 43. B 44. C 45. D 46. A 47. B 48. C
A. Ideas 54. Curriculum emphasized for primary classes

is?
B. Psychological foundation
A. Activity - centered curriculum
C. Society
B. Integrated - curriculum
D. Content
48. Sociological foundation are concerned C. Decrease in number of books
ER
with? D. Horizontal organization
A. Ideas 55. Explanatory methods are used in?
B. Psychological foundation A. Subject centered curriculum
GD
C. Society B. Learner centered curriculum
D. Content C. Activity centered curriculum
49. Subject centered designs revolve around? D. None
A. Ideas 56. Broad field curriculum is a modification of?
AN
B. Psychological foundation A. Subject centered curriculum
C. Society B. Learner centered curriculum
D. Content C. Activity centered curriculum

50. Nature of elements of curriculum and pat- D. None
CH
tern of their organization is? 57. Rote learning is a demerit of?
A. Curriculum design A. Subject centered curriculum
B. Foundation of curriculum B. Learner centered curriculum
C. Curriculum evaluation C. Activity centered curriculum
N
D. Elements of curriculum D. None of the above

51. A frame work of action for preparing a cur- 58. Teacher training is less emphasized in?
YA
riculum is?
A. Subject centered curriculum
A. Curriculum design
B. Learner centered curriculum
B. Foundation of curriculum
C. Activity centered curriculum
RA
C. Curriculum evaluation
D. Elements of curriculum 59. Curriculum based on thinking of John
52. Knowledge is compartmentalized in? Dewey is?
A. Subject centered curriculum A. Subject -centered curriculum
NA
B. Learner centered curriculum B. Learner -centered curriculum

C. Activity centered curriculum C. Activity centered curriculum
D. None D. None of the above
53. Prior Planning is characteristic of? 60. Prior planning is not possible in?
A. Subject centered curriculum A. Activity centered curriculum
B. Learner centered curriculum B. Integrated curriculum
C. Activity centered curriculum C. Decrease in number of books
D. None D. Horizontal organization
49. D 50. A 51. A 52. A 53. A 54. B 55. A 56. A 57. A 58. A 59. C 60. A 61. C
61. The purpose of integrated curriculum is? 68. The major function of the Punjab text Book
A. Activity centered curriculum Board.
B. Integrated curriculum A. Printing books
C. Decrease in number of books B. Examination

D. Horizontal organization C. Evaluation
62. The relationship of different concepts at D. None of the above
one level is?
69. Making value judgment about curriculum
A. Activity centered curriculum is?
M
B. Integrated curriculum
A. Curriculum evaluation
C. Decrease in number of books
B. Objectives
D. Horizontal organization
RA
C. I.Q
63. which is not concerned with teacher train-
ing? D. Education institution
A. BISE 70. The most important component of lesson
B. University of Education plan is?
C. IER A. Curriculum evaluation
D. DSD
E B. Objectives
64. Examinations are conducted by? C. I.Q
RE
A. BISE D. Educational institution
B. University of Education 71. To select subject matter,one should con-
C. IER sider student?
D. DSD A. Curriculum
SH
65. University Education was established in? B. Objectives

A. 2002
C. I.Q
B. 2000
D. Educational institution
C. 1998
72. The implementer for curriculum is?
D. 1992
I
A. Curriculum evaluation
66. Allama Iqbal Open University was estab-
JA
lished in? B. Objectives

A. 2002 C. I.Q
B. 1974 D. Educational institution
C. 1998 73. The source of achieving on objectives on
D. 1992 objectives is?
67. The system of distance education is ob- A. Curriculum evaluation
served in?
B. Objectives
A. BISE
C. I.Q
B. University of Education
D. Action
C. Allama Iqbal Open University
74. Curriculum is:
62. D 63. A 64. A 65. A 66. D 67. C 68. A 69. A 70. B 71. C 72. D 73. D 74. D
A. Course A. Mental
B. Syllabus B. Physical
C. Co-curricular activities C. Emotional
D. Overall activities of an institution D. All of the above
75. Mini Culture is: 81. A curriculum is blue print or pip of the
ER
school that includes experiences for the:
A. Content
A. Experts
B. Classroom
B. Teacher
C. Curriculum
GD
C. Learner
D. Home
D. Curriculum planner
76. Psychological foundation play its role in
the development of curriculum keeping in 82. If two or more methods are mixed up
view the: for teaching, the teaching method will be
AN
known as:
A. Student’s needs
A. Eclectic method
B. Student’s interest
B. Combined method
C. Student’s capabilities
C. Mixed method
CH
D. All of the above
D. None of these
77. Curriculum is interpreted to mean all the or-
83. A curriculum is the sum total of a school’s
ganized courses, activities and experiences
t influence a child’s:
which students have under the directions
of the school, whether in the classroom or A. Action
not, is said by:
N
B. Attitude
A. John Dewey
C. Personality
YA
B. Stephen Romine D. Behaviors

C. H. Rugg 84. Percentage of knowledge gained through
D. Hilda taba observation/vision is:
RA
78. Learning means: A. 40%
A. Teaching process B. 55%
B. Curriculum change C. 60%

D. 75%
NA
C. Change in behaviour
85. In planning and implementing curricula
school makes its selection from:
79. The mirror of the Society is:
A. Nation
A. playground
B. Region
B. community
C. Culture
C. Hospital
D. Mass communication
D. School
86. The arrangement of the elements of cur-
80. Types of individual differences are: riculum can be can as:
75. B 76. D 77. D 78. B 79. D 80. D 81. C 82. A 83. D 84. D 85. C 86. A 87. B
A. Curriculum Design A. Student Interest

B. Curriculum Foundation B. Training of practical work
C. Curriculum Construction C. Overall development
D. Curriculum Development D. All of the above
87. The model of behavioral objectives of cur- 93. Development of curriculum at higher level
riculum evaluation was presented by: and its application at different levels is:
A. John Dewey A. Horizontal organization
B. Tyler
M
B. Vertical organization
C. Hilda taba C. Centralized
D. Stuffle beam D. Decentralized
RA
88. When, What, Why & How, to teach is the 94. The factor effecting curriculum develop-
main task of: ment is:
A. Educational psychology A. Sociological factor
B. Educational philosophy B. Economical factor
C. Economics C. Scientific factor
E
D. History
D. All of the above
89. The forces that effect the development of
95. The evaluation used to improve the con-
RE
curriculum are called:
tents during curriculum development is:
A. Curriculum Design
A. Summative evaluation
B. Curriculum Evaluation
B. Formative evaluation
C. Elements of curriculum
SH
C. Diagnostic evaluation
D. Foundations of curriculum
90. Psychological foundations of curriculum
help curriculum developers to understand 96. Evaluation used to improve the contents
the nature of: after curriculum development is:
A. Content A. Summative evaluation

I
B. Learner B. Formative evaluation

JA
C. Teacher C. Diagnostic evaluation
D. Ideas D. None of the above

91. Areas/sources of information for psycho- 97. Repetition of concepts of same level in two
logical foundation are: consecutive classes lacks the quality of:
A. Learning process A. Horizontal organization

B. Teaching method B. Vertical organization
C. Student characteristics C. Relevancy
D. All of the above D. Flexibility
92. The characteristics of Activity Centred Cur- 98. The major purpose of co-curricular activi-
riculum: ties is to:
88. A 89. D 90. B 91. D 92. D 93. C 94. D 95. B 96. A 97. B 98. A
A. Help students achieve a well-adjusted A. Principal

personality
B. Parents
B. Provide relief from the usual classroom
C. Teacher
routine
D. Child himself
C. Allow students an opportunity to de-
velop in to good citizens 105. Curriculum effectiveness is determined
ER
by:
D. Permit students to have a choice of ed-
ucational program A. Community cooperation
99. Curriculum improvement should a ———— B. Teacher competence
—— process
GD
C. Student interest
A. last D. Quality of supervision
B. Initial 106. “Curriculum” is a word of:
C. Internal A. Greek
AN
D. Continuous B. Latin
100. Five stages of awareness, interest, evalua-
C. Persian
tion, trial and adoption are for:
D. English
A. Curriculum change
107. Psychomotor domain deals wit
CH
B. Curriculum formation
A. Feelings
C. Curriculum development
B. Practical skills
D. Curriculum implementation
C. Intellectual abilities
101. The highest in rank in ministry of educa-
tion is: D. None of the above
N
A. Administrative officer 108. Development of a learner is linked to:

B. Secretary A. Effective development
YA
C. Education officer B. Cognitive development

D. Research Officer C. Psychomotor development
102. School curriculum is defined as D. Sensorimotor development
RA
A. Methods of instruction 109. In experimental procedure of the content

selection, the content is selected by:
B. Experiences organized by school
A. The scientific pattern
C. Materials of instruction
B. Analysis of experiences
NA
D. Courses of study
103. The part of the curriculum designed to C. The opinion of the expert
meet the needs of all students is: D. Concerns of subject specialists
A. General education 110. In the subject centered curriculum, the im-
portant element is:
B. Specialized education
C. The extra-curriculum A. Division of knowledge
D. The program of studies B. Mixing of activities
104. What the child studies in a class is decided C. Influence of social values
by: D. Psychomotor development
99. D 100. A 101. B 102. B 103. A 104. C 105. C 106. B 107. B 108. A 109. B
110. A 111. A
111. Teaching and learning combines to make: A. Curriculum design

A. Curriculum B. Curriculum implementation
B. Instruction C. Curriculum Construction
C. Classroom D. Curriculum Development
D. Syllabus 114. A school curriculum is best defined as:
112. The Curriculum is affected by the follow- A. All materials and methods of instruc-
ing factor: tion
A. Government
B. All materials used to pupil activities
M
B. Religious group
C. The complete collection of courses of
C. Ideology of the nation study
D. All of the above D. The organized pupil experiences set by
RA
113. The term refer to the total process of de- the school
signing implementing and evaluating:
E
RE
I SH
JA
112. D 113. D 114. D

ER
7. Educational philosophy
GD
AN
CH
1. What is the origin of the world Education? B. Bright Mind
A. E and Catum C. Tendency to know
B. Edu and Catum D. None of these
5. What is the place of principal in an educa-
C. Word Education
tion institute?
N
D. None of these
A. Overall head of the school
2. What is called Education acquired with-
B. Manager of the school
YA
out any specific purpose fixed period and

place? C. Owner of the school
A. Indirect Education D. Founder of the school

6. If a student gets failed in any class what
RA
B. Individual Education
should be done to him?
C. Informal Education A. He should be given a chance to improve
D. Formal Education and sent to the next class after he improves
3. Which one of following sentences is correct B. He should be kept in the same class
NA
about the nature of teaching? C. He should be advised to leave studies

A. It is diagnostic D. All the above methods are right
B. It is remedial 7. Why are curriculum activities used In
teaching?
C. It is diagnostic as well as remedial
A. To Make teaching easy
D. All the above statements are correct
B. To make teaching interesting easy to
4. What is the compulsory element of learn-
understand and effective
ing?
C. To make teaching attractive
A. Ability to read
D. To assist the teacher
1. A 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. C 7. D 8. B
76 Chapter 7. Educational philosophy
8. What are the three components of the Edu- 14. On what depends the values of an Educa-
cation process? tion experience in the eyes of the idealist?
A. Education teacher and books A. Whether or not the pupil has been prop-
erly motivated
B. Teacher student and education
B. Whether or not it preserves accepted
C. Teaching learning and practice
institutions
D. Direction instruction and skill
C. The extent to which it satisfies pupil,s
9. What is teaching through deductive desires
method?
D. The manner in which it affects future
M
A. From general to specific experience
B. From specific to general 15. Which Education activity is most desirable
to the pragmatist?
C. From macro to micro
RA
A. Approximates the goals which educa-
D. From easy to difficult
tion scientists have set up
10. What is the main centre of informal Educa-
B. Results from the indiscrimination of the
tion?
pupil in democratic theory
A. Society
C. That is beneficial effect upon the future
B. Family experiences of the pupil
E
C. Radio and Television D. That characterizes by spontaneous ac-
tive continuously pleasurable and practical
RE
D. All of the above
for the pupil
11. Which is the first school for a child,s edu-
16. What is the view point of progressive edu-
cation?
cation regarding the issue of liberal vs vo-
A. Society cational education?
SH
B. Friends A. Vocational ends load one to degrade

C. Family learning
D. School B. Liberal arts subject should proceed vo-

cational training
12. Which one of the following education sys-
tems supports scientific progress? C. Vocational and liberal education should
not be separated
I
A. Realistic Education
D. All subjects should have a vocational
JA
B. Idealistic Education orientation

C. Naturalistic Education 17. Who was the supporter of Naturalism in
D. None of these Education?
13. What is the meaning of lesson plan? A. Frolbel
A. To read the lesson before teaching it B. Armstrong
B. To prepare all that the teacher wants to C. John Locke

teach in a limited period D. Rosseau
C. To prepare detailed answers of all the 18. What do you mean by curriculum?
questions to be asked in the class A. A child learns through curriculum
D. To prepare the list of question to be B. Sum total of the annual study
asked
9. D 10. A 11. A 12. C 13. A 14. B 15. B 16. A 17. D 18. A 19. B
C. Sum total of the activities of a school 24. Which is not Naturalism,s aim of Educa-
tion?
D. Indicates the course to be taught by the
teachers to the students throughout the A. Education is the notion of man,s evolu-
year tion from lower forms of life
19. Who raised the slogan “Back to Nature”? B. To equip the individual or the nation for
the struggle for existence so as to ensure
A. Realism
ER
survival
B. Pragmatism
C. To help the pupils to learn to be in har-
C. Naturalism mony with and well-adapted to their sur-
D. Existentialism roundings
GD
20. Which statements is not correct about Nat- D. To inculcate ethical and moral values in
uralism? the pupils
25. Which school held the view “God makes
A. A reaction against the degenerated hu-
all things good man meddles with and they
manism before Renaissance period
AN
become evil?
B. A reaction against the degenerated hu-
A. Marxism
manism of the Renaissance period
B. Existentialism
C. A reaction against sophistication artifi-
ciality and paraphernalia in education C. Naturalism
CH
D. A reaction against a mere study of D. Pragmatism
books and linguistic forms 26. Which school maintained self- expression
21. Who said “Reverse the usual practice and with the accompanying cries of “no inter-
you will almost always do right” ference” no “restraints”?
A. Extreme form Naturalism
A. Muhammad Ali Jinnah
N
B. Most widely accepted from of Natural-

B. Rousseau
ism
C. Dewey
YA
C. Truest form of Naturalism

D. Plato
D. Most valid form of Naturalism
22. “Human institutions are one mass of folly 27. Which is not the nature of philosophy?
and contradiction” Whose statement is
RA
this? A. It is a science
A. Bernard Shaw B. It is a collective ensemble of various

viewpoints
B. Rousseau
C. It is planned attempt on search for the
NA
C. Dewey truth
D. Allama Iqbal D. It is the totality of man,s creative ideas
23. According to which school of philosophy 28. Which branch of philosophy deals with
of education exaltation of individual,s per- knowledge its structure method and valid-
sonality is a function of education? ity?
A. Pragmatism A. Logic
B. Idealism B. Aesthetics
C. Marxism C. Epistemology
D. Idealism and Marxism both D. Metaphysics
20. C 21. B 22. C 23. D 24. D 25. C 26. A 27. D 28. C

29. Which school maintained “Natural im- A. Self-realization

pulses of the child are of great importance B. Spiritual and moral development
and are good in themselves?”
C. Happy and moral development
A. Biological Naturalism
D. Total development of personality
B. Mechanical Naturalism
35. Naturalist,s conception of man is.
C. Naturalism of physical science A. Man,s very essence of being is his spiri-
D. Romantic Naturalism tual nature
30. Which branch of philosophy examines is- B. It is spirit rather than animality that is
M
sues pertaining to the nature of :reality?” most truly man
A. Ontology C. There exists in the nature of things a
perfect pattern of each individual
B. Metaphysics
RA
D. Nature would have them children be-
C. Axiology
fore they are men
D. Epistemology 36. Which philosophy of education considers
31. On what is based the need for teaching phi- psychology as an incomplete study of and
losophy of education? an inadequate basis of educational theory?
A. All pupils are not alike A. Realism

E
B. Different systems of education found in B. Pragmatism
different countries C. Idealism
RE
C. Different philosophies expressed differ- D. Naturalism
ent points of view on every aspect of edu- 37. Which among the following does not fit
cation into the scheme of education goals of the
D. Different ways of teaching-learning Idealists?
SH
32. What is the goal of education according to A. Care of body

Idealism? B. Moral values
A. Perfect adaptation to the environment C. Skills
B. Realisation of moral values D. Self- expression
C. Satisfaction of human wants 38. Religious education is strongly advocated
I
by.
D. Cultivation of dynamic adaptable mind
JA
which will be resourceful and enterprising A. Pragmatists

in all situations B. Idealists
33. The aim of education according to the Ex- C. Realists
istentialists is.
D. Existentialists
A. Humanitarian and humanist self- 39. Which of the following is said about the
realization idealists?
B. Adaptation to practical life A. They are content with "briars"
C. Objective knowledge B. They like "roses"
D. A good understanding of the world out- C. They are satisfied neither with "briars"
side nor with "roses"
34. The Realist,s aim of education is. D. They want "roses" and "briars" both
29. D 30. B 31. C 32. B 33. A 34. C 35. D 36. C 37. A 38. B 39. C 40. B
40. Which school of philosophy of education A. The free activity of the pupil is likely to
advocated Project method of teaching? result in permanent attitudes of initiative
and independence and moral discipline
A. Realism
B. Training in citizenship is possible
B. Pragmatism
through school and community activities
C. Idealism C. Training in character through school,s
ER
D. Naturalism co-curricular activities is possible
41. Playway method of teaching has been em- D. Child,s own experience is valuable for
phasised in the scheme of the education adequate development of child,s personal-
of. ity
GD
46. Project method of teaching is an outstand-
A. Naturalists
ing contribution of.
B. Realists
A. Realism
C. Pragmatists B. Pragmatism
AN
D. Existentialists C. Naturalism
42. Which is the most widely accepted method D. Idealism
of education according to the pragmatists?
47. Which is the characteristic of the Project
A. Lecturing by the teacher Method?
CH
B. Leaving the child free to learn A. Problematic act
C. Learning by doing B. Carried in its natural setting
D. Heuristic method C. Used for all-round development of

child,s personality
43. The pragmatists are against.
D. A voluntary undertaking
N
A. The external examinations

48. Which among the following is not essen-
B. The special teachers tially desirable in the Project Method?
YA
C. Breakdown of knowledge into separate A. The task of the project is as real as the
subjects task of the life outside the walls of the
school
D. Eternal spiritual values
RA
B. The task of the project involves con-

44. Pragmatism has a grater sense of responsi-
structive effort or thought yielding objec-
bility than Naturalism with regard to moral
tive results
training because.
C. The task of the project should be full of
A. The free activity which pragmatic sys- message for the children
NA
tem of education entails does not mean li-

cence rather it means a guided activity D. The task of the project should be inter-
esting enough so that the pupil is genuinely
B. They emphasize teaching of values eager to carry it out
C. They consider education basically a so- 49. Which is a great disadvantage of the project
cial process method?
D. They do not want the teacher to abdi- A. It consumes much of the time of the
cate from the scene child
45. Which of the following claims of the prag- B. It leaves gaps in the knowledge of the
matists is not acceptable? child
41. A 42. C 43. C 44. A 45. A 46. B 47. C 48. C 49. B 50. A
C. Children are generally not interested in A. It is made by man

it B. It is ever changing
D. Teachers generally do not like to teach C. It is ever changing
through it
D. It is eternal
50. Learning by Project Method is technically
E. It is what emerges to be true in actual
known as.
practice
A. Incidental Learning 56. In whose methodology of teaching “Exper-
B. Efficient learning imentation” is the key-note of?
M
C. Systematic learning A. Idealism
B. Existentialism
D. Adequate learning
C. Realism
RA
51. Education according to the Pragmatist is.
D. Pragmatism
A. Wholly pupil oriented
57. The tern “progressive education related to.
B. Wholly society-oriented A. Realism
C. Wholly purposive B. Pragmatism
D. Wholly interdisciplinary C. Idealism
E
52. who among the following is not a follower D. Existentialism
of Pragmatic Philosophy? 58. Who said “No fixed aims of education and
RE
A. William James no values in advance”?
B. Peshtalozzi A. Progressive educators

B. Idealists
C. Johin Dewey
C. Realists
SH
D. Kilpatrick
D. Marxists
53. What is not associated with Pragmatism?
59. Which school of philosophy of education
A. Purposive education stresses the direct study of men and things
through tours and travels?
B. Experience-based education
A. Social realism
C. Freedom-based education
I
B. Idealism
JA
D. Education for self-realization

C. Existentialism
54. Who emphasised realization of Truth
D. Marxism
Beauty and Goodness as the aims of ed-
ucation? 60. Which school believes that all knowledge
comes through the senses?
A. Idealists
A. Idealism
B. Pragmatists
B. Sense Realism
C. Realists C. Pragmatism
D. Naturalists D. Existentialism
55. Which statement about truth is not cor- 61. Which school raised the slogan “Things as
rect according to the philosophy of Prag- they are and as they are likely to be encoun-
matism? tered in life rather tha words?”
51. C 52. B 53. D 54. A 55. D 56. D 57. B 58. A 59. A 60. B 61. B
A. Pragmatist A. The method of teaching

B. Realists B. The value and significance of what is
taught
C. Idealists
C. The nature of the child
D. Existentialists
62. As Huxley pleaded for the introduction of D. Organization of the content to be taught
ER
“a complete and thorough scientific culture”
into schools,he is claimed to be. 67. Which school of philosophy very strongly
advocates that education should be voca-
A. An Idealist
tional in character?
B. A Realist
GD
A. Existentialism
C. A Pragmatist
B. Naturalism
D. A Naturalist
C. Realism
63. Realism in education was born out of.
D. Pragmatism
A. The enthusiasm of the Renaissance
AN
68. Which is not an aspect of mind according
B. The great religious movement of the to the Realists,theory of knowing?
17th century
A. Awareness
C. A cleavage between the work of the
B. Consciousness
schools and the life of the world outside
CH
that occurred during the 19th century C. Behavior
D. The degeneration of humanism after Re- D. Processing of awareness
naissance 69. Who believe that “Objects have a reality
64. Which of the following is not criticised by independent of mental phenomena”?
realism in education? A. Idealists
N
A. Teachers denying the value of school B. Realists

co-curricular activities
C. Naturalists
YA
B. Pupils cramming for knowledge from

D. Existentialists
books for reproducing in examination
70. Marxist educational philosophy is close to.
C. Organizing schools in a way that is con-
ducive to practical training in citizenship A. idealism
RA
D. Teaching which drifts away from life of B. Realism

the child C. Naturalism
65. In the light of relevant past events con- D. Pragmatism
temporary events and their understanding
NA
71. Which among the following statements is

should find a place in the teaching of his-
not a characteristic of Marxism?
tory Who maintained this principle?
A. It presupposes a reality independent of
A. Naturalists
man,s mind
B. Idealists
B. Its educational philosophy is essentially
C. Realists materialistic
D. Marxists C. Its major objective is the development
66. The most important thing to keep in mind of child,s personality
for a teacher according to Realism in edu- D. It asserts that physical environment can
cation is. definitely change the nature of the child
62. B 63. C 64. C 65. C 66. B 67. C 68. C 69. B 70. B 71. C 72. A
72. Which school of philosophy of education A. Existentialism

regrets dualism between cultural and voca- B. Idealism
tional curriculum?
C. Marxism
A. Marxism
D. Pragmatism
B. Idealism
78. According to Existentialists,the essence of
C. Existentialism existence means.
D. Naturalism A. Unity with the ultimate reality
73. According to which educational philoso- B. Spiritual good and happiness
phy socially useful labour must from the
M
C. Tensions and contradictions which con-
central pivot of the entire school?
dition loneliness and anxiety
A. Idealism
D. Continuous growth and development
RA
B. Marxism 79. Who was the nineteenth century founder
C. Existentialism of Existentialist?
D. Naturalism A. Hegel
74. Which of the following has been asserted B. Soren Kierkegaard
about schools by Marxist educational phi- C. Rousseau
losophy?
D. D.J.O Connor
E
A. They should stand above politics
80. Who was twentieth century Existentialist?
B. They should disinterestedly serve soci-
A. Soren Kierkegaard
RE
ety as a whole
B. D.J O,Connor
C. They should function as deliberate in-
struments of state policy C. Jean Paul Sartre
D. The should not be mere weapons in the D. Hegel
SH
hands of the ruling class 81. Which of the following is more generally
75. Which of the following characteristics com- acceptable by modern educationists?
mon to Pragmatism Naturalism and Exis- A. There should be one single aim of edu-
tentialism? cation unchangeable over time and space
A. Emphasis on spiritual aims of education B. There is one grand objective of educa-
B. Emphasis on the individual tion and that is the development of the in-
I
ner nature of the child

C. Emphasis on physical environment
JA
C. Contribution to the welfare of the soci-

D. Emphasis on value education ety should be the only aim of education
76. Whose is the ultimate concern-“What is D. Education is bound to have several aims
existence”? since its concerns are several such as the
A. Idealists only individual the society the family the nation
B. Realists only and so on
82. What is development of human potentiali-
C. Existentialists and Idealists both ties in education?
D. Existentialists only A. Individual aim
77. which of the following philosophies held
B. Social aim
that ,Men in the world feel lonely and anx-
ious being unsure of their meaning and fear- C. Individual as well as social aim
ful of their annihilation? D. Specific aim
73. B 74. C 75. B 76. C 77. A 78. C 79. B 80. C 81. D 82. A
83. What is development of social sense and C. Individual aims are implied in the social
cooperation among the individuals through aims of education
education?
D. Individual and social aims are only two
A. Individual aim sides of the same coin
B. Social aim 88. Which statements is most acceptable to the
C. National aim academicians about “Bread and butter aim”
ER
of education?
D. Constitutional aim
84. Which among the following is not an ac- A. It is the most important aim and should
ceptable criticism of social aims of educa- be given top priority by educationists
GD
tion? B. It is equally important along with other
A. They are anit-individual aims of education
B. They are un-psychological as they do C. It is only partly acceptable
not take into account the capacities and
D. It is important for only a section of the
interests of the individual
AN
society
C. They hinder the growth and develop-
89. Which of the following does not pertain to
ment of art and literature
intellectual development aim of education?
D. Man in them becomes only a means to
an end A. Cultivation of intelligence
CH
85. Which among the following is not empha- B. Spiritual development
sized by the individual aims of education?
C. Development of cognitive powers
A. Individual freedom
D. Traming and "formation" of mind
B. Self-expression
90. Preparing the child for future life as an aim
C. Development of inner potentialities of education is preparing child for.
N
D. Development of values of tolerance and A. Some suitable vocation

non-violence
YA
86. Which of the following statements does not B. Some particular course of study
favour the individual aims of education? C. Facing all kinds of emergencies and sit-
A. The individual is an asset to the society uations of future life
his development and growth are necessary
RA
D. A happy married life

B. The society is strong if the individual is 91. the most effective method of character-
strong formation is.
C. Every individual is unique development
A. Teaching virtues through religious
of his potentialities is essential
NA
books
D. Society is supreme and all individuals
B. Organizing specialists lectures on im-
are only parts of it
portance of values in life
87. Which among the following is the most cor-
rect view about social and individual aims C. Teaching by strong character teachers
of education? D. Rewarding virtuous behaviours and
A. Individual aims should be given prefer- presenting high character models in the
ence to social aims schools
B. Social aims should be preferred to indi- 92. Harmonious development of the child aim
vidual aims of education means.
83. B 84. A 85. D 86. D 87. D 88. C 89. B 90. C 91. D 92. C
A. Development of all the qualities of the B. It must contribute to the peace and hap-
mind to the maximum possible extent piness of the whole society
B. Development of a sound mind in a C. It should have more and more institu-
sound body tions every year
C. Development of physical mental moral D. It should be by and large the concern of
and spiritual potentialities of the child in a the private sector
balanced manner
97. According to which philosophy of educa-
D. Development of the adjustment capaci- tion childhood is something desirable for its
ties of the child own sake and children should be children?
M
93. The social aims of education imply that.
A. Idealism
A. The state is an idealized metaphysical
entity B. Pragmatism
RA
B. The state is above the individual citizen C. Naturalism
C. The state is above the individual tran- D. Realism
scending all his desires and aspira-tions 98. Who emphasized that education should be
D. The state has to give not to take any- a social process?
thing from the individual
A. Vivekananda
94. Rigid system of state-education is justified
E
on the basis that the state. B. Rousseau
A. Is supreme to dictate what shall be C. Dewey

RE
taught and how shall be taught
D. Pestalozzi
B. Has absolute control over the lives and
99. Which system of education was pro-
destinies of its individual members
pounded by Mahatma Gandhi?
C. Has a right and a duty to mould the cit-
SH
izen to a pattern which makes for its own A. Teaching through listening, meditation
preservation and enhancement etc.
D. Has better resources to manage educa B. Teaching through music

tion C. Teaching by activities
95. Social aims of education imply the training
D. All of these
of.
I
100. “Education is the process of natural devel-

A. The individuals for the purpose of serv-
JA
opment of the child into an enjoyable, ra-

ing the needs of the society
tional, harmoniously balanced, useful and
B. Individuals according to their needs hence, natural life”. Which school of phi-
C. The individuals according to their ca- losophy of education believes that
pacities A. Realism
D. The individuals according to the facili- B. Idealism
ties
96. What does the individual aim of education C. Naturalism
imply? D. Existentialism
A. Education must secure for everyone the 101. Evaluate the viewpoint “The child knows
conditions under which the individuality is better than any educator what he should
most completely developed learn, when and how he should learn it”?
93. D 94. C 95. A 96. A 97. C 98. C 99. D 100. B 101. B

A. Practical, but not correct A. Co-ordinator

B. Correct, but not practical B. Efficient cause
C. Correct and practical both C. Soul is mover
D. Hundred percent correct D. All of these
102. While, according to Samkhya, Philosophy 108. The Jains have refused the Charvaka view
ER
effect is the real modification of cause, ac- of self on the basis of
cording to Samkara, it is
A. Illogical
A. Real
B. No evidence
B. Unreal
GD
C. Against causation
C. Indescribable
D. All of these
D. None of these
109. Buddha’s theory of self is known as
103. The theory of causation advanced by Sam-
kara has been proved by A. Eternal self
AN
A. Logic B. Immutable self
B. Scriptures C. Theory of no-soul

C. Experience D. None of these
CH
D. All of these 110. Buddha’s theory of self is similar to the
theory propounded in the West by
104. The relation between the Jiva and Brah-
man, according to Samkara, can be ex- A. David Hume
plained as
B. William James
A. Identity
C. Bertrand Russel
N
B. Evolution
D. All of these
C. Reflection 111. The existence of soul in Indian philoso-
YA
D. Emanation phy has not been accepted by the schools

105. According to the theory known as known as
Avacchedavada, causation means A. The Buddhists
RA
A. Reflection B. The Charvakas

B. Destruction C. Both (A) and (B)
C. Annihilation D. None of these
NA
D. None of these 112. Man, according to Charvaka philosophy,

106. Ramanuja’s theory of causation is known is
as A. The self
A. Vivartavada B. The physical body
B. Asatkarayavada C. The consciousness
C. Prakrti Parinamavada D. None of these
D. Brahman Parinamavada 113. Happiness and sorrow and other mental
107. The indirect proofs for the existence of activities, according to Charvaka, are the
self, according to the Jain philosophers, are attributes of
102. B 103. D 104. C 105. C 106. D 107. D 108. B 109. C 110. B 111. C 112. B
113. B
A. Self 120. The self, according to Samkhya is different

B. Body from
C. Consciousness A. Mind
D. None of these B. Body

114. Charvaka philosophers have been classi- C. Intellect
fied into
D. All of these
A. Dhurta
121. The Samkhya theory of self, is based upon
B. Susikshit
A. The Vedas
M
C. Both (A) and (B)
B. The Puranas
D. None of these
C. The Bhagwadgita
115. The sage Vatsyayan belongs to the Char-
RA
vaka School of D. None of these
A. Susikshit 122. The chief characteristics of the self accord-
ing to Samkhya philosophy, is
B. Dhurta
C. All of the above A. Rebirth
D. None of these B. Eternity

116. Rebirth, according to Buddha, is con-
E C. Pure consciousness
nected with self as
D. None of these
RE
A. Fundamental 123. In evolution self aims at
B. Irrelevant
A. Liberation
C. Relevant
B. Enjoyment
D. None of these
C. All of the above
SH
117. Buddha’s attitude towards self can be said

to be D. None of these
A. Sceptic 124. The chief arguments to prove the exis-
tence of self advance by Samkhya philoso-
B. Agnostic
phies are
C. Dogmatic
A. The Gunas
I
D. Indifferent
B. Structure of things
JA
118. Man, according to Buddha, can be said to

be C. Substratum of knowledge
A. Self D. All of these
B. Body 125. The self is proved on the basis of the psy-
chological tendencies of
C. Sanghat
A. Salvation
D. None of these
119. The self, according to Samkhya theory is B. Enjoyment
A. Body C. Knowledge
B. Mind D. All of these
C. Intellect 126. The plurality theory of self in Indian phi-
losophy has been accepted by
D. All of these
114. C 115. A 116. A 117. B 118. C 119. D 120. D 121. A 122. C 123. C 124. D
125. D 126. D
A. The Jainas 133. Samkara’s theory of self is based upon

B. The Mimamsa A. Logic
C. The Samkhya B. Metaphysics
D. All of these C. Epistemology
127. The unitary theory of self in Indian phi- D. All of these
losophy has been supported by
ER
134. Causation in Indian philosophy has been
A. The Jainas explained by
B. The Samkhya A. Satkaryavada
C. The Mimamsa B. Parinamavada
GD
D. Advaita Vedanta C. Asatkaryavada
128. Samkhya theory of self has been criticised
D. All of these
on the basis of
135. The theory, that the effect is the real result
A. Illogical of the cause, is known as
AN
B. Proofs for practical self only A. Vivartavada
C. Confusion between Jiva and Atman B. Parinamavada
D. All of these C. Satkaryavada
129. The most important theory of self in In-
CH
D. Asatkaryavada
dian philosophy has been advanced by
136. The theory, that the effect is only the ap-
A. Jainas
parent of the cause, is known as
B. Samkhya
A. Vivartavada
C. Buddhists
B. Satkaryavada
N
D. Advaita Vedanta
C. Parinamavada
130. Self, according to Samkara, is
D. Asatkaryavada
YA
A. Eternal
137. The theory that the effect is already im-
B. Brahman plicit in the cause, is known as
C. Transcedent A. Vivartavada
RA
D. All of these B. Parinamavada

131. The most important characteristic of self,
C. Satkaryavada
according to Samkara is
D. Asatkaryavada
A. Axiological
138. The Theory that the effect is not implicit
NA
B. Metaphysical but super-imposed upon cause, is known

C. Epistemological as
D. All of these A. vivartavada
132. The fundamental basis of Samkara’s the- B. satkaryavada
ory of self is
C. parinamavada
A. Dualism
D. asatkaryavada
B. Pluralism
139. The theory of causation known as Pari-
C. Non-dualism namavada in Indian philosophy has been
D. Qualified monism supported by
127. D 128. C 129. B 130. B 131. D 132. C 133. C 134. D 135. B 136. A 137. C
138. D 139. C
A. Samkhya A. Real change

B. Ramanuja B. Unreal change
C. Both (A) and (B) C. Both (A) and (B)
D. None of these D. None of these

146. The reflection of Brahman as according to
140. The cause, according to Indian philosophy,
Samkara, is due to
can be classified as
A. Avidya
A. Efficient cause
B. Adhyasa
M
B. Material cause
C. Vyavahara
C. Immediate cause
D. All of these
D. All of these 147. According to Pranvadin Charvakas the na-
RA
141. The material and the efficient cause, accor- ture of self is
ding to Samkhya philosophy, are related as A. Body
A. Identical B. Mind
B. Different C. Sense organs
C. Contradictory D. Vital principle

E
148. According to Atma Manovadin, Char-
D. None of these
vakas self is
142. The Mimamsa theory of causation is
RE
A. Mind
known as
B. Body
A. Vivartavada
C. Sense organs
B. Parinamavada
D. Vital principle
SH
C. Theory of energy 149. The Charvakas deny the existence of

D. None of these A. Self
143. The world, according to Samkara, is the B. Heaven and hel
result of
C. Merit and demerit
A. Evolution D. All of these
I
B. Real causation 150. The Charvaka theory of self can be termed

JA
as
C. Super-imposition
A. Vitalist
D. None of these
B. Mentalist
144. The theory known as Satkaryavada in-
cludes C. Materialist
A. Vivartavada D. All of these

151. The false knowledge, according to
B. Parinamavada Samkara, is known as
C. Both (A) and (B) A. vidya
D. None of these B. avidya
145. The causal relation, according to Samkara C. adhyasa
is
D. none of these
140. D 141. B 142. C 143. C 144. A 145. B 146. D 147. D 148. A 149. D 150. B
151. B 152. A
152. The cause of the power of Maya, accord- A. Error

ing to Samkara, is
B. Reality
A. aidya
C. Falsehood
B. vidya
D. All of these
C. adhyasa
159. The only valid Pramana according to Char-
ER
D. None of these vaka is
153. The cause of bondage of the Jiva in the
A. Inference
world, according to Samkara, is
B. Scriptures
A. vidya
GD
C. Perception
B. avidya
C. adhyasa D. None of these
160. According to materialism, the only valid
D. none of these
pramana is
154. The nature of Avidya, according to
AN
Samkara, can be described as A. Inference
A. Natural B. Scriptures
B. Eternal C. Perception
C. Both (A) and (B) D. None of these
CH
D. None of these 161. Perception coming through the contact of
155. The aim of the study of Vedanta scriptures external senses with objects according to
is: Charvaka is known as
A. Brahman realisation A. Internal

N
B. Achievement of self B. External

C. Liberation from Avidya C. Both (A) and (B)
YA
D. All of these D. None of these

156. Knowledge according to Mimamsa philo- 162. The nature of perception according to
sophy, is Charvaka can be said to be
A. real
RA
A. Authentic
B. unreal B. Inauthentic
D. none of these
D. None of these
NA
157. The nature of world as illusion has been

163. The Charvakas have challenged the valid-
accepted in Indian philosophy by
ity of
A. mimamsa
A. Inference
B. vishishitadvaita
B. Scriptures
C. advaita Vedanta
C. Both (A) and (B)
D. all of these
158. The relationship of the ultimate reality D. None of these
with the world in Indian philosophy has 164. The validity of scriptures has been chal-
been explained by the theory of lenged by the Charvakas in the field of
153. B 154. C 155. D 156. C 157. D 158. A 159. C 160. C 161. C 162. C 163. C
164. A
A. Imperceptible things A. Naya

B. Perceptible things B. Pramana

171. The theory of Naya is based upon
165. Charvakas have rejected the validity of
scriptures on the basis of A. Ekantvada
A. Criticism of inference B. Anekantvada

C. Both (A) and (B)
M
B. Absence of physical proof
D. None of these
C. Contradictions and tautologies
172. Pramanas, according to Jaina’s include
D. All of these
A. Direct
RA
166. Charvaka criticism of scriptures has been
B. Indirect
challenged by
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Nyaya
D. None of these
B. Samkhya 173. The knowledge of the qualities of the Pak-
C. Advaita Vedanta sha through the Hetu is known as
E
D. All of these A. Vyapti
167. The philosophers who have condemned B. Anuman

RE
Charvaka, challenge to Vedas include C. Paramarsa
A. Samkara D. None of these
174. The invariable relation between the Hetu
B. Udayana
and the Saddaya in Nyaya Philosophy is
SH
C. Vainkathnath known as
D. All of these A. Vyapti
168. The arguments presented in favour of the B. Anuman
Vedas include C. Paramarsa
A. Purpose to the authors D. None of these
I
B. Character of the authors 175. Vyapti can be properly defined as

JA
C. Authenticity of the authors A. Sequence
D. All of these B. Causal relation

C. Invariable concomitant
169. The most important element in the Jain
theory of Pramanas is D. None of these
A. Naya 176. The knowledge of the relation between
a name and the thing named in Nyaya is
B. Inference known as
C. Scriptures A. Inference
D. Perception B. Testimony
170. Knowledge according to Jain philosophers C. Perception
can be called D. Comparison
165. D 166. D 167. D 168. D 169. A 170. C 171. B 172. C 173. C 174. B 175. D
176. D 177. B
177. The knowledge gained through the testi- A. Real

mony of the reliable statement of scripture B. Unreal
is known as
C. Doubtful
A. Inference
D. None of these
B. Testimony 184. Valid knowledge according to Mimamsa
C. Perception includes
ER
D. Comparison A. Perceptual
178. Words according to Nyaya can be classi- B. Non-perceptual
fied as
C. Both (A) and (B)
GD
A. Drastartha D. None of these
B. Adrastartha 185. The perceptual knowledge, according to
C. Both (A) and (B) Mimamsa, can be classified as
D. None of these A. Savikalpa
AN
179. The basis of the classification of scriptural B. Nirvikalpa
words according to Nyaya can be C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Origin of words D. None of these
B. Meaning of words 186. The immediate knowledge according to
CH
Mimamsa is known as
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Perceptual
D. None of these
B. Non-perceptual
180. The words which are given to the seers
through the God himself are known as C. Both of them
A. Vedic D. None of these
N
187. Knowledge of name, shape, quality etc is

B. Laukika
known as
YA
C. Both (A) and (B)

A. Nirvikalpa
D. None of these
B. Savikalpa
181. Words created by ordinary human beings
are known as C. Both (A) and (B)
RA
D. None of these
A. Vedic
188. Knowledge arising out of similar cogni-
B. Laukika tion or perception is known as
C. Both (A) and (B) A. Inference
NA
D. None of these B. Testimony

182. The nature of Vedic words can be de- C. Perception
scribed as
D. Comparison
A. True
189. The Pramana of Upmana in Indian philos-
B. False ophy has been accepted by
C. Doubtful A. Nyaya
D. None of these B. Vedanta
183. Prama literally means the experience C. Mimamsa
which is
D. All of these
178. C 179. C 180. A 181. B 182. A 183. A 184. C 185. C 186. A 187. B 188. D
189. D 190. B
190. The most important source of knowledge 196. The immediate knowledge of the non-
according to Mimamsa is existence of an object is known as
A. Inference A. Inference
B. Testimony B. Testimony
C. Perception C. Arthapatti
D. Comparison D. Anupalabdhi
197. Prama, according to Vedanta, is the knowl-
191. The Vedic statements, according to Mi-
edge which is
mamsa, can be classified as
M
A. Worldly
A. Vidhayaka
B. Other worldly
B. Siddhartha
C. Contradictory
C. Both (A) and (B)
RA
D. Uncontradictory
D. None of these
198. Pramanas, according to Vedanta, can be
192. Sentences pertaining to objective exis- classified as
tence are known as
A. Inference
A. Vidhayaka
B. Scriptures
B. Siddhartha
E C. Perception
C. Both (A) and (B) D. All of these
RE
D. None of these 199. The identity of the subject and object con-
193. Statements concerning the Mode of Per- sciousness adopting the form of external
formance of religious activity are known object is known as
as A. Inference
A. Vidhayaka B. Scriptures
SH
B. Siddhartha C. Perception
D. None of these 200. The relation of subject and object in per-
ception, according to Vedanta, is
194. “Achieve heaven through charity for a
whole month,” is a statement which can A. Identical
I
be classified as B. Different
JA
A. Atidesa C. Contradictory
B. Upadesaka D. None of these
C. Both (A) and (B) 201. The knowledge which results by the past
impressions based upon the awareness of
D. None of these concomitance is known as
195. The postulation of a fact by the impossi- A. Inference
bility of its opposite is known as
B. Scriptures
A. Inference
C. Perception
B. Arthapatti
D. All of these
C. Testimony 202. The most important pramana, according
D. Anupalabdhi to Advaita Vedanta, is
191. C 192. B 193. A 194. A 195. B 196. D 197. D 198. D 199. C 200. A 201. A
202. B
A. Inference A. Mmyativada
B. Scriptures B. Asatkhyativada
C. Perception C. Atmakhyativada
D. All of these D. Akhathakhyativada
203. While Nyaya admits as many as five stages 209. The imposition of an object upon another
ER
in the process of inference, Samkara has ad- due to illusion is known as
mitted
A. Akhyativada
A. 1
B. Asatkhyativada
B. 3
GD
C. Atmakhyativada
C. 5
D. Anyathakhyativada
D. 7
210. The imagination of quality in a thing
204. The best theory of Pramanas in Indian phi- which has been the subject of imposition of
losophy has been presented by
AN
the object having that quality leads to the
A. Advaita Vedanta error known as
B. Samkhya A. Akhyativada
C. Nyaya B. Asatkhyativada
CH
D. None of these C. Atmakhyativada
205. The most, important source of knowledge, D. Anyathakhyativada
according to Indian philosophy is
211. The imposition of some quality in a thing
A. Inference where it is not, is known as
B. Scriptures A. Avidya
N
C. Perception B. Akhyati
D. All of these
YA
C. Adhyasa
206. The imposition of some external objects D. None of these
upon the self, according to Samkara, means
212. The proper cause of adhyasa, according
A. Akyativada to Samkara, is
RA
B. Asatkhyativada A. Maya
C. Atmakhyativada B. Avidya
D. Anyathakhyativada C. Vyavahara
NA
207. The theory of error known as Atmakhya-

D. All of these
tivada in Indian philosophy has been pre-
sented by 213. The world, according to Samkara, is
A. Nyaya A. Real
B. Mimamsa B. Unreal
C. Samkhya C. Illusory
D. Advaita vedanta D. None of these
208. The theory of imposition of a mental con- 214. In Indian philosophy the theory of error
cept upon the external world is known as has been mostly utilised in the field of
203. B 204. C 205. D 206. C 207. D 208. D 209. A 210. B 211. C 212. D 213. B
214. D 215. B
A. Axiology A. Paroksha
B. Metaphysics B. Pratyaksha
C. Epistemology C. Both (A) and (B)
D. All of these D. None of these

221. Knowledge according to Nyaya, can be
215. Samkara has utilised the Adhyasa to ex- properly described as
plain
A. Prama
A. Nature of self
B. Aprarna
M
B. Nature of world
C. Both (A) and (B)
C. Nature of brahman D. None of these
D. Nature of liberation 222. Uncontradicted knowledge arising out of
RA
216. The proper nature of Adhyasa can be ex- the sense object contact is known as
plained as A. Inference
A. Ignorance B. Testimony
B. Knowledge C. Perception
C. Both (A) and (B) D. Comparison

E
223. The most important source of knowledge
D. None of these according to Nyaya philosophy is
217. The right knowledge, according to
RE
A. Inference
Samkara, is known as
B. Testimony
A. Maya
C. Perception
B. Vidya
D. Comparison
SH
C. Avidya 224. Anuma knowledge according to Nyaya is

D. Adhyasa A. Inference
218. The knowledge known as Pramana is B. Testimony
gained by C. Perception
A. Jiva D. Comparison
I
B. Soul 225. The proper means of anumana according

JA
to Nyaya is
C. Sense organs
A. Hetu
D. None of these
B. Paksha
219. The knowledge which the Jiva attains
C. Sadhya
without any help is known as
D. Perception
A. Paroksha
226. Liberation, as becoming a part of God, ac-
B. Pratyaksha cording to Ramanuja is known as
C. Both (A) and (B) A. Sayujya
D. None of these B. Samipya
220. The knowledge of a thing by means of C. Salokya
Hetu, according to Jain’s is known as D. Sanidhya
216. A 217. B 218. A 219. B 220. A 221. A 222. C 223. A 224. A 225. A 226. A
227. A
227. Liberation, as nearness to Ishwara accord- A. Aim of life

ing to Ramanuja is known as B. Object of effort
A. Samipya C. Something important
B. Salokya D. All of these
C. Sayujya 234. Value is accompanied with
ER
D. Sanidhya A. Beliefs
228. The important means for achievement or B. Sacrifices

liberation, according to Samkara, is C. Convictions
GD
A. Religious practices D. All of these
235. Value has been closely linked with inter-
B. Concentration on Om
est. This statement has been given by
C. Distinction of self and not-self
A. J.S. Mill
D. All of these B. J.B.Perry
AN
229. The main theories concerning the intrin- C. W. M. Urban
sic values are
D. J.S.Mackenzie
A. Objective theory 236. According to psychologists, value is pri-
B. Axiological subjectivists marily concerned with:
CH
C. Both (A) and (B) A. Needs
D. None of these B. Drives
230. The extrinsic values mainly include C. Sentiments

D. All of these
A. Things
N
237. According to ethicists, values are con-

B. Wealth cerned with
C. Property A. Morals
YA
D. All of these B. Reasons

231. Health can be classified as having the C. Purposes
value of D. All of these
RA
A. Intrinsic 238. Axiological judgement shows the charac-

teristics of
B. Extrinsic
A. Based upon judgment
C. Instrumental
B. Obligatory
NA
D. None of these
C. Inevitable
232. Beauty can be classified as having the
D. All of these
value of
239. The materialists define value as
A. Extrinsic
A. Mental
B. Ultimate
B. Material
C. Instrumental C. Spiritual
233. Value can be properly defined as 240. The spiritualists define value as
228. D 229. C 230. D 231. A 232. B 233. D 234. D 235. B 236. D 237. D 238. D
239. B 240. B
A. Mental 247. Liberation, according to Charvaka, can be

said to be
B. Spiritual
C. Material A. Foolish
D. None of these B. Possible

241. Values have been classified as C. Impossible
A. Intrinsic D. None of these
B. Extrinsic 248. Liberation, according to Jaina philosophy,
is
M
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Freedom of matter
D. None of these
242. Goodwill, according to Immanual Kant, is B. Freedom from Karma
RA
A. Intrinsic value C. Freedom from life and death
B. Extrinsic value D. All of these

C. Instrumental value 249. Liberation, according to Jaina philosophy
can be classified as
D. None of these
A. Dravya moksha
243. The ultimate good includes
E B. Bhava moksha
A. Intrinsic value
B. Extrinsic value C. Both (A) and (B)
RE
C. Instrumental value D. None of these
D. None of these 250. The state of Jivan mukti is included in
244. The ultimate human values are of the na- A. Dravya moksha
ture of
SH
B. Bhava moksha
A. Spiritual C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Physical
D. None of these
C. Intellectual 251. Liberation, according to Jaina, can be
D. None of these achieved by
I
245. Values can be classified as A. Detachment

JA
A. Permanent B. Self-control
B. Temporary C. Penance
D. None of these 252. Liberation, according to Buddha, means
246. The theory of liberation has been rejected
A. Freedom
in Indian philosophy by the school known
as B. Extinction
A. The Jaina C. Detachment
B. The Vedanta D. None of these
C. The Buddhists 253. Liberation in Buddhist philosophy is
known as
D. The Charvaka
241. C 242. A 243. A 244. A 245. C 246. D 247. D 248. D 249. C 250. B 251. D
252. B 253. C 254. A
A. Mukti 260. The cause of suffering, according to

B. Moksha Samkhya, philosophy is
C. Nirvana A. Fear
D. None of these B. Ignorance

254. The most important means for achieving C. Attachment
ER
Nirvana, according to Buddha, is D. None of these
A. Penance 261. Liberation, according to Samkhya, can be
B. Mortification attained by:
A. Penance
GD
C. Detachment
D. Eight-fold path B. Enjoyment
255. Nirvana in Buddhist texts has been de- C. Knowledge
scribed as D. None of these
A. Eternal health
AN
262. The self in Samkhya philosophy is known
B. State of peace as
C. Perfect freedom A. Purusa
D. All of these B. Atman
CH
256. Nirvana cannot be described as C. Jiva
A. Nihilism D. None of these
B. Eternalism 263. The chief characteristics of purusa in
Samkhya philosophy is
C. Both (A) and (B)
D. None of these A. Non-attached
N
257. The famous preaching of Nirvana to king B. Transcendent

Milinda were given by C. Ever liberated
YA
A. Nagasena D. All of these

B. Nagarjuna 264. The liberation by living, according to
C. Gautam Buddha Samkhya philosophy, can be termed as
RA
D. None of these A. Videhamukti

258. The important forms of Nirvana include B. Jivanmukti
A. Sopadhi sesa C. Both (A) and (B)
NA
B. Nirupadhi sesa D. None of these

C. Both (A) and (B) 265. Liberation after death, according to
Samkhya philosophy, can be termed as
D. None of these
259. The world as suffering has been postulated A. videhamukti
by B. jivanmukti
A. Jainas C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Samkhya D. None of these
C. Buddhism 266. The final state of liberation, according to
Samkhya philosophy, is
D. All of these
255. D 256. C 257. A 258. C 259. D 260. B 261. C 262. A 263. D 264. C 265. A
266. A
A. Videhamukti A. Moksha
B. Jivanmukti B. Nirvana
C. Both (A) and (B) C. Apavargh

267. Liberation and bondage, according to 273. To contribute to India’s national integra-
Samkhya philosophy, are of the nature of tion education should
A. Like dream A. Be of high quality

B. Be free and compulsory
M
B. Ultimate reality
C. Reach each and every child of the coun-
C. Practical reality
try
D. None of these
D. Make children familiar with all aspects
RA
268. The main objection against Samkhya con- of national life
cept of liberation is based upon 274. Indian education can promote national
A. Fallacies of evolution consciousness by
B. The Purusa as agent A. Establishing more and more all India in-
stitutions which will admit students from
C. No happiness in liberation different parts of the country
E
D. All of these B. Understanding and re-evaluating of In-
269. The best theory of liberation in Indian phi- dia’s cultural heritage
RE
losophy has been advanced by C. Breaking down regional and linguistic
A. The Jainas barriers
B. The Samkhya D. All of these

275. Who was the founder of Shanti Niketan?
SH
C. The Buddhists
A. Gandhi
D. Advaita Vedanta
B. Tagore
270. According to Advaita Vedanta, the nature
of liberation can be explained as C. Sri Aurobindo
A. Atman D. Vivekananda
I
276. Under whose leadership is founded the

B. Brahman
University at Pondicherry?
JA
C. Transcedental reality
A. Tagore
D. All of these B. Gandhi
271. Advaita Vedanta theory of liberation is C. Sri Aurobindo
based upon
D. Vivekananda
A. The Vedas
277. On whose philosophy is based the current
B. Brahmasutra primary education in India?
C. Bhagwadgita A. Tagore
D. The Upanishads B. Gandhi
272. The liberation in Advaita Vedanta is C. Sri Aurobindo
known as:
D. Vivekananda
267. C 268. D 269. D 270. D 271. B 272. A 273. D 274. D 275. B 276. C 277. B
278. D
278. Material and spiritual knowledge is al- D. Education for International understand-
ready present in man covered by a ‘curtain ing
of ignorance’-who said this? 284. Which of the following types represents
A. Plato Aurobindo’s contribution to education?
B. Tagore A. Basic education
C. Gandhi B. Integral Education
ER
D. Vivekananda C. Education for man making
279. Vivekananda included study of “religion, D. Education for international understand-

philosophy, Upnishadas and Puranas” to ing
GD
achieve 285. As an educationist, Gandhiji was
A. Propagation of Indian culture A. An Idealist
B. Spiritual development of the child B. A naturalist
C. Development of intellect of the child C. A Pragmatist
AN
D. Complete development of child’s per- D. Naturalist, an Idealist and a Pragmatist
sonality all together
280. Which of the following was not suggested 286. The ultimate aim of education, according
as a method of education by Vivekananda? to Gandhiji, was to help the individuals to
be
CH
A. Yoga
A. Gainfully employed in life
B. Meditation
B. Peaceful and happy in life
C. Guided readings
C. Able-to grow into a divine human being
D. Lecture-cum-discussion by realizing Godliness
281. Vivekananda’s philosophy of life was de- D. Able to acquire as much as possible
N
rived from from the ocean of knowledge

A. Plato’s Idealism 287. What did Gandhiji’s philosophy of educa-
YA
tion stress as aim of education?

B. Vedanta philosophy
A. A synthesis of individual and social
C. Sarakhya philosophy
aims
D. Buddhistic philosophy
B. Individual aims
RA
282. Which of the following types represents

M.K. Gandhi’s contribution to education? C. Cultural aims
D. Social aims
A. Basic Education
288. Rabindra Nath Tagore was a Naturalist
B. Integral education
NA
because he said about children that

C. Education for man making A. They should be educated for national
D. Education for international understand- integration
ing B. They should be made to develop into
283. Which of the following types represents complete human being
Vivekananda’s contribution to education? C. They should be acquainted with the ide-
A. Basic education als and values of national culture
B. Integral education D. They should be given full freedom to
live in natural environment and learn by
C. Education for man making
doing
279. C 280. C 281. B 282. A 283. C 284. B 285. D 286. C 287. A 288. D
289. Tagore was an Idealist because he empha- 294. Which of the following does not con-
sized tribute to India’s national integration?
A. Vocational education A. National language
B. Rigid control and discipline in schools B. National curriculum
C. Religious education in a formal manner C. National system of education
D. Moral and spiritual development of the D. Teaching history compulsorily in the
child school
290. In Democracy educational pattern is 295. Which of the following is not a national
objective to be achieved through education
M
planned after the interests of the many be-
cause in India?
A. There are always too many illiterates in A. Increasing productivity

a democracy B. Increasing children’s creative ability
RA
B. Democracy has tremendous faith in her C. Accelerating process of modernization
men and their powers D. Achieving social and national integra-
C. Democracy is the government of the tion
many, by the many and for the many 296. Development of which of the following is
D. The ultimate authority determining ed- not an aim of democratic education?
ucational policy in democracy is imminent
E A. Democratic citizenship
in man B. Vocational efficiency
291. Aims of education are determined by hu-
RE
C. Educational leadership
man being for the good of the
D. Scientific and technical education
A. Society
297. The Vedas teach us that creation is
B. Individual
A. Has a definite beginning and also an end
SH
C. Both (A) and (B)

B. Without beginning and without an end
D. None of these
C. Without beginning
292. India’s constitutional value of “equality
D. Without an end
of all” is founded on several assumptions.
Which of the following is not among these? 298. Who said, “Without caring for all that is
believed, reason it all out and having found
A. Claim of human dignity that it will do good to you and all believe it,
I
B. All men are alike by nature live upto it and help others to live upto it”?
JA
C. All men are created equal A. Vyas

D. All men have intrinsic worth B. Kapila
293. In India’s constitutional values equality C. Buddha
applied to education means D. Swami Vivekananda
A. To impart same kind of education to all 299. Which philosophy maintained “The soul
is divine, only held in the bondage of mat-
B. To impart education to all up to the same
ter”?
level
A. Sankhya
C. To have same kinds of institutions for
all in the society B. Vedanta
D. To equalize the external or material cir- C. Buddhism
cumstances of obtaining education D. All of these
289. D 290. A 291. C 292. B 293. D 294. D 295. B 296. D 297. B 298. C 299. B
300. What should be done so that the school is ‘behaviour”. By saying this Tagore is trying
to be the guardian of democracy? to emphasize following aims of education
A. The teachers should have faith in A. Social aims
democracy B. Individual aims
B. Democracy should, actually, be lived in C. Both Individual and social aims
the school
ER
D. Intellectual development aim
C. Lessons on the importance of democ- 305. Who said that the aim of education should
racy should be included in the text-books be to develop in children feelings of inter-
D. Eminent leaders should be invited to national brotherhood and attitude of inter-
national understanding?
GD
school to talk about democracy to teachers
and the students A. Dewey
301. As one of the Indian constitutional values, B. Rousseau
secularism means
C. R. N. Tagore
A. No respect for any religion
AN
D. Mahatma Gandhi
B. Abolition of all personal religious laws 306. Characteristics of Vivekananda’s philoso-
C. Control of religious activities by the gov- phy of education include
ernment A. Idealism
D. Equal respect for all religions and no B. Naturalism
CH
discrimination in any matter on the ground
C. Pragmatism
of religion
302. For strengthening democracy as a consti- D. Naturalism idealism and pragmatism all
tutional value through education, it is nec-
essary to ensure that 307. According to Vivekananda’s philosophy
of education, the prime aim of education is
N
A. People are competitive for progress

A. Social development of the child
B. People are religious and God-fearing
B. Mental development of the child
YA
C. All people have the freedom to live the

C. Physical development of the child
life they think is the best for them
D. Fullness of perfection already present
D. People learn large-hearted tolerance,
in the child
mutual give and take and appreciation of
RA
ways in which people differ from one an- 308. The intimacy between philosophy and re-
other ligion can be seen in the field of
303. “Child is more important than all kinds A. Values

of books”. This viewpoint of Tagore rep- B. Goal of life
NA
resents his faith in the following aims of

C. Aim of knowledge
education
D. All of these
A. Social aims
309. The influence of both philosophy and re-
B. Cultural aims ligion in the life of the human individual
C. Individual aims and society is
D. A synthesis of individual and social A. Favorable

aims B. Unfavourable
304. “Next to Nature the child should be C. Both (A) and (B)
brought into touch with the stream of social
D. None of these
300. B 301. D 302. D 303. C 304. A 305. C 306. D 307. D 308. D 309. C 310. B
310. Religion and philosophy meet in: 317. The most important trait of philosophy is
A. Mind A. Analysis
B. Spirit B. Criticism
C. Matter C. Synthesis
311. The important aspects of philosophical
318. Philosophy is a comprehensive synthetic
problems are
science, has been maintained by
A. Critical
M
A. Roy Wood Seller
B. Synthetic
B. Herbert Spencer
C. Both (A) and (B)
C. Joseph A. Leighton
D. None of these
RA
312. The philosophical attitude includes D. All of these
A. Doubt 319. What is correct about the nature of phi-

losophy in relation to science?
B. Wonder
A. Philosophy is science
C. Criticism
B. Philosophy is a normative science
D. All of these
E
313. The philosophical method includes, C. Philosophy is the science of science
A. Induction D. Philosophy is the mother of all sciences

RE
B. Dialectical
320. Literally the term philosophy means
C. Deduction
A. Criticism
D. All of these
SH
314. Philosophising requires the processes of B. A particular method
A. Analysis C. Love of knowledge

B. Criticism D. None of these
C. Synthesis 321. The meaning of the terms philosophy and
Darshan are
D. All of these
I
315. The true nature of philosophy can be ex- A. Dissimilar

JA
plained as B. Similar
A. Critical method C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Synthetic science
D. None of these
C. Comprehensive science
322. The philosopher is more concerned with
D. All of these
A. Induction
316. The important characteristics of philoso-
phy are B. Dialectics
A. Philosophical attitude C. Deduction
B. Philosophical method D. None of these
C. Philosophical conclusions 323. The contemporary trend in philosophical
method is
D. All of these
311. C 312. D 313. D 314. D 315. D 316. D 317. B 318. D 319. C 320. C 321. A
322. B 323. A
A. Analysis 330. The philosophical thinking in a philoso-

pher is
B. Dialectics
A. limited
C. Synthesis
B. Evolving
D. None of these
C. Permanent
324. Philosophical activity is concerned with
ER
D. None of these
A. Thinking
331. Philosophers are, “Those who are lovers
B. Criticising of the vision of truth.” This was said by
C. Synthesising A. Plato
GD
D. All of these B. Aristotle
325. Philosophical thinking is characterised by
C. Socrates
A. Philosophical effect D. William James
B. Philosophical results
AN
332. The most important difference between
C. Philosophical conclusion philosophy and science is
D. All of these A. Scope
326. The philosophical effect can be seen upon B. Method

CH
A. The culture C. Subject matter
B. The group life D. None of these

333. The goal of philosophy can be properly
C. The Philosopher
defined as
D. All of these
A. Philosophising
N
327. The chief differences among thinking be-

ings are B. Solution of problem
C. Achievement of success
YA
A. Physical
D. None of these
B. Biological
334. Which of the following is the contribution
C. Philosophical of Rousseau to education?
RA
D. None of these A. Education for Freedom

328. A bad philosophy can be substituted by
B. Education for Nationalism
A. Science
C. Education for Democracy
B. Religion
NA
D. Education for State control

C. Better philosophy 335. Which of the following represents fascist
D. None of these ideal of education?
329. The diversity of philosophical conclusions A. Education for Freedom
shows B. Education for Nationalism
A. Strength C. Education for Democracy
B. Weakness D. Education for State control
C. Both (A) and (B) 336. Which of the following represents ‘com-
munist ideal’ of education?
D. None of these
324. D 325. D 326. D 327. C 328. C 329. A 330. B 331. C 332. B 333. A 334. A
335. B 336. D
A. Education for Freedom 342. Who among the following propounded ex-
B. Education for Nationalism istentialism in education?
C. Education for Democracy A. Plato

D. Education for State control B. Sartre
337. Which of the following is ideal of educa- C. Rousseau
tion, according to idealism?
D. Bertrand Russell
A. Livelihood
B. Citizenship 343. Who among the following propounded so-
cialism in education?
M
C. Self Realisation
A. Stalin
D. Social Adjustment
338. Which of the following is the Naturalist B. Sartre
RA
ideal of education? C. Dewey
A. Livelihood
D. Russell
B. Social Adjustment
344. Who among the following made maxi-
C. Self Realisation mum impact on modern education?
D. Inculcation of democratic values
A. Stalin
339. Who among the following has pro-
E
pounded idealism in education? B. Sartre
A. Plato C. Dewey
RE
B. Russell D. Russell
C. Rousseau 345. Science can be properly defined as
D. John Dewey
A. A method
SH
340. Who among the following propounded

pragmatism in education? B. A subject matter
A. Plato C. A field of knowledge
B. Russell D. None of these
C. Rousseau 346. The distinctions between philosophy and
D. John Dewey science are
I

JA
A. Distinction in nature
naturalism in education?
B. Distinction in method
A. Plato
B. Rousseau C. Distinction in problems
C. John Dewey D. All of these

D. Bertrand Russell
337. C 338. B 339. A 340. D 341. B 342. B 343. D 344. C 345. A 346. D
ER
8. Educational sociology
GD
AN
CH
1. Application of principles of sociology to 4. Educational sociology is study of those
education is known as phases of sociology that are significance
for educative processes, specially the study
A. Educational sociology
of those point to valuable programmers of
B. Sociology of education learning & control of learning
N
C. Social science of education A. Carter

D. Social foundations of education B. Brown
YA
2. Schools are social institutions because they C. Ottoway

A. Are established by the society D. T.P. Munn
B. Suggest solutions to social problems 5. Which of the following is not correct about
RA
schools?
C. Suggest ways and means of social
progress A. They are powerful instruments of social
change
D. Preserve and instill in future genera-
tions the knowledge, ideas, and customs B. They are social agencies of cultural
NA
of our culture transmission
3. “Educational Sociology is the study of the C. They are potential agents of conflicts
interaction of the individual and his cul- and disintegration
tural environment.” This was stated by
D. They are necessarily affected by the so-
A. Carter cial and economic situations and changes
in our civilisation
B. Brown
6. Specialisation and further distinctions in
C. Skinner making a living within a given economy,
D. Ottoway within an industrial economy makes
1. B 2. A 3. D 4. D 5. C 6. D
106 Chapter 8. Educational sociology
A. A greater demand for better education A. Social

B. A demand for better man-machine facil- B. Political
ities C. Economic
C. Many kinds of pressures on the expan- D. Psychological
sion of education
11. The least important challenge to Indian ed-
D. A demand for specialized courses and ucation today is presented by the
training programmers such as management
A. Expanding population
training, etc.
7. The nature of the differences in socio- B. High cost of education
M
economic strata of the society such as the C. Poverty of the masses
wealthy, middle class and the poor is that it
D. Low return on education
A. Affects adversely the quality of educa- 12. Culture is
RA
tion
A. The sum total of feelings of the people
B. Affects negatively the morale of the of a group
teachers
B. The totality of the inter-relationships of
C. Vitiates the socio-emotional climate of the people of a group
the schools
C. The totality of mutual understandings
D. Runs quite frequently at cross purposes
E of the people of a group
in the demands they make on education
D. The characteristics and products of the
8. What is the result of the existence of dif-
RE
learned behaviour of a group of people
ferent socio-economic strata in the society
13. To which type of culture belong attitudes,
with various class interests?
religious beliefs, moral beliefs and eti-
A. Creating a lot of politics in the school quettes?
B. Causing a lot of indiscipline in the class- A. Material culture
SH
room B. Industrial culture

C. Generating a lack of responsibility in C. Intellectual culture
the teachers
D. Non-material culture
D. Setting up mutually incompatible ten-
14. Social classes and their sub-cultures are
sions in the educational programme
most interesting and most important to a
I
9. The least hindrance in the way of the op- student of education because
JA
timum development of child’s personality

is A. Students belong to different social
classes
A. Incompetent teachers
B. Schools may belong to different social
B. Free education for all and equal opportu- classes
nity
C. Teachers also come from different social
C. Limited economic surplus that could be classes
spent on education
D. Social classes differ from one another in
D. Mad scramble among various social many ways which are important for educa-
groups for getting as much of the goods tion
of education as possible 15. High degree of inter-dependence between
10. Educational Sociology deals with which as- education and the rest of the society is very
pect of education? much emphasised, not because of
7. D 8. D 9. B 10. A 11. C 12. D 13. D 14. D 15. A

A. Man’s social nature 20. What type of education the family imparts
to the child?
B. Social nature of education
A. Regular
C. Dramatic changes in the role of govern-
ment in educational matters B. Formal
D. Increasing number of students, requir- C. Informal
ing increasing financial support
ER
D. Deliberate
16. It is implied in the “Social nature” of edu- 21. Education provided to the child by the
cation that it schools is
A. Educates the child for citizenship A. Formal
GD
B. Ensures desirable socialisation of the B. Informal
child
C. Traditional
C. Enables the individual to find a job for
D. Highly standardized
himself
22. Value conflicts in the minds of school chil-
AN
D. Ensures the development of child’s po- dren are often created by
tentialities
A. Unruly students
17. Which of the following does not influence
the process of education? B. Maladjusted teachers
A. Social class structures C. Conflicting laws of the country

CH
B. Political organization of the society D. Conflicting value systems of the home
and the school
C. The upper middle class of the society 23. Resolving children’s conflicts caused by
D. The culture of the society and its social contradictory value systems of the home
institutions and the schools is
N
18. Which one of the following social institu- A. Easy

tions of India does not have a profound
B. Very easy
effect on education?
YA
C. Impossible
A. The family
D. Difficult but not impossible
B. The religion
24. Communities do not exert pressures on ed-
C. The government
RA
ucational systems in the following way

D. The business class organisation A. Through revolts
19. Which of the following statements is not B. Through agitations
true about the family?
C. Through legislation
NA
A. It is an essential agency for socializing

D. Debates and discussions
and rearing the child
25. Control of the Government over education
B. It is the only socially recognized rela- is unavoidable because
tionship for child bearing
A. The government is all powerful
C. It is the only important agency that in-
troduces the child to the culture of the so- B. The very term “govern” means control
ciety C. The government is empowered to exer-
D. It is the only institution of society which cise control by the people themselves
caters to the development of child’s person- D. Education costs money; and money can
ality be provided by the government only
16. B 17. C 18. D 19. D 20. C 21. A 22. D 23. D 24. A 25. D 26. A
26. Which of the following is not correct about 30. “Religion has an indispensable place in the
the role of government in schooling? good life and the good society.” This is not
A. It will be affected by neither of the fore- supported by the argument that religion
going conditions A. Alone can prevent wars in the world
B. It will swell if schooling affects larger and bring peace as a consequence
domains of the public interest and welfare B. Alone can make people more spiritual,
C. It will diminish if schooling affects more devoted, more loving and more per-
smaller domains of the public interest and fect
welfare C. Can teach values to the community
M
D. It will swell if the institutional arrange- which are essential for good life and good
ments in the society become more and more society
inter-dependent D. Can provide for common worship and
RA
27. As a social institution, the essential func- religious orientation to the universe as a
tion of the family is whole bringing unity and peace
A. Producing children 31. Religious education in some forms is essen-
tial because it
B. Increasing community’s population
A. Makes good life in a good society
C. Rearing of children during their imma-
turity B. Develops essential values in children
E
D. Imparting formal education at the initial C. Provides children with desirable knowl-
stages of life edge
RE
28. Which of the following is not a correct state- D. Is the foundation stone on which rests
ment about children’s education in the fam- the success of a democratic society
ily? 32. Which is incorrect about the school as a
A. The parents willy-nilly produce social institution?
A. It stands for the satisfaction of the needs
SH
B. Criminality is taught to children by their

parents of the pupils who come for schooling
C. The rearing of children by the family is B. It has to teach about the social order and
a form of education its institutions in its instructional activities
D. Parents inevitably modify the behaviour C. As it stands for the good life in general,
of their children in one direction or another it is the critic of society and all its institu-
I
tions
JA
29. Caring for the cultivation of emotional D. It stands for the professional ideals of
health of children is as important for the the community rather than the ideals it
schools as caring for the cultivation of their practices and tolerates
intellect, not because 33. Which of the following type of economy
A. The family is not competent enough to places higher value on education?
do that A. Industrial economy
B. Rearing of children in most families is B. Agricultural economy
defective
C. Commercial economy
C. There cannot be any other social insti-
tution which can be entrusted with this job D. Mixed economy
34. Earlier educational values were lower and
D. The family, being ignorant of the prin-
less wide-spread in an agrarian than in an
ciples of emotional health, can do nothing
industrial society. This was not because
about it.
27. C 28. B 29. C 30. A 31. B 32. D 33. A 34. B
A. The agrarian society would get little 38. Our social institutions are frequently in
time to take off to attend school conflict with one another. Which is not
the possible reason?
B. Education served no purpose for them
as they needed no knowledge A. They are established by people for meet-
C. The agrarian society was always in need ing their needs
of hard physical labour and long hours of B. They are so complex that they are only
ER
work instead of education partially understood by many people
D. The agrarian society needed no employ- C. People’s points of view with regard to
ment for their members outside agriculture their functioning or value may vary greatly
for which education is necessary
GD
D. Different individuals and groups with
35. Today agrarian society calls for consider-
different needs are associated with them
ably more schooling than formerly because
for quite different reasons
A. The farmers have become wiser now
39. The social institution that men create
B. Agriculture is now considered by farm- should be the best because
AN
ers more dignified a calling
A. Best institutions are liked by all in the
C. The farmers have greater interaction society
with the people in the cities who motivate
them to go to schools B. Poor institutions will make people still
poorer
CH
D. Agriculture has become a science which
together with its mechanization calls for C. Poor institutions are always ineffective
scientific knowledge and corrupt
36. It is industrial rather than other types of D. Poor schools, poor churches, weak and
economy which most enhances the regard indecisive government will have a negative
for education, because effect on the society which brings them into
N
A. Industrialization has led to the produc- being

tion of a huge wealth 40. A level in society made up of people similar
YA
B. The industrialists belong to the upper in certain respect is known as

class of the society A. Social class
C. Each country has had tremendous de- B. Social order
velopment of industry
RA
C. Social system
D. Modern industry has become extremely
technical, science-based, knowledge- D. Social hierarchy
based; and scientific and technical knowl- 41. Indian society can be divided into various
edge is gained only through education levels of people. Which of the following is
NA
37. A social institution is defined as not one of those?

A. An institution which serves the society A. Hindus
B. An institution established by the gov- B. Lower class
ernment
C. Middle class
C. An institution established for achieving
social purposes D. Upper class
D. The totality of relationships processes 42. If in a social set up people are working
and facilities which people develop to meet against others in order to obtain possession,
a specific social interest or need they are said to have
35. D 36. D 37. D 38. A 39. D 40. A 41. A 42. A

A. Conflict A. Apathy
B. Competition B. Distance
C. Cooperation C. Disorder
D. Accommodation D. Selection
43. The act of adopting oneself, and one’s be- 48. Out of the following four branches of psy-
haviour, to the conditions and requirement chology, with which sociology has got max-
of the community in which one lives is imum linkage?
called social
A. Child Psychology
M
A. dynamic
B. Social Psychology
B. behaviour
C. General Psychology
C. adaptation
RA
D. Industrial Psychology
D. adjustment
49. The maximum contribution to the process
44. Which of the following can serve as the of socialization, in general comes from
suitable example of the primary group?
A. Home
A. Family
B. School
B. School
E
C. Teacher
C. Church
D. Community
RE
D. Community
50. In which of the following respect, a group
45. Any collection of human beings who are and crowd differ from each other?
brought into social relationship with one
another, is called a/an A. Size
A. Office B. Intimacy
SH
B. Group C. Suggestibility
C. Family D. Organisation
D. Institution 51. Cooley’s “face-to-face” group refers to
46. “Group defined by a sex relationship, suf- A. A formal group
I
ficiently precise and enduring to provide

B. An in group
for the procreation and up-bringing of
JA
children”- this definition given by Maclver C. An out group

refers to
D. A primary group
A. Family 52. The role that an individual plays in the de-
B. Community velopment of social phenomenon is studied
by
C. Primary Group
A. Sociology
D. Nursery Schools
47. The difference between the social groups, B. Anthropology
in the degree of cultural development; or C. Social psychology
the degree of antipathy manifested by in-
D. Political sociology
dividuals belonging to one group towards
individuals belonging to the other 53. Which of the following is a norm?
43. C 44. A 45. B 46. A 47. A 48. B 49. A 50. D 51. A 52. A 53. D 54. B
A. I like to eat ice cream 59. The notion of in group and out group was
first used by
B. Honesty is the best policy
A. Mead
C. Eat ice cream with a spoon
B. Freud
D. Simple living and high thinking is a
great virtue C. Maclver
D. Sumner
ER
54. Which of the following does not describe a
norm? 60. The rewards and ensure conformity called
A. It describes a value held by society A. Laws

B. Sanctions
B. It is behaviour that is most often fol-
GD
lowed C. Deviations
C. It is based on one or more of society’s D. Ostracism
values 61. The essence of secondary group experience
is
D. It is society’s expectation for right and
AN
proper behaviour A. Casualness of contact
55. The concept of role involves B. Face-to-face contacts
A. Taking a role voluntarily C. Intimate relationships

D. Consciousness of kind
B. Being appointed to a role
CH
62. Which of the following is normative inte-
C. Thinking, reflecting and deciding gration in a group?
D. Performing rights and duties which de- A. Socialisation
rive from the function to be performed
B. Directing individual efforts
56. A group in which one has a “we feeling” is
C. Co-ordination of individual efforts
N
called a
D. Choosing good leaders for projects
A. Primary group
63. Which of the following is the best exam-
YA
B. Inherited group ple of what Cooley referred to as a quasi-

primary group?
C. Secondary group
A. A boy-scout-troupe
D. Nationality group
B. Columbia university
RA
57. An individual who tends to withdraw from

association with others is called C. A mother and her child
A. Hysterical D. A spontaneous play group

64. A child develops a self-concept when he is
B. Well socialised able to see himself as an object. He devel-
NA
C. Poorly socialised ops a concept of himself as he

D. Very suggestible A. Thinks as others do
58. The notion of the “I: me: Generalised other” B. Reflects on objects that are not present
was developed by C. Responds to the behaviour of his par-
A. Mead GH ents
D. Thinks about himself and his own be-
B. Morton Robert
haviour
C. Thomas William 65. Which of the following statements is not
D. Cooley Charles true about the members of a social group?
55. D 56. A 57. D 58. B 59. D 60. B 61. A 62. A 63. C 64. D 65. B
A. They are involved in close interaction D. The personal qualities which tend to
B. They are a casual collection of people emphasize how different people really are
71. When we try to explain the behaviour of
C. They are aware of shared memberships
an individual, we find that his social envi-
D. They have distinct relations with one ronment is
another
A. A sufficient total explanation
66. The process of acting in awareness of oth-
ers and adjusting responses to the way oth- B. A necessary but not sufficient total ex-
ers respond is called planation
C. Both a necessary and sufficient total ex-
M
A. Role awareness
planation
B. Social interaction
D. Neither a necessary nor sufficient expla-
C. Social awareness
nation
RA
D. Social organisation
72. Socialisation is a process of converting a
67. Which of the following is an example of an biological organism into
aggregate?
A. Social man
A. Air-line passengers
B. Modern man
B. Tax payers’ meeting
C. Human being
C. Individuals at meetings
E
D. Super human being
D. A Rotary Club gathering
73. The study of society is nothing but study
RE
68. Which of the following is inevitably in-
of
volved in the exercise of competent author-
ity in any social group? A. Laws
A. Superior skill B. Mores
B. Superior memory C. Folkways
SH
C. Superior knowledge D. Conventions

D. The right to exact obedience 74. The term “oral dependency” means
69. Which of the following characteristics is A. Unwritten promise
essential in a primary group?
B. Depending on words
A. It should have large membership
I
C. Depending on eating
B. Its members must be of the same age
JA
D. A stage of child’s dependency on

C. Its membership usually must be limited
mother
to one sex
75. A role conflict occurs when
D. Its members must have a high rate of
interaction with one another A. The role being played is questioned
70. Of the following, the definition of person- B. The ego occupies two conflicting roles
ality is most appropriate, according to the
C. The roles of two persons different with
text would be
each other
A. Qualities of a person
D. There is a mental conflict over the
B. Popularity with one’s peers choice from a set of roles
C. The sum total of observed or observable 76. George Simmel classified human aggre-
characteristics of an individual gates units
66. B 67. A 68. D 69. D 70. D 71. C 72. A 73. C 74. D 75. B 76. A
A. Groups A. Citizen of a state

B. Societies B. Member of a society
C. Institutions C. Member of a religion
D. Communities D. Member of an organisation
77. The preferential feeling which individual 83. Man’s behaviour in society is determined
ER
have for their own group is called mainly by two forces, namely
A. Egoism A. Physical and social
B. Primary B. Formal and informal

C. Natural and unnatural
GD
C. Fraternal
D. Ethnocentrism D. Psychological and philosophical
84. Identify a quasi-group among the follow-
78. A group of individuals having essentially
ing,
the same social status in a given society is
called a A. Mob
AN
A. Struggle B. Crowd
B. Social class C. Trade union
C. Social group D. Status groups
CH
D. Secondary group 85. An individual starts learning from
79. Which one of the following is not strictly A. Childhood

speaking, one of Freud’s stages of psycho B. Adulthood
sexual development?
C. Mother’s wom
A. Oral
D. Adolescence
N
B. Phallic 86. Suggestion is one of the basic principles of

C. Genital A. Class
YA
D. Oedipal B. Caste
80. A situation where a student is expected by C. Socialization
his parents to study his lessons and is ex-
D. Human behaviour
RA
pected by his room-mates to visit a movie-

house illustrates 87. One of the basic principles of socialing in-
dividuals is
A. Role conflict
A. Caste
B. Status conflict
B. Imitation
NA
C. Culture conflict
C. Religion
D. Primary-secondary group conflict
D. Education
81. Individual and society are considered as
88. When the child is able to judge the response
A. Contradictory of a group as a whole, he is responding to a
B. Supplementary A. “Significant other”
C. Complementary B. “Particular other”
D. Interdependent C. “Generalised other”
82. Human nature develops in man as a D. “Insignificant other”
77. D 78. B 79. D 80. A 81. D 82. B 83. B 84. A 85. C 86. C 87. B 88. C 89. B
89. Internalization means that the individual 95. “Birds of the same feather flock together”
refers to the idea of a socialising process
A. Conforms to group norms
known as
B. Has standards to judge his own be-
haviour A. Imitation
C. Has identity, social location, aspiration B. Sympathy

and values C. Suggestion
D. Has adopted the norms and values of D. Identification
the group and uses them
96. The price paid to the Muslim bride is called
M
90. The concept of the looking-glass self may
be summarised as follows A. Mehar
A. What ego thinks alter is B. Dowry

C. Bride Price
RA
B. What ego thinks ego is
C. What alter thinks ego is D. Compensation
D. What ego thinks, alter thinks, ego is 97. In early Hindu society, widow remarriage
was
91. The process which aims to destroy the op-
ponent is A. Protected
A. Conflict B. Permitted
E
B. Competition C. Promoted
RE
C. Co-operation D. Prohibited
D. Accommodation 98. The laws of Muslim marriage are based on
92. When a group of clans get merged together, A. Quran
then the resultant grouping is called
B. Muslim law
SH
A. Gotra
C. Indian contract act
B. Family
D. Constitution of India
C. Siblings
99. Mehar given by husband to the wife imme-
D. Lineage diately after marriage is known as
93. The preferences and aversions amongst the
A. Meharul Misl
I
various members of a group is shown by

B. Settled Dower
JA
A. Sociogram
C. Muwajjal Mehar
B. Social psychology
C. Interactional analysis D. Dower after dissolution of marriage
100. Dissolution of Muslim Marriage Act was
D. Sociological analysis
passed in the year
94. The technique of measurement of the pat-
terns of social behaviour in a group is A. 1919
known as B. 1939
A. Sociometry C. 1959
B. Sociogram D. 1979
C. Social distance scale 101. Identify the forms of marriage widely
D. Interactional, analysis prevalent in Tribal society
90. D 91. A 92. D 93. C 94. A 95. D 96. A 97. B 98. A 99. C 100. B 101. A
A. Probationary marriage A. It is a formal organisation

B. Gandharva marriage B. It may encompass several groups
C. Service marriage C. Its members have a sense of belonging
in it
D. Asura marriage
D. Its members can live a satisfying life
102. Some of the modern changes which have within it
ER
taken place in the Hindu Marriage are 107. Standard of living has maximum rela-
A. No provision for divorce tionship with one of the following factors.
Which is that?
B. Widow Remarriage permitted
A. People
GD
C. Marriage is held as compulsory
B. Culture
D. Two living wives permissible to a hus-
C. Population
band
D. Environment
103. The Special Marriage Act was passed in
108. Custom is an important
AN
the year
A. Social control
A. 1933
B. Social institution
B. 1942
C. Way of political behaviour
C. 1953
CH
D. Way of thinking of Marxists
D. 1965 109. Main function of economic structure is
104. In the traditional arsha type of marriage A. Production and distribution of goods
among Hindus and services
A. The father gives his daughter to a per- B. Maintenance of a sense of purpose
son as kanyadana
N
C. Socialisation of new population

B. The bride selects her partner in the as- D. Replacement of population
sembly of noble men
YA
110. Function of political structure is

C. The father gives his daughter in mar- A. System maintenance
riage after receiving money from the bride-
groom B. Replacement of population
C. Socialization of new population
RA
D. The father gives his daughter in mar-

riage after receiving a cow and a bull from D. Maintenance of a sense of purpose
the bridegroom 111. Main function of Religious structure is
105. Example of a community is a/an A. Production and distribution of goods
NA
and services
A. Caste
B. Maintenance of a sense of purpose
B. Prison
C. Socialization of new population
C. Village
D. Replacement of population
D. Orphanage 112. Function of educational structure is
106. A territorial community refers to an area A. System maintenance
that has a geographical location and which
B. Replacement of population
is a source for all the social and cultural
needs of its members. Which of the follow- C. Socialisation of new population
ing is not true of a territori D. Maintenance of a sense of purpose
102. B 103. C 104. A 105. C 106. A 107. B 108. A 109. D 110. B 111. B 112. C
113. The state is a National Institution, was 119. The fundamental unit of human society is
maintained by known as
A. Plato A. Family
B. Aristotle B. Individual
C. T.H. Green C. Tribal group
D. Herbert Spencer D. Social group

120. Human society differs from animal society
114. One of the most important functions of
because of
the state is to
M
A. Cultural heritage
A. Maintain the democratic process
B. Provision of nutriment
B. Maintain the spirit of Nationalism
C. Protection against injury
C. Provide means of recreation to the peo-
RA
ple D. Reproduction of new organism
121. An example of formal norm is
D. Maintain law and order in a complex
society A. Law
115. Almost all societies, at some stage or the B. Mores
other, of their development have passed C. Custom
through
E D. Tradition
A. Rural conditions 122. Characteristic of society is
RE
B. Political conditions A. Specific aims
C. Economic conditions B. Interrelations
D. Educational conditions C. Mutual awareness
116. Social equality is supported by D. Definite geographical area
SH
A. Marxism 123. In public opinion, there is no higher court

than that of the
B. Socialism
A. Laws
C. Capitalism
B. Mores
D. Domestic Institution
C. Customs
117. Which of the following is a dynamic or-
I
ganisation of purposive individuals? D. Folkways

JA
124. The members of the society share senti-

A. Society ments highly favourable to
B. Sociology A. Laws
C. Social relations B. Nation
D. Social behaviour C. Mores
118. The most important characteristic of a so- D. Government
ciety is 125. A society is a network of
A. Mutual influence A. Social attitude
B. Individual approach B. Religious-cultural attitudes
C. Inter-communication C. Socio-political relationships
D. Interpersonal relationship D. Inter-personal relationships
113. D 114. D 115. A 116. B 117. A 118. D 119. A 120. A 121. B 122. B 123. B
124. C 125. D
126. So thoroughly have norms become a part 132. All human beings have to interact with
of human mode of existence that they are the other human beings in order to
to a high degree
A. Gossip
A. Regulated
B. Survive
B. Specialised
C. Quarrel
C. Internalised
ER
D. Compete
D. Standardised
133. The understanding and analysis of any so-
127. The analysis of human society must cer- cial organisation like restaurant becomes
tainly be carried out on the level possible and relatively simple by knowing
GD
A. Cultural A. Norms and status
B. Biological B. Many people in it
C. Sociological C. Order of the society
D. Psychological
AN
D. Functional imperatives
128. The study of Human society involves the
134. The idea of society’s division as proletar-
study of
ian and bourgeoise is given by
A. Man
A. Marx
B. Mind
CH
B. Freud
C. Heredity
C. Gillin and Gillin
D. Environment
D. Park and Burgess
129. Norms are society’s expectations or rules
specifying appropriate and inappropriate 135. Society preserves our
behaviour. Which of the following is not a A. Civilization
N
norm?
B. Interrelation
A. Stop at a red light
YA
C. Philosophical ideas
B. Honesty is the best policy
D. Culture and transmits it to succeeding
C. Keep to the left on the road generation
D. Eat soup with a soup spoon 136. A school is a miniature
RA
130. Both nature and necessity compel man to

A. State
live in
B. Family
A. Forest
C. Society
B. Church
NA
C. Society D. Organisation
137. The most potent instrument of social de-
D. College
velopment is
131. What is the nature of man, according to
Aristotle? A. Law
A. Social B. Culture
B. Cultural C. Religion
C. Political D. Education
D. Religious 138. The educational institution is a
126. C 127. C 128. A 129. C 130. C 131. A 132. B 133. D 134. A 135. B 136. C
137. D 138. B
A. Family 145. Main distinguishing factors between rural

and urban societies in India is
B. Community
A. Familial differences
C. Organisation
B. Political differences
D. Social institution
C. Language differences
139. Which aim of education is most useful for
the community? D. Differences in the density of population
A. Cultural
146. The role of caste in village is
B. Livelihood
M
A. Insignificant
C. Socialization
B. Based on colour
D. Technological C. Very much significant
RA
140. Land Reforms have brought
D. Having less importance
A. Decrease in output 147. The role of religion in rural society
B. Fragmentation of land A. Is of greater importance even today
C. Drastic changes in urban areas B. Is responsible for family disorganisation
D. Advantages to the land lords to exploit C. Has its hold on the behaviour of the peo-
the tenants ple
E
141. Which Indian economy is based on village D. Has nothing to do with the rural admin-
economy? istration
RE
A. National 148. Zamindari system of village administra-
tion was first introduced byA
B. Agriculture
A. British
C. Household
B. Guptas
SH
D. International
C. Moghuls
142. Usually rural people’s behaviour is
D. Peshwas
A. Cultured 149. Panchayatraj system is based on the prin-
B. Aggressive ciple of
C. Very simple A. Administration through hereditary
I
rulers
D. Highly civilized
JA
B. Administration through Government of-

143. Rural society is
ficials
A. Literate
C. Democratic decentralisation of admin-
B. Big in size istration
C. Small in size D. Effective Central administration for the
improvement of villages
D. Densely populated
150. Characteristics of the urban industrial
144. What type of society is rural society?
family are
A. Primitive society A. Isolation
B. Complex society B. Great degree of equality in roles
C. Homogeneous society C. Separation of place of work and home
D. Heterogeneous society D. All of these
139. C 140. C 141. A 142. C 143. C 144. C 145. D 146. C 147. A 148. A 149. C
150. D 151. B
151. Modern urban industrial families are usu- 157. According to the Hindu Marriage Act of
ally based upon 1955, a wife can seek divorce if her husband
A. Conjugal relationships A. Is guilty of adultery
B. Paternalistic relationships B. Beats her occasionally
C. Maternalistic relationships C. Does not speak to her
ER
D. Non-conjugal relationships D. Is regularly away from home
152. Which one of the following does not dis- 158. In recent times, inter-caste marriages are
tinguish urban communities from rural increasing because of
ones?
A. Education and enlightenment
GD
A. Mobility
B. Force used by the government
B. Stratification
C. Arrangement of marriages by friends
C. Differentiation
D. Arrangement of marriages by elders
D. Population density
AN
159. According to the Hindu Marriage Act of
153. “Women must always be honoured and
1955, which of the following is a legal
respected by father, brother, husband and
ground for divorce?
brother-in-law who desire their welfare”
was a statement made by A. Insanity for more than three years
A. Tilak B. Frequent quarrels with the in-laws
CH
B. Manu C. Absence of husband at - regular inter-
vals
C. Vinoba Bhave
D. Misunderstanding between husband
D. Mahatma Gandhi
and wife
154. Hindu Marriage Act was passed in the
160. The law forbidding dowry is ineffective
N
year
because
A. 1951
A. It is not sufficiently clear
YA
B. 1953
B. It lowers the status of women
C. 1955
C. It cannot be easily enforced
D. 1957
D. It has not been enacted by the govern-
RA
155. The abolition of ‘Sati’ system was mainly

ment
due to the efforts of
161. According to Muslim law “khula” is the
A. M.G. Ranade
form of divorce which is
B. Mahatma Gandhi
A. Arranged by the friends
NA
C. Raja Ram Mohan Roy

B. Obtained from a court of law
D. Dayananda Saraswat
C. Granted by the religious heads
156. According to the Hindu Marriage Act.
1955, the minimum age of marriage for boys D. Any other
is 162. Hindu Woman in a joint family has
A. 12 years A. Lack of freedom
B. 18 years B. Complete freedom
C. 21 years C. More freedom than men
D. 25 years D. Greater freedom than Muslim woman
152. B 153. D 154. C 155. C 156. C 157. A 158. A 159. A 160. C 161. C 162. A
163. Every caste is limited to A. I.P.C. Section 331

A. State B. I.P.C. Section 337
B. Region C. I.P.C. Section 344
C. Village D. I.P.C. Section 350
D. Linguistic area 169. Of the following kinds of marriages,
which one is the result of mutual love and
164. Which of the following Acts has legalised
affection of bride and bridegroom?
divorce on certain grounds?
A. Arsha Marriage
M
A. S.I.T. Act of 1956
B. Brahma marriage
B. Hindu Marriage Act of 1955
C. Gandharva marriage
C. Abolition of dowry Act of 1966
RA
D. Prajapatya marriage
D. Protection of Civil Liberties Act of 1976
170. International women’s year was cele-
brated during the year
165. Which of the following sections of I.P.C.
makes a person liable for 2 years imprison- A. 1971
ment if he assaults or uses criminal force B. 1973
on a woman?
E C. 1975
A. I.P.C. Section 310
D. 1977
B. I.P.C. Section 325
RE
171. The rapid progress in women’s education
C. I.P.C. Section 354 took place
D. I.P.C. Section 375 A. During 15th century
166. Advisory committee on social and moral B. During last 25 years
SH
hygiene was set up in 1954 under the chair-

manship of C. During British regime
A. Rukminidevi Arundale D. After Muslim invasion
B. Dhanwanthi Rama Rao 172. The progress for education of women in

India was initiated by
C. Smt. Vijayalaxmi Pandit
A. Robert Clive
I
D. Smt. Rameshwari Nehru

JA
B. Lord Dalhousie
167. Suppression of Immoral Traffic in Women
and Girls Act was passed by Indian Parlia- C. Raj a Ram Mohan Roy
ment in the year D. Iswar Chandra Vidya Sagar
A. 1955 173. The difference between the pace of
B. 1956 progress of material and non-material cul-
ture in case of a developed material culture
C. 1957 is known as
D. 1958 A. Social lag
168. Sexual intercourse by a person with the B. Cultural lag
wife of another man amounts to offence of
adultery liable for punishment according C. Technological lag
to D. Social and cultural lag
163. D 164. B 165. C 166. A 167. B 168. D 169. C 170. C 171. B 172. D 173. B
174. National Policy on Eduction (1986) makes A. Caste

a recommendation (8.1) that “The existing B. Religions
schism between the formal system of edu-
cation and the country’s rich & varied cul- C. Educational system
tural tradition needs to be bridged” D. Social distance between different
A. There is great need for social change in classes
180. What is more crucial for bringing about a
ER
India
desired social change in India?
B. There is enough socio-cultural progress
in India A. Development of social resources
C. There is a social and cultural lag in In- B. Development of natural resources
GD
dian society C. Development of human resources
D. There is insufficient progress, of educa- D. Development of physical resources
tion in India 181. Who said, “Western education leads to
175. Among the scheduled castes of India, the modernisation of perspectives in tra-
AN
which is the main cause of social mobility? ditional, non- industrial societies”?
A. Education A. Alex Inkeles
B. Television B. Yogendra Singh
C. Migration C. Robert C. Williamson
CH
D. Political awakening D. Michael Armer and Robert Youtz
176. A social system invariably has a 182. “Education is the most powerful factor in
making men modern”. This was said by
A. Personality
A. M.S. Gore
B. Social structure
B. Alex Inkeles
N
C. Culture of its own

C. Robert C.Williamson
D. All of these
D. Margaret L. Cormack
YA
177. Sociology of education is

183. Which is the pattern of modernization
A. A study of the society through education?
B. A branch of educational technology A. Capitalist
RA
C. A science which studies primitive soci- B. Non-capitalist

eties C. Both (A) and (B)
D. An analysis of sociological process in- D. None of these
volved in the institutions of education
184. Indian education in future should fight as
NA
178. Social structure, culture and personality the first priority against
combined together to form
A. Ignorance
A. Tradition
B. Inequality of opportunities in education
B. The folkways
C. Degeneration of educational standards
C. An association
D. Dangers of communal and caste frag-
D. A social system mentation
179. Which is not a threat to the desired social 185. Which is the most important social factor
change in India pertaining to national unity that has adversely affected the examination
and social progress? reforms in India?
174. D 175. A 176. D 177. D 178. D 179. A 180. A 181. D 182. B 183. C 184. D
185. D
A. Inadequate classroom teaching C. Caste loyalties being encouraged by pri-

vate and public schools
B. Unwieldy nature of the examination
D. Rivalry among teachers being encoura-
C. Ineffective university administration
ged by teachers’ associations
D. Unethical behaviours of students and 191. Transformation of the educational system
teachers means
186. “Religious education” and “education
A. Revolutionising its curriculum
about religions” are
B. Changing the theory and practice of ed-
A. Two different concepts entirely. ucation
M
B. Little different from one each other C. Improving the socio-emotional climate
C. Not, at all, different from each other of the schools
D. Such a comparison between them is ir- D. Relating it to the life, needs and aspira-
RA
relevant tions of the people and making it an instru-
ment of needed social change
187. Cultural diffusion means
192. Educators must have a good understand-
A. An exogeneous source of change ing of the social forces because
B. Historically important source of change A. Education is a social process
C. Borrowing of the society’s culture by B. Educators are themselves social beings
E
another one
C. Education is influenced by the social
D. All of these forces
RE
188. Modernization as a process of social D. Education is one of the activities carried
change requires on in the social setting amidst social forces
A. Structural fusion
B. Increased structural differentiation 193. Religion is an institution because
SH
C. Decreased structural differentiation A. It teaches religion to people
D. None of these B. It performs an important social function
189. The realization of the aspirations of the C. It imparts moral and-spiritual education
people of India involves to people
A. Industrialization D. It performs functions which satisfy im-

I
portant specific needs of people

B. Economic growth
JA
194. Family is said to be a primary social insti-

C. Agricultural innovations tution because
D. Change in the knowledge, skills, inter- A. It is a basic social unit
ests and values of the people as a whole
B. All these above characteristics are found
through education
in it
190. One of the several features of Indian
C. There is high degree of face-to-face re-
educa-tion promoting divisive tendencies
lationship within this
and thwarting national integration is
D. A high degree of importance is attached
A. Rivalry among students being encoura-
to it by all societies of people
ged by students’ unions
195. Which is the most important factor which
B. Indifference to education being encour- seems to be acting to reduce class differ-
aged by unemployment ences in India?
186. B 187. D 188. B 189. D 190. D 191. C 192. C 193. C 194. C 195. B
A. Missionaries of social workers 201. Which is not characteristic of modernisa-

B. Rise in standard of living of the working tion?
class A. Mobility
C. Spread of information through mass- B. Empathy
media such as the T.V
C. Participation
D. Government’s legal and social welfare
ER
efforts on improving the lot of the weaker D. Religious faith
sections of the society
202. Which article of the Indian Constitu-
196. Indian government’s legislation concern- tion proclaims that “untouchability is abol-
ing educational opportunities for the ished”?
GD
weaker sections of the society is an evi-
dence which brings into focus the A. Article 15
A. Social nature of education B. Article 16
B. Cultural nature of education C. Article 17
AN
C. Political nature of education D. Article 18
D. Economic nature of education
203. What is not involved in leadership?
197. The schools help the people to
A. Understanding based on co-operation
A. Enjoy culture
CH
B. Ignore culture B. Maintenance of group norms and values
C. Assimilate culture C. The supremacy based on personality

cult
D. Protest against culture
198. Which is not relevant for achieving verti- D. The goal motivation and role achieve-
cal social mobility? ment
N
A. Wealth 204. Which among the following is the advan-

tage that does not come to the followers
B. Religion
YA
under a specific leadership?

C. Education
A. The goal achievement satisfaction
D. Family background
199. Which is the most correct statement? B. The difficulties that may result by the
RA
risk of failure
A. Modernisation is the outcome of social
change C. The advantage of getting an all round
leader and guide
B. Social change is the outcome of mod-
ernisation D. It saves the group from the difficulties
NA
C. Social change and modernisation mean of taking decisions

the same thing 205. Mark out the reason that made Jawaharlal
D. None of these is incorrect a great leader.
200. Modernisation implies mobility which A. His parentage
may be of any kind except
B. His personal qualities
A. Social mobility
C. His brahmanical heritage
B. Psychic mobility
C. Physical mobility D. His leadership of the Congress
D. Scientific mobility 206. In India, education is the responsibility of
196. C 197. C 198. B 199. A 200. C 201. B 202. C 203. C 204. A 205. B 206. C
207. A
A. State Government 213. In the absence of law, which of the fol-

B. Central Government lowing help in maintaining social order in
simple societies?
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Mores
D. None of these
B. Folkways
207. Which institution has maximum control
over education? C. Customary rules
A. State D. All of these
B. Family 214. Which of the following sanctions can be
applied for an offence by an individual in
M
C. Religion simple societies?
D. Economy A. Moral sanctions
208. The future of education in India depends
RA
B. Penal sanctions
on
C. Ritual sanctions
A. Family
B. Society D. All of these
215. In simple societies, deviations from an
C. Economy
appropriate day to day behaviour are cor-
D. Government rected by such social controls as
209. Who gives the system of education in In-
E
A. Gossip
dia?
B. Ridicule
RE
A. State
C. Mild Ostracism
B. Family
D. All of these
C. Society
216. Which of the following simple societies
D. Economy possess distinct political institutions?
SH
210. What is the status of political interference A. The Zulu

in education?
B. The Ba Nyankole
A. Society
C. The Ba Mangwato
B. Economy
D. All of these
C. Both (A) and (B)
217. The essential attributes of a state are
I
D. None of these
A. Population
JA
211. Political aim of education is

B. Sovereignty
A. Secularism
C. Government
B. Democracy
D. All of these
C. Cosmopolitanism
218. A state has a large population, but not suf-
D. Constitutionalism ficient territory. What among the following
212. On whose help are the educational insti- it cannot do?
tution depend maximum?
A. Destroy all the new-born
A. State
B. Raise multi storey buildings
B. Family
C. Let its people migrate to other countries
C. Society
D. Popularise check on the growing popu-
D. Community lation
208. D 209. A 210. C 211. B 212. A 213. D 214. D 215. D 216. D 217. D 218. A
219. A
219. In which of the following works, the 223. Christ said “Render unto Ceasar things
theory of Social Contract was first pro- that are Ceasar’s and unto God the things
pounded? that are God’s. Mark out the correct con-
clusion.
A. Leviathan
A. King is superior to God
B. Mahabharata
B. State is not of Divine origin
C. Social Contract
ER
C. One should be loyal to the King
D. Two Treatises of Civil Government
D. Church and the state are two different
220. Who, among the following thinkers, is not
institutions
associated with the theory of Social Con-
GD
tract? 224. Who was the propounder of the Patriar-
chal theory of the state?
A. Locke
A. Frazer
B. Hobbes
B. Jenkins
C. Kautilya
AN
C. McLennan
D. Rousseau
D. Sir Henry Maine
221. The state of nature is
225. The importance of the Patriarchal theory
A. Supremacy of might on right of the origin of State
CH
B. A state of equality for all men A. Is doubtful
C. Such a state did not exist historically B. Overlooks the other factors in the devel-
D. The state when Devas were troubled by opment of the state
Asurs C. Emphasizes the concept of command
222. Due to Social Contract, man and the obedience which is the basis of po-
N
litical obligation
A. Lost his freedom
D. Provides the simplest explanation of the
B. Gained his freedom origin of state which really is the product
YA
C. Became part of the whole of complex circumstances

D. State came into existence
RA
NA
220. C 221. C 222. D 223. D 224. D 225. D

JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
9. Principle of teaching
GD
AN
CH
1. According to ”Teaching is the task of 4. Teaching involves a tirade of elements
teacher which is performed for the devel- i.e
opment of a child. A. The teacher and pupil
A. T.F Green B. subject matter
B. Burton C. Both A and B
N
C. Brubacher D. None of the above

D. None of them 5. According to ”Teaching is an activity,a
YA
2. According to ”Teaching is a process unique professional rational human activ-

of establishing inter-personal relationships ity in which one creatively and imagina-
between the teacher and the taught In this tively uses himsell and his knowledge to
sense,teaching becomes a cooperative act. promote the learning and welfare of others”
RA
A. Both B and C A. Hugh and Duncan

B. Burton B. Hugh and Hyman
C. Brubacher C. Brubbacher Duncan
NA
D. N.L.Gage D. None of the Above

3. says, “Teaching involves a tirade of el- 6. Teaching is triangular or tripolar process
ements (the teacher the pupil,the subject involving.
matter)and this tirade is dynamic in qual- A. The teacher and pupil,subject matter
ity”.
B. The teacher and pupil,publisher
A. Hugh and Duncan
C. Both A and B
B. Burton D. None of the above
C. Brubacher 7. The goal of all teaching is a desirable
D. Hyman change in behaviour.
1. A 2. D 3. D 4. C 5. A 6. A 7. A
128 Chapter 9. Principle of teaching
A. behaviour A. Stimulating
B. syllabus B. A matter of drawing out
C. education C. Active process
D. N.L Gage D. All of above
8. Teaching 14. The relationship between teaching and
learning in view of achieving the objectives
A. Is a contact between a mature person is called
and immature one
A. Teaching methods
B. Is an interactive process provides infor-
M
mation B. Teaching strategy
C. All of the above C. Maxims of teaching
9. Teaching is D. All of above
RA
15. The term strategy has been borrowed from
A. causing to learn
B. a direction
A. Philosophical science
C. an encouragement
B. Natural science
D. All of the above
C. Military science (technology)
10. Transferring of knowledge from one place
E
D. All of above
to another is called
16. The ways of implementing a teaching strat-
RE
A. Presentation egy are called?
B. Learning A. Rules of teaching
C. Teaching B. Methods of teaching
D. All of above C. Maxims of teaching
SH
11. The rules for presenting difficult terms and D. Tactics of teaching
concepts to make them easy to comprehend
17. Types of instructional strategies on the ba-
in classroom teaching are called
sis of roles of teaching variable are?
A. General principles of teaching
A. Teacher Controlled Instructional (TCI)
B. Psychological of teaching
B. Learner Controlled Instructional (LCI)
I
C. Maxims of teaching C. Group Controlled Instructional (GCI)

JA
D. All of above D. All of above

12. Maxims of teaching are 18. A systematic procedure adopted for the
A. From simple to complex,From known attainment of some specific objectives is
to unknown From whole to part From con- called.
crete to abstract from direct to direct A. Strategy
B. From particular to general From analy- B. Maxim
sis to synthesis
C. Method
C. From empirical to rationale from psy-
D. All of above
chological to logical to follow the nature
19. A teaching method which i generally fol-
D. All of the above lowed in colleges and schools with big
13. Features of good teaching are classes is
8. C 9. D 10. C 11. C 12. D 13. D 14. B 15. C 16. D 17. D 18. C 19. C
A. Discussion Method A. Recitation method

B. Recitation Method B. Project method
C. Lecture Method C. Heuristic method
D. All of above D. Lecture method
20. Which method is an economical teaching 26. The best method for mentally retorted chil-
ER
method,as large subject content may be dren is
taught relatively in small duration? A. Project method
A. Project method B. Recitation method
B. Heuristic method
GD
C. Heuristic method
C. Lecture method D. Lecture method
D. Discussion method 27. Which is the method in which the discus-
21. This method gives more emphasis on sion is carried by a teaching assistant(TA)?
teacher presentation and has no place T
AN
forthe participation of the students? A. Recitation method
A. Project method B. Discussion method
B. Lecture method C. Heuristic method
CH
C. Heuristic method D. Lecture method
D. Discussion method 28. In Discussion method students gain
22. Teacher can employ his full verbal commu- A. Self-confidence
nication and competency in method? B. Cooperation is learned
A. Lecture mehod C. Respect for other
N
B. Project method D. All of above

C. Heuristic method 29. The activities that can be performed in the
YA
D. Discussion method Discussion method are ?
23. method ignores the individual differ- A. Holding debate

ences? B. Holding seminar
RA
A. Project method C. Holding a symposium

B. Lecture method D. All of above
C. Heuristic method 30. A method in which a small group assem-
bles to communicate with each other using
NA
D. Discussion method
speaking listening and nonverbal processes
24. The students remain passive in? in order to achieveinstructional objectives
A. Project method is called
B. Heuristic method A. Recitation method
C. Discussion method B. Project method
D. Lecture method C. Lecture method
25. Most powerful technique for imprinting D. Discussion method

material on the mind and moving to 31. The first phase or step in Discussion
longerterm memory is method is?
20. C 21. B 22. A 23. B 24. D 25. A 26. B 27. A 28. D 29. D 30. D 31. B
A. Phrasing the discussion question 38. In which type of discussion few people with
B. Choosing the discussion to topic different backgrounds and experience dis-
cuss a thing while others listen?
C. Discussion strategy
A. Panel discussion
D. All of above
B. The symposium
32. Second step in Discussion method is?
C. Socialized procedure
A. Choosing discussion topic
D. All of above
B. Phrasing discussion question
39. In which method of teaching students as-
C. Outlining the topic similate and integrate information they
M
D. All of above have initially acquired from reading or lec-
ture?
33. The third step in Discussion method is?
A. Lecture method
A. Outlining the topic
RA
B. Discussion method
B. Phrasing discussion question
C. Project method
C. Choosing discussion topic
D. Heuristic method
D. All of the above
40. In which method of teaching there are
34. The Fourth step in Discussion method is?
chances for deviation from the main topic
A. Choosing the topic ortheme?
E
B. Phrasing questions A. Lecture method
RE
C. Outlining the Topic B. Project method
D. Planning Discussion Strategy C. Discussion method
35. Constraints in Discussion method are? D. Heuristic method
A. Trade of time 41. Which is psychological and economical
method of teaching?
SH
B. Class sizes
A. Lecture method
C. Physical space
B. Demonstration method
D. All of above
36. Famous form and type of Discussion C. Recitation method
method is/are D. Discussion method
42. Armstrong is the exponent of strategy
I
A. The symposium
of teaching.
JA
B. The panel discussion Information group

discussion Formalized group discussion A. Lecture method
C. Institutional forms of socialized proce- B. Project method
dure C. Discussion method
D. All of above D. Heuristic method
37. in this type of discussion three or more per- 43. The term “heuristics”has been bor-
sons present their views on a severalside rowed from the word “Heurises”which
question or topic means ?
A. Panel discussion A. Discover
B. Socialized procedure B. Investigate
C. The Symposium C. Both A and B
D. All of above D. None of A and B
32. B 33. A 34. D 35. D 36. D 37. C 38. A 39. B 40. C 41. B 42. D 43. C
44. Heuristic Method is based upon the as- 50. The first and second steps in Project
sumption the learner should be told as little method of teaching are?
as possible and he should be encouraged to A. Provision of situation
learn himself as much as possible Whose
idea was the Heuristic Method of teaching? B. Selection of objectives
A. John Dewey C. Both A and B
ER
B. Rousseau D. None of above
51. The third and fourth steps in Project
C. Aristotle
method of teaching are?
D. Herbert Spencer
A. Planning
GD
45. Pollio and Dankar in 1945 mentioned
B. Execution
Heuristic Strategy in the article entitled.
C. Both A and B
A. Innovative methods
D. None of above
B. New method
52. The Fifth and Sixth steps in the Project
AN
C. Problem solving method o teaching are
D. All of above A. Evaluation
46. The limitations of Heuristic method B. Recording
A. Cannot be used for lower classes C. Both A and B
CH
B. May be Time consuming D. None of above
C. Can,t be employed on large classes 53. IN which method of teaching students get
first hand knowledge or experience in an
D. All of above
environment in which they perform certain
47. What is a problematic act carried to com- activity?
N
pletion in its natural setting?

A. Lecture method
A. Lecture method
B. Activity method
YA
B. Discussion method
C. Discussion method
C. Project method D. Project method
D. Recitation method 54. A manner of dealing with that ,which is
RA
48. is used to achieve cognitive and affec- problematic?

tive objectives? A. Lecture method
A. Recitation method B. The Problem Solving method
B. Project method C. Activity method
NA
C. Lecture method D. Discussion method

D. All of above 55. The problem solving method has steps?
49. The project method of teaching has A. 5
steps? B. 6
A. 4 C. 7
B. 5 D. 8
C. 6 56. The first and second steps in problem solv-
ing method are?
D. 7
44. D 45. C 46. D 47. C 48. B 49. C 50. C 51. B 52. C 53. B 54. B 55. B 56. C
A. Location A. A triangular process

B. Explanation B. A chain of activities
C. Both A and B C. Intimate contact
D. None of A and B D. All of above
57. The third and fourth steps in problem solv- 64. The method which is related to Discussion
ing method are? and recitation is
A. Collection of data A. Lecture method
B. Evaluation B. Drill method
M
C. Both A and B C. Project method
D. None of A and B D. Heuristic method
58. The Fifth and Sixth steps in problem solv-
RA
65. Question-answer strategy is known as?
ing method are?
A. Aristotle strategyb
A. Tentative solutions
B. Plato strategy
B. Verification of results
C. Socratic strategy
C. Both A and B
D. All of above
D. None of A and B
E
66. In method of teaching a teacher estab-
59. Problem solving method has steps?
lishes a chain of learning by linking pervi-
A. 3 ous knowledge with new knowledge?
RE
B. 2 A. Recitation method
C. 1 B. Lecture method
D. 4 C. Socratic strategy
SH
60. The types of problem solving method are? D. Project method

A. Inductive 67. Which are the main types of questions in
B. Deductive Socratic strategy?
C. Both A and B A. Introductory questions
D. None of A and B B. Developing questions

I
61. From particular to general? C. Recapitulatory questions

JA
A. Deductive D. All of above

B. Inductive 68. Which questions in Socratic method of
teaching are based on previous knowledge
C. Both A and B
which is related to new knowledge?
D. None of A and B
A. Introductory questions
62. From general to particular?
B. Recapitulatory questions
A. Inductive
C. Developing questions
B. Deductive
D. All of above
C. Both A and B
69. In Socratic method of teaching after intro-
D. None of A and B ductory question,the questions which are
63. The nature of teaching is asked?
57. C 58. C 59. B 60. C 61. B 62. B 63. B 64. B 65. C 66. C 67. D 68. A 69. C
A. Introductory questions A. Equality,Classification and blending

Participation Evaluation
B. Recapitulatory questions
B. Period of existence group size,emphasis
C. Developing questions
assignment
D. All of above
C. Capability Supervision Appreciation
70. These type of questions provide the situa-
D. All of above
ER
tions to practice the learned content?
76. Innovative methods of teaching are
A. Introductory questions
A. Micro teaching
B. Developing questions
B. Simulation method
GD
C. Recapitulatory questions
C. Programmed instruction
D. All of above
D. All of above
71. The last type of questions which are asked
in Socratic method at the end of teaching 77. The term “Micro Teaching”frist of all,was
are? coined by Dwight W.Allen and his cowork-
AN
ers at Stanford University U.S.A in the
A. Introductory questions year ?
B. Developing questions A. 1962
C. Recapitulatory questions B. 1961
CH
D. Evaluatory questions C. 1963
72. It is very difficult to prepare good ques- D. 1964
tions and arrange them in psychological
78. The maximum students Micro teaching
sequence in method
are?
A. Lecture method
A. 5 to 10
N
B. Recitations method
B. 10 to 15
C. Socratic method
C. 15 to 20
YA
D. Project method D. 20 to 24
73. Which method of teaching is based on the 79. Maximized time period in Micro teaching
principle that no students is particularly dif- is
ferent from any group or class of students?
RA
A. 5 to 10 minutes
A. Project method
B. 10 to 15 minutes
B. Group Differentiated method
C. 15 to 20 minutes
C. Recitation method
D. 20 to 25 minutes
NA
D. Drill method
80. Which are the limitations of Micro teach-
74. Which type of instruction yields both indi- ing?
vidual and collective benefits?
A. Costly,Lack of experts,Not real teaching
A. Project-method
B. It is training technique
B. Drill method
C. Integration of skills
C. Recitation method
D. All of above
D. Group Differentiated method 81. Which method refers to operation in which
75. What are the Principles of Group instruc- a real situations is represented in another
tion? from?
70. C 71. D 72. C 73. B 74. D 75. D 76. D 77. B 78. A 79. A 80. B 81. B
A. Project method 87. Duration of macro teaching is?

B. Simulation method A. 30 to 40 minutes
C. Heuristic method B. 40 to 50 minutes
D. Recitation method C. 45 to 55 minutes
82. Which are the Parameters of simulation? D. 55 to 60 minutes
A. Stylized simulation 88. Drama or role play is useful for teaching?
B. Games,Free drama A. Language
C. An lllustration B. Science
M
D. All of above C. Malts
83. method of teaching can be enjoyable D. History
realistic and helpful? 89. How many main types of teleconferencing
RA
A. Lecture method are?
B. Simulation method A. 2
C. Recitation method B. 3
D. Drill method C. 4
84. “Programmed(learning)is a sequence of D. 5
E
small steps of instructional material most 90. Which is not the types of teleconferencing?
of which requires a response to be made by A. Audio teleconferencing
RE
completing a blank space in asentence “this
definition of Programmed instructional was B. Video teleconferencing
coined by? C. T.V teleconferencing
A. Smith and Moore D. Computer teleconferencing
B. Susan 91. Which one is accountable in cooperative
SH
learning?
C. Leith
A. Individual
D. Michael J.Apter
B. Group
85. “in a team teaching method two or more
teachers make a plan of the subject orsub- C. Both A and B
jects cooperatively carry it out and always D. None of above
I
evaluate its effect on thestudents periodi-

92. Cooperative learning is an alternative to
JA
cally”this definition of an innovate method

of teaching was furthered by?
A. Competitive models
A. M.BNaik
B. Teaching models
B. J.Apter
C. Lesson plans
C. Caulo Olson
D. Micro teaching
D. Michael
93. The number of students in cooperative
86. Activity involves learning groups is?
A. Physical action A. 3-4
B. Mental action B. 4-5
C. Many action C. 5-6
D. Physical and mental action D. 6-7
82. D 83. B 84. C 85. A 86. D 87. A 88. D 89. B 90. C 91. C 92. A 93. A
94. The essential characteristics of cooperative 101. The most direct experience from the fol-
learning?3 lowing options is that of?
A. Effective learning A. Motion Picture
B. Cooperation B. Visual symbol
C. Positive interdependence C. Demonstration
ER
D. Division of labour D. Field trip
95. CAI stands for. 102. The Method based on the facts that the
A. Computer analyzed students learn association ,activity and co-
operation is known as?
B. Computer assisted instruction
GD
C. Computer assisted interview A. Demonstration
D. Computer analyzed interview B. Discussion

96. Which is vast in scope? C. Problem solving
A. Teaching tactic D. Project
AN
B. Teaching techniques 103. The ultimate focus of scientific method is
on?
C. Teaching strategy
A. Hypothesis
D. Teaching method
97. Students find or explore the information B. Observation
CH
themselves in? C. Experimentation
A. Lecture method D. Formulation of law
B. Both 104. The teaching method recommended for
C. Discovery method elementary school science in Pakistan is?
N
D. Drill method A. Lecture method

98. Micro teaching started in B. Demonstration method
YA
A. 1950 C. Project method

B. 1960 D. Inquiry method
C. 1970 105. Teaching Method based on Dewey,s phi-
losophy is?
RA
D. 1980
99. Microteaching focuses on the competency A. Lecture method
of? B. Demonstration method
A. Methods C. Inquiry method
NA
B. Skills
D. Project method
C. Contents 106. Which Teaching method,based on the as-
D. All of above sumption of Herbert Spencer stresses that
100. Which method is more suitable in teach- the learner should be told as little as possi-
ing of science? ble?
A. Project method A. Heuristic method
B. Demonstration method B. Demonstration method
C. Discussion method C. Discussion method
D. Lecture method D. Lecture method
94. C 95. B 96. C 97. C 98. B 99. B 100. A 101. D 102. D 103. D 104. D 105. D
106. A 107. A
107. The method based on the psychological A. 2

principle of”Trial and Error”is? B. 5
A. Heuristic method C. 3
B. Problem solving method D. 4
C. Project method 113. Principles of teaching comprise
D. Activity method A. Psychological
108. A student who performs independently at B. General principles of teaching

the level of psychomotor domain is? C. Both A and B
M
A. Articulation D. None of the above
114. General principles of teaching are enumer-
B. Manipulation
ated as
RA
C. Precision
A. Principle of aim Principle of activity
D. Imitation linking with actual life
109. “Teaching is the means whereby the ex- B. Knowledge of entering behaviour prin-
perienced members of the group guide the ciple of planning
immature and infant members in their ad- C. Principle of subject mastery principle
justment of life”This definition of teaching of pupil participation
method is defined by
E
D. All of above
A. B.O Smith 115. Classroom environment student motiva-
RE
B. Yoakam And Simpson tion,reinforcement and feedback are the
principles.
C. Morrison
A. Psychological
D. Clarke
B. General Principles
SH
110. defines teaching method as follows

C. Both A and B
“Activities that are designed and performed
to produce change in behaviour”. D. None of above
116. Psychological principles are
A. Simpson
A. Principle of feedback principle of rein-
B. Clarke
forcement principle of providing training
I
C. Morrison to senses the principle of utilizing group

dynamics
JA
D. B.O Smith
B. The principle of encouraging
111. “Teaching is the Stimulation guidance
self,learning the principle of fostering cre-
direction and encouragement of learning
ativity and self-expression
“this definition of teaching is attributed
to C. The principle of remedial teaching
A. Simpson D. All of the above

117. A permanent change in behaviour is
B. Burton called
C. Clarke A. Learning
D. Morrison B. Teaching
112. The Principles of teaching are of C. Presentation
types.
D. All of above
108. A 109. B 110. B 111. B 112. A 113. C 114. D 115. A 116. D 117. A 118. B
118. How many categories under which the training to senses. The principle of utilizing
principles of teaching are discussed? group dynamics. The principle of encourag-
ing self-learning The principle of fostering
A. One
creativity and self-expression The principle
B. Two of remedial teaching.
C. Three A. General
ER
D. Four B. Psychological
119. Effective teaching principles heads are
C. Both A and B
D. Neither A nor B
A. General principles
GD
123. Teaching method is a style of the presen-
B. Psychological principles
tation of content in
C. Both A and B
A. Home
B. Classroom
AN
120. The following principles belong to
principles of teaching. The principle of C. Play ground
for a lesson. The principle of planning
(Good teaching is always planned,planning
involved selection division and revision). 124. The term method covers both strate-
The principle of subject mastery. The prin- gies and tactics of and involves the
CH
ciple of pupil participation. The principle choice of what is to be taught and in which
of suggestiveness (Good teaching is sugges- order is to be presented”
tive rather than authoritative). The princi- A. Teaching
ple of repetition and exercise.
B. learning
A. General
N
C. Both A and B
B. Psychological
D. None of the Above
C. Both A and B
YA
125. Teaching activities and instructional pro-

cedure are performed by using of teach-
121. The following principles belong to ing.
principles of teaching. The principle
A. Maxims
RA
of liberating the learner. The principle of

looking ahead (Good teaching looks ahead B. Idioms
while it also takes into account the past
experiences of the children) The principle C. Proverbs
of linking with actual life. The principle D. None of the above
NA
of knowledge of entering behaviour. The

126. “Maxims of ”are the rules for making
principle of activity.
difficult terms and concepts easy to com-
A. General prehend in classroom teaching.
B. Psychological A. Teaching
C. Both A and B B. Learning
D. None of the above C. Publishing
122. The principles of teaching include the
following. The principle of feedback and D. None of the above
reinforcement. The principle of providing 127. A maxim of teaching
119. C 120. A 121. A 122. B 123. B 124. A 125. A 126. A

A. makes presentation of terms and con- C. May be

cepts easily understandable D. May not be
B. enables teacher to communicate accord- 132. Good Teaching is a means of adjust-
ing to mental level of the students ment. organization of learning. kindly as
C. is an important component of instruc- well as sympathetic. democratic. both diag-
tional procedure in presenting content in nostic and remedial. liberates the learner.
an effective way and helps in organizing A. No
teaching activities B. May be
D. contains All of the above C. Yes
M
128. Awareness of the Maxims of Teaching is D. May not be
essential for a in order to perform tasks
133. The teaching phases include
of teaching in an organized manner.
A. Pre active phase
RA
A. Learner
B. Interactive phase
B. Teacher
C. Post Active phase
C. Parents
D. All of the above
D. None of the above 134. The pre active phase of teaching includes
129. Are the following are important maxims all those activities which a teacher per-
of teaching? From simple to complex. From
E forms before classroom teaching or before
known to unknown. From part to whole. entering the classroom.
RE
A. No A. After
B. Yes B. Before
C. May be C. during
D. May not be D. None of the above

SH
135. Are the following activities included in

130. Do the following are maxims of teaching?
phase of teaching? Fixation. Deci-
From particular to general. From analysis
sion about the subject matter. Arrang-
to synthesis. From empirical to rationale.
ing/sequencing the elements of content for
From whole to part. From concrete to ab-
presentation. Determining the strategies
stract. From direct to indirect. From psy-
of teaching. Implementation of teaching
chological to logical.
strategies.
I
A. No A. Pre active
JA
B. Yes B. Interactive
C. May be C. Post Active
D. May not be D. All of the above
131. Are the following five of the salient fea- 136. The phase of teaching comprises all
tures of good teaching. Good teaching is those activities which a teacher starts right
well planned. Good teaching is stimulating. from entering the classroom till the presen-
Good teaching involves a skill in guiding. tation of the contents.
Good teaching is suggestive and coopera- A. Pre active
tive. Good teaching is correlative.
B. Interactive
A. No
C. Post Active
B. Yes
D. All of the above
127. D 128. B 129. B 130. B 131. B 132. C 133. D 134. B 135. A 136. B
137. Are the following activities included in A. Broudy

the interactive phase of teaching? Sizing B. Clarke
up of the class. Diagnosis of the learners.
Action and reaction or achievement. C. Burton
A. No D. None of the above

142. All teaching methods can be classified un-
B. May be
der the three heads i.e. Telling Method
ER
C. Yes Showing method and Doing Method.
D. May not A. No
138. Are the following activities considered the B. May be
GD
post active phase of teaching? Defining the
exact dimension of the changes caused by C. Yes
teaching. Selecting appropriate testing de- D. May not be
vices and techniques. Changing the strate- 143. Telling method of teaching includes.
gies in terms of evidence gathered.
A. Lecture
AN
A. No
B. Questioning
B. May be
C. Discussion
C. Yes
D. All of the above
D. May not be 144. Showing method of teaching includes.
CH
139. Is the Teaching strategy the means to
A. Lecture
achieve learning objectives?
B. Demonstration
A. No
C. Excursion
B. May be
D. Both B and C
C. Yes
N
145. Doing method of teaching does not in-

D. May not be clude.
140. “Teaching strategy is a generalized plan
YA
A. Lecture
for a lesson which includes structure de-
sired learner behaviour in terms of goals of B. Questioning
instruction and an outline of planned tac- C. Discussion
tics necessary to implement the strategy
RA
The lesson strategy is a part of a larger de- D. All of the above

velopment scheme of the curriculum”.Who 146. The origin of the word”strategy”is
rendered this definition? A. British
A. E.Stone B. Latin
NA
B. Broudy and S.Morris C. Greek

C. E.Stone and Morris D. French
D. None of the above 147. The word Strategy has its root in Greek
141. has stated “Method refers to the word “Strategos”Stratos means army and
formal structure of the sequence of acts agein mean to lead.
commonly denoted instruction The term A. No
“Method”covers both strategies and tactics
B. May be
of teaching and involves the choice of what
is to be taught and in which order is it to C. Yes
be presented” D. May not be
137. C 138. C 139. C 140. C 141. A 142. C 143. D 144. D 145. D 146. C 147. C
148. Planning in education is a carefully de- 153. Techniques.

vised plan to achieve a goal or the art of A. belong to methods
developing or carrying out such a plan.
B. are psychological in nature and tech-
A. Disagreed niques
B. May be C. are used for the implementation of
C. Agreed methods
D. May not be D. All of the above
149. The root of word Method is Latin 154. Which of the following the types of tech-
niques?
M
word,Methodos originally coming from
Greek, which means “Pursuit”from meta A. Questioning Discussion
“after” and hodos means “journey”.
B. Exposition
A. Finnish
RA
C. lllustration,Story telling Narration, Su-
B. Latin pervised study
C. Persian D. All of the above
D. Spanish 155. What are the two major teaching strate-
gies?
150. The meaning of the term Method include.
A. Direct Strategy
A. Way of doing or carrying something
E
out,especially according to a plan B. Indirect Strategy
C. Both A and B
RE
B. Orderliness orderly thought,action or
technique D. None of the above
choice the body of systematic techniques 156. The direct teaching strategy is.
used by a particular discipline
A. highly teacher-centered
C. All of the above
SH
B. among the least used

151. The word Tactic coming modern Latin
is rooted in word “Taktikos”which C. among the most commonly used
means “of arrangements from tak- D. Both A and B
tos”arranged”from tessein to”to arrange.
157. Indirect teaching strategy seeks a high
A. Finnish level of student involvement in.
A. observing
I
B. Greek
JA
C. Persian B. investigating drawing inferences from

data
D. Spanish
C. forming hypothesis
152. The term tactic.
D. All of the above
A. Literally means a method or a course
of action followed in order to achieve an 158. is an educational approach which is
immediate or shot-term aim characterized by teacher centeredness,it is
also known as art,science profession or
B. Arrangement of the course of actions study of teaching.
for realization of immediate or short term
aim A. Andragocical
C. Arrangement of the course of actions B. Pedagogical

for realization of a long term aim C. Both A and B
D. Both A and B D. Neither A nor B
148. C 149. B 150. C 151. B 152. D 153. D 154. D 155. C 156. B 157. D 158. B
159. contains learning strategies focused 164. In method only the teacher talks the
on teaching adults.It is often known as the students are passive listeners and they do
process of engaging adult learners in the not take any active part.
structure of the learning experiences.
A. Recitation Method
A. Andragocical B. Lecture Method
B. Pedagogical C. Discussion Method
ER
C. Both A and B D. None of the above
D. None of the above 165. is the most powerful technique for im-
160. Contributors to the theories of pedagogy printing material on the mind and moving
GD
include. to longer-term memory.
A. Recitation Method
A. Maria Montessori John Dewey
B. Lecture Method
B. Johann Heinrich Pestalozi Jean Piaget
C. Discussion method
AN
C. Friedrich Froeble ,Lev Vyogt-
sky,Benjamin Bloom D. None of the above
D. All of the above 166. The recall method or recitation method
improves memory and learning as it forces
161. Methods may be defined as. you.
CH
A. a systematic procedure for the attain- A. to decide what is most important in
ment of some specific objectives what you read
B. a haphazard way adopted for achieving B. to put the material in your own word
some objectives
C. to bring you to full alertness because it
C. Neither A nor B is a very active and demanding techmique
N
D. Both A and B D. All of the above

162. As regards improvement of teaching meth- 167. In discussion method of teaching a small
YA
ods. group assembles.

A. it has become inevitable as the tradi- A. to communicate with each other while
tional methods are not trustworthy in ful- using the available time
filling the objectives
RA
B. uses speaking listening and nonverbal

B. even the best curriculum and the most processes to achieve instructional objective
perfect syllabus remains ineffective C. where group members have reciprocal
C. there is no urgent need as every thing influence over one another
is going smoothly in education
NA
D. All of the above

D. Both A and B 168. Forms or types of discussion include.
163. is a teaching method which is gen- A. The symposium
erally followed in colleges and in schools
B. panel discussion
with big classes.
C. group discussion
A. Lecture Method
D. All of the above
B. Recitation Method
169. In type of discussion three or more
C. Discussion Method persons present their views on a several
sided question or topic.
159. B 160. D 161. A 162. D 163. A 164. B 165. A 166. D 167. D 168. D 169. B
A. Panel C. to develop tendency of investigation

B. Symposium D. All of the above
C. Neither A norB 175. Various expressions about the project
D. None of the above method of teaching include . It is problem-
atic act carried to completion in its natural
170. In a few people with different back-
setting (Kilpatrick). A project is a test of
grounds and experiences discuss a thing
real life that has been imported in school
while others listen.
(Ballard). It is voluntary undertaking which
A. Panel Discussion involves constructive efforts or thought and
M
B. Symposium eventuates into subjective result (Yhornos
Long). It is unit of activity in which pupils
C. rally
are made responsible for planning and pur-
D. None of the above posing(Parker).
RA
171. In Information group discussion the is A. No
the leader of the discussion activities Lead-
ership qualities are developed in the leader. B. Yes
A. Teacher C. Not Sure
B. Pupil D. None of the above
C. public 176. Activity method of teaching.
E
D. None of the above A. emphasizes the creative and sponta-
172. is a discussion leader with several neous aspects of experiences
RE
resource members who represent special
B. brings the students close to the real life
skills and specialized knowledge The leader
keeps the discussion on the track.At inter- C. to provide first hand experience in an
vals,he summarizes the discussion and clar- environment in which students are per-
ifies the discussion before the next point. forming certain activity
SH
A. Formalized group discussion D. All of the above

B. Symposium 177. Problem-solving method occurs.
C. Information group discussion A. in difficult situation
D. None of the above B. in which a solution is not obtainable by
I
173. In Demonstration Method. the habitual method of applying concepts

and principles derived from past experience
JA
A. the teacher really teaches

in very similar situations
B. the students are active participants in a
demonstration and their faculties of obser- C. inductive and deductive forms
vation and reasoning are properly exercised D. All of the above
C. the students are passive participants 178. Which teaching method is based on the
D. Both A and B principle “Truth is that which works”?
174. The Heuristic method is based upon the A. Lecture method
assumption of Herbert Spencer that.
B. Demonstration method
A. the learner should be told as little as
possible C. Recitation method
B. he should be encouraged to learn him- D. Discussion method
self as much as possible
170. A 171. B 172. A 173. D 174. D 175. B 176. D 177. D 178. B

ER
10. Psychological disorders
GD
AN
CH
1. Which of the following is an example of a A. Chronological age
Specific Learning Disability?
B. IQ
A. Mental Retardation
C. Schooling experience
B. Dyslexia
D. All of the above
C. ADHD
N
5. In learning disabilities the name for mathe-

D. Autistic spectrum disorders matical disorder is.
2. Which of the following is an example of an
YA
A. Dyspraxia
intellectual disability?
B. Dyslexia
A. Dyslexia
C. Dyscalculia
B. ADHD
RA
C. Mental Retardation D. Dysphasia

6. Which of the following may occur in Ex-
D. Autistic spectrum disorders
pressive Language Disorder?
3. An example of a Developmental Disorder
is. A. Limited amount of speech
NA
A. ADHD B. Difficulty in learning new words

B. Dyslexia C. Difficulty in finding the right word
C. Mental Retardation D. All of the above
D. Autistic spectrum disorders 7. Which of the following is NOT a physical
4. Reading Disorder is a developmental disor- cause often associated with Phonological
der and is characterised by reading achieve- disorder?
ment (e.g accuracy speed and comprehen- A. A hearing impairment
sion) being significantly below standards
expected for which of the following. B. Cleft palate
1. A 2. C 3. D 4. B 5. C 6. D 7. C
144 Chapter 10. Psychological disorders
C. Small frontal lobes A. Significantly below average intellectual

functioning
D. Cerebral palsy
B. Impairments adaptive functioning gen-
8. Which of the following is the percentage
erally
of pre-school children who are diagnosed
with a phonological disorder of unknown C. These deficits should be manifest before
origin? the age of 18-years
A. 4% D. All of the above
B. 5% 13. In DSM-IV-TR intellectual disabilities are
divided into a number of degrees of sever-
M
C. 6% ity depending primarily on the range of IQ
D. 3% score provided by the sufferer One of these
is Mild Mental Retardation corresponding
9. Stuttering is a disturbance in the normal to an IQ score between .
RA
fluency and time patterning of speech that
is inappropriate for the individual,s age It A. 60-65 to 80
involves which of the following? B. 40-55 to 60
A. Frequent repetitions or prolongations C. 50-55 to 70
of ounds
D. 70-75 to 90
B. Pauses within worlds 14. In DSM-IV TR intellectual disabilities
E
C. Filled or unfilled pauses in speech are divided into a number of degrees of
severity depending primarily on the range
RE
D. All of the above of IQ score provided by the sufferer One
10. Treatment of communication disorders nor- of these is Moderate Mental Retardation
mally the domain of speech therapists and represented by an IQ score between .
related disciplines, and a range of success- A. 60-65-to 70-75
ful treatment programmes and equipment
SH
are available for disabilities such as phono- B. 35-40 to 50-55

logical disorder and stuttering( Saltuk- C. 80-85 to 90-95
laroglu & Kalinowski ,2005 Law,Garrett &
D. 20-25 to 30-35
Nye, 2004).For example hand-held equip-
ment can provide which of the following? 15. In DSM-IV-TR intellectual disabilities are
divided into number of degrees of sever-
A. Significant auditory feedback (SAF) ity depending primarily on the range of
I
B. Magnified auditory feedback (MAF) IQ score provided by the sufferer One of

JA
these is Profound Mental Retardation rep-

C. Altered auditory feedback (AAF) resented by an IQ score below.
D. Actual auditory feedback (AAF) A. 20-25
11. Which of the following is a technique used B. 25-30
to address stuttering?
C. 15-20
A. Purposeful speech
D. 10-15
B. Practical speech 16. In the UK, the Special Education Needs &
C. Delayed speech Disability Act of 2001 extended the rights of
individuals with intellectual disabilities to
D. Prolonged speech be educated in mainstream schools schools
12. Which of the following criteria can be used are now required to draw up which of the
to define Intellectual disabilities? folloing in order to facilitate the inclusion
8. D 9. D 10. C 11. D 12. D 13. C 14. B 15. A 16. C

of pupils with intellectual disabilities and to A. Down Syndrome

make reasonable adjustments so that they
B. Fragile X syndrome
are not disadvantaged?
C. Cerebral palsy
A. Inclusion strategies
D. Cerebral Vascular accident
B. Facilitation strategies
22. Which of the following is a form of child
C. Accessibility strategies
ER
abuse that is known to cause intellectual
D. Availability strategies disability?
17. Individuals with Down Syndrome often A. Shaken baby syndrome
have moderate to severe intellectual im- B. Abused child syndrome
GD
pairment with a measurable IQ usually be-
tween. C. Battered baby syndrome
A. 45-50 D. Damaged infant syndrome

23. The quality of life of people with intellec-
B. 55-60
tual disabilities can be improved signifi-
AN
C. 35-55 cantly with the help of basic training pro-
D. 25-35 cedures that will equip them with range of
skills depending on their level of disabil-
18. Which of the following procedures can ity The application of learning theory to
be used to identify Down Syndrome pre- training in these areas is also known as.
CH
natally?
A. Applied cognitive approaches
A. Amniocentesis
B. Applied treatment analysis
B. Amnioprolaxis
C. Cognitive behavioural therapy
C. Amniophalaxi
D. Applied behaviour analysis
N
D. Amniocalesis
24. Inappropriate life-threatening or challeng-
19. Fragile X syndrome is associated with ing behaviours may be inadvertently main-
which of the following?
YA
tained by reinforcement from others in the

A. Language impairment environment Which of the following is a
process that can be carried out in order to
B. Behavioural problems help identify the factors maintaining the
behaviour?
RA
C. Moderate levels of intellectual disability

D. All of the above A. Functional analysis
20. Which of the following is an example of B. Statistical analysis
a pre-natal cause of intellectual disability C. Behavioural analysis
NA
when there is a significant period without

oxygen occurring during or immediately D. Procedural analysis
after delivery? 25. Many individuals with intellectual disabil-
ities are conscientious and valued work-
A. Anoxia
ers employed in which of the normal work
B. Pronoxia environments Individuals with more spe-
C. Anaphylaxia cific needs may need to pursue employment
within.
D. Dysnoxia
A. Sheltered accommodation
21. which of the following is the main neuro-
logical birth syndrome caused by anoxia? B. Special workshops
17. C 18. A 19. D 20. A 21. C 22. A 23. D 24. A 25. C

C. Sheltered workshops A. Any from of martial arts

D. Special accommodation B. A mechanism designed to reduce stress
nd conflict caused by specific experiences
26. Disorders which are characterised by se-
rious abnormalities in the developmental C. A method for negotiating a stage of de-
process fall under the heading of pervasive velopment
developmental disorders (PDD) and are usu- D. A mechanism designed to remove psy-
ally associated with impairment in several chological barriers
areas of development From early infancy
some children will exhibit a spectrum of de- 31. What is the Id?
M
velopmental impairments and delays that A. Part of the psyche that controls im-
include which of the following? pulses
A. Social and emotional disturbances B. Part of the psyche that reduces anxiety
RA
B. Intellectual disabilities C. A description of innate instinctual
needs
C. Language and communication deficits
D. Part of the psyche that controls our
D. All of the above
morals
27. Early manifestation of symptoms such as 32. What is an Ego defence mechanism?
severe impairment in social interaction and
A. Part of the Ego state that prevents ratio-
in communication can be diagnosed as
E
which of the following? nal thinking
B. Part of the unconscious that attempts to
RE
A. Infantile autism
control unacceptable Id influences
B. Infantile amnesia
C. Part of the Ego state designed to reduce
C. Cerebral palsy barriers
D. Rett,s syndrome D. Part of the Ego state that aids develop-
SH
28. In autistic spectrum disorder when as in- ment

dividual exhibits immediate imitation of 33. One of the concepts of the humanistic-
words or sound they have just heard this is existential approach is.
known as.
A. Rationalism
A. Echoastic disorder B. Transference
I
B. Phonological inhibition C. Deviation from the statistical norm

JA
C. Echolalia D. Unconditional positive regard

D. Grapheme dysfunction 34. An example of classical conditioning is.
29. When an individual with multiple cognitive A. Rat presses lever for delivery of food
disabilities has extraordinary proficiency in
B. Dog learns to salivate on hearing bell
one isolated skill,this is known as?
C. Pigeon pecks at key for food delivery
A. Rainman syndrome
D. Dogs learn helplessness from electric
B. Asperger ability
shocks
C. Intellectual isolation 35. Ope rant conditioning.
D. Savant syndrome A. Represents learning using autobio-
30. What is a defence mechanism? graphical memory
26. D 27. A 28. C 29. D 30. B 31. C 32. A 33. D 34. B 35. B 36. A
B. Represents learning of specific be- A. Flooding

haviour through reward and reinforcement
B. Token economies
C. Represents learning through pairing of C. Systematic desensitisation
stimulus and response
D. Aversion therapies
D. Represents learning through using
41. Which of the following in not an axis I dis-
repetitive stimuli
ER
order?
36. Which one of the following would a client- A. Schizotypical personality disorder
centred therapist use?
B. Anxiety disorders
A. Empathy
GD
C. Bipolar disorders
B. Desensitisation
D. Schizophrenia
C. Racket system 42. Which of the following is NOT a way of
D. Ego states defining psychopathology?
A. Deviation from the statistical norm
AN
37. The somatogenic hypothesis advocated
that causes of psychological disorders were B. Distress and impairment
found in.
C. Measuring IQ
A. Analysis of dreams D. Maladaptive behaviour
CH
B. Physical or biological impairments 43. Which of the following is a problem associ-
ated with DSM IV?
C. Traumatic life events
A. Classification is based on causes
D. Family dynamics
B. Classification based on symptoms alone
38. According to the psychoanalytic ap-
proach,an attempt to integrate values C. Classification is based on behaviour
N
learned from parents and society is called? D. Classification is based on strength of

A. The Id emotion
YA
44. Comorbidity explains the notion that.

B. Sublimation
A. People suffering with the same psy-
C. The Oral stage chopathology logy die at the same time
RA
D. The Superego B. Sufferers exhibit a chronic fear of death

39. Which of the following of Freud,s ideas is C. Depression always happens in the win-
still important to psychopathology today? ter
A. Those thoughts are the basis for be- D. Differentially defined disorders can co-
NA
haviour occur
B. Behaviour is learned from experience 45. Rather than occurring as discrete disorders
it is possible that psychopathology may rep-
C. Psychopathology has origins in early ex- resent symptoms of.
perience rather than being a manifestation
A. Paranormal disorders
of biological dysfunction
B. Diurnal disorders
D. Dream analysis
C. Cyclic disorders
40. Which of the following is not a treatment
developed from classical conditioning prin- D. Hybrid disorders
ciples? 46. A GAF score of 21-30 may indicate.
37. B 38. D 39. C 40. B 41. A 42. C 43. B 44. D 45. D 46. D
A. Difficulty concentrating after family ar- A. Witchcraft

gument B. General paresis
B. Severe obsessional rituals C. The plague
C. Frequent shoplifting D. Social class
D. Acts grossly inappropriately 53. Which of the following is an example of
repression?
47. Which of the following is NOT addressed
by the medical model? A. Stopping yourself from behaving the
way you want to
A. Biochemical imbalances
M
B. Suppressing bad memories or current
B. Genetic disorders though that cause anxiety
C. Abnormal physical development C. Suppressing your natural instincts
RA
D. Biased information processing D. Stopping others from behaving inappro-
priately
48. Sigmund Freud was the pioneer of which of
the following models of psychopathology? 54. Which one of the models of psychopathol-
ogy would suggest that psychological dis-
A. Behaviourist orders result from acquiring dysfunctional
B. Cognitive result from acquiring dysfunctional ways
of thinking and acting?
E
C. Psychodynamic
A. Medical model
D. Humanistic B. Cognitive model
RE
49. The acquisition of dog phobia can best be C. Behavioural model
explained by the.
D. Client-centred model
A. Behavioural model 55. Psychoanalysis is an attempt to explain
B. Psychodynamic model what?
SH
C. Humanistic model A. Normal psychological functioning
D. Medical model B. Normal and abnormal psychological

functioning
50. Which of the following is not used to define
psychopathology? C. Abnormal psychological functioning
D. Childhood ideation
I
A. Deviation from the statistical norm

56. Behaviour modification is an example of
JA
B. Deviation from the sexual norm which of the following treatment methods.
C. Deviation from the social norm A. Enable the individual to unlearn mal-
adaptive behaviours and emotions
D. Maladaptive behaviour
B. Enable the individual to explore their
51. An example of a hybrid disorder is.
childhood behaviours
A. Mixed anxiety-depressive disorder C. Enable the individual to analyse the be-
B. Schizoidal personality disorder haviour of others
C. Multiple personality disorder D. Enable the individual to modify the be-

haviour of others
D. Borderline personality disorder
57. Psychological disorders were only added to
52. Which of the following were historical ex- the International List of Causes of Death
planations of psychopathology? (ICD) in 1939.This was done by.
47. D 48. C 49. A 50. B 51. A 52. B 53. B 54. B 55. B 56. A 57. B
A. The American Psychiatric Association B. Service user groups

(APA)
C. Clients
B. The World Health Organisation (WHO)
D. Thinktanks
C. The National Health Service (NHS)
59. Which of the following is an organisation
D. The Ministry of Health (MOH) dedicated to changing the way in which
58. Individuals with mental health problems society views people with mental health
ER
have become increasingly vocal about how problems?
psychopathology and those who suffer
from it are labelled and perceived by others A. Madness matters
Groups of individuals who are and users of B. Pro-mental
GD
the mental health services provided by for
example government agencies such as the C. Mad pride
NHS are known as. D. Mental health proud
A. Pateints
AN
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
58. B 59. C
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
11. Secondary education
GD
AN
CH
1. The Secondary Education is needed to be A. 3
given individual and importance.
B. 4
A. Elementary C. 2
B. High D. 6
N
C. Special 5. For the country,s solidarity,it is very impor-

D. Secondary tant to generate in students.
YA
2. The Secondary Education Should be ac- A. Patriotism

countable to the complete progress and to B. Responsibility
a student,s personality.
C. Need for education
A. Develop
RA
D. Awareness
B. Refine
6. The Secondary Education should enable a
C. Deteriorate person to get knowledge of scientific
D. Degenerate and inventions.
NA
3. For which class of people secondary A. Creations

schools are recommended to be con- B. Developments
structed?
C. Discoveries
A. Middle Class
D. Conventions
B. Higher Class 7. One of the objectives of the Secondary Ed-
C. Upper Class ucation is to encourage the individuals to
struggle for the social of the country.
D. Lower Class
A. Training
4. How many branches of high schools for
upper classes should be there? B. Development
1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. C 7. B
152 Chapter 11. Secondary education
C. Expansion A. Occupation
D. None of these B. Higher studies
8. The students of the Secondary Education C. University
should have a sense of co operation
self-control and hard work. D. Syllabus
14. English should not be taught as Literature
A. Integrity
but as language.
B. Responsibility
A. Elective
C. Accountability
B. Compulsory
M
D. Worthiness
C. Subjective
9. The Secondary Education lies under the
category of. D. Practical
15. In exams 75% marks should be allotted to
RA
A. 16th to 8th class
and remaining 25% Should be given ac-
B. 11th to 12th class cording to the performance and punctuality
C. 9th to 10th class at school.
D. 9th to 12th class A. Respective institute
10. How much the duration of the Secondary B. Students
Education is recommended?
E C. Board and University
A. 6 years
D. Syllabus studies
B. 2 years
RE
16. From grade religious studies must be
C. 4 years Compulsory but later it should be consid-
D. 3 years ered as an Elective subject.
11. Until and unless the primary education is A. 6th to 9th
not extended to 8th class,the Secondary
SH
B. 6th to 8th
Education has to be divided into two
classes,namely. C. 6th to 12th
A. Secondary and Higher Secondary Edu- D. 1st to 5th
cation 17. It is compulasory to work for 225 days per
B. Elementary and Secondary Education an academic year that is hours.
I
C. Primary and Secondary Education A. 1610

JA
D. Elementary and Higher Secondary Edu- B. 1500

cation C. 1620
12. The syllabus of Secondary Education must
D. 1600
consist of and Elective subjects.
18. *Emergency leave of teacher must be *less-
A. Selective
ened from 20 to
B. Optional
A. 5
C. Compulsory
B. 10
D. Elementary
C. 15
13. Elective subjects must be divided in fur-
ther groups so students can select the sub- D. 12
jects of their choice that can enable them 19. Teachers who give good performance must
to adopt accordingly. be awarded with medals by
8. A 9. D 10. C 11. A 12. C 13. A 14. D 15. C 16. B 17. D 18. A 19. A
A. President and Governor A. Academic

B. Institute B. Elementary
C. Principal C. Pre-Academic
D. Prime Minster D. Primary
20. must be taught Agricultural Economics 26. The of all private schools must be con-
ER
and arts. sidered obligatory.
A. Boys A. Registration
B. All students B. Advancement
GD
C. Girls C. Support
D. Adults D. Promotion
21. For the guidance of teachers they should 27. The income of school must be acquired
take by and by that would introduce from three resources-Fee Management,s
Governments,funds with proportion of
AN
new teaching methodologies to them.
A. Teaching Courses A. 60:20%
B. Educational Courses B. 60:30%
C. Refresher Courses C. 80:20

CH
D. 60:10
D. Advanced Vocational Courses
28. How many grant the Government should
22. Teachers teaching 6th to 10th grade stu-
give to the institutes consisting on building
dents,are liable to work for days a year.
and staff?
A. 325
A. 30%
N
B. 225
B. 40%
C. 215
C. 20%
YA
D. 210 D. 150
23. On how many weeks,an academic year 29. Government should make responsible
must be consisting? to allot land for schools.
RA
A. 35 A. Provincial Authority
B. 42 B. Divisional Authority
C. 40 C. Secondary Educational Board
D. 43
NA
D. Developmental Authority
24. 9th to 12th grades must be under the con- 30. Schools established on basis,must be
trol of registered.
A. Secondary Educational Board A. Commercial
B. Higher Educational Board B. Economical
C. Primary Board C. Mercantile
D. Elementary Educational Board D. Educational
25. In every Division there must be Public 31. The Education should make students take
schools along with schools. interest in literature,culture and
20. C 21. C 22. B 23. C 24. A 25. C 26. A 27. A 28. C 29. D 30. A 31. A
154 Chapter 11. Secondary education
A. Sports C. Life
B. Studies D. None of these
C. Arts 33. Children must be given educa-

tion,according to the
D. Traditions
A. Islamic Standards
32. Being a citizen,a student must be prepared
B. Secondary Educational Board
for the needs of life.
C. Traditions
A. Jobs
D. Customs
M
B. Education
RA
E
RE
I SH
JA
32. C 33. A
ER
12. Environmental studies
GD
AN
CH
1. The human activity, among the following, C. Raise consciousness about environmen-
which causes maximum environmental pol- tal conditions
lution having regional and global impact, D. All of the above
is
4. An ecosystem consists of
A. Industrialization
A. Population
N
B. Urbanization
B. A biotic community
C. Agriculture
C. A population and its non-living ele-
YA
D. Mining ments
2. The science that deals with the relationship
D. A biotic ecommunity and its non-living
of various organisms with their environ-
elements
ment is known as
RA
5. The perfect equilibrium existing in the bio-

A. anthropology sphere between the various organisms is
B. economics known as
C. ecology A. Ecological cycle
NA
D. geology B. Ecological balance

3. Objective of environmental studies is to C. Environmental balance
A. Create environmental ethics that foster D. None of these
awareness about the ecological inter - de- 6. A simple detritus food chain starts with
pendence of economic, social and political
factors in a human community and the en- A. green plant
vironment B. wastes of organisms and dead organ-
B. Acquiring skills to help the concerned isms
individuals in identifying and solving envi- C. both of the above
ronmental problems
D. none of these
1. A 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. B 6. A
156 Chapter 12. Environmental studies
7. In a food chain humans are 14. Eutrophication means :

A. Producers A. Water purification
B. Primary consumers B. Neutralization of waste water
C. Secondary consumers C. Waste water Treatment process
D. Primary and secondary consumers D. Enrichment of plant nutrients in water
8. Facultative Bacteria exisiing in which type bodies
of Environmental condition? 15. An ecosystem is a region in which
A. Presence of oxygen A. Dead organism interact with their envi-
M
B. Absence of oxygen ronment
C. Both (A) and (B) B. Living organism interact with their en-
vironment
D. None of these
RA
9. Word “Environment” is derived from : C. Living organism do not interact with
their environment
A. Italy
D. All of the above
B. French
16. The term ecosystem was first proposed by
C. German
A. Costanza
D. English
E
B. Tyler Miller
10. Organisms who directly feed on producers
are called : C. A.G. Tansley
RE
A. Herbivores D. Jacob Van Verkul
B. Omnivores 17. The two major components of ecosystem
are
C. Carnivores
A. Abiotic and biotic
SH
D. Decomposers
11. Largest reservoir of Nitrogen is exists in : B. Cyclic and biologic
A. Atmosphere C. Adiabatic and isotropic
B. Stratosphere. D. Ecologic and climatologic

18. Biotic components include
C. Hydrosphere
A. All living organisms
I
D. Lithosphere
JA
12. ’World Environmental Day’ is celebrated B. Light, temperature etc

every year on: C. Water, mineral and gases
A. 5th May D. Self-nourishing green plants
B. 5th June 19. The sequence of eating and being eaten in
C. 5th July an ecosystem is called
D. 18th July A. food chain
13. ’Earth’s Day’ is celebrated every year on: B. carbon cycle
A. Oct 26th C. sulphur cycle
B. April 22nd D. hydrological cycle
C. June 5th 20. An animal that feeds upon another animal
is
D. Dec 23rd
7. D 8. C 9. B 10. A 11. A 12. B 13. B 14. D 15. B 16. C 17. A 18. A 19. A
20. B
A. producer A. Atmosphere and lithosphere

B. consumer B. Atmosphere and hydrosphere
C. decomposer C. Lithosphere and thermosphere
D. predator D. Hydrosphere and lithosphere
21. Which part of plant contains nitrogen fix- 27. A food web consists of
ER
ing bacteria? A. A portion of food chain
A. Roots B. A set of similar consumers
B. Stems C. Interlocking of food chains
GD
C. Leaves D. Producers, consumers and decomposers
D. All the above
22. Green revolution is 28. Tendency of pollutants to become concen-
trated in successive tropic levels is known
AN
A. Crop variety improvement as
B. Judicious use of fertilizers A. Biopiracy
C. Expansion of irrigation B. Biorhythm
D. All the above C. Bioremediation
CH
23. Organic farming is D. Biomagnification
A. enhancing biodiversity 29. The Government of India adopted the Na-
tional Housing and habitat policy in
B. promoting soil biological activity
A. 1995
C. farming without using pesticides and
N
chemical fertilizers B. 1996

D. all the above C. 1997
YA
24. Percentage of nitrogen in earth’s atmo- D. 1998

sphere is 30. Social security is one of the most important
A. 12% programmes providing benefits to
RA
B. 21% A. Un-employee
C. 78% B. Worker/employee
D. 98% C. Families of deceased
25. The major objective of the family welfare D. All of the above
NA
programs in India is 31. Which atmospheric layer is closest to the

A. Disease control Earth’s surface?
B. Employment generation A. Troposphere
C. Population growth rate control B. Thermosphere

C. Stratosphere
D. None of these
26. Which of the following components of the D. Mesosphere
environment are effective transporters of 32. Earth’s body temperature is approximately
matter? equal to
21. A 22. D 23. D 24. C 25. C 26. D 27. C 28. D 29. D 30. D 31. A 32. A 33. A
A. 16.4◦ C 38. Which of the following is not caused by the

use of fertilizers in agriculture?
B. 26.4◦ C
A. Eutrophication
C. 36.4◦ C
B. Methemoglobinemia
D. 46.4◦ C
C. Acidification and Salinity of soils
33. Which of the following is a biotic compo-
nent of an ecosystem? D. None of these
A. Fungi 39. Anthropoginal activities means :
A. Human activities
B. Wind
M
B. Natural activities
C. Sunlight
C. Bacteriological activities
D. Temperature & Water
D. Wild animals activities
RA
34. Amount of carbon dioxide present in atmo-
spheric air is 40. Which of the following is major Environ-
mental issues in Mining activities?
A. 0.318%
A. Water pollution
B. 0.383%
B. Soil Degradation
C. 21%
C. Air pollution and Dust
D. 78%
E
D. All the above
35. The ideal of sustainable development was 41. ELA is related to :
RE
defined for the first time by the world com-
mission on environment and development A. Environmental Impact Assessment
in the year B. Environmental and Industrial Activities
A. 1985 C. Environmental Internal Activities
SH
B. 1986 D. Environmental Impact Activities

C. 1987 42. Sustainable development
D. 1988 A. Encourages environmentally economic

growth
36. The type of mass movement characterized
by a slow and gradual down slope move- B. Discourages environmentally economic
ment is known as growth
I
A. Creep C. Encourages environmentally harmful

JA
and unsustainable forms of economic

B. Rockfill growth
C. Landslide D. All the above
D. Mud flow 43. Smog is combination of
37. The natural disastrous events like volca- A. Smoke and snow
noes, earthquakes, cyclones, bring about
B. Snow and fog
environmental changes which are
C. Smoke and fog
A. Reversible
D. All the above
B. Irreversible
44. Decreased soil fertility through rapid leach-
C. Both (A) and (B) ing of the essential mineral nutrients is due
to
D. None of these
34. A 35. C 36. D 37. C 38. B 39. A 40. D 41. A 42. D 43. C 44. B
A. Reforestation 51. Physical pollution of water is due to

B. Deforestation A. PH
C. Over exploitation B. Chlorides
D. Recycling of forest products C. Turbidity
45. Bhopal gas tragedy occurred due to the D. All of these
leakage of
ER
52. Loss of water content through the plants
A. Mustard gas into the atmosphere is called :
B. Methane gas A. Evaporation
C. Sulphur dioxide B. Vaporization
GD
D. Methyl Isocyanate C. Hydraulic cycle
46. Mining means D. Transpiration
A. Process of extracting ores to obtain the 53. As per BIS, the permissible limit of PH value
metal of interest for Drinking water :
AN
B. To check pollution A. 6.5 to 7.5
C. To conserve minerals B. 7.0
D. To reserve minerals C. 6.5 to 8.5
47. Major problem/s due to industrialization D. 6.0 to 8.5
CH
is/are 54. What is the Max. allowable concentration
A. Urbanization of Iron content in drinking water?
B. Migration of people A. 0.5 mg/l
C. Development of slums B. I.0 mg/l
N
D. All of the above C. 1.5 mg/l

48. Sustainability requires D. 2.0 mg/l
55. Nitrogen fixation from the atmosphere is
YA
A. Conservations of resources
high in which type of plants?
B. Minimizing depletion of non-renewable
sources A. Liguminus
C. Using sustainable practices for manag- B. Manocoteliden
RA
ing renewable resources C. Both (A) and (B)

D. All the above D. None of the above
49. The adverse effect of modern agriculture is 56. Cholera and Typhoid are caused by
A. Soil pollution
NA
A. Virus
B. Water pollution B. Fungus
C. Wastes logging C. Housefly
D. All of these D. Bacteria
50. Estuary means 57. Major source of Fluoride available in :
A. Rich in nutrients A. River water
B. Treatment of water B. Food products
C. End point of the river C. Both (A) and (B)
D. Meeting place of river and sea D. Ground water
45. D 46. A 47. D 48. D 49. D 50. D 51. C 52. D 53. C 54. C 55. A 56. D 57. C
58. A
58. Which of the following is not a Natural A. Trees

mineral?
B. Rivers
A. Nitrogen
C. Oceans
B. Asbestos
D. Atmosphere
C. Limestone
65. The volume of nitrogen present in the tro-
D. Fluorospar posphere is
59. Among fresh water availability on Earth, A. 5%
the percentage of Groundwater occurs is
B. 21%
M
about
A. 0.2% C. 78%
B. 0.5% D. 85%
RA
C. 0.8% 66. Smelting of metallic minerals into copper,
lead and zinc release large amounts of
D. 1.0%
A. Nitric oxide
60. Good example of sedimentary cycle is
B. Carbon dioxide
A. Oxygen cycle
C. Sulphur dioxide
B. Sulphur cycle
E
C. Nitrogen cycle D. Hydrogen Sulphide
67. What is the percentage of fresh water avail-
D. Carbon cycle
RE
able in lakes and streams?
61. Water used for irrigation of food crops, fod-
der crops and medical herbs in known as A. 0.1%
A. Auxiliary use B. 0.01%
B. Productive use C. 0.001%

SH
C. Commercial use D. 0.0001%

D. Consumptive use 68. Which is considered as energy source of
future?
62. Water quality involves measuring the num-
ber of colonies of A. Wind
A. Cells B. Ocean
I
JA
B. Protozoa C. Hydrogen
C. Chromozomes D. None of these
D. Coliform bacteria 69. The fossil fuel which causes maximum en-
63. The earth’s land surface covered by forest vironmental pollution due to its use in gen-
is about eration of thermal power is
A. 30 % A. Oil
B. 40 % B. Coal
C. 50 % C. Natural gas
D. 60 % D. None of these
64. A major carbon storage reservoir in the car- 70. Tidal power plants are not preferred by en-
bon cycle is vironmentalists because,
59. B 60. B 61. B 62. B 63. A 64. A 65. C 66. B 67. B 68. C 69. B 70. B
A. Tidal power is a renewable source A. 30-50◦ C

B. Tidal power can be developed only in B. 35-50◦ C
coasts C. 85-15◦ C
C. Tidal power stations bring about ma- D. None of the above
jor ecological changes in sensitive coastal
77. Percentage methane content of biogas is
ecosystem
ER
A. 10-20 %
B. 20-35 %
71. Energy obtained from the Earth’s hot inte-
rior is called the C. 40-45 %
GD
A. Geo-Thermal energy D. 50-75 %
78. Hydrogen is found on earth in combination
B. Thermal energy
with
C. Biomass energy A. Copper
D. None of these
AN
B. Oxygen
72. Sulabh biogas plants are based on the use C. Helium
of
D. Sulphur
A. Cattle dung
79. About 30% of the country’s coal deposits
B. Human excreta are found in
CH
C. Agriculture waste A. Kashmir
D. None of these B. Karnataka
73. Bhopal Gas Tragedy happened in the year C. Tamil Nadu
A. Dec. 1983 D. Bihar and Orissa

N
80. Good example of renew able energy re-

B. Dec. 1984
source is
YA
C. Dec. 1987 A. Oil

D. Dec. 1994 B. Coal
74. Renewable energy is C. Hydropower
RA
A. Primary source D. All the above

B. Secondary source 81. The basic element in fossil fuels is
C. Tertiary source A. Oxygen
D. None of the above B. Carbon
NA
75. Electromagnetic radiation energy is an en- C. Sulphur

ergy in the form of D. Phosphorus
A. Heat 82. Hydro electricity is generated from
B. Wave A. Forests
C. Light B. Coal plants
D. All the above C. Lakes and ponds

76. Fermentation in the biogas plant is carried D. Water reservoir of river dams
out between 83. Cow dung can be used
71. A 72. A 73. B 74. A 75. D 76. A 77. D 78. B 79. D 80. C 81. B 82. D 83. C
A. as manure 90. Identify the non-renewable sources of en-

ergy from the following
B. for production of biogas
A. Coal
C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Fuel cells
D. none of these
C. Wind power
84. Recycled water can be used for
D. Wave power
A. Crop irrigation
91. Hydrogen can be produced commercially
B. Landscape gardening by
M
C. Replenishing fast depleting aquifers A. Cracking of ammonia
D. All of these B. Electrolysis of water
85. Solar radiations consist of C. Both (A) and (B)
RA
A. Visible region D. Gasification
B. Infra-red region 92. Generation of wind energy is mainly based
on which factor
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Storms
D. None of these
B. Pressure
86. Liquefied petroleum gas is a mixture of
E C. Velocity of wind
A. Propane and butane
D. Direction of wind
B. Methane and propane
RE
93. The air pollutant which causes severs dam-
C. Methane and butane age to plants, even at much lower concen-
D. Methane and ethane trations than what may be harmful to hu-
man health is
87. is the best environmental clean alter-
native fuel. A. Peroxyacyl nitrates (PAN)
SH
A. CNG B. Ozone
B. Coal C. Fluorine
D. None of these
C. Petrol
94. The term ’Refuse’ generally does not in-
D. Diesel clude is
I
88. Direct conversion of solar energy is at- A. Ashes

tained by
JA
B. Excreta
A. Galvanic cells
C. Putrescible solid waste
B. Electrolytic cells
D. Non putrescible solid waste
C. Hydrogen fuel cells 95. The maximum average permissible noise
D. Solar photovoltaic system levels during day time hours as per envi-
89. Use of Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) ronment protection act in India is
came into effect from A. 30 dB
A. Dec 2000 B. 45 dB
B. Dec 2001 C. 50 dB
C. Dec 2002 D. 55 dB
96. Noise pollution means
D. Dec 2003
84. D 85. C 86. A 87. A 88. D 89. C 90. A 91. C 92. C 93. A 94. A 95. B 96. B
A. Loud sound 103. ’Minamata’ disease is caused by

B. Unwanted sound A. Lead
C. High frequency sound B. Arsenic
D. Environmental pollution C. Mercury
97. Liquid waste generated from Bathrooms D. Cadmium
ER
and Kitchens are called
104. Which of the following is a natural source
A. Runoff of Air pollution?
B. Sullage A. Storms
GD
C. Domestic sewage B. Acid rain
D. All the above C. Precipitation
98. Non-point source of water pollution is D. Volcanic eruptions
caused by
105. Which of the following is a biodegradable
A. Pipes
AN
pollutant?
B. Ditches A. CFC
C. Sewers B. DDT
D. Mining wastes C. Freon’s
CH
99. Trickle irrigation reduces D. Sewage
A. Percolation 106. The major green house gas which is re-
B. Salinization sponsible for causing about 60% of the
green house effect on earth among the fol-
C. Water evaporation
lowing is
D. All of these
N
A. Nitrogen
100. Noise pollution limit in industrial area is
B. Methane
A. 65 dB
YA
C. Carbon dioxide
B. 80 dB
D. Carbon monoxide
C. 95 dB
107. The primary reason for large scale decline
D. 100 dB in population death rate during 20Ih cen-
RA
101. Which of the following is a natural source tury was

of environmental pollution? A. Improved environmental conditions
A. Earthquake B. Improved medical care and control of
NA
B. Automobiles epidemics
C. Industries C. Both (A) and (B)
D. Sewage D. None of these
102. Air pollution from automobiles can be con- 108. Which of the following is ill effect of Ur-
trolled by fitting banization
A. wet scrubber A. Environmental pollution
B. catalytic converter B. Loss of soil degradation
C. electrostatic precipitator C. Decrease in Agricultural Land
D. all the above D. All of these
97. C 98. D 99. D 100. B 101. A 102. D 103. C 104. D 105. D 106. C 107. B
108. D 109. A
109. Global warming means : 116. Climate and global air circulations are
A. Increase in Earth’s Body Temperature mainly affected by the properties of
B. Increase in solar radiation A. Temperature
C. Acid Rain B. Precipitation
D. All the above C. Water and air

110. Which of the following is not a Green D. None of the above
House Gas? 117. The main impact of urbanization on plant
A. Ozone and animal life is
M
B. Water vapour A. Loss of species
C. Carbon dioxide B. Mutation in species
D. Sulpher dioxide C. Increase in species
RA
111. Which of the following is not a solution D. None of these
for Global warming?
118. Global atmospheric temperatures are
A. Deforestation likely to be increased due to
B. Plantation of more trees A. Burning of fossil fuels
C. Reducing fossil fuel consumption
B. Water pollution
E
C. Soil erosion
112. Global warming affects
RE
A. Climate change
119. What is the maximum allowable concen-
B. Food production tration of fluorides in drinking water
C. Melting of glaciers A. 1.5 mg/L
SH
D. All of these
B. 2.0 mg/L
113. The protocol that reduces green house gas
emissions is C. 2.5 mg/L
A. Kyoto protocol D. 3.0 mg/L
B. Vienna protocol 120. Domestic sewage is
C. Montreal protocol A. Waste water from industries

I
D. Cartagena protocol B. Waste water from residential areas

JA
114. Green house effect causes C. Waste water generated from kitchens
A. Increase in rainfall and bathrooms
B. Lowering of acid rain D. None of the above
C. Rise in temperature of earth 121. During green house effect, carbon dioxide
and water vapours absorbs,
D. Lowering in temperature of earth
A. UV radiations
115. Important sources of land pollution are
B. Solar radiation
A. Industrial Wastes
B. Agricultural Wastes C. Short wave radiations
C. Both (A) and (B) D. Long wave radiations

122. Acid rains are more prominent in
110. D 111. A 112. D 113. A 114. C 115. C 116. A 117. A 118. A 119. A 120. C
121. D 122. A
A. Arid regions A. Sept 5th

B. Tropical regions B. Sept 16th
C. Temperate regions C. Oct 15th
D. Equally prominent in all D. June 5th

129. Ozone is present in which layers of the
123. The important gaseous pollutants con-
atmosphere?
ER
tributing to acid rain are
A. Stratosphere
A. Oxygen and Nitrogen
B. Mesosphere
B. Carbon Dioxide and Nitrogen
C. Troposphere
GD
C. Carbon dioxide
D. Thermosphere
D. Sulfur dioxide (SO2) and Nitrogen 130. The major contributors to the acid rain
(NOx) are known as
124. The ozone depletion in the stratosphere is
A. Protons
AN
chiefly caused by the release of
B. Pollutants
A. Chlorofluoro carbons
C. Processors
B. Carbon dioxide
D. Precursors
C. Methane 131. The equivalent of one Dobson unit is
CH
D. None of these A. 0.1 m
125. Movement of Nutrients from the soil by B. 0.01 m
the Acid Rain is called :
C. 0.1 mm
A. Leaching
D. 0.01 mm
N
B. Infiltration 132. Ozone hole is said to occur when the

C. Exfiltration ozone level decreases below
YA
D. Transpiration A. 2 DU
126. Thickness of the Ozone layer is measured B. 20 DU

in which units? C. 200 DU
RA
A. dB D. 2000 DU
B. DU 133. The radiations absorbed by ozone layer
are
C. PPB
A. Ultra-violet
D. PPM
NA
B. Infra-red
127. Each chlorine free radical can destroy the
C. Gamma rays
number of ozone molecules
D. Visible
A. 100 ozone molecules
134. Primary cause of acid rain around the
B. 1000 ozone molecules world is due to
C. 10,000 ozone molecules A. Ozone
D. 100,000 ozone molecules B. carbon dioxide
128. World ’Ozone day’ is being celebrated on C. sulfur dioxide
every year
D. carbon monoxide
123. D 124. A 125. A 126. B 127. D 128. B 129. A 130. D 131. D 132. C 133. A
134. C 135. C
135. Major compounds responsible for the de- A. 1984

struction of Ozone layer is B. 1985
A. C02 C. 1986
B. CH4 D. 1987
C. CFCs 142. The first major environmental protection
law promulgated in India was
D. oxygen
A. Air Act
136. Which of the following is the remedial
measure for acid rain? B. Water Act
M
A. Use of coal, free from sulphur C. Environmental Act
B. Use of electrostatic precipitator and cat- D. None of these
alytic converters 143. Water Pollution, ’Prevention and Control
RA
Act’ was enacted in the year
C. Reducing the release of oxides of nitro-
gen and sulphur into the atmosphere A. 1954
D. All of these B. 1964

137. The pH of acid rain is C. 1974
A. Less than 1.7 D. 1984
144. ’Wild Life Protection Act’ was enacted in
E
B. Less than 2.7
the year
C. Less than 4.7 A. 1971
RE
D. Less than 5.7 B. 1972
138. Acid rain affects C. 1973
A. Soil D. 1974
B. Plants 145. Karnataka State Pollution Control Board
SH
was established in the year

C. Materials
A. 1971
D. All of the above
B. 1972
139. Animal husbandry may result in
C. 1973
A. Genetic Damage
D. 1974
I
B. Ozone depletion
146. First International Earth summit was held
JA
C. Global warming at
D. None of the above A. Germany
140. Freon’s are called B. Stockholm
A. Ozone C. Johannesburg
B. Methane D. Riode Janeiro
C. Solvents 147. Amount of Carbon Dioxide(CO2) content
in atmospheric Air is normally
D. Hydrocarbons
A. 0.21%
141. The environment act was enacted by In-
dian parliament under Article 253 of the B. 0.318%
constitution of India and made applicable C. 0.416%
to all states of India in the year
D. 0.428%
136. D 137. D 138. D 139. C 140. D 141. C 142. B 143. C 144. B 145. D 146. B
147. B 148. A
148. EPA means : A. Waste management

A. Environmental Protection Act B. Forest management
B. Environmental Prevention Act C. Desert management
C. Environmental Pollution Act D. Protection of human environment in-
D. Environmental Protection Agency cluding human, plants, animals and prop-
erty
ER
149. Environmental protection is the responsi-
bility of 154. World environment day is celebrated on
A. Individuals A. April 5th
B. NGO’s B. June 5th
GD
C. Government of India C. November 5th
D. All of the above D. December 5th
150. The objectives of the Wild Life (protec- 155. Environmental protection is a fundamen-
tion) Act 1972 is tal duty of the citizen of India under the
AN
A. To preserve the biodiversity A. 21
B. Protection and conservation of wild life B. 47
C. To maintain essential ecological and life C. 48-A
supporting systems
CH
D. Article 51-A(g)
D. All the above 156. In which year the Hon’ble supreme court
151. Which of the following is the authority to ofIndia made environmental education
monitor state industrial effluents? compulsory subject at all the levels of edu-
A. State pollution control board cation
A. 2000
N
B. Indian environmental association

C. Centre for science and development B. 2001
YA
D. None of these C. 2002

152. Environmental education is targeted to D. 2003
A. General public 157. Expansion of the term WWF is
RA
B. Professional social groups A. Worldwide forest

C. Technicians and scientists B. World wild life fund
D. All of these C. Worldwide life force
153. Environment Protection Act of 1986 is D. Worldwide life forest
NA
meant for
149. D 150. D 151. A 152. D 153. D 154. B 155. D 156. D 157. B

JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
13. Higher education system
GD
AN
CH
1. In which year the University Grants Com- A. Information Technology refers to the
mission was established? use of hardware and software for process-
ing information
A. 1951
B. Information Technology refers to the
B. 1952
use of hardware and software for distribu-
N
C. 1953 tion of useful information

D. 1954 C. Information Technology refers to the
YA
2. Another name of Basic Education or Nai use of principles of Physical sciences and
Talim is : Social sciences for processing of informa-
tion of many kinds.
A. New Education Policy
D. Information Technology refers to the
RA
B. Compulsory Education use of hardware and software for storage,

C. Wardha Education Plan retrieval, processing and distributing infor-
mation of many kinds.
D. Sarva Shikshya Abhiyan
5. The launch of satellite channel by IGNOU
3. ICT stands for :
NA
on 26th January 2003 for technological ed-

A. Inter connected Terminals ucation for the growth and development of
distance education is:
B. Intera Common Terminology
A. Rajrishi channel
C. International Communication Technol-
B. Eklavya channel
ogy
C. Gyandarshan channel
D. Information and Communication Tech-
nology D. None of these
4. Which of the following is the appropriate 6. Ministry of Human Resource Development
definition of Information Technology? (HRD) includes:
1. C 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. B
170 Chapter 13. Higher education system
A. Department of Women and Child De- A. Good citizen

velopment
B. Popular teacher
B. Department of Elementary Education C. Efficient manager
and Literacy
D. Successful businessman
C. Department of Secondary Education
and Higher Education 12. Networking of libraries through electronic
media is known as:
D. All the above
A. HTML
7. Which of the following institutions in the
B. Internet
M
field of education is set up by the MHRD
Government of India? C. Inflibnet
A. Mythic Society, Bangalore D. Libinfnet
RA
B. National Bal Bhawn, New Delhi 13. The University which telecasts interactive
educational programmes through its own
C. India International Centre, New Delhi
channel is:
D. Indian council of world Affair, New
A. I.G.N.O.U.
Delhi
B. University of Pune
8. The University Grants Commission was
constituted on the recommendation of: C. Annamalai University
E
A. Kothari Commission D. B.R. Ambedkar Open University, Hyder-
abad
RE
B. Sargent Commission
14. The first Indian Satellite for serving the ed-
C. Mudaliar Commission ucational sector is known as:
D. Dr. Sarvapalli Radhakrishnan Commis- A. EDUSAT
sion
B. INSAT-B
SH
9. Which one of the following Articles of the

Constitution of India safeguards the rights C. INSAT-C
of Minorities to establish and run educa- D. SATEDU
tional institutions of their own liking?
15. Exclusive educational channel of IGNOU is
A. Article 30 known as:
B. Article 31 A. Cyan Vani
I
B. GyanDarshan
JA
C. Article 32
D. Article 33 C. DoorDarshan
10. Foundation training to the newly recruited D. Prasar Bharati
IAS (Probationers) is imparted by: 16. The head quarter of Mahatma Gandhi An-
A. Centre for Advanced Studies tarrashtriya Hindi Vishwavidyalaya is situ-
ated in:
B. Administrative Staff College of India
A. Wardha
C. Indian Institute of Public Administra-
tion B. Sevagram
D. L.B.S. National Academy of Administra- C. New Delhi

tion D. Ahmedabad
11. Value education makes a student: 17. Central Institute of English -
6. D 7. B 8. D 9. A 10. D 11. A 12. C 13. A 14. A 15. B 16. A 17. A

A. Hyderabad A. 1951
B. New Delhi B. 1958
C. Dharmasala C. 1964
D. Chitrakoot and Foreign D. 1970

24. Which one of the following is not situated
18. Gramodaya Vishwavidyalaya -
in New Delhi?
ER
A. Hyderabad A. Indian Institute of Advanced Studies
B. New Delhi B. Indian Council of Cultural Relations
C. Dharmasala C. Indian Council of Scientific Research
GD
D. Chitrakoot and Foreign D. National Council of Educational Re-
19. Central Institute of Higher Tibetan Studies search and Training
- 25. Autonomy in higher education implies free-
dom in:
A. Hyderabad
AN
A. Finance
B. New Delhi
B. Administration
C. Dharmasala
C. Policy-making
D. Chitrakoot and Foreign
D. Curriculum development
CH
20. IGNOU - 26. Dr. Hari Singh Gour University -
A. Hyderabad A. Sagar
B. New Delhi B. Baroda
C. Dharmasala C. Mumbai
D. Jodhpur
N
D. Chitrakoot and Foreign

21. The aim of vocationalization of education 27. S.N.D.T. University -
is: A. Sagar
YA
A. making liberal education job-oriented B. Baroda

B. converting liberal education into voca- C. Mumbai
tional education D. Jodhpur
RA
C. preparing students for a vocation along 28. M.S. University -

with knowledge A. Sagar
D. giving more importance to vocational B. Baroda
than general education
NA
C. Mumbai
22. NAAC is an autonomous institution under
D. Jodhpur
the aegis of:
29. J.N. Vyas University -
A. UGC
A. Sagar
B. CSIR
B. Baroda
C. AICTE C. Mumbai
D. ICSSR D. Jodhpur
23. National Council for Women’s Education 30. According to Radhakrishnan Commission,
was established in: the aim of Higher Education is:
18. D 19. C 20. B 21. A 22. A 23. B 24. A 25. D 26. A 27. C 28. B 29. D 30. C
A. To develop great personalities who can A. University Grants Commission is a

give their contributions in politics, admin- statutory body
istration, industry and commerce
B. Patent, inventions, design, copyright
B. To develop the democratic values, peace and trademarks are the subject of concur-
and harmony rent list
C. Both (A) and (B) C. Education is a subject of concurrent list
of VII schedule of Constitution of India
D. None of these
D. Indian Council of Social Science Re-
31. The National Museum at New Delhi is at- search is a statutory body related to re-
M
tached to : search in social sciences
A. Delhi University 37. The Kothari Commission’s reportwas enti-
tled on:
B. A Deemed University
RA
A. Learning to be adventure
C. A Subordinate Office of the JNU
B. Diversification of Education
D. Part of Ministry of Tourism and Culture
C. Education and National Development
32. National Law Institute - D. Education and socialization in democ-

racy
A. Bhopal
E
38. Which of the following is not a Dualmode
B. Shimla University?
RE
C. Nagpur A. Delhi University
D. Hyderabad B. Madras University
33. Indian Institute of Advanced Studies - C. Bangalore University
A. Bhopal D. Indira Gandhi National Open University

SH
B. Shimla
39. The recommendation of National Knowl-
C. Nagpur edge Commission for the establishment of
1500 Universities is to
D. Hyderabad
A. create more teaching jobs
34. National Judicial Academy -
I
B. ensure increase in student enrolment in

A. Bhopal higher education
JA
B. Shimla C. enable increased movement of students

C. Nagpur from rural areas to urban areas
D. replace or substitute the privately man-
D. Hyderabad
aged higher education institutions by pub-
35. National Savings Institute - lic institutions
A. Bhopal 40. The enrolment in higher education in In-
dia is contributed both by Formal System
B. Shimla of Education and by System of Distance
C. Nagpur Education. Distance education contributes
D. Hyderabad A. 10% of the formal system
36. Which opinion is not correct? B. 25% of formal system
31. D 32. D 33. B 34. A 35. C 36. B 37. C 38. D 39. B 40. B
C. 50% of formal system A. give affiliation to any institute of higher

education.
D. Distance education system’s contribu-
tion is not taken into account while con- B. offer programmes in higher education
sidering the figures of enrolment in higher and issue degrees.
education
C. offer distance education programmes
41. The Right to Information Act, 2005 makes without the approval of the Distance Edu-
ER
the provision of cation Council
A. Transparency and accountability in Pub- D. open off-campus and off-shore campus
lic authorities. anywhere in the country and overseas re-
B. Dissemination of all types of informa- spectively without the permission of the
GD
tion by all Public authorities to any person. UGC.
C. Establishment of Central, State and Dis- 45. India’s first Defence University is in the
trict Level Information Commissions as an State of
appellate body.
A. Punjab
AN
D. All of the above
B. Haryana
42. The accreditation process by National
Assessment and Accreditation Council C. Uttar Pradesh
(NAAC) differs from that of National Board D. Andhra Pradesh
of Accreditation (NBA) in terms of
CH
46. The first Open University in India was set
A. Disciplines covered by both being the up in the State of
same, there is duplication of efforts.
A. Delhi
B. One has institutional grading approach
and the other has programme grading ap- B. Tamil Nadu
proach.
N
C. Andhra Pradesh
C. This accreditation amounts to approval D. Himachal Pradesh
of minimum standards in the quality of ed-
YA
ucation in the institution concerned. 47. Most of the Universities in India are
founded by
D. Once get accredited by NBA or NAAC,
the institution is free from renewal of grad- A. the State Governments
ing, which is not a progressive decision.
RA
B. the Central Government

43. Which statement is not correct about the
“National Education Day” of India? C. private bodies and Individuals
A. It is being celebrated since 2008 D. the University Grants Commission

48. Which of the following organizations looks
NA
B. It is celebrated on 5th September every

year. after the quality of Technical and Manage-
ment education in India?
C. It is celebrated on 11th November every
year. A. MCI
D. It is celebrated in the memory of India’s B. CSIR

first Union Minister of Education, Dr. Abul C. NCTE
Kalam Azad.
D. AICTE
44. Deemed Universities declared by UGC un-
der Section 3 of the UGC Act 1956, are not 49. Which of the following is/are a minority
permitted to institution(s)?
41. D 42. D 43. B 44. D 45. B 46. C 47. D 48. D 49. B

A. Punjabi University, Patiala 55. Which of the following statements are cor-
B. St. Stephens College, Delhi rect about a Central University?
C. Kashmir University, Srinagar A. The President of India acts as the visitor

of the University.
D. Osmania University, Hyderabad
50. Which of the following statements about B. Central University is established under
the Union Public Service Commission are an Act of Parliament.
correct? C. President has the power to nominate
A. It serves as an advisory body. some members to the Executive Committee
or the Board of Management of the Univer-
M
B. UPSC is a Constitutional body. sity.
C. Both (A) and (B)
D. All of the above
D. It is called upon to advise the Govern-
56. The maximum number of fake institutions /
RA
ment in regard to representation of the
universities as identified by the UGC in the
Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes in
year 2014 are in the State / Union territory
the Civil Service.
of
51. Which of the following statements are cor-
rect about the National Assessment and Ac- A. Delhi
creditation Council? B. Bihar
A. It is an autonomous institution.
E C. Tamil Nadu
B. It is tasked with the responsibility of D. Uttar Pradesh
assessing and accrediting institutions of
RE
higher education. 57. Which of the following institutions are em-
powered to confer or grant degrees under
C. Both (A) and (B) the UGC Act, 1956?
D. It is located in Delhi. A. A university established by an Act of
52. Education as a subject of legislation figures Legislature.
SH
in the
B. A university established by an Act of
A. State List Parliament.
B. Union List
C. An institution which is a deemed to be
C. Concurrent List university.
D. Residuary Powers D. All of the above
I
53. Which of the following are Central Univer- 58. MOOC stands for
JA
sities?
A. Myrind Open Online Course
A. Vishwa Bharati
B. Media Online Open Course
B. Pondicherry University
C. Massive Open Online Course
C. H.N.B. Garhwal University
D. All of the above D. Massachusetts Open Online Course
54. Which of the following universities has 59. The South Asia University is situated in the
adopted the meta university concept? city of
A. Delhi University A. Dhaka
B. Assam University B. New Delhi
C. Hyderabad University C. Colombo
D. Pondicherry University D. Kathmandu
50. C 51. C 52. C 53. D 54. A 55. D 56. D 57. D 58. C 59. B
60. The University Grants Commission was es- A. National Mission on E-learning through
tablished with which of the following aims ICT
A. Capacity building of teachers B. National Mission on Education through
ICT
B. Identifying and sustaining institutions
of potential learning C. National Mission on E-commerce
through ICT
C. Promotion of research and development
ER
in higher education D. National Mission on E-governance
through ICT
D. All of the above
66. Which of the following core value among
61. The Gross Enrolment Ratio (GER) in institu-
the institutions of higher education are pro-
GD
tions of higher education in India at present
moted by the NAAC (National Assessment
(2015) is about
and Accreditation Council)?
A. 17%
A. Contributing to national development.
B. 18%
B. Inculcating a value system among stu-
AN
C. 19% dents.
D. 20% C. Fostering global competencies among
62. The total number of central universities in the students.
India in April 2016 was D. All of the above
CH
A. 40 67. The best way for providing value education
B. 42 is through
C. 44 A. lecture/discourses on values
D. 46 B. seminars/symposia on values
63. Which of the following are the objectives C. discussions on scriptural texts
N
of Rashtriya Uchchatar Shiksha Abhiyan D. mentoring/reflective sessions on values

(RUSA)?
YA
A. To ensure adequate availability of qual- 68. The statement “the study, design, devel-
ity faculty. opment, implementation, support or man-
B. To improve the overall quality of state agement of computer-based information
systems, particularly software applications
RA
institutions.
and computer Hardware” refers to
C. To create new institutions through
upgradation of existing autonomous col- A. Artificial Intelligence (AI)
leges. B. Information Technology (IT)
NA
D. All of the above C. Information and Data Technology (IDT)

64. The grounds on which discrimination in ad- D. Information and Collaborative Technol-
mission to educational institutions is con- ogy (ICT)
stitutionally prohibited are
69. Which of the following universities/insti-
A. Sex tutes is ranked first in the India Rankings
2016?
B. Religion
A. Central University, Hyderabad
C. Place of birth
B. Indian Institute of Science, Bangalore
D. All of the above
65. NMEICT stands for: C. Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi
60. D 61. C 62. D 63. D 64. D 65. B 66. D 67. A 68. B 69. B
D. Institute of Chemical Technology, Mum- 71. Which of the following are statutory bod-
bai ies?
70. Which of the following statements are cor- A. University Grants Commission (UGC)
rect about distance education in India? B. All India Council for Technical Educa-
A. It reduces the cost of education. tion (AICTE)
B. It supplements formal education. C. Both (A) and (B)

D. National Assessment and Accreditation
C. It enhances access to education.
Council (NAAC)
D. All of the above
M
RA
E
RE
I SH
JA
70. D 71. C
ER
14. ICT
GD
AN
CH
1. Which of the following is correct state- 4. Which of the following is not the charac-
ment? teristic of a computer?
A. A set of instructions is called a pro- A. computer cannot think at its own
gramme B. computer is an electrical machine
B. Computers can be used for diagnosing C. computer processes information error
N
the difficulty of a student in learning a sub- free

ject
D. computer can hold data for any length
YA
C. Psychological testing can be done with of time

the help of computer provided software is
5. Using websites to pour out one’s grievances
available
is called:
D. All of the above
RA
A. web plea
2. Line access and avoidance of collision are
the main functions of: B. web hate
C. cyber ranting
A. wide area networks
D. cyber venting
B. network protocols
NA
6. In web search, finding a large number of

C. the monitor documents with very little relevant infor-
D. the CPU mation is termed:
3. In the hypermedia database, information A. web crawl
bits are stored in the form of:
B. poor recall
A. cubes
C. poor web response
B. nodes D. poor precision rate
C. signals 7. The concept of connect intelligence is de-
D. symbols rived from:
1. D 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. D 6. B 7. C
178 Chapter 14. ICT
A. fuzzy logic 13. Which of the following is the appropriate

B. virtual reality format of URL of e-mail?
C. value added networks A. www.mail.com

D. Bluetooth technology B. www mail.com
8. Use of an ordinary telephone as an Internet C. [email protected]
applicance is called:
D. [email protected]
A. voice net
14. On the keyboard of computer each char-
B. voice line acter has an “ASCII” value which stands
M
C. voice portal for:
D. voice telephone A. Adaptable Standard Code for Informa-
9. Video transmission over the Internet that tion Change
RA
looks like delayed livecasting is called:
B. American Stock Code for Information
A. video shift Interchange
B. virtual video C. African Standard Code for Information
C. real-time video Interchange
D. direct broadcast D. American Standard Code for Informa-
10. LAN stands for:
E tion Interchange
A. Live Area Network 15. Which part of the Central Processing Unit
(CPU) performs calculation and makes de-
RE
B. Local And National
cisions:
C. Local Area Network
A. Alternate Local Unit
D. Large Area Network
B. American Logic Unit
11. Which of the following is the appropriate
SH
definition of a computer? C. Alternating Logic Unit

A. Computer is a machine that can process D. Arithematic Logic Unit
information.
16. “Dpi” stands for:
B. Computer is an electronic device that
can store, retrieve and quickly process only A. Dots per inch
quantitative data. B. Digits per unit
I
C. Computer is a machine that can store, C. Dots pixel inch

JA
retrieve and process quickly and accurately

only qualitative information. D. Diagrams per inch
D. Computer is an electronic device that 17. The process of laying out a document with
can store, retrieve and process both qual- text, graphics, headlines and photographs
itative and quantitative data quickly and is involved in
accurately. A. Deck Top Printing
12. Information and Communication Technol-
ogy includes: B. Desk Top Printing
A. On line learning C. Deck Top Publishing

B. Web Based Learning D. Desk Top Publishing
C. Learning through the use of EDUSAT 18. Transfer of data from one application to
another line is known as:
D. All of the above
8. B 9. C 10. C 11. D 12. D 13. C 14. D 15. D 16. A 17. D 18. B
A. Dodgy Data Exchange 25. Which of the following is not a Computer

language?
B. Dynamic Data Exchange
A. UNIX
C. Dynamic Disk Exchange
B. COBOL
D. Dogmatic Data Exchange
19. www represents: C. PASCAL
ER
D. FORTRAN
A. word wide web
26. A key-board has at least:
B. world wide web
A. 101 Keys
C. weird wide web
B. 201 Keys
GD
D. who what and where
C. 301 Keys
20. CD ROM stands for:
D. 401 Keys
A. Compact Disk Read Only Memory
27. An E-mail address is composed of:
B. Compact Disk Read Over Memory
A. one part
AN
C. Computer Disk Read Only Memory B. two parts
D. Computer Disk Read Over Memory C. three parts
21. The ’brain’ of a computer which keeps pe-
D. four parts
ripherals under its control is called:
CH
28. Corel Draw is a popular:
A. Central Power Unit
A. Text programme
B. Common Power Unit
B. Illustration programme
C. Central Processing Unit
C. Programming language
D. Common Processing Unit
N
22. Data can be saved on backing storage 29. The accounting software ’Tally’ was devel-
medium known as : oped by:
YA
A. Compact Disk Rewritable A. TCS

B. Computer Disk Rewritable B. HCL
C. Compact Disk Recordable C. Wipro
RA
D. Computer Data Rewritable D. Infosys

23. RAM means: 30. Errors in computer programmes are called:
A. Rigid Access Memory A. Bugs
B. Rapid Access Memory B. Spam
NA
C. Random Access Memory C. Follies

D. Revolving Access Memory D. Mistakes
24. WYSIWYG - describes the display of a doc- 31. HTML is basically used to design:
ument on screen as it will actually print: A. Web-site
A. What you see is what you get B. Graphics
B. What you save is what you get C. Web-page
C. What you state is what you get D. Tables and Frames
D. What you suggest is what you get 32. ’Micro Processing’is made for:
19. B 20. A 21. C 22. A 23. C 24. A 25. A 26. A 27. B 28. B 29. A 30. A 31. C
32. C
180 Chapter 14. ICT
A. Calculator A. Data Hiding

B. Computer B. Water marking
C. Digital System C. Data Encryption
D. Electronic Goods D. Information Retrieval

39. Which is the largest unit of storage among
33. Information, a combination of graphics,
the following?
text, sound, video and animation is called:
A. Gigabyte
A. Multifacet
B. Kilobyte
M
B. Multimedia
C. Megabyte
C. Multiprocess
D. Terabyte
D. Multiprogramme 40. bit stands for
RA
34. What do you need to put your web pages A. binary tree
on the www?
B. binary digit
A. a web server C. bivariate theory
B. a web browser D. binary information term
C. a connection to internet 41. Which one of the following is not a linear
E data structure?
D. all of the above
A. Stack
35. Which was the first company to launch mo-
RE
bile phone services in India? B. Array
A. BPL C. Queue
D. Binary Tree
B. Airtel
42. Which one of the following is not a network
SH
C. Essar device?
D. Hutchison A. Hub
36. Chandrayan I was launched on 22nd Octo- B. CPU
ber, 2008 in India from:
C. Router
A. Chennai D. Switch
I
B. Bangalore 43. A compiler is used to convert the following

JA
to object code which can be executed

C. Ahmedabad
A. Natural language
D. Sri Harikota
B. Assembly language
37. What is blog?
C. Low-level language
A. Intranet
D. High-level language
B. Online music 44. Which number system is usually followed
C. A personal or corporate Google search in a typical 32-bit computer?
D. A personal or corporate website in the A. 2

form of an online journal B. 4
38. Which of the following is not related to C. 8
information security on the Internet?
D. 12
33. B 34. D 35. A 36. D 37. D 38. D 39. D 40. B 41. D 42. B 43. D 44. C 45. D
45. Which one of the following is an example A. Operating system

of Operating System?
B. Operation system
A. Microsoft Word
C. Compiler system
B. Microsoft Excel
D. None of these
C. Microsoft Access
52. S/MIME in Internet technology stands for
ER
D. Microsoft Windows
A. Simple Multimedia Internet Mail Exten-
46. Which one of the following is different from
sion
other members?
A. Mac B. Secure Multimedia Internet Mail Exten-
GD
sion
B. Linux
C. Simple Multipurpose Internet Mail Ex-
C. Google tension
D. Windows
D. Secure Multipurpose Internet Mail Ex-
AN
47. Where does a computer add and compare tension
its data?
53. The octal number system consists of the
A. Floppy disk following symbols :
B. Hard disk A. 0 - 7
CH
C. Memory
B. 0 - 9
D. CPU
C. 0 - 9, A - F
48. Computers on an internet are identified by
A. IP address
54. DNS in internet technology stands for
B. street address
N
A. Domain Name System

C. e-mail address
B. Dynamic Name System
YA
D. none of the above

49. Which one of the following is not an Inter- C. Distributed Name System
net Service Provider (ISP)? D. None of these
A. BSNL 55. HTML stands for
RA
B. MTNL
A. Hyper Text Managing Links
C. ERNET India
B. Hyper Text Markup Language
D. Infotech India Ltd.
C. Hyper Text Manipulating Links
NA
50. The hexadecimal number system consists

of the symbols D. Hyper Text Manipulation Language
A. 0 - 7 56. Which of the following is type of LAN?
B. 0 - 7, A - F A. FDDI
C. 0 - 9 , A - F B. Ethernet
D. None of these C. Token Ring
51. The set of computer programs that man-
D. All of the above
age the hardware/software of a computer
is called 57. Which of the following statements is true?
46. C 47. B 48. A 49. D 50. C 51. A 52. D 53. A 54. A 55. B 56. B 57. C 58. A
182 Chapter 14. ICT
A. COS is smart card operating system. C. Number of bits required for IPv4 address
is same as number of bits required for IPv6
B. Smart cards do not require an operating
address.
system.
D. Number of bits required for IPv4 ad-
C. Smart cards and PCs use some operating
dress is more than number of bits required
system.
for IPv6 address.
D. The communication between reader 63. TCP/IP is necessary if one is to connect to
and card is in full duplex mode. the
58. Which of the following operating system A. LAN
M
is used on mobile phones?
B. Internet
A. Android
C. A Server
B. Windows XP D. Phone lines
RA
C. Windows Vista 64. Each character on the keyboard of com-
puter has an ASCII value which stands for
D. All of the above
A. Adaptable Standard Code for Informa-
59. High level programming language can
tion Change
be converted to machine language using
which of the following? B. American Stock Code for Information
Interchange
A. Oracle
E
C. African Standard Code for Information
B. Mat lab Interchange
RE
C. Compiler D. American Standard Code for Informa-
D. Assembler tion Interchange
65. Which of the following is not a program-
60. HTML is used to create
ming language?
A. web page
SH
A. C++
B. web server B. Java
C. high level program C. Pascal
D. machine language program D. Microsoft Office
61. The term DNS stands for 66. Minimum number of bits required to store
I
any 3 digit decimal number is equal to

A. Domain Name System
JA
A. 5
B. Dependent Name Server
B. 10
C. Defense Nuclear System
C. 15
D. Downloadable New Software
D. 20
62. IPv4 and IPv6 are addresses used to identify 67. Internet explorer is a type of
computers on the internet. Find the correct
statement out of the following: A. Browser
A. Number of bits required for IPv4 address B. Compiler

is 64. C. IP address
B. Number of bits required for IPv4 address D. Operating System
is less than number of bits required for IPv6 68. POP3 and IMAP are e-mail accounts in
address. which
59. C 60. A 61. A 62. B 63. B 64. D 65. D 66. B 67. A 68. D
A. One does not need any telephone lines A. Heads

B. One automatically gets one’s mail ev- B. Sectors
eryday
C. Vectors
C. One has to be connected to the server
D. Clusters
to read or write one’s mail
75. A computer program that translates a pro-
ER
D. One only has to be connected to the gram statement by statement into machine
server to send and receive email languages is called a/an
69. ALU stands for
A. Interpreter
A. Alternate Local Unit
GD
B. Simulator
B. American Logic Unit
C. Translator
C. Arithmetic Logic Unit
D. Compiler
D. Alternating Logic Unit 76. A Gigabyte is equal to
AN
70. A Personal Computer uses a number of
A. 1024 Bytes
chips mounted on a circuit board called
B. 1024 Kilobytes
A. Mother Board
C. 1024 Terabytes
B. System Board
D. 1024 Megabytes
CH
C. Daughter Board
77. A Compiler is a software which converts
D. Microprocessor
A. words to bits
71. Computer Virus is a
B. characters to bits
A. Bacteria
C. machine language to high level lan-
N
B. Software
guage
C. Hardware
D. high level language to machine lan-
YA
D. None of these guage

72. The file extension of MS-Word document 78. Virtual memory is
in Office 2007 is
A. an extremely large main memory.
RA
A. .txt
B. an extremely large secondary memory.
B. .doc
C. a type of memory used in super com-
C. .pdf puters.
D. .docx D. an illusion of extremely large main
NA
73. is a protocol used by e-mail clients to memory.

download e-mails to your computer. 79. The Internet ethical protocol is called
A. FTP A. netiquette
B. POP B. net ethics
C. TCP C. net protocol
D. SMTP D. net morality
74. A hard disk is divided into tracks which is 80. Commercial messages on the net are iden-
further subdivided into tified as
69. C 70. A 71. B 72. D 73. B 74. B 75. A 76. D 77. D 78. D 79. A 80. B 81. B
184 Chapter 14. ICT
A. Net ads 87. Virtual reality provides

B. Webmercials A. Sharp pictures
C. Viral advertisements B. Individual audio
D. Internet commercials C. Preview of new films
81. Manuel Castelle was the first to use the D. Participatory experience
term 88. The first virtual university of India came
A. Internet society up in
B. Network society A. Tamil Nadu
M
C. Telematic society B. Maharashtra
D. Electronic society C. Uttar Pradesh
82. GIF stands for D. Andhra Pradesh
RA
A. Graphics Interchange File 89. Which of the following is a social network?
B. Global Information Format A. eBay
C. Graphics Information Format B. Twitter
D. Graphics Interchange Format C. gmail.com
83. Which one of the following is not an Oper- D. amazon.com
E
ating System? 90. The acronym FTP stands for
A. Linux A. File Transfer Protocol
RE
B. Firefox B. File Tracking Protocol
C. IBM AIX C. Fast Transfer Protocol
D. Sun Solaris D. File Transfer Procedure
SH
84. The post-industrial society is designated as 91. Which one of the following is not a/an im-
A. Mediated society age/graphic file format?
B. Technology society A. GIF
C. Information society B. BMP
D. Non-agricultural society C. GUI

I
85. The initial efforts for internet based com- D. PNG

JA
munication was for 92. The first Web Browser is

A. Military purposes A. Firefox
B. Political campaigns B. Netscape
C. Personal interaction C. World Wide Web
D. Commercial communication D. Internet Explorer
86. Internal communication within institutions 93. When a computer is booting, BIOS is loaded
done through to the memory by
A. EBB A. TCP
B. MMS B. RAM
C. LAN C. ROM
D. WAN D. CD-ROM
82. D 83. B 84. C 85. A 86. C 87. D 88. A 89. B 90. A 91. C 92. C 93. C 94. A
94. Which one of the following is not the same 101. Digital Empowerment means
as the other three?
A. Universal digit literacy
A. IP address
B. Collaborative digital platform for partic-
B. MAC address ipative governance.
C. Physical address C. Probability of all entitlements for indi-
viduals through cloud.
ER
D. Hardware address
95. Identify the IP address from the following D. All of the above
A. 202.50.20.148 102. Encoding or scrambling data for transmis-
B. 202-50-20-148 sion across a network is known as
GD
C. 300 .215.317.3 A. Detection
D. [email protected] B. Protection
96. CSS stands for C. Decryption
A. Collecting Style Sheets
AN
D. Encryption
B. Cascading Style Sheets 103. Which of the following is not an output
C. Comparative Style Sheets device
D. Comprehensive Style Sheets A. Printer
97. Binary equivalent of decimal number 35 is
CH
B. Monitor
A. 110001 C. Speaker
B. 100011 D. Keyboard
C. 110101 104. Which of the following represents one bil-
D. 101011 lion characters
N
98. gif, jpg, bmp, png are used as extensions A. Kilobyte

for files which store
B. Megabyte
YA
A. Text data
C. Gigabyte
B. Audio data
D. Terabyte
C. Video data
105. Which of the following is not open source
RA
D. Image data software

99. Symbols A-F are used in which one of the
following? A. Open office
A. Octal number system B. Fedora Linux

NA
B. Decimal number system C. Internet Explorer

C. Binary number system D. Apache HTTP server
D. Hexadecimal number system 106. Which one of the following represents the
100. Which one of the following is not a search binary equivalent of the decimal number
engine? 25
A. Bing A. 01101
B. Yahoo B. 10101
C. Google C. 11001
D. Chrome D. 11011
95. A 96. B 97. B 98. D 99. D 100. D 101. D 102. D 103. D 104. C 105. C 106. C
107. B
186 Chapter 14. ICT
107. Which is an instant messenger that is used 113. is a type of memory circuitry that
for chatting holds the computer’s start-up routine.
A. MAC A. Cache Memory
B. Google Talk B. ROM (Read Only Memory)
C. Altavista C. RIM (Read Initial Memory)
D. Microsoft Office D. RAM (Random Access Memory)
108. NMEICT means 114. An ASCII is a character-encoding scheme
A. National Mission on E-learning through that is employed by personal computers in
order to represent various characters, num-
M
ICT
bers and control keys that the computer
B. National Mission on Education through user selects on the keyboard. ASCII
ICT
A. American Standard Code for Isolated
RA
C. National Mission on E-commerce Information
through ICT
B. American Standard Code for Informa-
D. National Mission on E-governance tion Integrity
through ICT
C. American Standard Code for Intelligent
109. Which of the following is an instant mes-
Information
saging application?
E D. American Standard Code for Informa-
A. Viber
tion Interchange
B. WhatsApp 115. An unsolicited e-mail message sent to
RE
C. Google Talk many recipient at once is a
D. All of the above A. Virus
110. In a Computer a byte generally consists B. Worm
of:
C. Spam
SH
A. 2 bits
D. Threat
B. 4 bits
116. If the binary equivalent of the decimal
C. 8 bits number 48 is 110000, then the binary equiv-
D. 16 bits alent of the decimal number 51 is given by
111. Which of the following is not an input A. 110100
I
device? B. 110001
JA
A. Monitor C. 110010
B. Joystick D. 110011
C. Keyboard 117. The process of copying files to a CD-ROM
D. Microphone is known as
112. Which of the following enables us to send A. Zipping
the same letter to different persons in MS B. Ripping
Word?
C. Burning
A. Mail join
D. Digitizing
B. Mail copy
118. Which of the following statements regard-
C. Mail insert ing the features of Information and Com-
D. Mail merge munication Technology (ICT) is/are true?
108. B 109. D 110. C 111. A 112. D 113. B 114. D 115. C 116. D 117. C
A. ICT are the main instruments for the A. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
creation of computer networks and the ap- B. Hyper Text Translation Protocol
plications based on them.
C. High TeraByte Transfer Protocol
B. ICT support the spread of information
and knowledge, separating the content D. Hypervisor Test Translation Protocol
from the place where it belongs physically. 123. When IT Act 2000 came into effect?
ER
C. Both (A) and (B) A. 2000 October 17
D. The digital and virtual nature of most B. 2000 November 11

of ICT products allow the expenditure for C. 2001 October 17
them to be maximized. D. 2001 November 11
GD
119. The software used to navigate through the 124. How many schedules are there in IT Act
web is known as 2000?
A. Website A. 2
B. Internet B. 4
AN
C. Web Browser C. 6
D. World Wide Web D. 8
120. With regard to e-mail, what does Bcc : 125. Which is the Act which provides legal
mean? framework for e-Governance in India
CH
A. Blind Carbon Copy : - The users speci- A. IT Act 2000
fied in the Bcc : field will get the e-mail and B. Indian Penal Code
see the addresses in the to : and cc : fields.
C. IT (amendment) Act 2008
B. Blind Carbon Copy : The users specified
in the Bcc : field will get the e-mail but will D. None of the above
126. Which section of IT Act deals with the
N
not see the addresses in the to : and cc :

fields. legal recognition of electronic records?
C. Blind Computer Communication : - The A. Section 1

YA
users specified in the Bcc : field will get the B. Section 2

e-mail and see the addresses in the to : and
C. Section 3
cc : fields.
D. Section 4
RA
D. Blind Computer Communication :- The

127. Which section of IT Act deals with the
users specified in the Bcc : field will get the
appointment of Controller of certifying au-
e-mail but it will be an audio file because
thorities
this is how blind people get e-mail.
121. Random Access Memory (RAM), a form A. Section 5
NA
of computer storage, is a memory. B. Section 11

A. Volatile C. Section 14
B. Permanent D. Section 17
C. Secondary 128. Which section of IT Act deals with Hack-
ing of computer systems and its penalties?
D. Non-volatile
A. Section 61
122. In Computer Networking, HTTP is re-
ferred to as a stateless protocol as servers B. Section 63
do not maintain any information about past C. Section 66
client requests. HTTP is an acronym for
D. Section 68
118. C 119. C 120. A 121. A 122. A 123. A 124. B 125. A 126. D 127. D 128. C
188 Chapter 14. ICT
129. Which section of IT Act deals with Cyber A. Two year imprisonment or 2 lakh ru-
terrorism? pees penalty or both
A. Section 66A B. Three year imprisonment or 2 lakh ru-
pees penalty or both
B. Section 66C
C. Three year imprisonment or 3 lakh ru-
C. Section 66D
D. Section 66F
D. Three year imprisonment or 5 lakh ru-
130. Which section of IT Act was invalidated pees penalty or both
by Supreme Court of India
M
135. Which section of IT Act 2000 propose a
A. Section 66A punishment of life imprisonment
B. Section 66C A. Section 66A
RA
C. Section 66D B. Section 66B
D. Section 66F C. Section 66C
131. The date on which Supreme Court of India D. Section 66F
invalidated Section 66A of IT Act 2000:
136. What is the proposed punishment for Cy-
A. 01.01.2015 ber Terrorism in IT Act
B. 24.03.2015
E
A. Life Imprisonment
C. 30.04.2015 B. 6 year imprisonment
RE
D. 01.06.2015 C. 10 year imprisonment
132. What is the maximum penalty for damage D. 1 crore rupees penalty
to Computer, Computer systems, unautho-
rized access, download of data, infecting 137. What is the punishment for identity theft
SH
with virus, denial of access etc as per Sec- in IT Act

tion 43 A. Two year imprisonment or 1 lakh ru-
A. Rs. 50 lakh pees penalty or both
B. Rs. 75 lakh B. Three year imprisonment or 1 lakh ru-

C. Rs.1 crore
I

D. Rs.5 crore pees penalty or both
JA
133. What is the punishment for hacking of

computers
138. Major amendments to IT Act 2000 was
A. Life Imprisonment
introduced in the form of IT (amendment)
B. Three year imprisonment or 2 lakh ru- Act 2008, which came into effect on
A. 2008 June 1
B. 2008 October 27
C. 2009 July 3
D. Three year imprisonment or 10 lakh ru-
pees penalty or both D. 2009 October 27
134. What is the penalty for destroying com- 139. IT Act 2000 amended various sections of
puter source code which of the following Acts
129. D 130. A 131. B 132. C 133. C 134. B 135. D 136. A 137. B 138. D 139. D
140. A
A. Indian Penal Code 1860 145. Which Act in India focuses on data pri-
B. Reserve Bank of India Act 1934 vacy and information technology
C. Indian Evidence Act 1872 & Bankers A. IT Act 2000

Book Evidence Act 1891 B. Indian Penal Code
D. All of the above C. IT (amendment) Act 2008
140. What is the penalty for publishing images
ER
D. Banking Regulation Act 1949
of a person’s private parts without consent,
as per IT Act 2000? 146. Which section of IT Act 2000 deals with
the punishment for cheating by imperson-
A. 3 years imprisonment or 2 lakh rupees ation by using computer resources?
penalty or both
GD
A. Section 66A
B. 5 years imprisonment or 5 lakh rupees
penalty or both B. Section 66C
C. Life imprisonment C. Section 66D

D. None of the above D. Section 66F
AN
141. Which section of IT Act deals with Child 147. What is the time limit for filing appeal
pornography against the order of Cyber appellate tri-
bunal?
A. Section 67A
B. Section 67B A. 20 days
CH
C. Section 67C B. 40 days
D. Section 67D C. 60 days

142. The following punishment is mentioned D. 80 days
in which section of IT Act 2000 ’3 years of 148. Which is the appeal court on the orders
imprisonment and/or 5 lakh repees penalty issued by Cyber appellate tribunal?
N
for first conviction & 5 years of imprison-

ment and/or 10 lakh rupees penalt A. High Court
YA
A. Section 65 B. District Court
B. Section 66 C. Supreme Court
C. Section 67 D. Munsiff Court

149. The section deals with the use of elec-
RA
D. Section 68
tronic records and digital signature in Gov-
143. Which are the sections of IT Act applica-
ernment and its agencies
ble for Cyber pornography?
A. Section 2
A. 66, 66A, 66B
NA
B. 67, 67A, 67B B. Section 4
C. 67, 67C, 67D C. Section 6
D. None of the above D. Section 8

144. Which are the section of the IT Act deals 150. The section deals with legal recognition
with Credit card fraud? of digital signature
A. 66, 66C, 66D A. Section 1
B. 42, 67, 67A, 67B B. Section 5
C. 43, 66, 66C, 66D C. Section 7
D. None of the above D. Section 9
141. B 142. C 143. B 144. C 145. C 146. C 147. C 148. A 149. C 150. B 151. A
190 Chapter 14. ICT
151. The section deals with legal recognition 152. How many rows are there in MS Excel
of electronic records 2003?
A. Section 5 A. 65536
B. Section 4 B. 66536
C. 67536
C. Section 3
D. 68536
D. Section 2
M
RA
E
RE
I SH
JA
152. A
ER
15. Modern history of education
GD
AN
CH
1. Complex of colleges is called . 5. Secondary Education Commission was es-
tablished in
A. Unitary University
A. 1964
B. Federal University
B. 1948
C. State University
C. 1952
N
D. Central University
2. The aim of education in Vedic system of D. 1854
6. Kothari Commission was formed under Ed-
YA
education is
ucation Minister
A. Personality development
A. Abdul Kalam Azad
B. Character formation
B. K.L. Shrimali
RA
C. Preservation of culture
C. M.C. Chagala
D. All of the above
D. K.C. Pant
3. The main feature of Muslim education was
7. A draft of challanges in Education was pub-
A. Vocational education lished in
NA
B. Technichal education A. January 1985

C. Propagation of Muslim religion B. August 1985
D. Propagation of Hindu religion C. May 1986
4. Indigenous schools were appreciated by D. August 1986
A. Bentinck 8. In which education system, student was
B. Adam termed as ’Shraman’?
C. Macaulay A. Vedic
B. Islamic
D. Wood
1. B 2. D 3. C 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. B 8. C
192 Chapter 15. Modern history of education
C. Buddhist 14. In which of the following categories the

enrolment of students in higher education
D. None of these
in 2010-11 was beyond the percentage of
9. Which of the following are the tools of good seats reserved?
governance?
A. OBC students
A. Social Audit and Separation of Powers
B. SC students
B. Citizen’s Charter
C. ST students
C. Right to Information
D. Women students
D. All of these
M
15. Which one of the following statements is
10. Right to privacy as a Fundamental Right is
not correct about the University Grants
implied in
Commission (UGC)?
A. Right to Freedom
RA
A. It was established in 1956 by an Act of
B. Right to Life and Personal Liberty Parliament.
C. Right to Equality B. It is tasked with promoting and coordi-
D. Right against Exploitation nating higher education.
11. Which of the following organizations deals C. It receives Plan and Non-Plan funds
with “capacity building programe” on Edu- from the Central Government.
cational Planning?
E
D. It receives funds from State Govern-
A. NCERT ments in respect of State Universities.
RE
B. UGC 16. India has the highest number of students
in colleges after
C. NAAC
A. U.K.
D. NUEPA
12. Which one of the following Councils has B. U.S.A
SH
been disbanded in 2013? C. Australia

A. Distance Education Council (DEC) D. Canada
B. National Council for Teacher Education 17. Indian Institute of Advanced Study is lo-
(NCTE) cated at
C. National Council of Educational Re- A. Dharamshala
I
search and Training (NCERT)

B. Shimla
JA
D. National Assessment and Accreditation

Council (NAAC) C. Solan
13. Who among the following conducted the D. Bilaspur
CNN-IBN - The Hindu 2013 Election 18. Indicate the number of Regional Offices of
Tracker Survey across 267 constituencies National Council of Teacher Education.
in 18 States?
A. 4
A. The Centre for the Study of Developing
Societies (CSDS) B. 5
B. The Association for Democratic Re- C. 6

forms (ADR) D. 8
C. CNN and IBN 19. Who among the following created the office
D. CNN, IBN and The Hindu of the District Collector in India?
9. D 10. B 11. D 12. A 13. A 14. A 15. D 16. B 17. B 18. A 19. B
A. Lord Cornwallis 25. Who was the first Chairman of University

B. Warren Hastings Grant Commission?
C. The Royal Commission on Decentrali- A. Prof. Yash Pal

sation B. Prof. S.S. Bhatnagar
D. Sir Charles Metcalfe C. Prof. D.S. Kothari
ER
20. The aim of value education to inculcate in
D. Dr. Manmohan Singh
students is
26. In which models of Integrated Educa-
A. the moral values tion Programme is being implemented
B. the social values in large scale by governmental and non-
GD
governmental agencies in India?
C. the political values
D. the economic values A. Resource model
21. Indicate the number of Regional Offices of B. Itinerant model
University Grants Commission of India. C. Both (A) and (B)
AN
A. 7 D. Dual Teaching Model
B. 2 27. Which of the following statements are cor-
C. 8 rect about the National Advisory Council
(NAC)?
D. 3
CH
22. Most of the Universities in India A. It is headed by the Prime Minister of
India.
A. conduct teaching and research only
B. It facilitates constant interaction with
B. affiliate colleges and conduct examina-
the leaders of civil society.
tions
C. It provides policy and legislative inputs
N
C. conduct teaching/research and exami-

to the Government of India.
nations
D. Both (B) and (C)
YA
D. promote research only

23. The e-content generation for undergradu- 28. The Government established the Univer-
ate courses has been assigned by the Min- sity Grants Commission by an Act of Par-
istry of Human Resource Development to liament in the year:
RA
A. INFLIBNET A. 1950
B. Consortium for Educational Communi- B. 1956

cation C. 1961
C. National Knowledge Commission D. 1967
NA
D. Indira Gandhi National Open University 29. Universities having central campus for im-
parting education are called:
24. Who heads the committee, constituted by
A. Residential Universities
the Government of India, to draft the New
Education Policy B. Open Universities
A. TSR Subramanian C. Central Universities
B. V K Saraswat D. Deemed Universities
C. Sam Pitroda 30. The policy recommended by the Kothari
Commission vis-a-vis language is
D. Yash Pal
20. A 21. A 22. C 23. B 24. A 25. B 26. C 27. D 28. B 29. C 30. D
A. Hindi A. U.S.S.R.
B. Mother Tongue B. U.K.
C. Two language formula C. U.S.A.
D. Three language formula D. India
37. For equality of educational opportunities
31. Which of the following State does not have
among women, the Constitution has provi-
State Open University?
sion under
A. Assam
A. Article 45
B. Orissa
M
B. Article 15(3)
C. West Bengal C. Article 16(1) and (2)
D. Bihar D. All of the above
RA
32. RTE Act was implemented in India with 38. Refresher courses for teacher education in
effect from secondary level are conducted by
A. 1st May 2010 A. National Council for Teacher Education
B. 1st April 2008 B. National Institute of Education
C. 1st April 2009 C. Academic Staff Colleges
D. State Institutes of Education
D. 1st April 2010
E
39. Chancellor of Visva-Bharati University?
33. The first National Policy on Education in
free India was launched in the year A. President of India
RE
A. 1960 B. President of India
B. 1968 C. Governor of West Bengal
C. 1972 D. Chief Minister of West Bengal

40. The main purpose of Navodaya Vidyalayas
SH
D. 1978 is to give education to

34. Why is Sharda Act important in the Indian A. Urban students
context?
B. Rural students
A. It recommends free education for all
children up to the age of fourteen. C. Rural talented students
D. Girls students only
I
B. It prohibits child marriage of girls.

41. Selection Test for admission to teacher
JA
C. It prohibits child labour. training program was suggested by

D. It recommends supply of study materi- A. NCERT
als to girls free of cost.
B. NCTE
35. Operation Black-Board Programme was in-
C. NAAC
troduced to improve
D. NPERC
A. Primary Education
42. NCTE was established by an act of Parlia-
B. Secondary Education ment in
C. Higher Education A. 1995
D. Teacher Education B. 1996
36. Teacher education is considered as a tech- C. 1997
nical education in
D. 1998
31. B 32. A 33. B 34. B 35. A 36. C 37. D 38. D 39. B 40. C 41. D 42. A 43. A
43. In which country the first Open University C. Ministry of Social Justice and Empow-
was established in the world? erment
A. U.K. D. National Council of Teacher Education
B. U.S.A. 49. The right to free and compulsory education
for children between age group of 6 to 14
C. India has been inserted in Indian Constitution as
ER
D. Australia A. Article 16
44. The Right to Education Act recently passed B. Article 21A
by our Parliament is an extension of the
following article of our Constitution C. Article 45A
GD
D. Article 46
A. 13
50. As per the NCTE norms the man power re-
B. 15 quired for starting up M.Ed. with a strength
C. 45 of 25 students is
D. 55 A. 1 + 4
AN
45. The title of the Reportof Education Com- B. 1 + 5
mission (1964-66) is C. 1 + 8
A. Education and the People of India D. 1 + 9
B. Education and National Development 51. The National flagship programme of edu-
CH
cation (SSA) aims at
C. Learning without Burden
A. Special Education in Primary Schools
D. An Enlightened and Humane Society
B. Universalization of Elementary Educa-
46. The principal function of the NCERT is an
tion
extension work with the State Education
departments centering around the improve- C. Universalization of Secondary Educa-
N
ment of tion
A. school education D. Special Secondary Academic Programs

YA
52. Who have signed MOU for recognition of

B. higher education
Teacher Education in Special Education
C. secondary education Programme in India?
D. technical education A. RCI and NCERT
RA
47. I.A.S.Es in teacher education were started B. NCTE and NAAC

in C. RCI and NCTE
A. 1981 D. NCDS and RCI
NA
B. 1986 53. Which of the following is the incorrect

C. 1990 pair?
A. Expanded programme of immunisation
D. 1992
implemented in India - 1978
48. Which is the following agency regulates
and monitors special education programme B. National iodine deficiency disorder con-
in India? trol programme started in India - 1986
C. Child survival and safe mother hood
A. Ministry of Human Resource and Devel-
programme launched in India - 1992-93
opment
D. National nutritional policy was
B. Rehabilitation Council of India
launched in India - 1992
44. C 45. B 46. A 47. D 48. B 49. B 50. A 51. B 52. C 53. D 54. A
54. The mid-day meal programme for Pr. 60. Special Education Courses are controlled
Schools was initiated with a view to by
A. Increase enrolment A. Special Education Courses are con-
trolled by
B. Increase the employment
B. Special Education Council of India
C. Engage teachers
C. Medical Council of India
D. Involve community
55. VEC under SSA stands for D. National Council of Teacher Education
61. National Knowledge Commission is headed
A. Village Environment Committee
M
by
B. Village Education Committee
A. Azim Premji
C. Village Enabling Council
B. Sam Pitroda
RA
C. Amartya Sen
56. In which year IGNOU was established?
D.
A. 1985
E. S. Kothari
B. 1992 62. First Open University in India was estab-
C. 1980 lished in the year
E
D. 1964 A. 1975
57. Which of the following Committee recom- B. 1962
RE
mended for improvement of Teacher Edu-
C. 1985
cation Programme?
D. 1982
A. Yashpal Committtee
63. Inclusive Education refers to
B. Mehrotra Committee
SH
A. Special education in special schools

C. Ramamurti Committee
B. Special teaching to disabled students
D. Reddy Committee
C. Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan
58. The meaning of Universalisation of Pri-
mary Education is to provide D. Equal educational opportunities to dis-
abled and normal students
A. Free and compulsory education to the
I
children of 6 - 14 years age 64. Which of the following is the apex body in
the area of Teacher Education in India?
JA
B. Free and compulsory education to all

children A. NCTE
C. Education to all girls children B. UGC
D. Education to all C. NCERT
59. The first Committee to be constituted after D. MHRD

independence by the Government of India 65. Who have signed MOU for accreditation of
on Women’s Education was Teacher Education Institutions in India?
A. The Shri Sri Prakasa Committee A. UGC and NCTE
B. Dr. Durgabai Deshmukh Committee B. NCTE and NAAC
C. Dr. Radhakrishnan Commission C. NAAC and UGC
D. The Mudaliar Commission D. None of the above
55. B 56. A 57. C 58. A 59. B 60. A 61. B 62. D 63. D 64. A 65. B 66. C
66. As per NCTE norms, what should be the 72. Which part of Indian Constitution allows
pattern of teaching staff for a unit of 100 every citizen to impart education as per
students at B.Ed. level? ones own religion?
A. 1 + 5 A. Democratic rights
B. 1 + 6 B. Fundamental Rights
C. 1 + 7 C. Directive Principles
ER
D. 1 + 9 D. Concurrent list of centre and the States
73. Which of the following Commission first
67. Which of the following commissions sug-
decentralized the primary education?
gested silent meditation as a part of moral
GD
values? A. Kothari Commission
A. Indian Education Commission B. Sadler Commission
B. Secondary Education Commission C. Hunter Commission
C. National Education Commission D. Mudaliar Commission
AN
74. According to 2011 Census Report, the dif-
D. University Education Commission ference between literacy rates of men and
68. Which of the following is described as women in India is about
Magna-Carta of Indian Education?
A. 10%
A. Wood’s Despatch
CH
B. 17%
B. Macaulay Minutes C. 22%
C. Hunter Commission D. 28%
D. Sargent Commission 75. 10+2+3 year structure of education was pro-
69. District Primary Education Programme posed by ?
N
(DPEP) was started in A. Education Commission, 1964

A. 1986 B. Ramamurti Committee, 1990
YA
B. 1990 C. Secondary Education Commission, 1952

C. 1994 D. University Education Commission, 1948
D. 1999
76. ‘Buniyadi Shiksha’ plan is based on
RA
70. University Education Commission consti- plan.

tuted in 1948 was appointed by
A. Mahatma Gandhi’s
A. Ministry of Education
B. Rabindranath Tagore’s
B. Ministry of Human Resource Develop-
NA
C. Dr. Radhakrishnan’s
ment
D. Maulana Abul Kalam Azad’s
C. ICSSR
77. What is the name of Yashpal Committee
D. NCERT Report(1993)?
71. Education falls under the A. Learning through broadcasting
A. Fundamental Rights B. I.C.T. in teacher education
B. State List C. Learning without burden
C. Concurrent List D. None of these
78. NUEPA is concerned with
D. Constitution of India
67. D 68. A 69. C 70. A 71. C 72. B 73. C 74. B 75. A 76. A 77. C 78. D
A. Educational supervision B. The Saraswat Ayatan of Brahma Ban-

dopadhyay
B. Educational unity
C. Santiniketan Ashram of Rabindranath
C. Educational evaluation
Tagore
D. Educational planning
D. Anushilan Samiti of Barindra Kumar
79. is a women’s university Ghosh
A. Banasthali Vidyapith 84. The Fergusson College at Pune was
B. Jamia-Milia-Islamia founded in 1885 by:
A. The Social Service League
M
C. Agra University
D. RTU B. The Servants of India Society
80. The foundation of modern education sys- C. The Deccan Education Society
RA
tem in India was laid by- D. Poona Sarvajanic Sabha
A. The Charter Act of 1813 85. Who of the following set up Mahila Arya
B. Macaulay’s Minutes of 1835 Samaj to improve Women’s Education?
C. The Hunter Commission of 1882 A. Pandita Ramabai
D. Wood’s Despatch of 1854 B. Sister Nivedita

E
C.
81. Which Committee was appointed to sug-
gest improvement in the University Educa- D. K. Karve
tion system?
RE
E. G.S. Agarkar
A. Whitley Commission
86. Which one of the following policy docu-
B. Philip Hartog Commission ment was called the ‘Magna Carta’ of West-
C. Lord Chancellor Commission ern education system in India?
SH
D. Sadler Commission A. Ma Caulay’s Minute of 1835

82. Who was the first Vice-chancellor of Indian B. Indian Education Commission Reportof
Women’s University of Poona in 1916? 1882
A. Dhondo Keshav Karve C. Charles Woods Despatch of 1854
B. R.G. Bhandarkar D. Releigh Commission Reportof 1902
I
C. Sir Tej Bahadur Sapru 87. From whose accounts do we know about
JA
the functioning of the Nalanda University?

D. W.T. Wacha
A. Megasthenes
83. One of the following organisations was not
associated with National Education Move- B. Hiuen-Tsang
ment in the early twentieth century. C. Bana
A. Bhagabat Chatuspadi of Satischandra D. Fa-hien
Mukherjee
79. A 80. B 81. D 82. B 83. D 84. C 85. A 86. C 87. B

ER
16. Psychology
GD
AN
CH
1. According to John Dewey, the teacher 4. The best definition of Educational Psycho-
should guide students the way of the knowl- logy is a study of teaching and learning”
edge as a in learning process. has been given by
A. facilitator A. W. Kolesnik
B. guider B. James Ross
N
C. philosopher C. Charles E. Skinner

D. partner D. N.L. Munn
YA
2. The primary aim of educational psychology 5. A development perspective involves con-

is cern with changes occurring over time in-
A. To contribute to an understanding of A. Form

RA
sound educational practices. B. Rate

B. To provide the academic background es- C. Sequence
sential for effective teaching.
D. All of these
C. To provide a theoretical framework for 6. Which one of theories of intelligence advo-
NA
educational research. cates the presence of general intelligence

D. To provide the teacher with a greater ’g’ and specific intelligence’s’?
appreciation of his role in the education of A. Anarchic theory
the child.
B. Guilford’s theory of intellect
3. According to Psychology, all education is
C. Spearman’s two factor theory
A. Deliberate
D. Vernon’s hierarchical theory
B. Functional
7. The thinking process involved in produc-
C. Purposive ing an idea or concept that is new, original
and useful is termed as-
D. Self -education
1. D 2. A 3. D 4. C 5. D 6. C 7. A
200 Chapter 16. Psychology
A. Creativity A. It is the growth of heart, brain and mus-

cles.
B. Innovation
B. It is improvement of the ability.
C. Intelligence
C. It is the quantitative change of the child.
D. Synectics
8. Which of the following is NOT an example D. it is a complex process of integrating
of discrete variable? many structures and functions.
14. What is called the pre-birth stage of a child?
A. Age
A. From 0 to 2 years
B. Gender
M
B. From 3 to 7 years
C. Marital status
C. From conception to birth
D. Place of residence
D. From 3 to 12 years
RA
9. Ramesh and Ankit have the same IQ of 120.
Ramesh is two years younger than Ankit. 15. Which age is called the adolescent age of a
If Ankit is 12 years old, then the mental age child?
of Ramesh is- A. From 3 to 12 yrs.
A. 9 years B. From 13 to 19 yrs.
B. 10 years C. From 20 to 25 yrs.
E
C. 12 years D. From 26 to 35 yrs.
D. 14 years 16. “In youth we learn in age we understand”.
RE
What does this statement indicate?
10. What is the aim of education?
A. Relationship of learning with age.
A. All round development of the personal-
ity of a child. B. Learning stops with adulthood.
B. Moral development of a child. C. In youth our understanding is better.
SH
C. Ability to read, write and do arithmatic. D. There is no learning in childhood.

D. To gain knowledge. 17. What does intellectual development in-
clude?
11. What turns the single fertilized egg into a
full fledged adult? A. The development of mind.
A. Parent’s nourishment. B. Development of thinking, reasoning and

I
interest perception.
B. Enviornment.
JA
C. Development of skills.
C. Cycle of the growth and development.
D. Development of emotions.
D. Interaction with the outside world
18. How many words does a child learn to
12. What is meant by growth in the strict sense speak at the age of 2, according to Prof.
of the terminology of psychology? Smith?
A. It is the mental growth of a child. A. 150 words
B. It is the increase in size, weight and B. 372 words
height.
C. 172 words
C. It is related to the functions of the body.
D. 272 words
D. All of the above. 19. On which animal Pavlov conducted his ex-
13. What is meant by development? periment
8. A 9. C 10. A 11. C 12. B 13. D 14. C 15. B 16. A 17. B 18. D 19. C
A. Rat A. Lindzey
B. Cat B. Festinger
C. Dog C. Espinas
D. Bird D. Baldwin
20. Mirror drawing apparatus is related to 26. The most difficult age for the development
of a child is -
ER
A. Conditioning
A. Early childhood
B. Trial and error
B. Teen age
C. Span of memory
C. Young age
GD
D. Forgetting
D. Adult age
21. Strains and disparities appears in the child’s
personality on account of 27. Heredity and atmosphere are correlate
A. Social disadjustment A. Companions

B. Dependent
AN
B. Bad environment
C. Elders
C. Parents psychological behavior towards
the child D. All of these
D. Parents aggressive behavior in front of 28. Which of the following factors comes in
the way of girls’ personal rights?
CH
the child
22. What factor influence a healthy growth of A. Social Recognition
a child B. Family
A. One way love C. Gender Difference
B. Parent’s balanced behavior D. All of these
N
C. According to environment 29. Which of the following is not an accepted

stage in Kohlberg’s Theory of Moral Devel-
D. Good food
opment?
YA
23. If a mother shows much love,then a child’s

personality will develop A. Interpersonal relations
A. One way B. Individualism

C. Social contract and social rights
RA
B. Two way
D. Universal principles
C. Multi dimention
30. Which of the following is not considered a
D. Abnormal way factor of cognition?
24. Early experiences determine late person-
A. Fear
NA
ality characteristics of social development.

This was maintained by B. Retreat
A. Atkinson C. Anger
B. Morgan D. Hunger
31. An ideal teacher should concentrate
C. Freud
A. On teaching methods
D. Semmul
25. Who said “children have innate inclination B. On the subject being taught
to imitate their seniors, both in mental and C. On students and their behaviours
social development”?
D. On all of these
20. B 21. C 22. B 23. A 24. C 25. D 26. B 27. D 28. D 29. C 30. B 31. D 32. A
32. The motive of the concept of curricular flex- A. Generalizable

ibility is to benefit B. Valid
A. Disabled students C. Reliable
B. Minority students D. All of the above
C. Reserved castes 39. It is important that basic sensory capacities
are developing properly because:
D. All of these
A. They are the basis for learning
33. Which of the following is not considered a
tool for formative assessment B. If not, emotional development may be
M
comprised
A. Oral questions
C. Social interaction depends on them
B. MCQ
D. All of the above
C. Assignments
RA
40. Habituation:
D. Projects
A. Develops through interpersonal inter-
34. What do you understand by the term Peer action
Group?
B. Relies on good vision
A. People of same profession
C. Is based on the fact that attention de-
B. Friends and acquaintances clines as an event is presented repeatedly
E
C. Family members and relatives D. Is important for development of sucking
RE
D. All of these
41. The Bayley Scales of Infant Development:
35. A problem child has
A. Are the most widely used method of
A. Pampering guardians assessing infant developmental level
B. Hereditary problems B. Indicates an infant’s abilities relative to
SH
C. IQ problems others of the same age
D. Physical problems C. Measures mental and motor capacities
36. A research technique in which researchers D. All of the above

obtain information about an infant’s spon- 42. An infant’s tendency to attend to the more
taneous behavior is: complex of two stimuli is the basis of the
I
method called:
A. Standardized developmental testing
JA
A. Preference paradigm
B. Experimental designs
B. Habituation
C. Naturalistic observation
C. Conditioned head turning
D. Newborn neurobehavioral exams
D. Contingency learning
37. Experimental designs are characterized by:
43. The rate of habituation is an indication of:
A. Normative data A. Memory
B. Controlled conditions B. Fundamental cognitive processes
C. Automated Stimulation C. Brain integrity
D. All of the above D. All of the above
38. Research findings that explain behavior un- 44. The difference between classical condition-
der many conditions are: ing and operant conditioning is:
33. B 34. D 35. A 36. C 37. B 38. A 39. D 40. C 41. D 42. A 43. D 44. B
A. Classical conditioning is based on con- A. The initial behavioral and physiological

sequences of an event while operant con- response to a stressful event
ditioning is based on repeated pairings of
B. The time that it takes to return to a calm
two events
state following a stressful event
B. Classical conditioning is based on re-
C. A mother’s response to an infant’s dis-
peated pairings of two events while operant
tress
ER
conditioning is based on the consequences
of an event D. All of the above
C. Whether or not the infant likes the re- 50. Vagal tone has been used as a measure of
ward physiological regulation because:
GD
D. Classical conditioning is uses motor be- A. It measures the parasympathetic ner-
havior but operant conditioning uses any vous system
behavior
B. It’s non-invasive
45. Infants of mothers who are responsive:
C. It’s related to control by the brain of
AN
A. Learn to expect this heart rate in response to arousal
B. Get upset when mothers are not respon-
D. All of the above
sive
51. Infants express emotions by:
C. Use their mothers for security
A. Crying
CH
D. All of the above
46. Security of attachment to mother is typi- B. Facial expressions
cally measured by: C. Body posture
A. Separation-reunion procedure D. All of the above
B. Observation of mother-infant play 52. Facial expressions are coded from video-
N
C. Questionnaire tape by:

D. All of the above A. Scoring position of the mouth, chin and
YA
47. A 9-12 month milestone in social compe- the entire head

tence is: B. Having coders judge the expression
A. Attending to books C. Scoring muscle movements of eye, brow
and mouth
RA
B. Engaging in joint attention

C. Laughing while being bounced D. Matching the expression to illustrations
of standard expressions
D. Playing with mother
53. Temperament is considered:
48. Cortisol is:
NA
A. A hormone released by the pituitary A. A relatively unchanging style of inter-

gland in response to stress acting with the environment
B. A hormone released by the adrenal B. An important indicator of cognitive po-

glands in response to sunlight tential
C. A hormone released by the adrenal C. A dynamic characteristic that develops

glands in response to stress over time
D. A hormone produced in the liver and D. To be determined by interactions with
stored in the gall bladder the social environment
49. Stress reactivity refers to: 54. Temperament is measured using:
45. D 46. A 47. B 48. C 49. A 50. D 51. D 52. C 53. A 54. D
A. Parent questionnaires A. 250

B. Infant observation B. 2500
C. Experimental procedures C. 25000

D. 250000
D. All of the above
61. Myelinisation is the process where:
55. The mirror-rouge task measures:
A. The nerve cell becomes insulated
A. An infant’s ability to touch his/her nose
B. Nerve cells migrate to their final posi-
B. An infant’s understanding of self tion
M
C. An infant’s recognition of his/her C. The cells form a line
mother D. The nerve cells form connections with
D. All of the above other nerve cells
RA
62. Teratogens are those agents which:
56. The period when the major organs of the
body begin to form is the period. A. Adversely affect development
B. Support development
A. Embryonic
C. Improve development
B. Fetal
D. Have no effect on development
C. Germinal 63. At which time period is the body most sen-
E
D. Newborn sitive to disruption of growth?
57. How does the development of the body dur- A. Germinal
RE
ing the prenatal period proceed? B. Embryonic
A. At the same rate all over C. Fetal
B. Parts nearer the feet develop first D. All equally
64. The first sense to develop is:
SH
C. Parts near the head develop first

A. Touch
D. Parts near the heart develop first
B. Hearing
58. After fertilization the brain begins to de-
velop at: C. Sight
D. Taste
A. 8 days
65. Visual accommodation is the ability of the
I
B. 18 days individual to:

JA
C. 8 weeks A. See in color

D. 18 weeks B. Focus its eyes
59. The part of the brain that develops first is C. See things in its room
the: D. Blink
A. Cerebral cortex 66. In the context of education, socialization
means
B. Neocortex
A. creating one’s on social norms
C. Midbrain
B. respecting elders in society
D. Hindbrain C. adapting and adjusting to social env-
60. At its peak of development brain cells iornment
are being produced every minute. D. always following social norms
55. B 56. A 57. C 58. B 59. D 60. D 61. A 62. A 63. B 64. A 65. B 66. C 67. C
67. What is the principle of anticipation A. It causes a person to move towards a

goal
A. The child anticipates his growth.
B. It satisfies the person’s biological needs
B. He is more concerned about his growth.
C. It helps in achieving a psychological am-
C. He modifies his behaviour anticipating
bition
his future career.
D. It keeps away from an unpleasant situa-
ER
D. None of the above.
tion
68. Learning depends on cognitive develop- 74. A child writes with his / her left hand and
ment is comfortable doing things with it, she / he
A. Always should be -
GD
B. Some Times A. Discouraged
C. Never B. Made to write with the left hand
D. In calculation C. Allow his preference
AN
69. Who gives more stress to the philosophy D. Send to seek medical help
of social constructivism? 75. Which of the following is NOT a sign of
A. Piaget ’being gifted’?
B. Kohlberg A. Curiosity
B. Creativity
CH
C. Vygotsky
C. Poor relationship with peers
D. Dewey
70. Who is the father of “Theory of Multiple D. Interest in extra reading
Intelligence”? 76. Language of word is not necessary for
A. Gardner A. Imaginative Thinking

N
B. Vygotsky B. Conceptual Thinking
C. Bruner C. Associative Thinking

YA
D. Piaget D. Perceptual Thinking

77. The best place of social development for a
71. Single factor theory of intelligence was
12 years old child is
given by
RA
A. Neighborhood
A. Alfred Binet
B. Family
B. Thorndike
C. Playground
C. Freeman
D. School
NA
D. None of them
78. Select “the educable” group of students
72. Which indicates the change in the quality from the following groups, indicating dif-
or character of a child? ferent I.Q. levels
A. Growth A. 50 to 70
B. Development B. 30 to 50
C. Learning C. 70 to 90
D. Environment D. 40 to 80
73. Which of the following statement is not 79. IQ scores are generally correlated with
appropriate to motivation as a process academic performance.
68. A 69. C 70. A 71. A 72. B 73. D 74. C 75. C 76. A 77. C 78. A 79. C
A. Least A. feeling of self-actualization

B. Perfectly B. feeling of satiation about life
C. Highly C. anxiety and concern about themselves
D. Moderately D. feeling of fear about sins committed in
childhood
80. Nature of children are like
86. How a “Teacher” should behave with the
A. Imitative students?
B. Constructive A. Father Like
M
C. Imaginative B. Friend Like
D. Destructive C. General
81. Theory of multiple intelligence implies the D. Elder Like
RA
following except
87. Who is regarded as the first teacher of a
A. intelligence is a distinct set of process- child?
ing operations used by an individual to
A. Headmaster
solve problems.
B. Class Teacher
B. disciplines should be presented in a
number of ways C. Mother
E
C. learning could be assessed through a D. Tutor
variety of means 88. Sign of creative child is his/her
RE
D. emotional intelligence is not related to A. Intelligence
IQ
B. Good behavior
82. Gifted students are
C. Creativity
A. non-assertive of their needs
D. Good memory
SH
B. independent in their judgments 89. The raw material of thinking is

C. independent of teachers A. Symbols
D. introvert in nature B. Semantics
83. The cardinal principles of learner centered C. Man
education are
I
D. Child
A. Learning by doing
90. What is the unit of Heredity?
JA
B. Learning by living
A. Chromosome
C. Both B. Gene
D. None of these C. Fertilized cell
84. is the capacity to acquire and apply
D. Zygote
knowledge.
91. Which one of the following is an example
A. Personality of a fine motor skill?
B. Intelligence A. Climbing
C. Aptitude B. Hopping
D. Attitude C. Running
85. Adolescents may experience D. Writing
80. A 81. D 82. B 83. C 84. B 85. A 86. B 87. C 88. C 89. A 90. B 91. D 92. B
92. Is the ratio of mental age to the chrono- A. Individual difference

logical age multiplied by 100. B. Mental retardation
A. Emotional quotient C. Educational backwardness
B. Intelligence quotient D. All of these
C. Both 99. The process of expansion of an individual’s
capacities quantitatively, should be termed
ER
D. None of these
as:
93. Which of the following is not a product of
A. Development
learning?
B. Growth
A. Skill
GD
C. Equilibration
B. Knowledge
D. Maturation
C. Maturation
100. Teaching-Learning process fundamentally
D. Physical structure completed in
AN
94. A group of students are found to be harass- A. Class room
ing another student. What should be your
B. School
reaction?
C. Society
A. Punish the students
D. Home
B. Send to their parents
CH
101. In which of the following stages the child
C. Counsel the students individually looks self-centered?
D. Give them a severe warning A. Infancy
95. What is meant by Schema? B. Early childhood
A. Chunking mechanisms C. Adolescence
N
B. Learning techniques D. Adulthood

102. Primary education helps
C. Organized packets of information
YA
stored in long-term memory A. Socialization of child

D. Defense mechanisms B. Democratization of child
96. How many stages of cognitive development C. In course understanding
RA
recommended by Piaget? D. All of the above

A. Seven Stages 103. The period of sensory motor adaptation
of Piaget is
B. Six Stages
A. 0-2 years
C. Four Stages
NA
B. 1-3 years
D. Two Stages
C. 3-5 years
97. Smallest unit of meaning in a language is
D. 4-6 years
A. Syntax 104. Who is the father of genetic epistemol-
B. Morpheme ogy?
C. Pragmatics A. Piaget
D. Phoneme B. Bruner
98. Intelligence testing is useful for knowing C. Vygotsky
D. Dewey
93. C 94. A 95. C 96. C 97. B 98. D 99. A 100. A 101. B 102. B 103. A 104. A
105. Child growth as proceeding through an or- 111. Performance of a student can be evaluated
ganized sequence of stages divided roughly in the best possible manner through
by age in view of
A. Weekly tests
A. Kohlberg
B. Annualy tests
B. Piaget
C. An on-going overall assessment
C. Vygotsky throughout the year
D. Skinner D. monthly tests
106. The most important quality of an effective
112. One of the ways to deal with the devel-
teacher is
M
opment of sexuality in children during pu-
A. Deep knowledge about the subject berty is defense mechanism, like
taught
A. Sublimation
B. A strict disciplinarian
RA
B. Projection
C. Good rapport with the students
C. Compensation
D. A good motivator
107. Questioning in the class-room D. Rationalization
A. Clarifies the subject-matter 113. RTE stands to
B. Develops inactivity A. Right to Education

E
C. Is a wastage of time B. Right true education
RE
D. Creates indiscipline C. Right time education
108. When a child ’fails’, it means D. Ruraly true eduaction
A. the child has not memorized the an- 114. Primary eduaction helps
swers properly
A. Socialization of child
SH
B. the child should have taken private tu-

tion B. Democratization of child
C. the system has failed C. In course uderstanding
D. the child is not fit for studies D. All of the above
109. Navodaya Schools have been established 115. The development that proceeds in the di-
to rection of the longitudinal axis i.e; head to
I
A. increase number of schools in rural ar- foot is termed as

JA
eas A. Cephalo-caudal development

B. provide good education in rural areas
B. Proximo distal
C. complete ’Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan’
C. Interrelation
D. check wastage of education in rural ar-
eas D. Intergration
110. Inclusive Education 116. Single Factor Theory of Intelligence was
given by
A. celebrates diversity in the classroom
A. Alfred Binet
B. encouraging strict admission procedure
C. incudes indoctrination of facts B. Thorndike
D. includes teachers from marginalized C. Freeman

groups D. None of them
105. D 106. D 107. A 108. C 109. B 110. A 111. C 112. A 113. A 114. D 115. A
116. A 117. C
117. The current movement of behaviour mod- D. Both Heredity and Environment inter-
ificatio, wherein tokens are awarded for acting separately
correct responses, is 123. Term PSRN in development implies-
A. Herbart’s five steps A. Problem solving, reasoning and numer-
B. Lock’s Tabula rasa acy
B. Problem solving relationship and nu-
C. Thorndike’s Law of Effect
ER
meracy
D. Thorndike’s Law of Exercise
C. Perceptual skill, reasoning and numer-
118. The greatest technique to review progress acy
and improvement of the kid is-
D. Perceptual skill, relationship and num-
GD
A. Psychoanalytic Method bers
B. Comparative Method 124. Vygotsky proposed that Child Develop-
ment is-
C. Developmental Method
A. Due to genetic components of a culture
D. Statistical Method
AN
B. A product of social interaction
119. Socialization is a course of by which
youngsters and adults study from C. A product of formal education
A. Family D. A product of assimilation and accom-
modation
B. School
CH
125. Gardner formulated a list of Seven Intelli-
C. Peers gencies, which among the following is not
D. All of those one of them?
120. Which one of many following is the true A. Spatial Intelligence
assertion similar to Cephalocaudal Princi- B. Emotional Intelligence
ple of Child’s Development
N
C. Interpersonal Intelligence
A. Development is from head to foot
D. Linguistic Intelligence
B. Development is from foot to go
YA
126. Which of the following is the true state-

C. Development is from center to periph- ment in reference to Intelligence?
ery A. Intelligence is the ability to adjust
D. None of those B. Intelligence is the ability to learn
RA
121. The best method to study growth and de- C. Intelligence is the ability of Abstract
velopment of the child is- Reasoning
A. Psychoanalytic Method D. All of these
B. Comparative Method 127. “A Child can think logically about objects
NA
and events” This is the characteristic given

C. Developmental Method
by Piaget of stage-
D. Statistical Method A. Sensory Motor
122. Determinants of Individual differences in
B. Pre Operational
human beings relate to-
C. Concrete Operational
A. Differences in Environment
D. Formal Operation
B. Differences in Heredity
128. Which of the following does not belong
C. Interaction between Heredity and Envi- to the categories of Coping strategies that
ronment women commonly engaged in-
118. C 119. A 120. A 121. C 122. C 123. C 124. B 125. B 126. D 127. C 128. C
A. Acceptance 134. Special education is related to-

B. Resistance A. Educational for talented students
C. Revolution B. Educational programmes for disabled
D. Adaptation C. Training programmes for Teachers
129. What should be the role of teacher in meet- D. Training programme for retarded
ing the individual differences? 135. In CCE, Formative and Summative Assess-
A. Try to know the abilities, interest and ment totals to-
aptitude of individuals A. 40% and 60% respectively
M
B. Try to adjust the curriculum as per the B. 60% and 40% respectively
needs of individuals
C. 50% and 50% respectively
C. Both (A) and (B)
D. None of these
RA
D. None of these
136. Which article enjoins that “All minorities
130. If a child has mental age of 5 years and whether based on religion or language shall
chronological age of 4 years than what will have the right to establish and administer
be the IQ of child? education institutions of their choice”?
A. 125 A. Article 29 (1)
B. 80 B. Article 29 (2)
E
C. 100 C. Article 30 (1)
D. 120
RE
D. Article 30 (2)
131. Which of the following is not the tool for 137. If a child writes 16 as 61 and gets confused
Formative Assessment in sholastic domain? between Band D, this is case of-
A. Conversation Skill A. Visual Impairment
B. Multiple Choice Question
SH
B. Learning Disability
C. Projects C. Mental Impairment
D. Oral Questions D. Mental Retardation
132. A few students in your class are exception- 138. As a teacher what techniques you would
ally bright, you will teach them- follow to motivate students of your class-
A. Along with the class A. By setting induction and Use of black
I
B. Along with higher classes board

JA
C. By using Enriched programmes B. By illustration

D. Only when they want C. By active participation of students
133. The major purpose of diagnostic test is D. All of these
that of identifying- 139. What are the factors related to learner that
A. The General area of weakness in class effects the learning?
performance A. Physical and Mental health of the
B. Specific nature of remedial Programme learner
needed B. Level of aspiration and achievement mo-
C. The causes underlying academic diffi- tivation
culties C. Readiness and Willpower
D. The specific nature of pupil difficulties D. All of these
129. C 130. A 131. C 132. C 133. C 134. B 135. A 136. C 137. B 138. D 139. D
140. A
140. Cognitive Development means- 145. Which of the following Motives are con-
sidered as primary motives?
A. Development of intelligence
B. Development of child A. Physiological Motives
C. Development of Physical Skills B. Psychological Motives
D. Development of individual C. Social Motives
ER
141. Which of the following are the External D. Educational Motives
Factors affecting the interest of students in 146. According to john Bowlby, children be-
classroom? come depressed as a result of
A. Emotions and Sentiments A. self-devaluing cognitive schema
GD
B. Culture and Training B. exposure to prolonged, uncontrollable
C. Attitudes of students negative experiences
D. Goals and motives C. insecure attachments

142. An intelligent student is not doing well D. living with depressed parents
AN
in studies. What is the best course of the 147. “The individual develops through the
action for the teacher? head, the heart and the hand” this was the
A. Wait till he performs better educational philosophy of
B. Find out reason for his under achieve- A. Herbart

CH
ment B. Comenius
C. Give him grace marks in the examina- C. Pestalozzi
tion
D. Froebel
D. Ask his parents to withdraw from 148. The coginitive structures into which chil-
school dren organize their behaviour and knowl-
N
143. Who was the pioneer of Classical Condi- edge are called
tioning?
A. Accomodations
YA
A. Skinner
B. Framework
B. Pavlov
C. Operations
C. Watson
D. Schemata
RA
D. Thorndike 149. Education is called a triangular process.

144. It is said that teacher should be resource- Which are the three sides of the triangle?
ful, This means that-
A. School, Knowledge and Teacher
A. He should have enough money and
B. Books, School and Teacher
NA
property so that he may not have to take

up tuitions C. Social Environment, Teacher and Stu-
dents
B. He should have contacts with high au-
thorities so that he may not be harmed D. None of these
C. He should have adequate knowledge so 150. Absenteeism can be tackled by :
that he may be able to solve the problems A. teaching
of students
B. punishing the students
D. He should have good reputation among
C. giving the sweets
students so that authorities may not be able
to take any punitive measure against him D. contacting the parents
141. D 142. B 143. B 144. C 145. A 146. C 147. C 148. D 149. C 150. D 151. D
151. Discipline means: A. Heredity

A. strict-behaviour B. Experiences
B. severe punishment C. Practice

D. Self learning
C. obedience
158. One of, the students of a class hardly talks
D. going by the rules in the class. How would you encourage
152. If any girl child does not corne to school him to express himself?
regularly you will A. By orgariising discussions
M
A. no bother B. encouraging children to take part in
classroom activities
B. struck off her name
C. By organizing educational games/ pro-
C. complain to the Principal grammes in which - children feel like speak-
RA
D. meet the parents and en-courage them ing
153. In co-education you want’t to : D. By giving good marks to those who ex-
press them’selves well
A. make separate rows of boys and girls
159. The stage in which a child begins to think
B. you give preference to boys over girls logically about objects and events is known
as-
C. you give preference to none
E
A. sensory-motor stage
D. you deal according to need
B. formal operational stage
RE
154. One of the basic priniclples of socializing
C. pre-operational stage
Individuals is :
D. concrete operational stage
A. religion
160. Four distinct stages of children’s intel-
B. caste lectual development were identified by-
SH
C. educational A. Kohlberg
D. imitation B. Eriskon
155. Good reading aims at develop-ing: C. Skinner

D. Piaget
A. understanding
161. Parents should play a role in the learn-
I
B. pronunciation ing process of young children.

JA
C. sensitivity A. negative
D. increasing factual knowledge B. proactive
156. The primary duty of a teacher is to be re- C. sympathetic
sponsible to his/her: D. neutral
A. family 162. Which is the place where the child’s cog-
nitive development is defined in the best
B. students way?
C. society A. Playground
D. nation B. School and Classroom
157. Which of the following is not related to C. Auditorium
educational achieve-ment?
D. Home
152. D 153. D 154. C 155. A 156. B 157. A 158. C 159. C 160. D 161. C 162. B
163. B
163. is considered a sign of motivated C. treated normally in the classroom and

teaching. provided support through audio CDs
A. Maximum attendance in class D. given special treatment in the classroom
B. Remedial work given by the teacher
169. Most important work of teacher is-
C. Questioning by students
A. to organize teaching work
ER
D. Pin drop silence in the class
B. to deliver lecture in class
164. At lower classes play-way method of
teaching is based on- C. to take care of children
A. theory of physical education pro- D. to evaluate the students
GD
grammes 170. A teacher should be-
B. principles of methods of teaching A. Honest
C. psychological principles of develop- B. Dilligent
ment and growth
AN
C. Dutiful
D. sociological principles of teaching
D. Punctual
165. Dyslexia is associated with
171. Environmental education should be
A. mental disorder taught in schools because-
CH
B. mathematical disorder A. it will affect environmental pollution
C. reading disorder B. it is important part of life
D. behavioural disorder C. it will provide job to teachers
166. Education of children with special needs D. we cannot escape from environment
should be provided 172. At primary level, it is better to teach in
N
A. along with other normal children mother language because-
B. by methods developed for special chil- A. it develops self-confidence in children

YA
dren ,in special schools B. it makes learning easy

C. in special school C. it is helpful in intellectual development
D. by special teachers in special schools D. it helps children in learning in natural
RA
167. In the process of learning, motivation- atmosphere

A. sharpens the memory of learners 173. Women are better teacher at primary level
because-
B. differentiates new learning from old
A. they behave more patiently with chil-
NA
learning
dren
C. makes learners think unidirectionally
B. they are ready to work with low salary
D. creates interest for learning among new
learners C. higher qualification is not needed in this
profession
168. A student of grade 5 with visual deficiency
should be- D. they have less chances in other profes-
sion
A. excused to do a lower level of work
174. You have been selected in all the four pro-
B. helped with his/her routine work by par- fessions given below. Where would you
ents and friends like to go?
164. C 165. C 166. A 167. D 168. C 169. A 170. C 171. B 172. D 173. A 174. A
175. A
A. Teacher A. is physically handicapped

B. Police B. belongs to low socio-economic status
C. Army C. has weak personality
D. Bank D. has immature mental development

181. The success of teacher is-
175. What is most important while writing on
blackboard? A. high achievement of students
A. Good writing B. good traits of his/her personality
C. his/her good teaching
M
B. Clarity in writing
C. Writing in big letters D. his/her good character
182. A Deepawali fair is being organized in
D. Writing in small letters
your school. What would you like to do?
RA
176. Some students send a greeting card to you
A. only to visit the fair
on teacher’s day. What will you do? You
will- B. to take part in function
A. do nothing C. to take a shop to sell something
B. say thanks to them D. to distribute free water to visitors

183. The most important trait of a student is-
E
C. ask them to not to waste money
A. sense of responsibility
D. reciprocate the good wishes to them
RE
B. to speak truth
177. A student comes late in your class. Then
you will- C. co-operation
A. inform to parents D. obedience

184. The purpose of basic education scheme is-
B. punish him
SH
A. universalization of primary education

C. try to know the reason
B. to vocationalise the eduction
D. not pay attention there
C. to fulfil basic need of persons through
178. When the students become failed, it can education
be understood that-
D. to make education compulsory for all
I
A. The system has failed 185. You are teaching a topic in class and a stu-
JA
B. The teachers failure dent ask a question unrelated to the topic.

What will you do?
C. The text-books failure
A. you will allow him to ask unrelated
D. The individual student’s failure question
179. It is advantage of giving home work that B. you will not allow him to ask unrealated
students- question
A. remain busy at home C. you will consider it indiscipline and pun-
B. study at home ish him
C. may be checked for their progress D. you will answer the question after the
class
D. may develop habit of self study
186. If you are unable to get a job of teacher,
180. A teacher has serious defect is he/she- then you will-
176. B 177. C 178. D 179. D 180. D 181. C 182. B 183. D 184. C 185. D 186. D
187. A
A. start giving tuition at home A. Encoding - retrieval - storage

B. remain at home till you get a job B. Encoding - storage - retrieval
C. take some another job C. Storage - encoding - retrieval
D. continue applying for teaching D. Retrieval - encoding - storage
187. A teacher can motivate the students by- 193. Which one of the following does not con-
tribute to memory?
ER
A. giving suitable prizes
A. Interesting/disinteresting learning ma-
B. giving proper guidance terial
C. giving examples B. Goal behind learning
GD
D. delivering speech in class C. Gender
188. If a student does not pay any respect to D. Some rest after resting
you, then you will- 194. In terms of efficiency in scanning informa-
A. ignore him tion, which one of the following strategies
is considered be the best?
AN
B. award less marks in examination
A. Conservative focusing
C. talk to his/her parents
B. Focus gambling
D. rebuke him
C. Simultaneous scanning
189. A procedure that establishes a sequence
CH
of responses which lead to a reward follow- D. Successive scanning
ing the final response and then working 195. In retrograde amnesia, which of the fol-
backwards is called lowing kind of problem is seen :
A. Shapping A. Problem with recalling previously
learned material
B. Stimulus control
N
B. Problem with face recognition

C. Chaining
C. Difficulty finding routes
D. Stimulus generalization
YA
D. Poor encoding of verbal material

190. In a study on scaling of attitude items,
eleven statements were included. What 196. Socialization is a process by which chil-
would be the number of pairs of attitude dren and adults learn from ’?
statements? A. Family
RA
A. 21 B. School
B. 55 C. Peers
C. 110 D. All of these
197. Which one of the following is the true
NA
D. 221
statement corresponding to Cephalocaudal
191. Who first attempted to describe personal- Principle of Child’s Development?
ity traits in terms of Lexican descriptors?
A. Development is from head to foot
A. Ross Stagner
B. Development is from foot to head
B. Allport and Odbert
C. Development is from middle to periph-
C. R. B. Cattell ery
D. Coasta and McCrae D. None of these
192. Which of the following is correctly ar- 198. If level of imaginary fear (worry) is more
ranged? than normal it is termed as:
188. A 189. C 190. B 191. B 192. B 193. C 194. A 195. A 196. D 197. A 198. A
A. anxiety 204. Which of the following measures should

B. tension be adopted to check educational backward-
ness?
C. depression
A. Continuous evaluation and regular feed-
D. none of these back
199. All are the characterstics of learning ex-
B. Remedial teaching
cept:
A. learning is the process of the organism C. Adjustment and behaviour training
B. learning is a process relating to educat- D. All of the above
M
ing environment 205. What is the narrow concept of heredity?
C. learning is a result of practice A. Offspring of a man will be a child not a
D. learning reinforces further learning dog.
RA
200. A teacher can use Gestalf theory in which B. Offspring will have the same traits as
of the following situations? those of parents
A. Students of higher classes who are able C. Offspring will not have the traits of par-
to perceive abstract material ents
B. Organising the subject matter systemat- D. None of the above
ically according to its structure 206. Who are the responsible for the develop-
E
C. Claritying the purpose before the start ment of traits?
of teaching in the class A. Parents
RE
D. All of the above B. Cells
201. Guidance is a process by which an indi-
C. Genes
vidual is helped to:
A. choose the best alternative in accor- D. Gametes
207. When is the sex of a child determined?
SH
dance with his potentialities and interest

B. solve his educational, vocational and A. 3 months after conception
personal problems effectively B. At the time of mating or conception
C. adapt to the antagonistic environment C. 6 months after conception
and enjoy it
D. 8 months after conception
D. all of the above
I
208. Who studied statistical study of the trans-

202. Spearman’s ’G ’ factor of Intelligence is:
mission of various traits?
JA
A. universal and inborn ability

A. Lamarck
B. constant and does not change in an in-
dividual with time B. Darwin
C. different in different individuals depend- C. Galton

ing on their genes D. Weismann
D. all of the above 209. ’Origin of species by means of natural se-
203. I.Q. range of morons are in the range of: lection’ is written by-
A. 60-90 A. Charles Darwin
B. 50-75 B. Lamarck
C. 60-80 C. Mr. Mandel
D. 30-50 D. Galton
199. B 200. D 201. D 202. D 203. B 204. D 205. A 206. C 207. B 208. C 209. A
210. As per study conducted by Galton, what A. William James

ratio in heredity in an organism is due to B. Raymond Dodge
father and mother?
C. Ronald Fisher
A. 25%
D. Freud
B. 12.5%
217. Psycho-analysis was propounded by .
ER
C. 50% A. Jung
D. 75% B. Hull
211. Education develops child’s . C. Adler
GD
A. Expressions D. S. Freud
B. Intution 218. I.Q. = M.A. / C.A. * 100
C. Accuracy A. Hull
D. Innate powers B. Freud
AN
212. Medieval period was dominated by C. Binet
education. D. Spearman
A. Vedic 219. Cognition can be stated as .
B. Buddhist A. Feeling
CH
C. Islamic B. Knowing
D. None of the above C. Willing
213. A school is a miniature . D. Doing

220. Creativity increases with .
A. State
N
A. Age
B. Family
B. Practice
C. Society
YA
C. Experience
D. Organisation
D. Education
214. Performance tests are termed as .
221. Mental deficiency indicates I.Q. ranges
A. Verbal tests .
RA
B. Non-verbal tests A. 25 to 50
C. Projective tests B. 50 to 70
D. Subjective tests C. 0 to 70
NA
215. According to Psychology, all education is D. 0 to 100

. 222. Suppose fourteen years old girl has taken
to wearing the same style sweaters that her
A. Deliberate
teacher wears, then this form of behaviour
B. Conscious is known as
C. Functional A. Compensation
D. Self-education B. Regression
216. Who among the following was the first C. Identification
man to describe ’Null Hypothesis’? D. Egocentrism
210. C 211. D 212. C 213. C 214. B 215. D 216. C 217. D 218. C 219. B 220. C
221. C 222. C 223. A
223. The essential object for the full develop- A. Outer reality
ment of young ones is B. Bodily instincts
A. Games and Sports C. The ego
B. Cultural Programme D. The super ego
C. Cultural Knowledge 229. Erikson proposed that trust and mistrust
develops during the:
D. Religious Education
A. Anal stage
224. If you wish to maintain a sweet relation
with others, the important tool for you is B. Genital Stage
M
A. to praise them always. C. Latency stage
B. to invite them to your place and to go D. Oral sensory stage

to theirs. 230. A stimulus that elicits a response before
RA
the ex-perimental manipulation is a(an):
C. to ignore their mistakes.
A. Response stimulus
D. to trust them honestly.
B. Unconditioned stimulus
225. To control the population growth in our
country suitable way is C. Generallised stimulus
A. by starting a campaign for the forced D. Conditioned stimulus

E
231. The theory that we all experience a se-
operation of the people under family plan-
ning. ries of developmental crisis throughout our
lives was proposed by:
RE
B. by spreading attractive programmes
through public media to make people con- A. FRUED
scious of a small family and its advantage. B. ADLER
C. by making available sufficient facilities C. SHELDON
in the hospitals.
SH
D. ERICKSON
D. by considering government employ- 232. The morality of self accepted principles
ees for promotion if they accept family- was proposed by:
planning.
A. PIAGET
226. The best way to rid a boy of his misbe-
haviour is B. ERICKSON
I
C. KOHLBERG
A. to punish him mercilessly.
JA
D. BANDURA
B. to handover the boy to the police.
233. A hypothesis of ’No Difference’ is called:
C. to educate him constantly.
A. Experimental hypothesis
D. to criticize him for his misbehaviour.
B. Research hypothesis
227. Marxist educational philosophy is closer
C. Null hypothesis
to .
D. None of these
A. Realism
234. Socialization is an process.
B. Idealism
A. Unconscious
C. Pragmatism
B. Occasional
D. Naturalism C. interactional
228. The id draws its psychic energy from:
D. None of these
224. D 225. B 226. C 227. A 228. B 229. D 230. B 231. D 232. C 233. C 234. C
235. C
235. Both ’X’ and ’Y’ chromosomes are found 242. ’Evaluation’ is the stage of:
in:
A. Divergent thinking
A. Brain cells
B. Convergent thinking
B. Females
C. Creative thinking
C. Males
D. None of these
ER
D. None of these
243. During the premoral stage described by
236. Learning is the modification of behaviour KOHLBERG’S MORAL development the-
which is relatively . ory, children:
A. Permanent A. Think that bad behaviour is punished
GD
B. Temporary and good behaviour is not punished
C. Adverse B. have no conception of good or bad be-
haviour
D. Quick
237. Endocrine glands are called: C. are amoral
AN
A. Nerve glands D. are uncooperative
B. Adernal gland 244. The reinforcement schedule that yields
the lowest performance is the:
C. Ductless glands
A. Fixed ratio schedule
CH
D. Gonad glands
238. Pituitary gland is known as: B. Variable ratio schedule
A. Simple gland C. Fixed interval schedule
B. Specific gland D. Variable interval schedule
C. Master gland 245. The earliest studies on record of verbal

N
learning and memory were conducted by:

D. None of these
A. MOWRER
239. ’TRIAL & ERROR’ theory of learning was
YA
given by: B. PAVLOV

A. FREUD C. SKINNER
B. THORNDIKE D. EBBINGHAUS
RA
C. THRUSTON 246. The short term memory can hold how

many items at one time?
D. BANDURA
240. Operant conditioning is associated with: A. 7 (plus or minus) 2 i.e 9 or 5
A. Pavlov B. 10 (plus or minus) 2
NA
B. Skinner C. 10 (plus or minus) 5

C. Hull D. 5
D. Miller 247. The belief that aggression is learned is
241. Long Term Memory may last for: held by:
A. 5 seconds A. Social learning theorists
B. 30 seconds B. Phenomenological theorists
C. Days, Months, Years C. psychodynamic theorists
D. None of these D. Experimental theorists
236. A 237. C 238. C 239. B 240. B 241. C 242. C 243. A 244. C 245. D 246. A
247. A 248. C
248. ’The aim of all life is death’ this quote from A. Knowing
SIEMUND FREUD’S work refers to: B. Understanding
A. Thanatos C. Analysing
B. Eros D. Evaluating
C. The struggle between eros and thanatos 255. Which of the following factors does not
impact teaching
D. The death instinct
A. Class room activities that encourage
249. Defence mechanisms are created by the : learning
A. Id
M
B. Socio-economic background of teachers
B. Ego and students
C. Super ego C. Learning through experience
RA
D. Consciousness D. Teacher’s knowledge
256. Which of the following statements about
250. A developmental hault due to frustration
teaching aids are not correct?
and anxiety is referred to as:
A. They help in retaining concepts for
A. Depression longer duration
B. Fixation B. They help students learn better
C. Regression
E
C. They make teaching learning process
D. Learned helplessness interesting
RE
251. Which one of the following problems D. They enhance rote learning
would require divergent thinking: 257. Techniques used by a teacher to teach in-
clude
A. Adding a column of numbers.
A. Lecture and Interactive lecture
B. Deciding whether to turn left or right
SH
at an intersection while driving a car. B. Group work

C. Self study
C. Choosing the best move in a card game.
D. All of these
D. Repairing a broken type-writter.
258. Achievement tests are commonly used for
252. Which is an advantage of group testing? the purpose of
A. Reduction of cost A. Making selections for a specific job
I
B. More reliable norms B. Selecting candidates for a course

JA
C. More objective scoring C. Identifying strengths and weaknesses

of learners
D. All of the above
D. Assessing the amount of learning after
253. Which was the First State formed on lin-
teaching
guistic basis?
259. A good teacher is one who
A. Rajasthan
A. gives useful information
B. Madhya Pradesh
B. explains concepts and principles
C. Andhra Pradesh C. gives printed notes to students
D. Karnataka D. inspires students to learn
254. Which of the following is the highest level 260. Maximum participation of students dur-
of cognitive ability ing teaching is possible through
249. B 250. B 251. C 252. D 253. C 254. A 255. B 256. D 257. D 258. D 259. D
260. C
A. Lecture method A. Students asking questions

B. Demonstration method B. Maximum attendance of the students
C. Inductive method C. Pin drop silence in the classroom
D. Textbook method D. Students taking notes
261. Diagnostic evaluation ascertains 267. Which one of the following is the best
ER
A. Students performance at the beginning method of teaching?
of instructions. A. Lecture
B. Learning progress and failures during B. Discussion
instructions.
GD
C. Demonstration
C. Degree of achievements of instructions
at the end. D. Narration
D. Causes and remedies of persistent learn-
the concept of paradigm?
ing problems during instructions.
AN
262. Instructional aides are used by the teacher A. Peter Haggett
to B. Von Thunen
A. Glorify the class C. Thomas Kuhn
B. Attract the students D. John K. Wright
CH
C. Clarify the concepts 269. While delivering lecture if there is some
D. Ensure discipline disturbance in the class, a teacher should
263. Attitude of the teacher that affects teach- A. keep quiet for a while and then continue
ing pertains to B. punish those causing disturbance
A. Affective domain
N
C. motivate to teach those causing distur-

B. Cognitive domain bance
C. Connative domain D. not bother of what is happening in the
YA
D. Psychomotor domain class
264. “Education is the manifestation of perfec- 270. Effective teaching is a function of

tion already in man” was stated by A. Teacher’s satisfaction.
RA
A. M. K. Gandhi B. Teacher’s honesty and commitment

B. R. N. Tagore C. Teacher’s making students learn and un-
C. Swami Vivekanand derstand
NA
D. Sri Aurobindo D. Teacher’s liking for professional excel-

lence
265. Which of the following is not a prescribed
level of teaching? 271. The most appropriate meaning of learning
is
A. Memory
A. Acquisition of skills
B. Understanding
B. Modification of behaviour
C. Reflective
C. Personal adjustment
D. Differentiation
266. Which one of the following is considered D. Inculcation of knowledge
a sign of motivated teaching? 272. CIET stands for
261. D 262. C 263. A 264. C 265. D 266. A 267. C 268. C 269. C 270. C 271. B
272. C
A. Centre for Integrated Education and 278. Which one is the highest order of learn-
Technology ing?
B. Central Institute for Engineering and A. Chain learning
Technology
B. Problem-solving learning
C. Central Institute for Education Technol-
C. Stimulus-response learning
ogy
D. Conditioned-reflex learning
D. Centre for Integrated Evaluation Tech-
niques 279. A person can enjoy teaching as a profes-
273. Teacher’s role at higher education sion when he
M
A. provide information to students. A. has control over students.
B. promote self learning in students. B. commands respect from students.
C. encourage healthy competition among C. is more qualified than his colleagues.
RA
students. D. is very close to higher authorities.
D. help students to solve their problems. 280. “A diagram speaks more than 1000 words.”
274. The Verstehen School of Understanding The statement means that the teacher
was popularised by should
A. German Social scientists A. use diagrams in teaching.
B. American philosophers
E
B. speak more and more in the class.
C. British Academicians C. use teaching aids in the class.
RE
D. Italian political Analysts D. not speak too much in the class.
275. The black-board can be utilized best by a 281. For an efficient and durable learning,
teacher for learner should have
A. Putting the matter of teaching in black
A. ability to learn only
SH
and white
B. equisite level of motivation only
B. Making the students attentive
C. opportunities to learn only
C. Writing the important and notable
points D. desired level of ability and motivation
D. Highlighting the teacher himself 282. Classroom communication must be
276. Now a days the most effective mode of A. Teacher centric
I
learning is
JA
B. Student centric
A. Self study and Face-to-face learning
C. General centric
B. e-learning
D. Textbook centric
C. Blended learning
283. The best method of teaching is to
D. Both e-learning and Blended learning
A. impart information
277. At the primary school stage, most of the
teachers should be women because they B. ask students to read books
A. can teach children better than men. C. suggest good reference material
B. know basic content better than men. D. initiate a discussion and participate in
C. are available on lower salaries. it
284. Interaction inside the classroom should
D. can deal with children with love and
generate
affection.
273. B 274. A 275. C 276. D 277. D 278. D 279. B 280. C 281. D 282. B 283. D
284. C
A. Argument A. Overhead projector

B. Information B. Blackboard
C. Ideas C. Epidiascope
D. Controversy D. Slide projector

290. For a teacher, which of the following meth-
285. “Spare the rod and spoil the child”, gives
ER
ods would be correct for writing on the
the message that
blackboard?
A. punishment in the class should be A. Writing fast and as clearly as possible.
banned.
B. Writing the matter first and then asking
GD
B. corporal punishment is not acceptable. students to read it.
C. undesirable behaviour must be pun- C. Asking a question to students and then
ished. writing the answer as stated by them.
D. children should be beaten with rods. D. Writing the important points as clearly
AN
286. The type of communication that the as possible.
teacher has in the classroom, is termed as 291. A teacher can be successful if he/she
A. Interpersonal A. helps students in becoming better citi-

zens
B. Mass communication
CH
B. imparts subject knowledge to students
C. Group communication
C. prepares students to pass the examina-
D. Face-to-face communication tion
287. If you get an opportunity to teach a visu- D. presents the subject matter in a well or-
ally challenged student along with normal ganized manner
students, what type of treatment would you
N
292. Dynamic approach to teaching means

like to give him in the class?
A. Teaching should be forceful and effec-
A. Not giving extra attention because ma-
YA
tive
jority may suffer.
B. Teachers should be energetic and dy-
B. Take care of him sympathetically in the namic
classroom.
C. The topics of teaching should not be
RA
C. You will think that blindness is his des- static, but dynamic
tiny and hence you cannot do anything. D. The students should be required to learn
D. Arrange a seat in the front row and try through activities
to teach at a pace convenient to him. 293. By which of the following methods the
NA
288. Which of the following is not a character- true evaluation of the students is possible?
istic of a good achievement test? A. Evaluation at the end of the course.
A. Reliability B. Evaluation twice in a year.
B. Objectivity C. Continuous evaluation.
C. Ambiguity D. Formative evaluation.

294. Suppose a student wants to share his prob-
D. Validity
lems with his teacher and he visits the
289. Which of the following does not belong teacher’s house for the purpose, the teacher
to a projected aid? should
285. C 286. C 287. D 288. C 289. B 290. D 291. D 292. D 293. C 294. D
A. contact the student’s parents and solve A. Allow students to do what they like.
his problem.
B. Deal with the students strictly.
B. suggest him that he should never visit C. Give the students some problem to
his house. solve.
C. suggest him to meet the principal and D. Deal with them politely and firmly.
solve the problem.
300. An effective teaching aid is one which
D. extend reasonable help and boost his
A. is colourful and good looking
morale.
B. activates all faculties
M
295. When some students are deliberately at-
tempting to disturb the discipline of the C. is visible to all students
class by making mischief, what will be your D. easy to prepare and use
role as a teacher?
301. Those teachers are popular among stu-
RA
A. Expelling those students. dents who
B. Isolate those students. A. develop intimacy with them
C. Reform the group with your authority. B. help them solve their problems
D. Giving them an opportunity for intro- C. award good grades
spection and improve their behaviour. D. take classes on extra tuition fee
E
296. Which of the following belongs to a pro- 302. The essence of an effective classroom en-
jected aid? vironment is
RE
A. Blackboard A. a variety of teaching aids
B. Diorama B. lively student-teacher interaction
C. Epidiascope C. pin-drop silence
D. strict discipline
SH
D. Globe
297. A teacher is said to be fluent in asking 303. On the first day of his class, if a teacher is
questions, if he can ask asked by the students to introduce himself,
he should
A. meaningful questions
A. ask them to meet after the class
B. as many questions as possible
B. tell them about himself in brief
I
C. maximum number of questions in a

C. ignore the demand and start teaching
JA
fixed time
D. scold the student for this unwanted de-
D. many meaningful questions in a fixed
mand
time
304. Moral values can be effectively inculcated
298. Which of the following qualities is most among the students when the teacher
essential for a teacher?
A. frequently talks about values
A. He should be a learned person.
B. himself practices them
B. He should be a well dressed person.
C. tells stories of great persons
C. He should have patience.
D. talks of Gods and Goddesses
D. He should be an expert in his subject. 305. Some students in a class exhibit great cu-
299. For maintaining an effective discipline in riosity for learning. It may be because such
the class, the teacher should children
295. D 296. C 297. A 298. C 299. D 300. B 301. B 302. B 303. B 304. B 305. A
306. A
A. Are gifted A. Punctuality and sincerity

B. Come from rich families B. Content mastery
C. Show artificial behaviour C. Content mastery and reactive
D. Create indiscipline in the class D. Content mastery and sociable
306. The most important quality of a good 312. The primary responsibility for the
ER
teacher is teacher’s adjustment lies with
A. Sound knowledge of subject matter A. The children
B. Good communication skills B. The principal
GD
C. Concern for students’ welfare C. The teacher himself
D. Effective leadership qualities D. The community
307. Which one of the following is appropriate 313. As per the NCTE norms, what should be
in respect of teacher student relationship? the staff strength for a unit of 100 students
at B.Ed. level?
AN
A. Very informal and intimate
A. 1 + 7
B. Limited to classroom only
B. 1 + 9
C. Cordial and respectful
C. 1 + 10
D. Indifferent
CH
308. The academic performance of students D. 1 + 5
can be improved if parents are encouraged 314. Research has shown that the most fre-
to quent symptom of nervous instability
among teachers is
A. supervise the work of their wards
A. Digestive upsets
B. arrange for extra tuition
N
B. Explosive behaviour
C. remain unconcerned about it
C. Fatigue
D. interact with teachers frequently
YA
309. In a lively classroom situation, there is D. Worry

likely to be 315. A successful teacher is one who is
A. occasional roars of laughter A. Compassionate and disciplinarian
RA
B. complete silence B. Quite and reactive

C. frequent teacher-student dialogue C. Tolerant and dominating
D. loud discussion among students D. Passive and active
NA
310. If a parent approaches the teacher to do 316. Which of the following is not a principle
some favour to his/her ward in the exami- of development?
nation, the teacher should
A. Principle of continuity.
A. try to help him
B. Principle of individual difference.
B. ask him not to talk in those terms
C. Principle of proceeding from specific to
C. refuse politely and firmly general response.
D. ask him rudely to go away D. Principle of integration.
311. Which one of the following is the most 317. Development of language in children, ac-
important quality of a good teacher? cording to B.F. Skinner, is the result of
307. C 308. A 309. C 310. C 311. C 312. B 313. C 314. B 315. A 316. C 317. A
A. Imitation and reinforcement 323. “The greatness of a nation is to be mea-

B. Maturation sured not by its material power and wealth
but by the intercultural relationship of its
C. Training in grammar people.” Who said this?
D. Innate abilities A. Vivekananda
318. Behaviour pattern that increases in fre-
B. Dr. Radhakrishnan
quency when followed by a reward is
known as C. Gandhi
A. Shaping D. Tagore
M
B. Generalization 324. Which of the following does not specify
Max Weber’s concept of social stratifica-
C. Operant Conditioning
tion?
D. Classical Conditioning
RA
A. Income and Wealth
319. Who said this “Education is man mak-
ing. It is that by which character is formed, B. Social Prestige
strength of mind is increased, intellect is C. Educational Status
expanded and by which man can stand on
his own feet”? D. Political Power
A. Tagore 325. Which of the following is the least impor-

E tant aspect of the teachers’ role in the guid-
B. Vivekananda ance of learning?
C. Dayanand Saraswati
RE
A. The provision of encouragement and
D. None of these moral support.
320. Statement that not match correct: B. The provision of continuous diagnostic
A. Tagore - Child is more, important than and remedial help.
all kinds of books C. The development of insight into what
SH
B. Vivekananda - Yoga as a method of edu- constitutes an adequate performance.

cation D. The development of insight to overcome
C. Mahatma Gandhi - The doctrine of the pitfalls and obstacles.
dharma 326. Which of the following qualities of a
D. Buddhism - The doctrine of karma teacher will be liked most by you?
I
321. Purpose of creation of the universe and its A. Compassion

JA
relation to man and god is discussed in

B. Entertaining
A. Epistemology
C. Idealistic philosophy
B. Ethics
D. Discipline
C. Metaphysics
327. The most important challenge for a
D. None of these teacher is
322. Which of the following agency regulates
A. To maintain discipline in the classroom.
education?
B. To make teaching process enjoyable.
A. School
C. To prepare the question-bank.
B. Library
C. Church D. To make students do their homework.
328. Techno-Pedagogic competency is
D. State
318. C 319. B 320. C 321. C 322. D 323. B 324. C 325. D 326. A 327. B
A. A technique of combining principles of 334. Who advocated the logical analysis of lan-
technology and principles of teaching. guage for getting the true meaning?
B. A science of using technology in teach- A. Bertrand Russel
ing.
B. Morris L. Biggie
C. A competence to develop techno peda-
C. G.E. Moore
gogic systems in education.
ER
D. A set of skills of interweaving technol- D.
ogy into teaching and learning both scien- E. J. Ayer
tifically and aesthetically. 335. Archimedes found the solution of his prob-
329. Psycho-analytic approach of counselling lem when he was in his bath tub. This will
GD
was first introduced by come under which step of process of cre-
A. Freud ativity?
B. Jung A. Preparation
C. Adler B. Incubation
AN
D. None of these C. Verification
330. Who advocated the creation of a classless D. Illumination
society?
336. The pioneer of functionalism is
A. Auguste Comte
A. J.B. Watson
CH
B. Karl Marx
B. William James
C. Plato
C. Wilhelm Wundt
D. M.K. Gandhi
331. The Vedas teach us that D. Kurt Lewin
337. Who propounded Self Theory of Person-
A. Creation is without beginning
N
ality?
B. Creation is without an end.
A. Eysenck
YA
C. Creation has a definite beginning and

also an end. B. Kretschmer
D. Creation is without beginning and with- C. Roger

out an end. D. Allport
RA
332. Epistemology is the branch of philosophy 338. Use of Science and Technology in replac-
which deals with the theories of ing existing social practices is termed as
A. Values
A. Sanskritization
B. Knowledge
B. Modernization
NA
C. Reality
C. Socialization
D. Existence
D. Westernization
333. “Things as they are and as they are likely
to be encountered in life rather than words” 339. The process of imbibing one’s own culture
was the slogan of the in one’s personality is termed as
A. Idealists A. Socialization
B. Pragmatists B. Sanskritization
C. Realists C. Acculturation
D. Existentialists D. Enculturation
328. D 329. A 330. B 331. D 332. B 333. C 334. D 335. D 336. B 337. C 338. B
339. D
340. According to psycho-analysis theory of 346. ‘Project is a whole-hearted purposeful ac-

personality, neurotic disorders are caused tivity proceeding on a social environment”,
by it was defined by
A. Inactivity of libido A. Adamson
B. Role of unconscious mind B. John Dewey
C. Repression of desires C. Kilpatrick
D. All of these D. Ballard
341. According to Freud, Super Ego is properly 347. Who said that the school be made as minia-
ture society?
M
developed during
A. Phallic period A. Dewey
B. Latency period B. Skinner
RA
C. Anal period C. Herbert
D. None of these D. Thorndike
342. Individual psychology of personality was 348. Who said that “Material and spiritual
given by knowledge is already present in man cov-
ered by a curtain of ignorance”?
A.
A. Vivekananda
B. Adler
E
B. Mahatma Gandhi
C. Eysenck
C. Tagore
RE
D. Jung
D. Plato
E. None of these
349. A baby sucking her thumb is an example
343. Which of the following theories is most of
quantitatively measurable?
A. Aggression
SH
A. Skinner’s
B. Displacement
B. Pavlov’s
C. Regression
C. Hull’s
D. Withdrawal
D. None of these 350. What is meant by ‘Culture’?
344. There are three phases of teaching given
A. Civilization marked by the use of mod-
I
by P. Jackson, which of the following is in-

ern electric home appliances
JA
correct one?
B. Using of computers, mobile phones, in-
A. Pre-active phase
ternet, etc.
B. Interactive phase C. Sophistication in dress, food, etc.
C. Post-active phase D. Complex whole of what man has
D. Underactive phase achieved as being a member of the society.
345. “Rising knowledge to wisdom is real edu- 351. “Reverse the usual practice and you will
cation” was said by almost always do right” was the dictum of
A. Chhandogya Upanishad A. Mahatma Gandhi
B. Rigveda B. Rousseau
C. Bhagvadh Geeta C. Plato
D. Samaveda D. Dewey
340. C 341. B 342. A 342. B 343. C 344. D 345. A 346. C 347. C 348. A 349. C
350. D 351. B 352. A
352. Who is the exponent of experience cen- 359. The most ascetic School of Indian Philos-
tered curriculum? ophy is
A. John Dewey A. Jainism
B. Parker B. Buddhism
C. Froebel C. Sankhya
ER
D. Stevenson D. Vedanta
353. Solomon’s Four Group design falls under 360. Who had suggested that questions are a
A. Pre-experimental design powerful means of triggering thinking and
can lead people from “unconscious igno-
B. True-experimental design
GD
rance to conscious ignorance”?
C. Quasi-experimental design
A. Plato
D. Factorial design
B. Aristotle
354. ‘Epistemology’ means
C. Socrates
AN
A. study of the nature of knowledge
B. stem cell research D. Chanakya
361. Child centred education means
C. study of the nature of the world
D. study of the nature of values A. education geared to child’s needs and
aspiration.
CH
355. ‘Coherence’ is the criterion of truth is
B. education liked by children.
A. Naturalism
C. education liked both by children and
B. Existentialism
teachers
C. Idealism
D. education considered worthwhile and
D. Marxism
N
desirable by those who have a concern for

356. ‘Metaphysics’ means their development.
A. Physics of metals 362. Those whose educational philosophy is
YA
rooted in pragmatism
B. a branch of Physics
C. Physics of weather A. accept the stimulus response theory of
learning.
D. exploring the nature of ultimate reality
RA
B. claim that knowledge is tentative, truth

357. Introspection method lacks in
is relative.
A. Validity
C. reject the scientific method of experi-
B. Reliability mentation.
NA
C. Objectivity D. maintain that complete objectivity is

D. All of these possible.
358. ‘Philosophy’ means 363. The concept of pratityasamutpade (that
nothing happens without a cause) is one of
A. A form of religion.
the central principles of
B. Attempt to find answer to fundamental
and ultimate questions. A. Buddhism
C. Sophisticated arguments. B. Jainism
D. Consoling oneself while facing disap- C. Sakhya

pointments in life. D. Vedanta
353. B 354. A 355. C 356. D 357. D 358. B 359. A 360. C 361. A 362. B 363. D
364. A
364. Who, of the following thinkers declared A. He transfuses the high values of the hu-
education as a man making process? manity into young ones sitting in the class-
room.
A. Vivekananda
B. He has to play all these vital roles in the
B. Maulana Abul Kalam Azad context of the society
C. Aurobindo C. He is a great reformer and patriotic
D. J. Krishnamurthi saviour of a nation.
D. All of these
365. Which of the following thinkers said ‘Lit-
eracy itself is not education, literacy is only 370. The use of media either sequentially or
M
a means to education’? simultaneously in a single communication
is called as
A. Sri Aurobindo
A. Web Aided Instruction
RA
B. Mahatma Gandhi
B. Technology Aided Instruction
C. J. Krishnamurti C. Computer Assisted Instruction
D. Swami Vivekananda D. Multi-media Instruction
366. The four fold valuation of Indian culture 371. What are the stages involved in a compre-
(Catu puru artha), when arranged in an as- hensive guidance programme? Choose the
cending hierarchy in terms of the height of correct sequence of stages
E
values, will constitute which of the follow- A. Consideration of problem, appreciating
ing orders? problem, referral, taking action, accepting
RE
A. Artha, Kama, Dharma, Moksha individual
B. Moksha, Dharma, Kama, Artha B. Accepting individual, appreciating prob-

lem, consideration of problem, taking ac-
C. Dharma, Artha, Kama, Moksha tion, referral
SH
D. Artha, Dharma, Kama, Moksha C. Taking action, referral, appreciating

problem, accepting individual, considera-
367. Who defined sociology of education as ‘a
tion of problem
study of the relation between education and
society’? D. Appreciation of problem, accepting in-
dividual, referral, consideration of problem,
A. Good taking action
I
B. Brown 372. A method in which the skill and expertise

JA
of many teachers is combined to teach a

C. Smith
class is called as
D. Ottaway A. Team teaching
368. The nature of social values is B. Tutorial method
A. Emotional C. Panel discussion
B. Logical D. Group discussion
C. Materialistic 373. The family imparts education to the child
A. Regularly
D. Symbolical
B. Formally
369. The teacher has been glorified by the
phrase - “Friend, Philosopher and Guide” C. Informally
because D. Deliberately
365. B 366. A 367. D 368. B 369. A 370. D 371. B 372. A 373. C 374. D
374. Which of the following is not match cor- 380. The child who reads numbers wrongly has
rectly? the following learning disability
A. Classical conditioning - Pavlov A. Dyslexia
B. Sign Gestalt learning - Tolman B. Dyscrasia
C. Learning by insight - Kohlar C. Dyscalculia

D. Dyspepsia
ER
D. Drive reduction - Skinner
381. Sociology of education includes
375. Curriculum means
A. Social development in the country
A. Subject that are transferred by the fac-
ulty. B. Society and its relationship with the in-
GD
dividual
B. All the experiences which students get
C. Communication of the individual with
in school.
the society
C. Class experiences, sports and games.
D. Social relations by which individuals
AN
D. Syllabus prescribed for the course. gain experience
376. Programmed learning is based on the prin- 382. ‘Mirambaka’ - The school based on ideas
ciples of of free progress education was advocated
by
A. Cognitive Learning Theory
A. Aurobindo
CH
B. Conditioned Learning Theory
B. M.K. Gandhi
C. Operant-conditioning
C. John Dewey
D. Gestalt Learning Theory D. Vivekanand
377. According to Piaget, at what stage does 383. Who coined the term ‘cultural capital’?
abstract thinking begin to develop?
A. McRobbie and Aryon
N
A. Formal operational B. Bowels and Gintis

B. Concrete operational C. Bourdieu and Passeron
YA
C. Sensory motor D. Young

D. Pre-operational 384. Who among the following is not a cogni-
tive gestalt psychologist?
378. Which is the most effective reinforcement
RA
schedule according to operant conditioning A. Kohler

theory of learning for stable learning? B. Lewin
A. Fixed interval reinforcement C. Wertheimer
B. Continuous reinforcement D. Tolman
NA
C. Variable ratio reinforcement 385. In operant conditioning the reinforcement

is contingent upon
D. Fixed ratio reinforcement
A. Nature of the stimulus
379. Xerophthalmia is a result of insufficient
B. Nature of the response
amount of
C. Both (A) and (B)
A. Vitamin D
D. None of these
B. Vitamin A
386. According to Guilford’s SI model, total
C. Vitamin B number of factors that constitute to human
intellect is
D. Vitamin C
375. B 376. C 377. A 378. C 379. B 380. A 381. B 382. A 383. C 384. D 385. B
386. D
A. 60 A. J.J Rousseau
B. 90 B. John Locke
C. 110 C. Plato
D. 120 D. Horace Man
387. Inclusive education is about 393. In the conditioning approach to learning:
A. making provision for all children A. The natural stimulus follows the unnat-
ural stimulus.
B. welcoming and celebrating diversity
B. The subject should be in readiness to
M
C. Both (A) and (B) receive the unnatural stimulus.
D. none of these C. The unnatural stimulus follows the nat-
388. When an individual repeats those leanings ural stimulus.
RA
that, in the past, proved to be highly satis- D. Response to natural stimulus required
fying such behavior can best be explained to be reinforced.
by the law of 394. Who is not in favour of logical analysis?
A. readiness A. Ludwig Wittgenstein
B. recency B. Kant
C. effect C. G.E. Moore
E
D. frequency D. Bertrand Russel
389. Martin Luther’s greatest contribution to 395. The great sociologist who held the view
RE
education was his: that “education doesn’t bring about social
change; rather the social change results
A. Translation of the Bible into German
into an educational change” was
B. Ninety -Five Theses
A. Durkheim
SH
C. Concept of justification by good works

B. McDougal
D. Advocacy of science curriculum for the
C. Dewey
universities
D. Aristotle
390. During the first year of life a child’s height
increases by about: 396. Delinquency is committed by the children
of the age group
A. 10%
I
A. 6 - 14 years
B. 20%
JA
B. 9 - 19 years
C. 40%
C. 7 - 15 years
D. 50%
D. 8 - 18 years
391. The educator who advanced the idea of 397. The two basic divisions in Schools of In-
the five formal steps in leaving was dian Philosophy are
A. Herbart A. Orthodox and Heterodox
B. Rousseau B. Theistic and Atheistic
C. Comenius C. Vedanta and Buddhism
D. Pestalozzi D. Advaita and Dwaita
392. That the mind of an infant is a tabula rasa 398. The ultimate goal of education in Jainism
is the contribution of: is
387. C 388. C 389. A 390. D 391. A 392. B 393. C 394. B 395. A 396. C 397. A
398. B
A. Non-violence A. Performance tests

B. Liberation B. Verbal tests
C. Philanthropy C. Non-verbal tests
D. Renunciation D. None of these
399. The ceremony of initiation of education 405. ‘Cultural Lag’ is the term used by
ER
in Buddhism is called
A. Pyne
A. Pabajja
B. Marx
B. Uparampada
C. Weber
GD
C. Vidyarambam
D. Ogburn
D. Upanayanam
406. Who propounded the ‘self’ theory of per-
400. Which of the following philosophies are sonality?
most tilted to individualism?
A. Allport
A. Buddhism
AN
B. Roger
B. Samkhya
C. Kretschmar
C. Jainism
D. Eysenck
D. None of these
407. Intelligence Quotient is computed by
CH
401. The Rosarch Inkblot test consists of
which of the following formula?
A. Ten black and ten white cards
A. M.A./C.A. × 100
B. Five black and five coloured cards
B. M.A./100 ×C.A.
C. Five black and white & five multi-
C. C.A./M.A. × 100
coloured cards
N
D. Ten multi-coloured cards D. C.A./100 × M.A.
402. “No disinterested pursuit of knowledge 408. Stanford Binet Scale measures the follow-
YA
and no intellectual education for its own ing attribute of an individual :

sake” was the slogan of the A. Personality
A. Idealists B. Intelligence
RA
B. Realists C. Creativity
C. Naturalists D. Aptitude
D. Pragmatists 409. Who emphasized that the aim of educa-
403. “Give me a dozen of healthy children I can tion should be the development in children
NA
make them Doctor, Judge, Beggar and even the feeling of international brotherhood
a Thief” - Comment made by and attitude of international understand-
ing?
A. Jung
A. Rousseau
B. Guthrie
B. Dewey
C. J.B. Watson
C. Tagore
D. Hull
404. Tests that do not require the use of lan- D. Mahatma Gandhi
guage of the subjects but responses are in 410. According to whom “Educational Psychol-
the form of activities are called as ogy is the Science of Education”?
399. A 400. C 401. C 402. D 403. C 404. A 405. D 406. B 407. A 408. B 409. C
410. D
A. Skinner A. innovativeness in approach and teach-

ing strategies
B. Pillsburg
B. mastery over the subject and compe-
C. Crow and Crow
tency for teaching
D. Peel C. justice to the profession
411. The Dalton Scheme of Education is useful D. All of the above
for which one of the following?
417. Kindergarten (KG)system of education is
A. For infants indebted to
B. For little children A. Spencer
M
C. For older children B. Froebel
D. For all of these C. Dewey
RA
412. Which of the following is meant of infor- D. Plato
mation collection? 418. Distance education is not
A. Schedule A. De-schooling
B. Telemetric teaching
B. Scope
C. Distance study
C. Report
D. Work oriented education
E
D. Plan
419. CLASS stands for
413. In a kindergarten class it would be unrea-
A. Centre for Literacy and Studies in
RE
sonable to expect a child to:
Schools
A. care for plants B. Complete Literacy and Studies in
B. clean up after clay work Schools
C. bring an old shirt for painting activities C. Computer Literacy and Studies in
SH
Schools
D. know when it is time to clean up
D. Computer Literates and Students in
414. The trial and error method of instruction Schools
is best enhanced by: 420. According to 2011 Census, the overall lit-
A. the developmental lesson eracy rate in India is about
B. programmed instruction A. 71%
I
B. 72%
JA
C. role playing
C. 73%
D. independent study
D. 74%
415. The evaluation of personality is best made
through the use of an : 421. The idea of Four Pillars of Education was
suggested by
A. survey test
A. UGC
B. inventory test
B. NCTE
C. projective test C. UNESCO
D. preference test D. UNICEF
416. The professional requirement of a teacher 422. Continuous Comprehensive Evalua-
as explained in the UNESCO publication tion(CCE) in school education was started
is/are by
411. C 412. A 413. D 414. D 415. C 416. D 417. B 418. D 419. C 420. D 421. C
422. A
A. CBSE 427. Creativity refers to :

B. UGC A. A new production
C. SCERT B. Raw production
D. IGNOU C. Repetition
423. International Institute of Educational Plan- D. All the above
ER
ning is at 428. The creative potential can be improved by
A. Paris :
B. New Delhi A. Proper Training
GD
C. London B. Competitive feeling
D. New York C. Activity
424. DIET stands for D. Punishment
A. District Institute of Education and 429. ’Decision-Making’ is a kind of :
AN
Training A. Thinking
B. District Institute of Elementary Train- B. Memory
ing
C. Perception
C. District Institute of Educational Tech-
nology D. Problem solving
CH
430. The term ’gene’ for the factors controlling
D. District Institute of Elementary Teach-
heredity was coined by -
ers
425. Thumb sucking, Nail biting etc, similar A. T.H. Morgan
actions are due to: B. Hugo de vries
A. Pleasure seeking
N
C. Gregor-Mendal
B. Training D. W. Johannsen
YA
C. Habit 431. Psychology is directly concerned with hu-

man behaviour, was said by
D. Anxiety
426. It takes a maturation of months for A. Ivan Pavlov
the child to take his first step in walking. B.
RA
A. 5 to 6 C. F. Skinner
B. 10 to 12 D. Albert Bandura
C. 4 to 5 E. Edward Thorndike
NA
D. 0 to 2
423. A 424. D 425. D 426. B 427. A 428. A 429. D 430. D 431. B 431. C
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
17. Research methodology
GD
AN
CH
1. is referred to as “the father of research A. Saves time
on teaching”? B. Helps in capital-saving
A. N. L. Gage C. Both (A) and (B)
B. David Berliner D. Increases accuracy
N
C. Egon Brunswik 5. Random sampling is helpful as it is

D. Donald T. Campbell A. Reasonably accurate
YA
2. The main purpose of research in education B. Free from personal biases

is to
C. An economical method of data collec-
A. Increase social status of an individual tion
B. Increase job prospects of an individual D. All the above
RA
C. Help in the personal growth of an indi- 6. Tippit table refers to

vidual A. Table of random digits
D. Help the candidate become an eminent B. Table used in sampling methods
NA
educationist
C. Table used in statistical investigations
3. refers to inferring about the whole pop-
ulation based on the observations made on D. All the above
a small part. 7. Type-I Error occurs if
A. Pseudo-inference A. the null hypothesis is rejected even
though it is true
B. Objective inference
B. the null hypothesis is accepted even
C. Inductive inference though it is false
D. Deductive inference C. both the null hypothesis as well as al-
4. Sampling is advantageous as it ternative hypothesis are rejected
1. A 2. D 3. C 4. C 5. D 6. D 7. A 8. A
238 Chapter 17. Research methodology
D. None of the above A. Goal Orientation

8. is a preferred sampling method for the B. Following an aim
population with finite size.
C. Attaining an aim
A. Systematic sampling D. Praying to achieve an aim
B. Purposive sampling 14. Survey research studies
C. Cluster sampling A. Events
D. Area sampling B. Processes
M
9. Research and Development become the in- C. Populations
dex of development of country. Which of
D. Circumstances
the following reasons are true with regards
to this statement? 15. Evaluation research is concerned with
RA
A. Because R &D targets the human devel- A. Why are we doing?
opment B. What are we doing?
B. Because R &D can improve the standard C. How well are we doing?
of living of the people in a country
C. Because R &D reflect the true economic 16. A college wants to give training in use
and social conditions prevailing in a coun-
E of Statistical Package for Social Sciences
try (SPSS) to researchers. For this the college
should organize:
RE
D. All the above
10. The data of research is A. Lecture
A. Qualitative only B. Seminar

C. Workshop
B. Quantitative only
SH
D. Conference
C. Both (A) and (B)
17. Which of the following is NOT the charac-
D. Neither (a) nor (b) teristic of a research?
11. The longitudinal approach of research deals A. Research is systematic
with
B. Research is not passive
I
A. Short-term researches
C. Research is not a process
JA
B. Long-term researches
D. Research is problem oriented
C. Horizontal researches 18. One of the following is not a quality of re-
D. None of the above searcher:
12. Dramaturgical interviewing is carried out A. Keenness in enquiry
through B. He must be of alert mind
A. Debating C. His assertion to outstrip the evidence
B. Sampling D. Unison with that of which he is in
C. Case study search
19. A satisfactory statistical quantitative
D. Role playing
method should not possess one of the fol-
13. The word ’Anusandhan’ implies lowing qualities
9. D 10. C 11. B 12. D 13. B 14. C 15. C 16. C 17. C 18. C 19. A 20. B
A. Flexibility A. confirm triangulation

B. Measurability B. introduce new variables
C. Comparability C. improve data interpretation
D. Appropriateness D. eliminate spurious relations
20. Books and records are the primary sources 25. The depth of any research can be judged
by:
ER
of data in:
A. clinical research A. title of the research
B. historical research B. duration of the research
C. objectives of the research
GD
C. laboratory research
D. participatory research D. total expenditure on the research
21. The important pre-requisites of a re- 26. Research can be conducted by a person
searcher in sciences, social sciences and who:
humanities are A. is a hard worker
AN
A. laboratory skills, records, supervisor, B. holds a postgraduate degree
topic C. has studied research methodology
B. supervisor, topic, critical analysis, pa- D. possesses thinking and reasoning abil-
tience ity
CH
C. archives, supervisor, topic, flexibility in 27. Which of the following is not the Method
thinking of Research?
D. topic, supervisor, good temperament, A. Survey
pre-conceived notions
B. Historical
22. Which of the following options are the
C. Observation
N
main tasks of research in modern society?

D. Philosophical
A. to discover new things
28. Research can be classified as:
YA
B. to keep pace with the advancement in

knowledge A. Basic, Applied and Action Research
C. to systematically examine and critically B. Quantitative and Qualitative Research

analyse the investigations/sources with ob- C. Philosophical, Historical, Survey and
RA
jectivity Experimental Research

D. all of the above D. All the above
23. What do you consider as the main aim of 29. The first step of research is:
inter disciplinary research? A. Finding a problem
NA
A. To over simplify the problem of research B. Selecting a problem

B. To bring out holistic approach to re- C. Searching a problem
search
D. Identifying a problem
C. To create a new trend in research 30. To test null hypothesis, a researcher uses:
methodology
A. X
D. To reduce the emphasis of single subject
in research domain B. t test
24. One of the aims of the scientific method in C. ANOVA
research is to: D. factorial analysis
21. B 22. D 23. B 24. D 25. C 26. C 27. C 28. D 29. D 30. C
31. A research problem is feasible only when: 37. Which of the following methods will you
choose to prepare choropleth map of India
A. it is researchable
showing urban density of population:
B. it has utility and relevance
A. Quintiles
C. it is new and adds something to knowl-
edge B. Quartiles
D. all the above C. Break - point
32. Bibliography given in a research report: D. Mean and SD
A. has no relevance to research 38. Which of the following methods is best
M
suited to show on a map the types of crops
B. shows vast knowledge of the researcher being grown in a region?
C. helps those interested in further re- A. Isopleth
search
RA
B. Choropleth
D. all the above
C. Chorochromatic
33. Fundamental research reflects the ability
to: D. Choroschematic
A. Expound new principles 39. Generalised conclusion on the basis of a
sample is technically known as:
B. Synthesize new ideals
E A. Statistical inference
C. Evaluate the existing material concern-
ing research B. Parameter inference
RE
D. Study the existing literature regarding C. Data analysis and interpretation
various topics D. All of the above
34. The study in which the investigators at- 40. The experimental study is based on:
tempt to trace an effect is known as:
A. Survey of literature
SH
A. Survey Research
B. Conceptual parameters
B. Historical Research
C. Replication of research
C. Summative Research
D. The manipulation of variables
D. ’Ex-post Facto’ Research
41. The main characteristic of scientific re-
35. A ratio represents the relation between: search is:
I
A. Part and Part A. empirical

JA
B. Part and Whole B. theoretical

C. Whole and Whole C. experimental
D. All of the above D. all of the above
36. Circle graphs are used to show: 42. Authenticity of a research finding is its:
A. How one part is related to other parts? A. Validity
B. How various sections share in the B. Objectivity
whole?
C. Originality
C. How one whole is related to other
whole? D. All of the above
43. Which technique is generally followed
D. How various parts are related to the
when the population is finite?
whole?
31. D 32. C 33. A 34. D 35. D 36. D 37. B 38. B 39. C 40. D 41. D 42. B 43. A
A. Systematic Sampling Technique A. Inference

B. Purposive Sampling Technique B. Statistics
C. Area Sampling Technique C. Sample parameter
D. None of the above D. None of these
44. Research problem is selected from the stand 50. The importance of the correlation co-
efficient lies in the fact that:
ER
point of:
A. It is one of the most valid measure of
A. Social relevance
statistics.
B. Financial support
B. It is a non-parametric method of statis-
GD
C. Researcher’s interest tical analysis.
D. Availability of relevant literature C. There is a linear relationship between
45. Which one is called non-probability sam- the correlated variables.
pling? D. It allows one to determine the degree
or strength of the association between two
AN
A. Quota sampling
variables.
B. Cluster sampling 51. The F-test:
C. Systematic sampling A. is essentially a two tailed test.
D. Stratified random sampling B. is essentially a one tailed test.
CH
46. Formulation of hypothesis may NOT be re- C. can be one tailed as well as two tailed
quired in: depending on the hypothesis.
A. Survey method D. can never be a one tailed test.
B. Historical studies 52. Which one of the following is the most com-
prehensive source of population data?
N
C. Normative studies
A. Census
D. Experimental studies
B. National Sample Surveys
YA
47. Field-work based research is classified as:

C. Demographic Health Surveys
A. Historical
D. National Family Health Surveys
B. Empirical
53. Which one of the following principles is
RA
C. Biographical not applicable to sampling?

D. Experimental A. Sample units must be clearly defined
48. Which of the following sampling method B. Sample units must be dependent on each
is appropriate to study the prevalence of other
NA
AIDS amongst male and female in India in

C. Same units of sample should be used
1976, 1986, 1996 and 2006?
throughout the study
A. Quota sampling D. Sample units must be chosen in a sys-
B. Cluster sampling tematic and objective manner
C. Systematic sampling 54. The research is always -
D. Stratified random sampling A. exploring new knowledge
49. A statistical measure based upon the en- B. verifying the old knowledge
tire population is called parameter while C. filling the gap between knowledge
measure based upon a sample is known as:
D. all of these
44. A 45. A 46. B 47. B 48. C 49. B 50. D 51. C 52. A 53. B 54. D 55. A
55. The research that applies the laws at the 61. Which of the following is classified in the
time of field study to draw more and more category of the developmental research?
clear ideas about the problem is: A. Action research
A. Experimental research B. Descriptive research
B. Applied research C. Philosophical research
C. Action research D. All the above
D. None of these 62. We use Factorial Analysis:
56. When a research problem is related to het- A. To test the Hypothesis
M
erogeneous population, the most suitable B. To know the difference between two
sampling method is variables
A. Lottery Method C. To know the relationship between two
RA
B. Cluster Sampling variables
C. Stratified Sampling D. To know the difference among the many

variables
D. Convenient Sampling 63. A null hypothesis is
57. The process not needed in experimental
A. subjective in nature
research is:
B. the same as research hypothesis
A. Controlling
E
C. when there is difference between the
B. Observation variables
RE
C. Reference collection D. when there is no difference between the
D. Manipulation and replication variables
58. How can the objectivity of the research be 64. The research which is exploring new facts
enhanced? through the study of the past is called
SH
A. Content analysis
A. Through its validity
B. Historical research
B. Through its reliability
C. Mythological research
C. Through its impartiality
D. Philosophical research
D. All of these
65. Action research is
59. Action-research is:
I
A. An applied research
JA
A. An applied research
B. Simulative research
B. A longitudinal research
C. A longitudinal research
C. A research carried out to solve immedi- D. A research carried out to solve immedi-
ate problems ate problems
D. All the above 66. The process not needed in Experimental
60. The basis on which assumptions are formu- Researches is
lated: A. Controlling
A. Universities B. Observation
B. Cultural background of the country C. Manipulation
C. Specific characteristics of the castes D. Content Analysis
67. Manipulation is always a part of
D. All of these
56. C 57. B 58. D 59. C 60. B 61. D 62. B 63. D 64. B 65. D 66. C 67. B
A. Historical research 73. If a researcher conducts a research on find-

ing out which administrative style con-
B. Descriptive research
tributes more to institutional effectiveness?
C. Fundamental research This will be an example of
D. Experimental research A. Applied Research
68. Which correlation co-efficient best explains B. Action Research
ER
the relationship between creativity and in-
telligence? C. Basic Research
A. 0.3 D. None of the above

74. Normal Probability Curve should be
GD
B. 0.5
C. 0.6 A. Zero skewed
D. 1.00 B. Positively skewed

69. Action research means C. Negatively skewed
AN
A. An applied research D. Leptokurtic skewed
B. A longitudinal research 75. Which one of the following is the oldest
Archival source of data in India?
C. A research with socioeconomic objec-
tive A. Census
CH
D. A research initiated to solve an imme- B. Vital Statistics
diate problem
C. Agricultural Statistics
70. Research is
D. National Sample Surveys
A. Working in a scientific way to search
76. In a large random data set following nor-
N
for truth of any problem

mal distribution, the ratio (%) of number of
B. Finding solution to any problem data points which are in the range of (mean
± standard deviation) to the total number
YA
C. Searching again and again

of data points, is
A. 47%
71. A common test in research demands much
RA
priority on B. 50%
A. Objectivity C. 67%
B. Reliability D. 97%
C. Useability 77. Which of the following variables cannot be
NA
expressed in quantitative terms?

D. All of the above
72. Which of the following is the first step in A. Marital Status
starting the research process? B. Numerical Aptitude
A. Identification of problem C. Professional Attitude
B. Survey of related literature D. Socio-economic Status
C. Searching for solutions to the problem 78. A doctor studies the relative effectiveness
D. Searching sources of information to lo- of two drugs of dengue fever. His research
cate problem would be classified as
68. D 69. D 70. A 71. D 72. D 73. A 74. A 75. D 76. C 77. C 78. D 79. D
A. Case Study A. Primary Data only

B. Ethnography B. Secondary Data only
C. Descriptive Survey C. Both Primary and Secondary Data
D. Experimental Research D. None of the above

85. Newton gave three basic laws of motion.
79. The term ‘phenomenology’ is associated
This research is categorized as
with the process of
A. Sample Survey
A. Correlational Study
B. Applied Research
B. Analysis of Variance
M
C. Descriptive Research
C. Probability Sampling
D. Fundamental Research
D. Qualitative Research
86. A group of experts in a specific area of
RA
80. The ‘Sociogram’ technique is used to study knowledge assembled at a place and pre-
pared a syllabus for a new course. The pro-
A. Human Relations
cess may be termed as
B. Vocational Interest
A. Seminar
C. Achievement Motivation
B. Workshop
D. Professional Competence C. Conference
E
81. Which one of the following methods serve D. Symposium
to measure correlation between two vari-
87. In the process of conducting research “For-
RE
ables?
mulation of Hypothesis” is followed by
A. Two-way table
A. Analysis of Data
B. Scatter Diagram B. Collection of Data
C. Frequency Distribution
SH
C. Statement of Objectives
D. Coefficient of Rank Correlation D. Selection of Research Tools
82. Which of the following phrases is not rel- 88. Which one of the following methods is best
evant to describe the meaning of research suited for mapping the distribution of dif-
as a process? ferent crops as provided in the standard
classification of crops in India?
A. Trial and Error
I
A. Dot method
B. Problem Solving
JA
B. Pie diagram
C. Systematic Activity
C. Isopleth technique
D. Objective Observation
D. Chorochromatic technique
83. Which of the following is not an example
89. Which one of the following does not come
of a continuous variable?
under the methods of data classification?
A. Height
A. Spatial
B. Attitude B. Normative
C. Family size C. Qualitative
D. Intelligence D. Quantitative
84. A research paper is a brief reportof research 90. Which one of the following is not a source
work based on of data?
80. A 81. D 82. D 83. D 84. C 85. D 86. B 87. B 88. D 89. A 90. D
A. GIS 97. Which one of the following is a research

B. Sample survey tool?
C. Population census A. Graph
D. Administrative records B. Diagram
91. The essential qualities of a researcher are C. Illustration
ER
A. systematization or theorizing of knowl- D. Questionnaire
edge 98. Research is not considered ethical if it
B. reliance on observation and evidence A. is not of a very high standard
C. spirit of free enquiry B. tries to prove a particular point
GD
D. all the above C. does not investigate the data scientifi-
92. Research is conducted to cally
A. Generate new knowledge D. does not ensure privacy and anonymity

of the respondent
AN
B. Obtain research degree
99. The research that aims at immediate appli-
C. Reinterpret existing knowledge cation is
D. All of the above A. Action Research
93. A hypothesis is a B. Empirical Research
CH
A. law C. Conceptual Research
B. canon D. Fundamental Research
C. postulate 100. When two or more successive footnotes
D. supposition refer to the same work which one of the
following expressions is used?
94. Suppose you want to investigate the work-
N
ing efficiency of nationalized bank in India, A. et.al

which one of the following would you fol- B. op.cit
YA
low?
C. loc.cit
A. Area Sampling
D. ibid
B. Quota Sampling
101. Nine year olds are taller than seven year
RA
C. Sequential Sampling olds. This is an example of a reference

D. Multi-stage Sampling drawn from
95. Controlled group condition is applied in A. Vertical study
A. Survey Research B. Time series study
NA
B. Historical Research C. Experimental study

C. Descriptive Research D. Cross-sectional study
D. Experimental Research 102. Conferences are meant for
96. Workshops are meant for A. Group discussions
A. giving lectures B. Multiple target groups
B. multiple target groups C. Show-casing new Research
C. showcase new theories D. All the above
D. hands on training/experience 103. Ex Post Facto research means
91. D 92. D 93. D 94. D 95. D 96. D 97. D 98. D 99. A 100. D 101. D 102. D
103. A
A. The research is carried out after the in- A. Scientific hypothesis is a scientific the-
cident ory
B. The research is carried out prior to the B. Hypothesis is a proposed explanation
incident for a phenomenon
C. The research is carried out along with C. A hypothesis is a basis for reasoning
the happening of an incident without any assumption of its truth
D. The research is carried out keeping in D. A hypothesis is made on the basis of lim-
mind the possibilities of an incident ited evidence as a starting point for further
investigations
M
104. Research ethics do not include 109. A research paper
A. Integrity A. is a compilation of information on a
B. Honesty topic
RA
B. can be published in more than one jour-
C. Objectivity
nal
D. Subjectivity
C. contains original research as deemed by
105. Which one of the following is an indica- the author
tion of the quality of a research journal?
D. contains peer-reviewed original re-
A. h-index search or evaluation of research conducted
E
by others
B. g-index
110. Which one of the following belongs to the
RE
C. i10-index category of good ‘research ethics’?
D. Impact factor A. Publishing the same paper in two re-
search journals without telling the editors
106. Good ‘research ethics’ means
B. Trimming outliers from a data set with-
A. Assigning a particular research problem out discussing your reasons in a research
SH
to one Ph.D./research student only paper

B. Submitting the same research C. Conducting a review of the literature
manuscript for publishing in more than that acknowledges the contributions of
one journal other people in the relevant field or rele-
C. Not disclosing the holdings of shares/- vant prior work
I
stocks in a company that sponsors your D. Including a colleague as an author on

research a research paper in return for a favor even
JA
D. Discussing with your colleagues confi- though the colleague did not make a serious
dential data from a research paper that you contribution to the paper
are reviewing for an academic journal 111. A workshop is
107. Which of the following sampling methods A. a meeting for discussion on a topic
is based on probability? B. a conference for discussion on a topic
A. Quota sampling C. a class at a college or a university in
which a teacher and the students discuss a
B. Stratified sampling
topic
C. Judgement sampling D. a brief intensive course for a small
D. Convenience sampling group emphasizing the development of a
skill or technique for solving a specific prob-
108. Identify the incorrect statement:
lem
104. D 105. D 106. A 107. B 108. A 109. D 110. C 111. D 112. D
112. A working hypothesis is 118. The variable which impacts the relation-
A. a scientific theory ship between an independent variable and
a dependent variable is known as
B. not required to be tested
A. control variable
C. a proven hypothesis for an argument
B. predictor variable
D. a provisionally accepted hypothesis for
ER
further research C. precedent variable
113. Which one of the following is not a type D. antecedent variable
of experimental method?
119. Which one of the following is a non-
A. Single group experiment
probability sampling method?
GD
B. Parallel group experiment
A. Quota Sampling
C. Rational group experiment
B. Cluster Sampling
D. Residual group experiment
114. Which one of the following is not a non- C. Stratified Sampling
AN
parametric test? D. Simple Random Sampling
A. t-test 120. The population information is called pa-
B. Run test rameter while the corresponding sample
information is known as
C. Sign test
CH
D. Chi-square test A. Universe
115. Identify the correct sequence of research B. Statistics
steps :
C. Inference
A. Selection of topic, review of literature,
interpretation of findings, data collection D. Sampling design
N
B. Selection of topic, data collection, re- 121. The sequential operations in scientific re-
view of literature, interpretation of findings search are
YA
C. Review of literature, selection of topic, A. Elimination of Spurious Relations, The-

data collection, interpretation of findings orisation, Generalisation, Co-variation
D. Selection of topic, review of literature, B. Theorisation, Generalisation, Elimina-
data collection, interpretation of findings
RA
tion of Spurious Relations, Co-variation

116. Deconstruction is a popular method of re-
C. Co-vaiation, Elimination of Spurious Re-
search in
lations, Generalisation, Theorisation
A. Literature
D. Generalisation, Co-variation, Theorisa-
NA
B. Basic Science tion, Elimination of Spurious Relations

C. Social Science 122. In sampling, the lottery method is used
D. Applied Science for
117. With which one of the following tech- A. Theorisation
niques communality is associated?
B. Randomisation
A. Case studies
C. Interpretation
B. SWOT analysis
C. Factor analysis D. Conceptualisation
D. Univariate analysis 123. Which is the main objective of research?
113. D 114. A 115. D 116. A 117. C 118. A 119. A 120. B 121. C 122. B 123. D
A. To review the literature A. Stratified

B. To get an academic degree B. Purposive
C. To summarize what is already known C. Systematic
D. To discover new facts or to make fresh D. Simple Random
interpretation of known facts 130. Identify the category of evaluation that
124. Sampling error decreases with the assesses the learning progress to provide
continuous feedback to the students during
A. Process of analysis instruction.
M
B. Increase in sample size A. Formative
C. Decrease in sample size B. Diagnostic
D. Process of randomization C. Placement
RA
125. The Principles of fundamental research D. Summative
are used in 131. The research stream of immediate appli-
A. Action research cation is
B. Applied research A. Action research
C. Historical research B. Empirical research

E
D. Philosophical research C. Conceptual research
126. In a thesis, figures and tables are included D. Fundamental research

RE
in 132. The core elements of dissertation are
A. The text itself A. Research Plan; Research Data; Analysis;
References
B. The appendix
B. Executive Summary; Literature review;
SH
C. A separate chapter
Data gathered; Conclusions; Bibliography
D. The concluding chapter C. Introduction; Literature Review; Re-
127. A thesis statement is search Methodology; Results; Discussion
and Conclusion
A. A fact
D. Introduction; Data Collection; Data
B. A discussion
I
Analysis; Conclusions and Recommenda-

C. An assertion tions
JA
D. An observation 133. What is a Research Design?
128. The research approach of Max Weber to A. Sampling using a sampling frame
understand how people create meanings in B. Literally the researcher’s brief case
natural settings is identified as
C. Identifying people who are suitable for
A. Critical paradigm research
B. Positive paradigm D. Sampling of people, newspapers, televi-
C. Natural paradigm sion programmes etc.
134. The frequency distribution of a research
D. Interpretative paradigm
data which is symmetrical in shape similar
129. Which one of the following is a non prob- to a normal distribution but center peak is
ability sampling? much higher, is
124. B 125. B 126. A 127. C 128. D 129. B 130. A 131. A 132. C 133. D 134. C
135. B
A. Skewed C. consistency in the way the thesis is writ-

ten
B. Platykurtic
D. all of the above
C. Leptokurtic
140. Jean Piaget gave a theory of cognitive de-
D. Mesokurtic velopment of humans on the basis of his
135. When planning to do a social research, it
A. Action research
ER
is better to
B. Applied research
A. Be familiar with literature on the topic
C. Evaluation Research
B. Approach the topic with an open mind
D. Fundamental research
GD
C. Do a pilot study before getting stuck
141. “Male and female students perform
into it
equally well in a numerical aptitude test.”
D. Forget about theory because this is a This statement indicates a
very practical
A. null hypothesis
136. When academicians are called to deliver
AN
lecture or presentations to an audience on B. research hypothesis
certain topics or a set of topics of educa- C. statistical hypothesis
tional nature, it is called D. directional hypothesis
A. Seminar 142. The conclusions/findings of which type
CH
B. Workshop of research cannot be generalized to other
situations
C. Symposium
A. Historical research
D. Training Program
B. Descriptive Research
137. Media is known as
C. Experimental Research
N
A. First Estate
D. Causal Comparative Research
B. Second Estate
143. Which of the following steps are required
YA
C. Third Estate to design a questionnaire

D. Fourth Estate A. Revision of the draft
138. Which of the following statements regard- B. Prepare a draft of questionnaire
RA
ing the meaning of research are correct

C. Writing primary and secondary aims of
A. It leads to enhancement of knowledge the study
B. Research refers to a series of systematic D. All of the above
activity or activities undertaken to find out 144. When the purpose of a definition is to ex-
NA
the solution of a problem plain the use or to eliminate ambiguity the

C. It is a systematic, logical and an unbi- definition is called
ased process wherein verification of hy- A. Lexical
pothesis data analysis, interpretation and
formation of principles can be done B. Persuasive
D. All of the above C. Theoretical
139. A good thesis writing should involve D. Stipulative

145. Which of the following statements is not
A. careful checking of references
true in the context of participatory re-
B. a clear and well written abstract search?
136. A 137. D 138. D 139. D 140. D 141. A 142. C 143. D 144. C 145. D
A. It recognizes knowledge as power. A. Copyright

B. It is a collective process of enquiry. B. Thesis format
C. It emphasises on people as experts. C. Patenting policy
D. Its sole purpose is production of knowl- D. Data sharing policies
edge. 151. A definition that has a meaning that is
146. Which of the following statements is true deliberately assigned to some symbol is
in the context of the testing of a hypothe- called:
sis? A. Lexical
M
A. It is only the null hypothesis, that can B. Precising
be tested.
C. Stipulative
B. It is only the alternative hypothesis, that
D. Persuasive
can be tested.
RA
152. A Cluster of propositions with a structure
C. Both, the alternative and the null hy- that exhibits some inference is called
potheses can be tested.
A. An argument
D. Both, the alternative and the null hy-
potheses cannot be tested. B. An inference
147. Which of the following are the basic rules C. An explanation
of APA style of referencing format?
E
D. A valid argument
A. Alphabetically index reference list 153. In qualitative research paradigm, which of
RE
the following features may be considered
B. Invert authors’ names (last name first)
critical?
C. Italicize titles of longer works such as
A. Data collection with standardised re-
books and journals
search tools.
D. All of the above
SH
B. Data collection with bottom-up empiri-

148. Which of the following are the character- cal evidences.
istics of a seminar?
C. Sampling design with probability sam-
A. It is a form of academic instruction. ple techniques.
B. It needs involvement of skilled persons. D. Data gathering to take with top-down
C. It involves questioning, discussion and systematic evidences.
I
debates. 154. From the following list of statements iden-

JA
tify the set which has negative implications

D. All of the above
for ‘research ethics’ :
149. A researcher is interested in studying the
prospects of a particular political party in A. Related studies are cited without proper
an urban area. What tool should he prefer references.
for the study? B. Conduct of practitioner is screened in
terms of reported research evidences.
A. Interview
C. Both policy making and policy imple-
B. Schedule
menting processes are regulated in terms
C. Rating scale of preliminary studies.
D. Questionnaire D. All of the above
150. Ethical norms in research do not involve 155. Which of the following is an initial manda-
guidelines for: tory requirement for pursuing research?
146. A 147. D 148. D 149. D 150. B 151. C 152. A 153. B 154. D 155. B
A. Developing a research design D. Data take the forms of words or pictures.

B. Formulating a research question
159. A detailed description of methodology of
C. Formulating a research hypothesis
research is required in
D. Deciding about the data analysis proce-
A. Thesis/Dissertation
dure
156. The format of thesis writing is the same B. Symposium/Workshop
ER
as in C. Seminar paper/Articles
A. a research dissertation D. Conference and Seminar Papers
B. writing of seminar presentation 160. Research ethics has a direct connection
GD
more often with which stages of research?
C. preparation of a research paper/article
A. Defining and delimiting the scope of re-
D. presenting a workshop/conference pa-
search.
per
157. In a Ph.D. thesis which one is the correct B. Deciding about statistical techniques
and data analysis.
AN
sequence for showing scheme of Chapteri-
sation? C. Problem formulation and reporting of
A. Introduction, Design of study, Data research findings.
Analysis and Interpretation, Generaliza- D. Defining the population and deciding
tions, Conclusions and Survey of related the sampling technique for research.
CH
studies and suggestions for further re- 161. For advancing knowledge, the latest strat-
search, References and Appendix egy used by mankind is
B. Survey of related studies, Introduction, A. scientific thinking
Design of the study, Data-Analysis and in-
terpretation, Conclusions and generalisa- B. inductive reasoning
tions, suggested further study, References, C. deductive reasoning
N
Appendix D. consulting an authority

C. Survey of related studies, References, In- 162. Action research is a type of
YA
troduction, Design of study, Data analysis

A. Survey research
and interpretation, Conclusions and gener-
alizations, Suggestions for further research, B. Applied research
Appendix C. Quantity research
RA
D. Introduction, Survey of related studies, D. Population research

Design of study, Data-presentation; anal-
163. Hypothesis relates
ysis & Interpretation, Formulation of gen-
eralization & Conclusions, Suggestions for A. Constant to constant
NA
further research, References & Appendix B. Constant to variables

158. Which of the following is not the critical
C. Variables to constant
feature of qualitative research?
D. Variables to variables
A. Researcher becomes immersed in the
situation, present or past related to the phe- 164. In the purposive method of sampling de-
nomena. sign, items are selected according to
B. Seeking to establish relationships A. Personal judgement

among measured social facts. B. Law of probability
C. Actual settings are the direct source of C. Law of certainty
data.
156. A 157. D 158. B 159. A 160. C 161. A 162. B 163. D 164. A
165. Primary data for the research process be A. Being regular

collected through
B. Covering the prescribed course
A. Survey
C. Ensuring that the students are relaxed
B. Experiment while teaching
C. Both (A) and (B) D. Making students understand what the
D. None of the above teacher explains
166. A research problem is not feasible if 172. Which of the following is the biggest bar-
rier to communication in a classroom?
A. It is researchable
M
A. Outside disturbance
B. It has utility and relevance
B. Noise in the classroom
C. It is new and adds something to knowl-
edge C. Lack of teaching aids
RA
D. It consists of independent and depen- D. Confusion on the part of the teacher
dent variables 173. How is the competency of a teacher
167. Determining the relationship between judged?
two or more variables occurs in
A. Personality
A. Survey research
B. Books published
B. Action research
E
C. Meeting the needs of students
C. Correlational research
D. Length of association with a school
RE
D. Naturalistic observation
174. What is the most important challenge be-
168. Participant observation is the process of fore a teacher?
immersing yourself in the study of
A. Checking question papers
A. People
B. Getting assignments finished
SH
B. Options
C. Making teaching-learning enjoyable
C. Methods
D. Maintaining discipline in the classroom
D. Outcomes
169. ’Ethnography’ describes
175. is not required for an effective com-
A. Way of life munication
I
B. Culture A. Speech modulation

JA
C. Both (A) and (B) B. Charming personality

D. Progeny C. Appropriate gestures
170. The least important thing to do in teach-
D. Good knowledge of the content
ing is
176. Who is an effective communicator?
A. Punishing the students
A. The one with histrionic talents
B. Lecturing in interesting way
B. The one who is claer with what he says
C. Ensuring discipline in the class
C. The one who is a humourous speaker
D. Drawing sketches and diagrams on the
blackboard D. The one who can speak in many lan-
171. For a teacher, which is the most important guages
skill to possess? 177. What is required in a classroom?
165. C 166. D 167. C 168. A 169. C 170. A 171. D 172. D 173. C 174. C 175. B
176. B 177. B
A. Teacher who is disciplined and take ating to the textbook and research
tendance regularly
D. A teacher delivering his lecture on the
B. Teacher effectively answering the ques- basis of textbook contents and standard
tions asked by students books
C. A teacher delivering his lecture accord-
ER
GD
AN
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
18. School and classroom management
GD
AN
CH
1. The main purpose of the supervision of C. Parents
teaching should be the.
D. Students
A. Advacement of pupil welfare 5. The criticism most frequently leveled at
B. Proper utilization of school facilities school administration is that.
N
C. Carrying out of the curriculum A. They like praise

D. Achievement of success in examination B. They are so lazy
YA
C. They fail to provide leadership

2. Supervision should be primarily.
D. They do not know teacher
A. Preventive and critical 6. The school headmasters are expected to.
B. Preventive and corrective
RA
A. Put into operation the course of study

C. Constructive and creative
B. Hold daily meetings
D. Constructive and critical
C. Prepare the budget
3. The basic purpose of supervision is to help.
D. All of the above
NA
A. Teachers in improving methods

7. The effective supervision is indicated by.
B. Teachers in understanding pupil
A. Good relations between teacher and su-
C. Children learn more effectively pervisors.
D. Teachers in dealing pupils B. Helping teachers in their teaching
4. The elementary school teachers are directly C. Helping teachers becoming more self-
responsible to the. sufficient
A. Headmaster D. Criticizing teacher,s lessons
B. DEO 8. The school policy should be determined by.
1. A 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. D
256 Chapter 18. School and classroom management
A. The professional educators 15. Arrangement of physical resources is.

B. Headmasters A. instructional tasks
C. Citizens B. Non - instructional tasks
D. Citizens and educators C. Both
9. The chief responsibility of the principal is D. None of the above
to. 16. The main types of administration are.
A. Organize and administer the guidance A. 2
programme
B. 3
M
B. Provide leadership in instructional plan
C. 6
C. Maintain school records
D. 9
D. Handle discipline problems
RA
17. Which is not the type of adminstration.
10. Indication of democratic attitude is.
A. Instructional adminstration
A. Equal rights
B. Authoritarian adminstration
B. Participation
C. Democratic adminstration
C. Cooperation
D. Laissez Faire adminstration
D. All of the
E
18. Which is not the characteristic of authori-
11. The history of administration goes back to. tative administration.
A. 5000 BC
RE
A. Rudeness
B. 4000 BC B. Suppressing the subordinates
C. 800 BC C. Strict discipline
D. 1000 BC D. Sharing
SH
12. Administration means. 19. Authoritative administration is based on.

A. To look after A. Dictatorship
B. To protect B. Mutual sharing
C. To run C. Non -interference
D. To establish D. None of the above
I
13. The function of educational administration 20. Democratic administration is based on.
JA
and management is.

A. Dictatorship
A. Instructional tasks
B. Mutual sharing
B. Non - instructional tasks
C. Non- interference
C. Both A and B
21. Laissez Faire administration is based on.
14. Provision of good educational environment
is. A. Dictatorship
A. Instructional tasks B. Mutual sharing
B. Non instructional tasks C. Non - interference
C. Both A and B D. None of the above

22. Boss is always right is the feature of.
9. B 10. D 11. A 12. A 13. C 14. A 15. B 16. B 17. A 18. D 19. B 20. B 21. C
22. B
A. instructional adminstration 29. According to Fayol elements of administra-

tion are.
B. Authoritarian adminstration
A. 4
C. Democratic adminstration
B. B.5
D. Laissez Faire adminstration
C. 5
23. Respect of opinion of the feature of.
ER
D. D.2
A. Instructional adminstration
30. According to Gulick and Urwick elements
B. Authoritarian adminstration of administration are.
C. Democratic adminstration A. 7
GD
D. Laissez Faire adminstration B. 5
24. Sense of responsibility is not cared in. C. 8
A. Instructional adminstration D. D.9
B. Authoritarian adminstration 31. In “POSDCORB”Co stands for.
AN
C. Democratic adminstration A. Cooperation
D. Laissez Faire adminstration B. Collection

25. Literal meaning of supervision is. C. Coordinating
D. Correlation
CH
A. Superior knowledge and power
32. To make arrangements is the part of.
B. Superior knowledge and service
A. Planning
C. Superior efforts and service
B. Organizing
D. None of these
C. Commanding
26. “Supervision is not to control the teacher
N
but to work cooperatively” is the saying of. D. Coordinating

33. Execution of plans and decisions is the part
A. Glatthorn
of.
YA
B. Hoy and Forsyth

A. Planning
C. Harris
B. Organizing
D. Glickman C. Commanding
RA
27. In teaching learning process supervision is

D. Coordinating
usually carried out by.
34. To bring harmony among all the elements
A. Principal of programme is.
B. Teacher
NA
A. Planning
C. Parents B. Organizing
D. Society C. Commanding
28. Assessment of how well a school is per- D. Coordinating
forming is. 35. School Budget includes.
A. Administration A. Development expendciture
B. Supervision B. Non development expenditure
C. Inspection C. Both A and B
D. All of the above D. Nether A nor B
23. C 24. D 25. D 26. B 27. A 28. C 29. B 30. A 31. C 32. B 33. C 34. D 35. C
36. D
36. BM stands for. 43. Who is the father of operational manage-

A. Budget Money ment theory?
B. Budget Monitoring A. Fredrick Tylor
C. Budget Materials B. Henry Fayol
D. Budget Manual C. Terry and Franklin

37. Non – development budget includes. D. Elton Meo
A. Salaries 44. All Govt grants and expenditures are main-
tained in.
B. Running expenditures
M
C. Maintenance of building A. Cash Register
D. All of the above B. Acquittance Roll

C. Stock Register
RA
38. New Libraries laboratories etc are con-
structed under. D. Contingent Register
A. Development Budget 45. In case of GPE advance,the number of in-
B. Non - development budget stallments for refunding is.
C. Both A and B A. 24
D. None of the above B. 32
E
39. Leadership is the ability. C. 65
A. To influence
RE
D. 41
B. To motivate 46. Developing alternatives is a step of.
C. To achieve organizational goals A. Organization
D. All of the above
B. Planning
SH
40. Staff development means.

C. Direction
A. Recruiting staff
D. Control
B. Training staff
47. How funds in a given period will be ob-
C. Increasing staff tained and spent is?
D. Decreasing staff A. Allocation
I
41. Selecting one course of action among vari-

B. Expenditure
JA
ous alternatives is.

A. Planning C. Budget
B. Organizing D. Reciept
C. Decision making 48. Types of supervision encouraging vari-

ety,originality and indpendent experimen-
D. Coordinating tation is.
42. Who is called father of scientific manage-
A. Preventive
ment theory?
B. Corrective
A. Fredrick Tylor
B. Henry Fayol C. Creative
C. Terry and Franklin D. Construction

49. Who advocated bureaucratic theory?
D. Elton Meo
37. D 38. A 39. D 40. B 41. C 42. C 43. D 44. A 45. A 46. B 47. C 48. C 49. D
A. Campbell 56. All financial transactions of the school oc-

B. Herzberg curring from day to day is entered in.
C. Henry Fayol A. Cash Book
D. Max Weber B. Stock Register

50. Directing must be consistent with. C. Service book
ER
A. Organizational policies D. Log Book
B. Procedures 57. The process of directing others towards the
C. Job descriptions accomplishment of some objectives is.
GD
D. All of the above A. Communication
51. In case of new recruitment the probation B. Managing
period is.
C. Leadership
A. 3 Years
B. 5 Years
AN
58. Micro planning done in.
C. 8 Years
D. 9 Years A. Top Management
52. The power delegated throughtout an orga- B. Middle Management
nization is.
CH
C. Lower Management
A. Control
D. Middle and Lower Management
B. Command
59. The ACR cannot be initiated for the period
C. Decetralization of less than.
D. Centralization A. Two months
N
53. The father of modern theory of manage-

ment is. B. Three months
C. Five months
YA
A. Tyler
B. Hery Fayol D. Four months
C. Max Weber 60. The individual in the group given the task
of directing and coordinating is.
RA
D. Gullick
54. The smallest interacting parts of a systems A. Leader
are. B. Supervisor
A. Input C. Instructor
NA
B. Component
D. Guide
C. Structure
61. A choice made between two or more alter-
D. Feed back natives is called.
55. Which pension is granted to civil servant
A. Assumption
who retires in the age of sixty.
B. Decision
A. Superannuation
B. Invalid C. Reporting
C. Retiring D. None
D. Compensation 62. The cash book in maintained by.
50. D 51. A 52. C 53. B 54. B 55. A 56. A 57. B 58. D 59. B 60. B 61. D 62. A
A. DDO 69. Person who possesses qualities of leader-

ship is.
B. EDO
A. Leader
C. DEO
B. Manager
D. Dy.DEO
63. Authoritarian model is more suitable for. C. Administrator
A. Confidence D. Officer
B. Improvement 70. The process of making judgment is called.
C. Achievement A. Budgeting
M
D. Discipline B. Evaluation
64. Teacher salaries and allowances collec- C. Demonstration

tively are written in.
RA
D. Documentation
A. Cash Register 71. The characteristics of good planner are.
B. Acquaintance Roll A. Optimistic
C. Contingent Register B. Motivator
65. To motivate the others to achieve certain C. Producer
goals is.
E D. All of them
A. Planning
72. What dose E and D Rules means.
B. Leading
RE
A. Efficiency and duty rules
C. Controlling
B. Efficiency and department rules
D. Organizing
C. Efficiency and disciplinary rules
66. A programme of activities which is de-
signed to attain educational ends is. D. Efficiency and discipline rules
SH
73. A.D.P is an abbreviation of.

A. Learning
A. Annual development programme
B. Curriculum
B. Annual duty programme
C. Instruction
C. Annual division of performance
D. Syllabi
I
67. Superannuation retirement age in Pakistan D. Annual debating programme

is. 74. The power is concentrated in the hands of
JA
one or few people in.

A. 60 Years
A. Control
B. 65 Years
B. Command
C. 75 Years
C. Decentralization
D. 80 Years
68. Pension is given if the retirement is after D. Coordination
service of. 75. What is central to administration?
A. 25 Years A. Organization
B. 30 Years B. Communication
C. 45 Years C. Decision making
D. 50 Years D. Coordination
63. D 64. A 65. B 66. D 67. A 68. A 69. A 70. D 71. D 72. C 73. A 74. D 75. C
76. A
76. In POSDIR,R stands for. A. Administration

A. Reporting B. Inspection
B. Response reply C. Supervision
C. Representing D. Management
83. The concept of inspection was first intro-
D. Directing
ER
duced in.
77. S.N.E is an abbreviation of.
A. Pakistan
A. Schedule of new experience B. India
B. Schedule of new entry
GD
C. England
C. Schedule of new expenditure D. China
D. System of new entry 84. Budgeting is an estimation of.
78. The level of school addminstration can best A. Income and investment
AN
be judged through. B. Investment
A. Head teacher C. Income and expenditure
B. Beautiful building D. All of the above
C. Learning outcomes 85. The authorized person of staff performance
CH
is.
D. Teachers students relations
A. Teacher
79. Acquittance roll is used for.
B. Head teacher
A. Salary disbursement
C. Student
B. Stock
D. Clerk
N
C. Govt grants 86. A supervisor is one who

D. Expenditures
YA
A. Gives directions
80. The degree to which organizational re- B. Provides friendly help
sources contribute to productivity is.
C. Inspects classrooms
A. Effectiveness
RA
D. Criticizes the teaching method

B. Efficiency 87. Boss is right is the feature of
C. Output A. Instructional administration
D. Production B. Laissez Faire administration
NA
81. All transaction should be enterd in which C. Authoritarian administration

register. D. Democratic administration
A. Fee 88. Respect of opinion is the feature of
B. Cash A. Laissez Faire administration
C. Funds B. Instructional administration
D. Withdrawal C. Authoritarian administration
82. Coordinating stimulating and directing the D. Democratic administration

growth of teacher is the purpose of. 89. In “POSDCORB” CO stands for
77. B 78. C 79. A 80. B 81. B 82. B 83. C 84. C 85. B 86. B 87. C 88. D 89. A
A. Coordinating 96. Evaluation that monitors learning progress

is?
B. Cooperation
A. Formative evaluation
C. Correlation
B. Placement evaluation
D. Collection
C. Summative evaluation
90. Micro planning is done in
D. Diagnostic evaluation
A. Top Management
97. A formal and systematic procedure of get-
B. Middle Management ting information is?
M
C. Lower Management A. Test
D. Middle and Lower Management B. Evaluation
91. What does E and D rules mean C. Assessment
RA
A. Efficiency and duty rules D. Measurement
B. Efficiency and discipline rules 98. The process of obtaining numerical value
is?
C. Efficiency and department rules
A. Test
D. None of these
B. Evaluation
92. Instrument used for measuring sample of
behavior is?
E C. Assessment
A. Test D. Measurement
RE
99. A sum of questions is?
B. Evaluation
A. Test
C. Assessment
B. Evaluation
D. Measurement
C. Assessment
93. Limited to quantitative description of
SH
pupil’s performance is? D. Measurement

A. Test 100. The first step in measurement is?
B. Evaluation A. Decision of what to measure

B. Development of the test
C. Assessment
C. Administering the test
D. Measurement
I
D. None
94. The purpose of the evaluation is to make?
JA
101. The purpose of formative evaluation is?

A. Opinion
A. Monitoring progress of students
B. Decision
B. Decision of what to measure
C. Judgment
C. Development of the test
D. Prediction
D. Administering the test
95. The purpose of evaluation is to make judg-
102. To assess achievement at the end of in-
ment about educational?
struction is?
A. Age A. Formative Assessment
B. Quantity B. Summative Assessment
C. Quality C. Diagnostic Assessment
D. Time period D. Placement Assessment
90. D 91. B 92. A 93. D 94. C 95. C 96. A 97. A 98. D 99. A 100. A 101. A
102. B 103. C
103. Vast of all in scope? A. Essay

A. Test B. Completion
B. Assessment C. Short answer
C. Evaluation D. Multiple choice question

110. Facility value of less than 0.20 means?
D. Measurement
ER
A. Item is easy
104. The least in scope is?
B. Item is difficult
A. Test
C. Item is too easy
B. Evaluation
GD
D. Item is acceptable
C. Assessment 111. Objective type question have advantage
over essay type because such questions?
D. Measurement
A. Are easy to mark
105. Permanent difficulties in learning are in-
B. Are eay to solve
AN
vestigated in?
A. Diagnostic Assessment C. Are easy to prepare
D. None
B. Formative Assessment
112. Discrimination value of more than 0.4
C. Placement Assessment means
CH
D. Summative Assessment A. Item is weak
106. Broader in meaning is? B. Item is good
A. Aims C. tem is acceptable
B. Objectives D. None
N
113. Test involving the construction of certain

C. Specific Objectives
patterns are called?
D. Instructional objectives
YA
A. Scholastic test
107. Procedures used to determine person abil- B. Intelligence test
ities is?
C. Performance tests
A. Norm performance test
RA
D. None
B. Typical performance test 114. In multiple choice items the stem of the
C. Criterion performance te items should be?
A. Small
D. Maximum performance test
NA
B. Large
108. In norm referenced test the comparison is
between? C. Undefine
A. Areas D. Meaningful
115. Which appropriate verb will you use to
B. Groups make an objective behavioral?
C. Interest A. To know
D. Individuals B. To construct
109. In which question marking will be more C. To appreciate
reliable?
D. To understand
104. A 105. A 106. A 107. D 108. D 109. D 110. B 111. A 112. C 113. C 114. D
115. B 116. B
116. Objectives representing the purposes of A. Frequencies

instruction of a teacher are called? B. Quartiles
A. Attainment C. Mid point
B. Instructional D. Class
C. Performance 123. In a norm referenced test which item is
best?
D. None
A. Item difficulty is near 50
117. Running description of active behavior of
a student as observed by the teacher is? B. Item difficulty is near 75
M
A. Anecdotal record C. Item difficulty is near 100
D. Item difficulty is near zero
B. Autobiography
124. Which question has increasing objectivity
C. Autobiography
RA
of marking?
D. None A. Multiple type questions
118. A test very popular with class room B. Unstructured essay
teacher is?
C. Structured essay
A. Matching D. Short answer
B. True false test 125. The most widely used format on standard-
E
ized test in USA is?
C. Multiple choices
A. Short answer
RE
D. Completion test
B. Structured essay
119. Frequently used tools of summative eval-
uation are? C. Unstructured essay
A. Test D. Multiple type questions

126. Which questions are difficult to mark with
SH
B. Daily assignment reliability?

C. Teacher observation A. Short answer
D. None B. Structured essay
120. The summative evaluation is? C. Unstructured essay
A. Continous D. Multiple type questions
I
B. Diagnostic 127. Projective techniques are used to mea-

JA
sure?
C. Cerifying judgment
A. Intelligence
D. None
B. Personality
121. The difference between maximum and
C. Knowledge
minimum values is?
D. Aptitude
A. Range
128. Test meant for prediction on a certain cri-
B. Mode terion are called?
C. Mean A. Knowledge
D. None B. Personality
122. The number of score lying in a class inter- C. Intelligence
val is? D. Aptitude test
117. A 118. C 119. A 120. C 121. A 122. A 123. A 124. A 125. D 126. C 127. B
128. D 129. B
129. Kuder Richardson method is used to esti- A. V

mate? B. U
A. Validity C. Bell
B. Reliability D. None
C. Usability 136. The alternative name of the “table of spec-
ification” is?
ER
D. Objectivity
130. Value that divides the data into two equal A. Test Scoring
parts is? B. Test Blue Print
A. Mean C. Test Construction
GD
B. Mode D. Test Administration
C. Median 137. ”Table of specification” helps in?
D. None A. Test Scoring
AN
131. The test measures what we intend to mea- B. Test Construction
sure. This quality of the test is called? C. Test development
A. Validity D. Test Administration
B. Usability 138. The supply type test item is?
CH
C. Reliability A. M.C.Q items
D. Objectivity B. Matching items
132. The length of a test is an important factor C. True / False items
in obtaining a representative?
D. Completion items
A. Mean 139. Alternative response item is?
N
B. Mode A. Right / wrong

C. Median B. True / False items
YA
D. Sample C. Correct / incorrect

133. The test made to compare the perfor- D. All of the above
mance of student with the other students
140. How many columns matching items have?
RA
is called?
A. 1
A. Achievement
B. 2
B. Norm reference
C. 3
C. Criterion reference
NA
D. 4
D. None
141. The item in the column for which a match
134. The summative evaluation is used? is sought is?
A. At the start of the program A. Premise
B. At the middle of the program B. Response
C. At the end of the program C. Destructor
D. None D. None
135. The appearance of normal curve resem- 142. Identifying relationship between two
bles with? things is demonstrated by?
130. C 131. A 132. D 133. B 134. C 135. C 136. B 137. C 138. D 139. D 140. B
141. A 142. A 143. A
A. Matching items A. Essay Type Test

B. M.C.Q items B. Standardized Test
C. True / False items C. Objective type test
D. Completion items D. Norm referenced test
143. The correct option in M.C.Q is? 150. Student’s performance is compared with
other students in?
A. Answer
A. Essay Type Test
B. Premise
B. Standardized Test
C. Response
M
C. Objective type test
D. Destructor
D. Norm referenced test
144. The incorrect options in M.C.Q are? 151. Student performance is compared with
RA
A. Answer clearly defined learning tasks in?
B. Premise A. Essay Type Test
C. Response B. Standardized Test
D. Destructor C. Norm referenced test
145. The most widely applicable test item is? D. Criterion reverenced test
152. Test that measure learning outcome of stu-
A. M.C.Q items
E
dents is
B. Matching items
A. Aptitude test
RE
C. True / False items
B. Achievement test
D. Completion items C. Norm referenced test
146. The type of essay item in which contents
D. Criterion reverenced test
are limited is?
153. The tests designed to predict future per-
SH
A. M.C.Q items formance is?

B. Matching items A. Aptitude test
C. Restricted Response Questions B. Achievement test
D. Extended Response Questions C. Norm referenced test
147. The Analysis of items is necessary in? D. Criterion reverenced test
I
A. Essay Type Test 154. The founder of modern intelligent tests

JA
was?
A. Alfred Binet
C. Objective type test
B. Gulford
D. Norm referenced test
C. Stern
148. Which one is not the type of test of test
by purpose? D. None
155. The formula to determine I.Q was pre-
A. Essay Type Test
sented by?
A. Alfred Binet
C. Objective type test B. Gulford
D. Norm referenced test C. Stern
149. The type of the test by method is?
D. None
144. D 145. A 146. D 147. B 148. A 149. C 150. D 151. D 152. B 153. A 154. A
155. C
156. I.Q of a student having same physical and 162. If the sample of the question in the test
mental age will be? is sufficiently large enough, the quality of
test is?
A. 140
B. 120 A. Adequacy
C. 100 B. Reliability
C. Objectivity
ER
D. 50
157. The I.Q of a student having twelve years D. Differentiability
mental age and ten years physical age will 163. The quality of test showing ease of time,
be? cost, administration and interpretation is
GD
A. 140 called?
B. 120 A. Usability
C. 100 B. Reliability
D. 90 C. Objectivity
AN
158. The quality of test that measures “what it D. Differentiability
claims to measure” is? 164. Facility index of an item determines?
A. Validity A. Reliability
B. Reliability B. Objectivity
CH
C. Objectivity C. Ease or difficulty
D. Differentiability D. Discrimination power
159. The characteristic of a test to discriminate 165. High and low achievers are sorted out by?
between high achievers and low achievers
is? A. Reliability
N
A. Validity B. Objectivity
B. Reliability C. Ease or difficulty

YA
C. Objectivity D. Discrimination power

166. Test item is acceptable which its faculty
D. Differentiability
index /difficulty level ranges from?
160. If the scoring of the test is not effected by
RA
any factor, quality of test is called? A. 30%
A. Validity B. 70 %
B. Objectivity C. 30-70 %
NA
C. Reliability D. None
D. Differentiability 167. Test item is very easy when value of fac-
ulty index/ difficulty level is higher than?
161. The quality of test to give same scores
when administered at different occasions A. 30%
is? B. 70 %
A. Validity C. 30-70 %
B. Objectivity D. None
C. Reliability 168. Test item is very difficult when value of
D. Differentiability facility index/ difficulty level is less than?
156. C 157. B 158. A 159. D 160. B 161. C 162. A 163. A 164. C 165. D 166. C
167. B 168. A
A. 30% C. Workers would receive a set wage re-

gardless of performance.
B. 70 %
C. 30-70 % D. Workers can decide their own methods
of performing tasks.
D. None
174. Fayol’s functions of management include:
169. Discrimination power of an item is accept-
able when its value ranges from? A. Planning, designating, completing, co-
operating.
A. 1
B. 0.30 B. Punishing, commanding, organising, co-
M
ordinating, controlling.
C. 0.30 - 1
C. Preparing, commanding, operating, con-
D. None sulting, controlling.
170. Test item discriminates 100% when its
RA
value for discrimination is? D. Planning, commanding, organising, co-
ordinating, controlling.
A. 0.30
175. Systems theory holds that:
B. 1
A. The whole is greater than the sum of
C. 0.30 - 1 the parts
D. None
E B. Decentralised organisations are more
171. Test item cannot discriminate low achiev- productive.
ers and high achievers when its value is
RE
lower than? C. Centralised organisations are more pro-
ductive.
A. 0.30
D. Fragmentation improves performance.
B. 1
176. Contingency theories identify:
C. 0.30 - 1
SH
A. One method of management is suitable

D. None
for all situations.
172. The main schools of management thought
are: B. Autocratic managers achieve the best
results.
A. Comprehensive, human resources, con-
tinuous, systems. C. People are more important than the
I
products produced.
B. Scientific, technical, social, human rela-
JA
tions. D. The circumstances in which a particular

C. Classical, human relations, systems, practice is more likely to succeed.
contingency. 177. A hypothesis is
D. Classical, human resources, systems, A. A variable thought to affect one or more
contingency. variables.
173. Scientific management is based on the as-
B. An outcome studied through research.
sumption that:
C. A statement about the proposed rela-
A. The scientific observation of people at
tionship between variables.
work would reveal the one best way to do
the task. D. The consistency of data obtained from
B. Observation would reveal the workers a particular research method.
need to be multi-skilled. 178. Affirmative actions is the same as:
169. C 170. B 171. A 172. C 173. A 174. D 175. A 176. D 177. C 178. B 179. B
A. Managing systems. A. Loss of profits.

B. Positive action. B. Practising effective organisational be-
haviour.
C. Leadership potential.
C. Poor organisational practice.
D. Management practices.
D. People management.
179. Acting ethically is synonymous with
ER
GD
AN
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
19. Teaching and research aptitude
GD
AN
CH
1. Teachers should study the educational phi- 4. As a teacher you should not demand your
losophy because pupils which is beyond their stage of
growth. If you do so, it only causes
A. They do not know it
A. Frustrations
B. They do not have their won Philosophy
B. Encouragement for more learning
N
C. Philosophy is the backbone of all disci-

plines C. Frustrations, Heighten Tension and Ner-
vousness
YA
D. They may improve their work by clari-

fying their own Philosophy D. None of these
2. Why should you prefer teaching to other 5. A teacher generally asks questions to his
profession? pupils during the lecture, why?
RA
A. For love of teaching A. To help the students

B. To know, which student is brilliant one?
B. For love to young (Youth)
C. Are students listening the lecture atten-
C. For the service of humanity
tively?
NA
D. For mastery over the subject of teaching

D. To know whether the students are un-
derstanding the lecture or not.
3. The best way by a teacher to introduce a 6. A competent teacher must have a sound
new subject by knowledge in right order
A. Relating it to daily life situation A. Theory, Research, Concept and Practice
B. Giving a broad outline of the subject B. Concept, Theory, Practice and Research
C. Relating it to previously studied subject C. Research, Practice, Concept and Theory
or course material
D. Practive, Concept, Theory and Research
D. Any of these
1. D 2. C 3. D 4. C 5. D 6. B 7. B
272 Chapter 19. Teaching and research aptitude
7. In the final analysis, teaching must be A. Proximity

thought of mainly as a process of
B. Affirm or correct student performance
A. Hearing recitation of Pupils
C. Equitable distribution of response time
B. Directing the activities of Pupils
D. All of these
C. Asking questions and evaluating the
Learning 13. Which of the following is quality of a
teacher?
D. All of these
8. A teacher commands prestige,authority es- A. He should know the child psychology
teem and respect. He should make use of it
M
B. He should be trained to various teaching
through suggestion. He should not try to methodologies
command respect through
C. He presenting the subject matter in an
A. Tact effective manner with clear explaining lead-
RA
B. Experience ing to better understanding of the matter
C. Scholarship D. All of these
D. Punishing and creating revolting situa- 14. In ancient education system, teachers ap-
tion plied some psychological principles in edu-
9. A teacher is successful only if he cation especially to young child from pre-
E school age to adolescence. They recognize
A. Is approachable
the role of
B. Produces cent percent result
RE
A. Sense and perception in teaching and
C. Knows his subject thoroughly well learning
D. Publishes papers in journals of Repute B. Convent system of schooling
10. The major responsibility with which the
school personnel have been entrusted is C. Gurukul type of education
SH
that D. All Of These

A. It makes the child able to get job 15. Recreational Reading should be
B. It harmonizes the child’s need and de- A. Assigned as homework.
mands of the society both
B. Reserved for the school library period.
C. It prepares the school programme ac-
I
cording to the need of the child C. An integral part of language art curricu-
lum.
JA
D. All of these
11. One of your students wants to share his D. A responsibility of the home not the
problems with you. He visits your house school.
for the same. In such a condition ou should 16. Which characteristic from the following is
A. Suggest him to escape from his family. least concerned with a teacher?
B. Extend necessary co-operation and A. Effective verbal communication.
boost his Morale.
B. Command over subject matter.
C. Contact the students parent and solve
the problem. C. Good rapport with the students .
D. None of these D. Respect from college management

12. For better interaction with the students, the 17. Which of the following statements doesn’t
teachers objective should be the suit a teacher? The teacher is
8. D 9. C 10. B 11. B 12. D 13. D 14. A 15. C 16. D 17. C

A. Really interested in students. A. As a teacher you will allow her

B. Able to direct and discipline students. B. You will never allow her suspecting a
foul game
C. Reluctant to adapt himself to new situa-
tion. C. You will permit her because you may
get in touch with her
D. Enthusiastic about the work that teach-
D. You would not give permission as it is
ER
ers do.
against your own principles
18. Who can be a good teacher? One
23. The most important task is teaching is
A. Whose students do not need to ask ques-
A. Directing students in the development
tions
GD
of experience
B. Who answers all the questions asked by
B. Making monthly reports and maintain-
students
ing records
C. Who never encourages children to
C. Making assignments and hearing recita-
known something not in curriculum.
tions
AN
D. Who always tells his/her students that D. None of these
from where they can get answers to their
queries. 24. The most accurate statement about teach-
ing machines is that
19. Meaningul learning takes place when
A. They can be used for all learning pro-
CH
A. Students are interested in topic taught. grammes
B. Students raise questions and get them B. B.F. Skinner began the movement for
clarified. their use
C. Explanations are given within reach of C. They are not as efficient as teachers in
students. reinforcing responses
N
D. The new content being taught is related D. They were designed as an economy
to the previous knowledge of the student. measure to replace teachers
YA
20. Teachers use teaching aids for 25. Why should a student not be punished sev-
erly?
A. The sake of its use.
A. He may quarrel with a teacher.
B. Making teaching interesting.
RA
B. His parent may quarrel with the teacher.

C. Making student attentive.
C. He may leave the school and join an-
D. Making teaching with understanding other.
level of students.
D. The student may develop a negative
NA
21. How a teacher should behave with the stu- attitude towards his studies, teacher and
dents school.
A. Friend 26. The term ‘least restrictive environment’
refers to the education of the
B. Father
A. Gifted
C. Leader
B. Retarded
D. General
C. Handicapped
22. If a girl student requests you to collect her
posts at your address what would you like D. Early childhood youngsters
to do in this case? 27. According to Dewey, education is a :
18. B 19. A 20. D 21. C 22. A 23. A 24. B 25. D 26. C 27. A 28. A
A. Social need 33. A new comer teacher who is maltreated in

B. Personal need his class will deal with the students by
C. Theoretical need A. Applying punitive measure

D. Psychological need B. Giving them a threat of expulsion
28. The teaching is not thought as a process of C. Changing his class after consultation
A. Indoctrinating adult ideas to young peo- D. Improving his qualities and expressing
ple it before them in a good way
B. Listening the recitation of pupils
34. A teacher can establish apport with his
M
C. Directing the activities of people pupil by
D. None of these A. Becoming a friend to the Pupils
29. The major objective of education is:
B. Becoming a figure of authority
RA
A. Reforming the society
C. Impressing them with knoledge and
B. Making students disciplined skill
C. Making students followers of teachers
D. Playing the role of a guide with desire
D. Developing inherent abilities/powers of to help them
Students
35. A teacher can help adolescent to overcome
30. Each child grows in its won unique way.
E
his special problems, and help him to adjust
The wide individual differences are caused to the environment. Which of the following
by
RE
attitude, he should not made?
A. Heredity
A. He should have right information about
B. Endowment Sex.
C. Environmental influences B. He should impart right information
SH
D. All of these about Sex.

31. All of the following are advantages of teach- C. He should have unsympathetic attitude
ing machines except towards others.
A. Tracking of errors
D. He should redirect the energies of the
B. The control of cheating adolescent to fruitful channels through
C. The Insurance of Attention sports and other constructive activities.
I
D. Their universal use for different kinds 36. If majority of students in your class is weak
JA
of Programmes you should

32. The process of learning include which of A. Not care about intelligent students
the following
B. Keep your teaching slow which can also
A. It includes all activities which leave per- be helpful to bright students.
manent effect on the individual.
C. Keep your teaching slow along with
B. Synthesis and organisation of the old some extra guidance to bright people
and new experiences, resulting in a novel
pattern. D. Keep your speed of teaching gast so that
students comprehension level may increase
C. In its simplest form, learning means ac-
quisition, retentiaon and modificaiton of
experience. 37. For formulating the curriculum, which fac-
tor is most important?
D. All of these
29. D 30. D 31. D 32. D 33. D 34. D 35. C 36. C 37. D
A. Teahcers ability A. A teacher has to teach for the sake of

B. National idelogy getting salaries
B. The extent to which a teacher subscribes
C. Social and cultural ideals
to a professional code
D. Children’s capabilities and needs
C. A teacher must have completed profes-
38. There are so many definations of learning. sional teachers training course before his
ER
Which of the following is most adequate? appointment
A. The development of skills D. All of these
B. The modification of behaviour 43. Which one of the most fundamental of
the guidance activities should be executed
GD
C. The acquisition and organisations of
Knowledge first?
A. Selection of curriculum
D. All of these
39. Which of the following is true about Mod- B. Determination of objectives
ern Annual Examination System? C. Selection of learning activities
AN
A. It doesn’t encourage the habit of regular D. Determination of learning process
study. 44. A teacher should keep his voice in the class
B. It encourages attaining knowledge by A. Moderate
cramming.
B. Sometime low and some time high
CH
C. It doesn’t encourage students to attain
C. Loud, so that every one can hear clearly
their classes regularly.
D. High enough to be heard by every stu-
D. All of these
dent clearly
40. Personalized system of education :
45. Which of the following is/are true about
A. Leads to wastage of time and energy teaching?
N
B. Doesn’t inculcate a feeling of competi- A. It is a process not an Act.

tion B. It is highly dominated by communica-
YA
C. Doesn’t inculcate a feeling of socialization skill.

tion in students C. The analysis and assessment of teaching
D. All of these provide feedback for further improvement
in teaching method.
RA
41. If you are irritated and show rashness be-

cause of the inadequate behavior of another D. All of these
teachers , what do you think about your 46. Which of the following is/are true about
own behavior? teacher/teaching?
A. Your behavior is also a sign of maladjust-
NA
A. Teaching should be pupil centered

ment and so try to control yourself when rather than subject centered.
you are maltreated.
B. Teacher should arouse interest among
B. Your behavior is not good because el- students about the subject
ders have the right to behave you in this
C. Teacher should have control over the
way.
students to maintain peace and order in the
C. It is justified because behaviors are class.
echo.
D. All of these
D. All of these 47. Which of the following is true about teach-
42. Teacher’s professionalism means: ing/teacher?
38. B 39. D 40. D 41. A 42. B 43. A 44. B 45. D 46. D

A. Teacher should work as a leader in the A. Anabolism

class. B. Metabolism
B. Teacher should maintain a democratic C. Catabolism
atmosphere in the class
D. None of above
C. Teacher should make a lesson plan be-
54. Hybrid computer is a combination of
fore presenting lesson in the class
A. Laptop and Abacus
D. All of these
B. Calculator and Laptop
48. A teacher learns maximum from
C. Punch Card and Analog Computer
M
A. Books
D. Analog Computer and Digital Com-
B. Students puter
C. Principal 55. The final result of a study will be more ac-
RA
D. None of these curate if the sample drawn is
49. The first important step in teaching is A. purposive
A. organizing the material to be taught B. fixed by quota
B. knowing the background of students C. taken randomly

D. representative to the population
C. planning of representation of topic or
E
56. Noise is known as
subject
D. organizing the background of students A. sender barrier
RE
for the subject B. receiving barrier
50. Failure of students in examination, it may C. transmitting barrier
be the fault of
D. none of these
A. teacher 57. Which of the following is not a part of In-
SH
B. students themselves formation?
C. Both (A) and (B) A. formal
D. principal B. logical
51. Research is born out of C. perception
A. human curiosity D. impersonal

I
58. Bright Light in classroom is a type

B. natural incidents
JA
of Barrier.
C. human requirements A. channel
D. none of these B. physical distraction
52. Which of the following is the first step of C. emotional distraction
research?
D. none of these
A. Identification of subject
59. Close Circuit Television (CCT )is useful
B. Identification of nature of problem
A. for large group communication
C. Both (A) and (B) B. only for poor students of the class
D. None of these C. only for a restricted audience residing
53. The biochemical processes taking place in at a particular place
the body is known as
D. None of these
47. D 48. B 49. B 50. C 51. A 52. C 53. B 54. D 55. D 56. C 57. C 58. B 59. C
60. C
60. All students are not geniuses concludes that 67. If a student is constantly rubbing his eyes
A. no student is genius and is unattentive during blackboard work,
he is having
B. all geniuses are students
A. visual problem
C. many students are not genius
B. hearing problem
D. None of these
ER
61. UGC was established in C. adjustment problem
A. 1951 D. All of the above
B. 1952 68. Which of the following must be the quali-
ties of teacher except?
GD
C. 1953
D. 1954 A. Superstitions
62. Discussion Method can be used when : B. Patience and tolerance
A. The topic is easy C. Good communication skill
AN
B. The topic is difficult D. Sweet, polite and clear voice
C. The topic is very difficult 69. If in a reserach independent variables can-
D. All of the above not be manipulated then it is known as
63. Which of the following is a teaching aid? A. Exploratory Research
CH
A. Tape Recorder B. Experimental Research
B. 16 mm Film Projector C. Non-experimental Research
C. Working Model of Wind Mill D. Pure or Fundamental Research
D. All of the above 70. Which of the following is not a character-
64. The main aim of teaching is : istic of research?
N
A. To develop only thinking A. Logical

B. To develop only reasoning
YA
B. Objective
C. Both (A) and (B)
C. Systematic
D. To give information
D. Perspective
65. The quality of teaching is reflected :
RA
71. Who said that members of the same species

A. By the pass percentage of students
are not alike?
B. By the attendance of students in the
A. Best
class
C. By the quality of questions asked by stu- B. Good
NA
dents C. Darwin
D. By the duration of silence maintained D. Herber
in the class
72. Certificate for copy right waiver is gener-
66. The present annual examination system:
ally given in
A. promotes rote learning
A. paper
B. does not promote good study habits
B. books
C. does not encourage students to be regu-
lar in class C. article
D. All of the above D. thesis writing
61. C 62. C 63. D 64. C 65. C 66. D 67. A 68. A 69. C 70. D 71. C 72. D 73. C
73. Logic of induction is very close to 79. A teacher who is not able to draw the at-
A. logic of controlled variables tention of his studetns should
B. logic of observation A. Start dictating
C. logic of sampling B. Resign from the post.
D. None of these C. Find fault in his pupils.

74. The professional requirements of a teacher D. Evaluate his teaching method and im-
as explained in the Unesco Publication is prove it.
/are
80. Of great importance in determining the
M
A. Justice to the profession amount of transference that occurs in learn-
B. Innovativeness in approach and teaching is the
ing strategies A. IQ of teacher
RA
C. Mastery over the subject and compe- B. Knowledge of the teacher
tency for teaching
C. Use of appropriate elements
D. All of the above
D. Presence of identical elements
75. Some students are weak in studies. What
will be your attitude towards them? 81. Democracy in the classroom is best re-
flected through
A. Strict
E A. You will justify that most of the female
B. Liberal
students are more sincere towards their
C. Lenient studies than male students.
RE
D. Lovable B. You will justify to the male students that
76. If a teacher is not able to answer the ques- it is difficult for you refuse the request made
tion of a pupil he should by female students
A. Rebuke the pupil C. Allowing students freedom to the obser-
SH
B. Feel shy of his ignorance vance of classroom rules and regulations
C. Say that question is wrong D. None of these

D. Say that he will answer after consulta- 82. For knowledge lessons
tion A. Herbart’s five-stage system is used
77. An individual’s ability to learn is
B. Glover’s scheme is used
I
A. Elders
JA
C. Garry’s scheme is used

B. Teachers
D. None of these
C. Acquired
83. What can a teacher do to develop integrated
D. None of these personalities of his Pupil?
78. How will you demonstrate your impartial A. Life in schools should be so planned
behavior? that children are able to express themselves
A. By assaulting a teacher. fully.
B. By criticizing the teacher community. B. They should be helped to build their Self-
C. By making own behaviour more bal- Esteem to develop a sense of worthiness
anced and fair. and positive ego image.
D. By maintaining high self esteem and C. Children should be encouraged and

egoistic behaviour. helped to set themselves well-defined goals
74. D 75. A 76. D 77. A 78. C 79. D 80. A 81. A 82. A 83. D
and objectives which they can hope to C. To pursue those curricular matters that
achieve. strategically determine effective living for
specific type of handicapped children.
D. All of these
84. Of the following objectives of an Elemen- D. All of these
tary Music Programme the one of lowest 88. The introduction of career courses in
priority is schools and colleges aims at
ER
A. To provide children with emotion out- A. Increasing G.K. in students.
lets. B. Providing professional knowledge to
students.
B. To prepare children for wise use of
leisure time. C. Developing the ability to make the in-
GD
telligent choice of jobs.
C. To develop a group of performers for
Hiliday Assemblies. D. All of the above
89. The test on the basis of which a teacher
D. To expose children to a variety of musi-
takes decision about the students is known
cal compositions.
AN
as
85. A backward child is a slow learner. He does
A. Revision Test
not respond satisfactorily to the ordinary
school curriculum and to the usual meth- B. Institutional Test
ods. The causes of this phenomena are C. Performance Test
CH
A. Emotional disturbance D. Instructional Test
B. Physical defects and diseases 90. In your institution, a debate test would be
held shortly then how would you support
C. Poor intellectual ability and low intelli- your students?
gence
A. You will tell students where to consult
D. All of the above for Literature
N
86. You are a teacher of literature. A chapter B. You would tell students how to write a
of a book deals with a biography of a scien- debate
YA
tist and his works. In this situation, What

would you do with chapter? C. By writing the debate
D. None of these
A. You would consult other books concern-
ing with the scientist and then teach the 91. Which of the following is wrongly
RA
lesson tostudent. matched?

A. Skinner - Gestalt
B. You would request the science teacher,
to teach this chapter to the students. B. Dewey - Pragmatism
C. You would ask the students to read C. Herbart - Apperception
NA
themselves. D. Froebel - Progressivism

D. Any one of them. 92. How can students in a class be made atten-
tive?
87. Which one is not the objective of Special
Education? A. By creating curiosity in students
A. To develop realistic self-concept in B. By speaking loudly in the class
handicapped children. C. By preparing your lecture properly
B. To develop motivational patterns in the D. By wearing special types of clothes
handicapped that will produce achieve- 93. A teacher can get important place in society
ments. if he
84. C 85. D 86. A 87. D 88. B 89. C 90. A 91. A 92. A 93. B
A. Is scholar and in power 98. Verbal guidance is least effective in Teach-

B. Performs his responsibility honestly ing -
C. Participates actively in social activities A. Skills
D. Performs the role of an active member B. Attitude

the political party in power C. Relationship
94. If the Principal of your Institution is not sat-
D. Concepts and Facts
isfied with your performance and charge
you with the Act Of Negligence Of Duties, 99. The adage of maintaining good relations
How would you behave with him? with others is
M
A. You would neglect him. A. Sycophancy
B. You would take a tough stand against B. Kaleidoscopic personality

the changes. C. Control over emotion
RA
C. You would keep yourself alert and make D. Attractive features and mental make up
his efforts unfruitful.
D. You would take revenge by giving phys- 100. Which is most favorable for education?
ical and agony to him.
A. Caste
95. Which of the following can be termed as
most import task in teaching among the B. Social class
E
given? C. Social mobility
A. Making assignments and checking
RE
D. Social stratification
worksheets.
101. Which of the following is most important
B. Making monthly reports and maintain- for effective learning in classroom?
ing records.
A. Provide immediate feedback
C. Directing students in development of
SH
experiences. B. Teacher’s ability to create and maintain

inappropriate responses
D. All of the above
96. If your own son is in your class. How will C. Do not provide unconstructive com-
you behave with your students in compari- ments for evaluating activities
son to your son? D. All of the above
A. Repressed treatment. 102. Which of the following is the educational
I
B. Just like your own son. implication of the of the learning process?
JA
C. It is better to lend them a free hand. A. Interest
D. Equal treatment is not possible to all the B. Memory

students. C. Curiosity and level of aspiration are mo-
97. The criteria for grading should be tivating factors according to Berlyne.
A. Is there any originality in the submitted D. All of the above
work. 103. Use of telecast materials -
B. The material is covered in an accurate
A. Increases retention power.
manner.
B. Reduces the burden of the Teacher.
C. The writing communicates clearly and
effectively. C. Enhances concentration and learning.
D. All of these D. All of the above
94. C 95. C 96. B 97. D 98. A 99. D 100. D 101. D 102. D 103. C 104. A
104. Which one of the following languages can 109. This methodology trains the child to
be the best medium of instruction at pri- search facts, rules and principles led by
mary level? his own efforts, organize the set of knowl-
edge gained and delineate general rule. The
A. Mother Tongue
aforesaid statement is about which
B. Regional Language A. Heuristic
ER
C. National Language(Hindi) B. Playway
D. International Language(English) C. Montessori
105. All of the following are the characteristic D. Kindergarten
features of an effective Teacher except 110. While dealing with juvenile delinquents a
GD
A. Emphasis upon standards teacher should
B. Differential treatment meted out to stu- A. Talks with them frankly and guide and
dents of his class. channelize
B. Complain to the principal against them
AN
C. Emphasis upon the quick control of
problematic situations. C. Play them filthy jokes.
D. Emphasizing group discussion for the D. None of these

purpose of clarifying the objectives 111. Which of the following is a disadvantage
of teaching machine?
106. Which one of the following should a
CH
teacher adopt in his lecture in a class? A. The tracking of errors
A. Moderate tone. B. The insurance of attention

C. Their universal use for different kinds
B. Elongated tone.
of programmes
C. Precise and low tone.
D. All of these
N
D. Precise and high tone. 112. The greatest important Cause Of Failure
107. Which of the following is true about Micro In The Beginning For A Teacher Lies In The
YA
Teaching? Area Of :
A. Verbal ability
A. It is the following with video recording
of lessons. B. Interpersonal relationship
RA
B. It is scaled down teaching encounters in C. Knowledge of the teacher

class size and class time. D. Light-handling of the student
C. It is a teacher education technique al- 113. The best way to reacty to a wrong answer
lowing teachers to apply clearly defined given by a student is :
teaching goals.
NA
A. To explain why the answer is wrong

D. All of the above B. To scold him for not having learnt the
108. If students are not able to follow your lec- lesson
tures what will you do first? C. To ask another student to give the cor-
rect answer
A. You will make your lecture more easy.
D. To ignore the wrong answer and pass
B. You will start giving examples to them.
on the next question
C. You will try to know the cause and find 114. Which of the following institutions is re-
the right solution for that. sponsible for the implementation of re-
forms in teaching profession?
D. None of these
105. C 106. C 107. D 108. C 109. A 110. A 111. B 112. B 113. A
A. University Grants Commission C. All India Council for Technical Educa-

tion
B. National Council for Teacher’s Educa-
tion D. National Council for Educational Re-
search and Training
C. National Council for Educational Re-
119. The function of a teacher is in the order
search and Training
of :
D. National Institute of Educational Plan-
A. Guiding the child, helping him towards
ning and Administration
progress and evaluation
115. A serious minded teacher as a rule:
B. Checking homework, guiding him and
M
A. Never allows mistakes on the part of his assigning further task
students
C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Should mildly punish studetns who com- D. None of these
mit mistakes
RA
120. Classroom discipline can be maintained
C. Takes all precaution so that students effectively by:
never commit mistakes A. Providing a programme which is accord-
D. Allows the mistakes to be committed ing to need and interest of Pupils
and explains how to minimise those mis- B. Knowing the cause of indiscipline and
takes handling it with stern hand
116. One of your student is too poor to buy a
E
C. By giving punishment for even smallest
book. How will you help him? sins
RE
A. You will purchase the book. D. None of these
B. You will provide the books from library. 121. A researcher wants to study the future
of the Congress-I in India. For the study
C. You will collect a fund from others for
which tool is most appropriate for him?
this purpose.
A. interview
SH
D. You will request the institute adminis-

tration to make a policy for helping such B. Schedule
students. C. Rating scale
117. Objective type questions are not helpful D. Questionnaire
in testing 122. An effective teacher adopts the norms of
A. Student’s ability of writing and expres- the
I
sion. A. Autocratic Society

JA
B. Student’s knowledge level of subject B. Democratic Society

matter. C. Laissez Faire Society
C. Student’s ability to describe and explain D. All of these
things. 123. The decline of the British Empire should
D. All of the above have spelt the decline of English
118. Which of the following is responsible for A. the statement is a fact
uniformity in curriculum at higher level in B. the statement is an advice
India?
C. the statement is an opinion
A. University Grants Commission
D. the statement is a prejudice
B. Human Resource Development Min- 124. Why a teacher is called the leader of the
istry class?
114. D 115. D 116. B 117. D 118. A 119. A 120. A 121. D 122. B 123. D 124. A
A. He is autocratic emperor of his class. A. To discipline the students

B. He is a maker of the future of his stu- B. To make monthly and annual reports
dents. C. To prepare students for examinations
C. He belongs to a recognised teacher’s D. To participate in extra curricular activi-
union. ties
D. He masters the art of oratory like a po- 130. Hypothesis cannot be stated in
ER
litical leader. A. general terms
125. The historical research is different from
B. directional terms
experimental research in the process of
C. declarations terms
GD
A. replication
D. null and question form terms
B. hypothesis testing
131. If a teacher had to establish his credibility
C. formulation of hypothesis in evaluating answer sheets he must be
D. All of the above A. strict
AN
126. Formulation of hypothesis may not be nec- B. lenient
essary in
C. prompt
A. survey studies
D. objective
B. normative studies 132. Mainstreaming is a term associated with
CH
C. experimental studies A. career education
D. fact finding (Historical) studies B. environmental education
127. In the guidance of learning a teacher has C. inter-age class groupings
many important roles. Which one of the fol-
D. education for handicapped
lowing is the least important aspect of the
N
teachers role in the guidance of learning? 133. Suggestion helps in the development of in-
formation moral behavior, aesthetic sense
A. The forestalling of habits. and character traits. Which of the follow-
YA
B. The provision of encouragement and ing is the chief source of suggestions which
moral support. would his life?
C. The provision of continuous diagnostic A. Elders

RA
and remedial help. B. Teachers

D. The development of insight into what C. Pupil of same age
constitute the pitfalls and danger to be
D. None of these
avoided.
134. A teacher exploits students in your school.
NA
128. Feedback is In this situation, what you will do?

A. response of receiver to communicator’s A. Not interfere in this matter.
message
B. Reportthe matter to the principal.
B. immediate reaction of receiver
C. Go on Satyagraha against the teacher.
C. analysis done by the receiver of the com-
D. Guide the teacher please stop this activ-
municator’s message
ity.
D. none of these 135. Of the following learning theories, the one
129. Which one of the following is not con- that embodies the idea that the learning
cerned with the duties of a teacher? takes place through insight is known as
125. D 126. D 127. D 128. A 129. D 130. A 131. D 132. D 133. A 134. D 135. A
A. Gestalt A. You will break all limits of anger

B. Pragmatic B. You will leave the class for few days
C. Connectionist C. You will scold him/her and resist them
D. Stimulus-Response D. You will feel sorry for committing the
blunder
136. The teacher ought to know the problems
140. The project method of teaching is best as-
prevalent in the field of education. The rea-
sociated with the philosophy of
son is that
A.
A. Teachers can tell the government about
M
it. B. F. Skinner
B. He can tell about the same to another C. Max Rafferty
teacher. D. John Dewey
RA
C. Only a teacher can do something about E. Robert Hatchins
solving them. 141. In our present society where values are
D. With this knowledge, the teacher can deteriorating, the excellent education will
have information about education. be which
137. The male students in your class are an- A. Enables one to earn in an easy manner.
noyed with you on the pretext you that B. Decelerates the social change in society.
have a favor to the female students. In such
E
C. Exaggerates the competition in the so-
an embarrassing situation how would you
ciety.
like to control them in class?
RE
D. Works for establishment of human and
A. You will justify that most of the female
cultural value
students are more sincere towards their
142. Emotional development is as much af-
studies than male students.
fected by maturation and learning as sen-
B. You will justify to the male students that sory processes, muscular growth and in-
SH
it is difficult for you refuse the request made tellectual functions. Parlous experiment
by female students showed emotional responses could be
C. You will tell the male students that girls learned th
have no option except to depend on school A. imitation
teacher for their academic assistance. B. conditioning
I
D. None of these C. knowledge and skills

JA
138. With respect to the development of skills, D. None of these

all of the following are correct except that
143. Before starting instruction a teacher
A. Group interaction increases the skills should
B. Workbooks can be invaluable learning A. Be competent enough to arouse the cu-
aid. riosity of pupil.
C. Group instruction facilitates the learn- B. Be aware of the environmental variables
ing process acting on the mind of the pupil.
D. Pupil of same mental age should learn C. Know the existing knowledge of his stu-
at the same rate. dents and their background knowledge.
139. When you make a mistake while teaching D. All of these
in the class and your students point it out 144. Professors need to study educational phi-
angrily then what will you does? losophy mainly because
136. C 137. A 138. D 139. D 140. D 141. D 142. B 143. D 144. B

A. most professors follow a wrong philos- C. Should be encouraged to participate in

ophy classroom discussion
B. they may improve their work by classi- D. Performs the role of an active member
fying their philosophy of the political party in power
C. most professors know nothing about ed- 149. Which of the following one is most effec-
ucational philosophy tive for a teacher?
ER
D. all of the above A. Feedback
145. On which of the following statements B. Knowledge

there is consensus among educators? C. Management
GD
A. Disciplinary cases should be totally ne- D. Teaching skills
glected in the class. 150. Which is the source of primary data
B. Disciplinary cases should never be sent A. Books
to principal’s office.
B. Reports
AN
C. Disciplinary cases should be sent to
C. Respondent
the principal only when other means have
failed. D. Newspapers
151. Many experienced teachers go into a class-
D. None of these
room and embark straight away upon a les-
146. Below are given some probable character- son. As a beginner to the teaching profes-
CH
istics of an ineffective teacher, which of the sion will you
following is most likely to be characterised
the ineffective teacher? A. As the students a like
B. Adopt the same procedure
A. Emphasis upon standards
C. Make a written note of your preparation
B. Emphasis upon the control of immedi-
N
ate situation D. None of these

152. Which can be described as an ideal teach-
C. Emphasis upon pupil discussion in the
ing technique?
YA
clarification of group’s goals

A. Encouraging in group discussion for log-
D. None of these
ical thinking.
147. Which of the following is/are the qualities
of teacher? B. Using props and manipulative to help
RA
students understand abstract concept.

A. Teacher should inspire his pupil
C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Teacher should have sweet, polite and
D. Repetitive drill and rote memorization
clear voice
153. Quality of education in a school/college
NA
C. Teacher should be able to arrange sub- can be measured through

ject matter in a logical way
A. Students achievements
D. All of these
B. Infrastructural facilities available
148. The students who keep asking questions
in the class C. Manpower teachers and principal avail-
able
A. Should be encouraged to continue ques-
D. All of the above
tioning.
154. A mentally retarded student attends your
B. Should be encouraged to find answer lecture and sits in a deaf and dumb manner.
independently What will you do?
145. C 146. B 147. D 148. A 149. D 150. C 151. C 152. C 153. D

A. You do not support him at all. A. Scholarship

B. You pressurised the student to leave the B. Organisational ability
class.
C. Communicative ability
C. You do not like to spoil majority for the
D. Personality and its ability to relate to
individual.
the class and to the pupils
D. Make your lecture very simple and
160. Which one of the following is least re-
spare some extra time for him.
quired during the preparation of lecture?
155. Teaching in higher education implies
A. Time and control unit
M
A. Helping students how to learn
B. Factual materials in indirect way
B. Presenting the information given in the
text book C. Clear introduction and summary
RA
C. Helping students prepare for and pass D. Examples for better explanation and un-
the examination derstanding
D. Asking questions in the class and con- 161. In your view arrangement for “education
ducting examinations on environment” in the school
156. For providing evaluative feedback to stu- A. Is like giving work to teacher
dents, the teacher should
B. Is a mode of entertainment for students
A. Provide immediate feedback
E
C. Is likely to put more burdens on stu-
B. Use correction, not criticism, in respect dents
RE
to inappropriate responses
D. Is important for creating an awareness
C. Do not provide nonconstructive com- among an awareness among students about
ments for evaluating activities the environment
D. All of these 162. Failure of the teacher to communicate its
SH
157. The members of a group act, feel and think ideas well to the students may result in
together, in a way which is different from
A. Classroom indiscipline.
the normal acting, feeling and thinking of
individual, who come together to form the B. Increase in number of absentees in the
group. It is known as class.
A. Memsis C. Loss of student’s interest in hot topic
I
being taught.
B. Co-operation
JA
C. Understanding D. All of these

163. If a group of students enter your room and
D. Group working
abuse you and behave violently with you,
158. Which of the following is a good method at that time how would you control your
of teaching? emotions?
A. Seminar and project
A. You will feel ashamed among your
B. Lecture and dictation teachers community.
C. Seminar and dictation B. You will react in a similar fashion and
D. Dictation and Assignment try to assault them physically.
159. Which of the following is the most impor- C. You will reportthe case to the princi-
tant signal factor in underlying the success pal with recommendation of punitive mea-
of beginning a teacher? sures.
154. D 155. A 156. D 157. A 158. A 159. D 160. B 161. D 162. D 163. D
D. First, you will try to pacify their emo- 168. Which of the following is ‘NOT’ true?
tions and then ask politely about their be- A. Teaching is an art.
haviour.
B. Teachers are born.
164. What is the reason behind the adoption
of ‘GRADE’ system instead of our old C. Teachers can be trained.
‘MARKS’ system? D. All of the above
ER
A. It will improve the quality of assess- 169. The main function of educational psychol-
ment. ogy is to provide prospective teacher with:
B. It will improve teacher student relation- A. How to deal with students and everyday
ship. class situation.
GD
C. Grading system is easier than marks sys- B. Insight into various aspects of modern
tem. teaching education.
D. It will eliminate the differentiation be- C. Research procedures for evaluating cur-
tween students on marks basis. rent teaching procedure.
AN
165. Why do you support the five stage method D. Insight into the needs, problems and
of Herbart? styles of behaviour of teacher.
A. In this there is no scope for individual 170. You bringing your pupil for a monument
diversity of students. visit outside your city. A father is reluctant
to send his child for this. What will you
CH
B. In this method, it is difficult to make do?
co-ordination between various subjects.
A. Try to convince him for sending his
C. Under this, generalisation is not re- child by explaining the importance of such
quired to be done while teaching subjects as educational and cultural trip
like language, history, geography etc
B. Try to understand his father’s problems
N
D. All of these
C. Leave that child and go with others
166. To gain popularity among students,
teacher should : D. None of these
YA
171. The primary task of a teacher is :

A. frequently organize tours
A. to make them a thinking people
B. dictate notes while teaching
B. to teach the prescribed curriculum
C. maintain good social relationship
RA
C. to prepare students to pass their exami-

D. personally help them in their study
nation
167. Which one of the following is not a quality
D. to modify their behaviour according to
of teacher?
the needs of our society and country
NA
A. Teacher must be fair tin grading and 172. Who defined teaching as a “An organised
marking. system of specific activities aimed to help
B. Teacher should maintain an autocratic the learner learn something ”?
atmosphere in the class. A. Byod
C. He/she should have interest in his/her B. Smith
profession and knowledge must be up-
dated. C. Morrin
D. Jackson
D. Teacher should use modern techniques.
Methods and gadgets are teaching for bet- 173. The main role of education according to
ter understanding of subject matter. Plato is :
164. D 165. D 166. D 167. B 168. D 169. A 170. A 171. D 172. B 173. D
A. to strengthen the state B. Only a specific group of teachers will be

invited.
B. to develop the power of contemplation
C. Extend invitation to all the teachers
C. to develop the personality of each indi-
without any distinction.
viduals
D. Only personal invitation will be ex-
D. All of these
tended to most dear ones.
174. Which of the following statements regard- 178. All of the following statements about a
ing motivation is correct? teacher are correct except that he/she is
A. Freewill, intellect and reason are the mo- A. the leader in the class
M
tivating factors according to Plato.
B. a friend guide and philosopher
B. Curiosity and level of aspiration are mo-
tivating factors according to Berlyne. C. teacher that the students do not know
RA
C. Inborn, unlearned tendencied, called in- D. changes his attitudes and behaviour ac-
stincts are the motivating forces according cording to the need of the society
to James Burt. 179. The quality of research is judged by the
D. All of these A. Relevance of research

175. Suppose you are asked by your friends to B. Depth of the research
take the membership of the teachers associ- C. Experience of researcher
E
ation. How could you take decision in this
situation? D. Methodology followed in conducting
the research
RE
A. You will try to avoid the issue.
180. The study in which the investigators at-
B. You will have, faith in unity so you will tempt
accept the membership.
A. Survey Research
C. You will give priority to social relations, B. Historical Research
SH
therefore, you will accept the offer.

C. Summative Research
D. You will the - affiliate yourself from the
colleagues instead of enmity with the man- D. ‘Ex-post Facto’ Research
agement. 181. Micro teaching is most effective for the
176. An effective teaching means all of the fol- student-teacher :
lowing except A. before the practice-teaching
I
A. A teacher finds fault in his students. B. during the practice-teaching

JA
B. A teacher teaches with enthusiasm. C. after the practice- teaching

C. A teacher puts emphasis more on teach- D. none of these
ing than on class control. 182. Teaching model is a way to
D. A teacher is interested in making the A. Select such stimulus so that, the stu-
subject matter understood rather than on dents may give expected feedback
completing the course.
B. Teach in a formal as well as informal
177. If you invite personal friends and col- way
leagues in your son’s birthday party, the
C. Both (A) and (B)
procedure of invitation will be
D. Talk and think about instruction, which
A. You would invite all the personnel of
may contain facts in organised and classi-
the school.
fied manner
174. D 175. A 176. A 177. C 178. C 179. A 180. D 181. C 182. C 183. D
183. Which of the following is/are step/steps A. Students fear you.

of Research plan? B. You are unable to communicate effec-
A. Review of literature tively.
B. Research hypothesis C. Your educational methodology is inade-

quate.
C. Objectives of the study
D. There is a cordial relation between you
ER
D. All of these and your students.
184. What is/are the objectives of workshop in 189. If you are doing experiments on a large
research? group of samples which method of control-
ling will you adopt?
GD
A. Defining and refining of problem to help
researcher A. Matching
B. Elimination
B. Consideration of alternative research
models through the presented different C. Randomization
model programmes D. Elimination and matching
AN
C. Both (A) and (B) 190. If a student is absent from the classes for
a long time
D. None of these
A. you would try to solve his problems or
185. Which of the following is /are correct? help him
CH
A. A teacher should have command over B. you will try to know the cause of his
his subject absence
B. A teacher should have command over C. Both (A) and (B)
his language
D. none of these
C. A teacher should introduce the lesson 191. Who has the least chance of becoming an
N
before he starts teaching effective teacher?

D. All of these A. One who teaches moral values.
YA
186. Effective teaching involves B. One who knows his subject well.
A. silence C. One who is a strict disciplinarian.

D. One who has no interest in teaching.
B. pupil dominance
RA
192. Educational quality is

C. teacher dominance
A. Only a legal right
D. teacher and pupil interview
B. Fundamental right
187. The research guide requires which of the C. Only a customary right
following essential qualities?
NA
D. None of these
A. Inter-disciplinary expertise 193. Which of the following is fast step of
B. Methodological expertise teaching?
C. Subject matter expertise A. Application

B. Comparison
D. All of these
C. Presentation
188. During lecture in classroom, some stu-
dents hesitate to say that they are unable D. Generalisation
to understand your lecture. What may be 194. Which one of the following is a primary
the reason for this? task of a teacher?
184. C 185. D 186. D 187. D 188. B 189. C 190. C 191. D 192. D 193. A 194. B
A. To teach the prescribed curriculum A. National Science Foundation

B. To stimulate and guide students learn- B. National Defence Education Act
ing C. National Institute of Mental Health
C. To provide diagnostic and remedial aid D. College Entrance Examination Board
wherever desired 200. A teacher’s major contribution towards
D. To promote habits of conformity to the maximum self-realization of the student
adult demands and expectations is affected through
195. Which of the following systematically A. Strict control of class-room activities
M
discovers relations and interaction among B. Constant fulfilment of the student’s
variables in real life situations such as needs
school, factory, community etc?
C. Strict reinforcement of academic stan-
A. Field study dards
RA
B. Survey study D. Sensitivity to students’ needs, goals and
purposes
C. Field experiments
201. Teacher’s primary responsibility lies in
D. Ex-post factor study A. implementing policies
196. Which of the following is/are components B. keeping students record
of ethical research?
E
C. planning educational experiences
A. Disclosure
D. all of the above
RE
B. Competence 202. Which of the following is/are the exam-
C. Understanding ples of qualitative variable?
D. All of the above A. Sex
197. “mm-hmm” is a type of Feedback B. Religion and Caste

SH
C. Both (A) and (B)

A. positive
D. None of these
B. negative
203. In case of equal emoluments. The best
C. ambiguous profession is that of
D. none of these A. Teacher
I
198. If a teacher is cracking filthy jokes in a B. An Engineer

class and you are enable to stop him, then
JA
C. Doctor
what will you do?
D. Research Workers
A. live in isolation or change the group. 204. Which of the following methods of com-
B. instruct him to mind his/her language munication would be most effective in class-
in class. room?
C. be critical and remind him for the nobil- A. Lecture method

ity of their jobs. B. Multimedia method
D. persuade him/her decently not to waste C. Presenting written notes
their time-in filthy jokes. D. Presenting written matter with the Lec-
199. All of the following tend to erode local tures
control of education in favour of national 205. What is the full form of abbreviation HFT
control, except the used in research?
195. A 196. D 197. C 198. D 199. C 200. C 201. C 202. C 203. A 204. B 205. B
A. Holfkins Issac Test C. whether worthwhile inferences could

be drawn
B. Holzman Inkblot Test
D. whether appropriate statistical tech-
C. Hinds Informative Test
niques are available
D. Higher Intelligence Test 211. Which of the following is not a step of
206. In order to produce a quality of research, research?
ER
it depends on
A. Selecting a topic
A. available facilities
B. Framing research questions
B. use of high technology
C. Surveying the research topic
GD
C. training in research methodology D. None of these
D. dedication on the part of researcher 212. Teachers who are enthusiastic in the class-
207. In comparing the lecture and developmen- room teaching
tal lessons which one of the following is A. simply dramatize to hold the student’s
false?
AN
attention
A. The lecture method is more conducive B. involve their students in the teaching
to largest class learning process
B. There is more public developmental de- C. often lack proficiency in the subjects
velopmental lesson which stays hidden under their enthusiasm
CH
C. It is more difficult to ascertain public D. all of these
learning in a lecture lesson
213. Team teaching has the potential to de-
D. Slow children derive more benefits from velop :
a lecture than brighter children do
A. Cooperation
208. If students do not understand what is
N
B. Competitive spirit
taught in the class the teacher should feel
C. Highlighting the gaps in each other’s
A. terribly bored
YA
teaching
B. pity for the students
D. The habit of supplementing the teach-
C. that he is wasting time ing of each other
D. to explain it in different way 214. The most common cause of nervous insta-
RA
209. Which of the following is a purposive sam- bility amongst teacher is

pling? A. worry
A. Cluster sampling B. fatigue
NA
B. Deliberate sampling C. quarrelsome behavior

C. Stratified random sampling D. all of the above
D. Random probability sampling 215. What will you do as a teacher if the stu-
dents do not attend your class?
210. The first question that a researcher inter-
ested in the applicable for statistical tech- A. Blame the students for their absence
niques to his problem has to ask B. Know the reason and try to remove
A. whether the data could be quantified them
B. whether analysis of data would be pos- C. Think of using some interesting meth-
sible ods of teaching
206. D 207. D 208. D 209. B 210. A 211. D 212. B 213. D 214. A 215. B
D. Keep quiet considering the present at- A. Audio means

titude of students as the change of culture
B. Visual means
C. Audio-Visual means
216. If a student becomes unconscious in the
class what will you do first? D. Black Board Writing
A. Telephoning (informing) student’s par- 221. In every field research pursuits promote
ents and wait for them systematic and gradual advancement of
knowledge but discoveries are rare because
B. Giving first aid to him and trying to con-
tact any nearby doctor A. research is a continuous critical investi-
M
gation
C. Making arrangement to send him to his
house or nearby hospital B. most people lack depth of knowledge
needed for it
D. Rushing to the principal’s office and can-
RA
vassing for help immediately C. it is not common to be able to think be-
yond a grooved channel
217. If a child is a back bencher and unable to
watch the blackboard clearly. As a result D. sustained experimental work needed for
he stands, sees and sits repeatedly. What discoveries is not easily forthcoming
inference will you draw regarding the case? 222. Students should prefer those teachers who
A. The child has a defective-vision A. dictate notes in the class.
E
B. The child is of short height as compared B. are themselves disciplined.
to his classmates C. give important questions before exami-
RE
C. Both (A) and (B) nation.
D. The blackboard is under shining effect D. can clear their difficulties regarding
of light subject-matter.
218. Which of the following is a characteristic 223. What makes people to undertake re-
SH
of a researcher? search?
A. He a specialist rather than generalist. A. Desire to face the challenge in solving

the unsolved problems.
B. He is industrious and persistent on the
trail of discovery. B. Desire to get intellectual joy of doing
some creative work.
C. He is not operational to his chosen filed
I
but accepts the reality. C. Desire to get a research degree along

with it consequential benefits.
JA
D. All of these
D. All of these
219. The difference between experimental re-
224. Which of the following is the most impor-
search and historical research in the pro-
tant characteristic of Open Book Examina-
cess of
tion system?
A. replication
A. Students become serious.
B. the testing of hypothesis
B. In compels students to think.
C. the formulation of the hypothesis
C. It improves attendance in the classroom.
D. all of these
D. It reduces examination anxiety amongst
220. The effective means in education commu- students.
nication is
216. B 217. C 218. D 219. D 220. C 221. A 222. D 223. D 224. B

ER
20. Teaching aptitude in education
GD
AN
CH
1. Emotional Adjustment of students is effec- B. Encouraged to participate in the discus-
tive in. sion in the class
A. Personality formation C. Encouraged to continue asking ques-
B. Class-teaching tions
D. Encouraged to search answers indepen-
N
C. Discipline
dently
D. All of the above
5. At authoritarian level teaching is.
YA
2. Black-board can be included in which

group/category of teaching-aids? A. Teacher - centered
A. Audio-aids B. Child - centered
B. Visual aids C. Headmaster centered

RA
C. Audio-visual aids D. Experience - based
D. None of the above 6. Who developed the interaction analysis cat-

egory system in education for increasing
3. Which of the following is related with the
the teacher effectiveness.
teaching skill?
NA
A. Flander
A. Black-board writing
B. Rayon
B. Solving questions
C. Amidon and Simon
C. Asking questions
D. Richard Over
D. All of the above
7. One of the important theory of moral de-
4. Students who ask questions in the class
velopment has been proposed by
should be.
A. Laurence Kohlberg
A. Advised to meet the teacher after the
class B. Erik Fromm
1. D 2. B 3. D 4. C 5. A 6. A 7. A
294 Chapter 20. Teaching aptitude in education
C. Daniel Coleman A. By naturalist philosophy

D. Benjamin Bloom B. By pragmatist philosophy
8. Character is developed by. C. In Victorian Era
A. Will power D. In Democratic Era
B. Conduct and behavior 15. The proponent of the Cognitive Theory of
teaching is.
C. Morality
A. N. L Gage
D. All of the above
B. Piaget
9. Which of the following is not a level of
M
teaching learning? C. B. F Skiner
A. Differentiation level D. McDonald
16. Instruction medium affects the absence and
RA
B. Memory level
escape from class teaching.
C. Reflective level
A. Agreed
D. Understanding level
B. Indefinite
10. NUEPA is mainly concerned with.
C. Disagreed
A. Educational Supervision
B. Educational Unity
E
17. The determinant of teaching skill training
C. Educational Planning is.
RE
D. Educational Evaluation A. Components
11. The Father of Psychoanalysis is. B. Pupil - teacher
A. Erik H. Erikson C. Supervisor
B. lean Piaget D. Headmaster
SH
C. Jerorne S. Bruner 18. For a good communication . . . ..is requried.

D. Sigmund Freud A. Clarity of thought
12. In pedagogy computer is used. B. Dramatic Presentation
A. To motivate the learner C. Speaking in a mild tone
I
B. To provide feedback D. Speaking without pause

JA
C. To interact with the learner 19. Which of the following is an approach to

education planning?
D. For all the above
A. Man power approach
13. Which of the following is die brain of the
computer? B. Social Demand approach
A. Prograrnme C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Central processing unit D. None of the above

20. Institutional planning should be based on-
C. Memory
A. Aim and needs
D. Hard Disc
14. Spare the rod spoil the child. This as- B. Time - table
sumption is related to that type of discipline C. Administration
which has been advocated.
D. Need
8. D 9. A 10. C 11. B 12. D 13. D 14. B 15. C 16. A 17. A 18. A 19. D 20. C
21. A
21. Teacher behaviour ought to be- 28. Which of the following expectations stu-
A. Administrative dents have from group learning?
B. Instructive A. To get appreciation from the group
C. Idealistic B. To distribute the work equally
D. Directive C. To ignore individual view point
ER
22. Information highway or net is – D. To attract isolated student towards the
group
A. Computer
29. In order to modify the undesirable behavior
B. Intemet
of a student the most effective method is.
GD
C. intranet
A. To punish the student
D. Key - board
B. To bring it to the notice of parents
23. Computer language is based on –
C. To find out the reasons for the undesir-
A. Number system able behaviour and provide remedies
AN
B. Symbol system D. To ignore it
C. Series system 30. In which university the microteaching sys-
D. None of the above tem started in 1961?
24. The main task of educational computer is. A. Stanford University
CH
A. Scoring the answers B. Oxford University
B. Preserve the information C. Delhi University
C. Analysis of data D. The Punjab University
D. All of the above 31. The correct meaning of C.A.I.is.
N
25. UNESCO satellite directed television pro- A. Characteristics of Assistant Instructor

gram was used first.
B. Computer Assisted Instruction
A. 1926
YA
C. Community Assisted Instruction

B. 1959
C. 1961
32. “Man is born free but every-where he is in
D. 1965
RA
chains/,This statement has been given by-

26. In which of the following instructional pro-
A. Abraham Maslow
cedure is the main component?
B. Jean Jacques Rousseau
A. Synectics teaching model
C. John Dewey
NA
B. Basic teaching model

C. Inductive model D. W.I-I Kilpatrick
33. Written communication strategy includes-
D. Social -stimulation
27. The computer- based teaching model has A. Algorithms
been developed by- B. Decision Table
A. Gilbert (1962) C. Both (A) and (B)
B. Stolurow and Davis (1965) D. None of the above
C. Robert Gagne (1965) 34. Main responsibility of School Management
D. Mecner (1965) lies on –
22. C 23. B 24. A 25. D 26. D 27. B 28. B 29. D 30. C 31. A 32. B 33. B 34. C
35. A
A. Principal 41. The scope of Decision Making is

B. Teachers A. Management
C. Manager B. Organization
D. All of the C. Administration
35. Major objective of School Discipline is-
D. Supervision
A. To ensure safety of staff and students
42. Factor of personality is
B. To create an environment conducive for
teaching A. Ductless glands
M
C. Both (A) and (B) B. Family background
D. None of the above C. School
36. A fault in computer programme which pre- D. All of the above
RA
vents it form working correctly known as-
43. Which of the following aspects is discussed
A. Bug in a Teacher,s Dairy?
B. Error A. Class Time Table
C. Boo Boo
B. Teaching Content
D. Virus
C. Both (A) and (B)
37. Practical knowledge of language is learnt
E
at- D. None of the above
RE
A. School 44. Which of the following methods of teach-
ing encourages the use of maximum
B. Language laboratory
senses?
C. Language teaching
A. Self-study method
D. Language instruction
SH
B. Laboratory method
38. Dropping out form school means-
A. To come to school casually C. Team teaching method
B. To leave the school forever D. Problem-solving method
C. To play truant from class 45. An effective teacher is one who can:
D. None of the above A. control the class

I
39. Which one of the following is not a princi- B. motivate students to learn
JA
ple of a good time table?

C. correct the assignments carefully
A. Flexibility
D. give more information in less time
B. Ruthless master
46. Which of the following comprise teaching
C. Variety skill?
D. Coordination of efforts
A. Explaining
40. The reason of absence and escape from
school is- B. Questioning
A. Lack of interest in syllabus C. Black Board writing

B. Poor method of teaching D. All the above
C. Ineffective teacher 47. Which of the following statements is most
appropriate?
D. All of the above
36. C 37. A 38. B 39. B 40. B 41. D 42. C 43. D 44. B 45. B 46. D 47. D
A. Teachers are born. 53. The teacher’s role at the higher educational
level is to:
B. Teachers can teach.
A. provide information to students
C. Lecture Method can be used for devel-
oping thinking. B. promote self-learning in students
D. Teachers help can create in a student a C. help students to solve their personal
desire to learn. problems
ER
48. The first Indian chronicler of Indian history D. encourage healthy competition among
was: students
A. Kalhan 54. Which one of the following teachers would
GD
you like the most:
B. Fahiyan
A. punctual
C. Huan Tsang
B. having research aptitude
D. Megasthanese
C. who often amuses his students
AN
49. Which of the following is not instructional
D. loving and having high idealistic philos-
material?
ophy
A. Transparency 55. Which is the least important factor in teach-
B. Audio Casset ing?
CH
C. Printed Material A. punishing the students
D. Over Head Projector B. lecturing in impressive way
50. The main objective of teaching at Higher C. maintaining discipline in the class
Education Level is: D. drawing sketches and diagrams on the
A. To give new information black-board
N
56. Verbal guidance is least effective in the

B. To prepare students to pass examination
learning of:
C. To develop the capacity to take deci-
YA
A. Skills
sions
B. Attitudes
D. To motivate students to ask questions
during lecture C. Aptitudes
RA
51. Which of the following indicates evalua- D. Relationship

tion? 57. Which is the most important aspect of the
teacher’s role in learning?
A. Ram got 45 marks out of 200
A. The provision of encouragement and
B. Mohan got 38 percent marks in English
moral support
NA
C. Shyam got First Division in final exami- B. The provision of continuous diagnostic
nation and remedial help
D. All the above C. The development of insight into what
52. Teacher uses visual-aids to make learning: constitutes an adequate performance
A. simple D. The development of insight into what
constitutes the pitfalls and dangers to be
B. quicker
avoided
C. interesting 58. The most appropriate purpose of learning
D. more knowledgeable is:
48. A 49. A 50. C 51. D 52. C 53. B 54. B 55. A 56. A 57. C 58. B
A. personal adjustment A. His professional training and creativity

B. modification of behaviour B. His renunciation of personal gain and
C. social and political awareness service to others
D. preparing oneself for employment C. His mastery on the subject and capacity
in controlling the students
59. The students who keep on asking questions
in the class should be: D. His concentration on his work and du-
ties with a spirit of obedience to God
A. encouraged to continue questioning
65. Which of the following teacher, will be
B. advised not to disturb during the lecture liked most?
M
C. advised to meet the teacher after the A. A loving teacher
class
B. A teacher who is disciplined
D. encouraged to find answer indepen-
RA
dently C. A teacher of high idealistic attitude
60. Maximum participation of students is pos- D. A teacher who often amuses his stu-
sible in teaching through: dents
A. lecture method 66. A teacher’s most important challenge is:
B. text book method A. To prepare the question paper
C. audio-visual aids
E B. To make students do their home work
D. discussion method C. To maintain discipline in the class room
RE
61. The most important cause of failure for D. To make teaching-learning process en-
teacher lies in the area of: joyable
A. verbal ability 67. Value-education stands for:
B. inter personal relationship A. inculcation of virtues
SH
C. strict handling of the students B. making a student healthy

D. lack of command over the knowledge C. making a student to get a job
of the subject
D. all-round development of personality
62. A teacher can establish rapport with his
students by: 68. When a normal student behaves in an er-
ratic manner in the class, you would:
I
A. playing the role of a guide

A. ignore the student
JA
B. becoming a figure of authority

B. talk to the student after the class
C. becoming a friend to the students
C. ask the student to leave the class
D. impressing students with knowledge
and skill D. pull up the student then and there
63. Education is a powerful instrument of: 69. Good evaluation of written material should
not be based on:
A. Social transformation
A. Logical presentation
B. Cultural transformation
B. Linguistic expression
C. Personal transformation
C. Comprehension of subject
D. All the above
64. According to Swami Vivekananda, D. Ability to reproduce whatever is read
teacher’s success depends on: 70. Why do teachers use teaching aid?
59. D 60. D 61. D 62. D 63. D 64. B 65. A 66. D 67. A 68. B 69. C 70. D
A. For students’ attention 76. What quality the students like the most in
a teacher?
B. To make teaching fun-filled
A. Discipline
C. To make students attentive
B. Compassion
D. To teach within understanding level of
students C. Entertaining
ER
71. Attitudes, concepts, skills and knowledge D. Idealist philosophy
are products of: 77. Which of the following is more interactive
A. Heredity and student centric?
B. Learning A. Group Discussion
GD
B. Workshop
C. Research
C. Seminar
D. Explanation
72. Which among the following gives more D. Lecture
freedom to the learner to interact? 78. A good teacher must be
AN
A. Use of film A. resourceful and dominant
B. Lectures by experts B. resourceful and autocratic
C. Small group discussion C. resourceful and authoritative

D. resourceful and participative
CH
D. Viewing country-wide classroom pro-
gramme on TV 79. Successful Communication in classroom
teaching is
73. Which of the following skills are needed
for present day teacher to adjust effectively A. Circular
with the classroom teaching? B. Influential
A. Content mastery
N
C. Directional
B. Knowledge of students’ needs D. Reciprocal
YA
C. Use of technology in teaching learning 80. Which one of the following types of evalu-
ation assesses the learning progress to pro-
D. All of the above
vide continuous feedback to both teachers
74. The primary duty of the teacher is to and students during instruction?
RA
A. imbibe value system in the students A. Summative

B. help all round development of the stu- B. Formative evaluation
dents
C. Placement evaluation
C. raise the intellectual standard of the stu- D. Diagnostic evaluation
NA
dents
81. Which one of the following is a scaled down
D. improve the physical standard of the teaching situation?
students
A. Team teaching
75. Micro teaching is more effective
B. Micro teaching
A. always
C. Macro teaching
B. after the teaching-practice
D. Cooperative teaching
C. during the teaching-practice 82. Greater the handicap of the students com-
D. during the preparation for teaching- ing to the educational institutions, greater
practice the demand on the:
71. B 72. C 73. D 74. B 75. C 76. A 77. A 78. D 79. D 80. B 81. B 82. B
A. State 88. The main objectives of student evaluation

B. Teacher of teachers are:
C. Society A. To make teachers take teaching seri-

ously.
D. Family
83. What are the characteristics of Continuous B. To help teachers adopt innovative meth-
and Comprehensive Evaluation? ods of teaching.
A. It replaces marks with grades. C. To identify the areas of further improve-

ment in teacher traits.
B. It helps in reducing examination phobia.
M
D. All of the above
C. It evaluates every aspect of the student.
89. Using the central point of the classroom
D. All of the above
communication as the beginning of a dy-
84. Which of the following attributes denote namic pattern of ideas is referred to as:
RA
great strengths of a teacher?
A. Idea protocol
A. Setting examples
B. Systemisation
B. Acknowledging mistakes
C. Mind mapping
C. Willingness to put assumptions to the
test D. Problem - orientation
D. All of the above
E
90. Attitudes, actions and appearances in the
85. Which one of the following statements is context of classroom communication are
correct in the context of multiple - choice considered as:
RE
type questions? A. Verbal
A. They are less objective than essay type B. Irrational
questions.
C. Impersonal
B. They are more objective than true-false
SH
type questions. D. Non-verbal

C. They are more subjective than true-false 91. Most often, the teacher - student commu-
type questions nication is:
D. They are more subjective than short- A. Critical
answer type questions.
B. Utilitarian
86. As Chairman of an independent commis-
I
sion on education, Jacques Delors reportto C. Spurious

JA
UNESCO was titled D. Confrontational

A. Learning : The Treasure Within 92. In a classroom, a communicator’s trust level
B. Millennium Development Report is determined by:
C. World Declaration on Education for All A. eye contact
D. International Commission on Education B. the use of hyperbole
Report
C. the change of voice level
87. What are required for good teaching?
D. the use of abstract concepts
A. Remedy
93. Which set of learner characteristics may
B. Diagnosis be considered helpful in designing effective
C. Feedback teaching-learning systems? Select the cor-
rect alternative from the codes given below:
D. All of the above
83. D 84. D 85. B 86. A 87. D 88. D 89. B 90. D 91. B 92. A
A. Prior experience of learners in respect 98. Which of the following set of statements
of the subject. reflects the basic characteristics of teach-
ing? Select the correct alternative from the
B. Ability of the learners in respect of the
codes:
subject.
A. Teaching is related to learning.
C. Student’s language background.
D. All of the above B. One may teach without learning taking
ER
place.
94. Select the alternative which consists of pos-
itive factors contributing to effectiveness C. Teaching is a ‘task’ word while learning
of teaching: is an ‘achievement’ word.
GD
A. Teacher’s knowledge of the subject. D. All of the above
B. Communication skill of the teacher. 99. Which of the following factors affect teach-
ing? Choose the correct code to indicate
C. Teacher’s competence in managing and your answer.
monitoring the classroom transactions.
AN
A. Teacher’s internal locus of control.
D. All of the above
B. Learner-motivation.
95. The use of teaching aids is justified on the
grounds of C. Teacher’s self efficacy.
A. Optimizing learning outcomes of stu- D. All of the above
CH
dents. 100. Which combination of methods of teach-
B. Attracting student’s attention in the ing is likely to optimise learning?
class room.
A. Lecturing, discussions and seminar
C. Minimizing indiscipline problems in the method
classroom.
B. Lecturing, demonstrations and Power-
N
D. Effective engagement of students in Point based presentations

learning tasks.
C. Interactive discussions, planned lec-
YA
96. Imagine you are working in an educational tures and PowerPoint based presentations
institution where people are of equal sta-
tus. Which method of communication is D. Interactive lecture sessions followed by
best suited and normally employed in such buzz sessions, brainstorming and projects
RA
a context? 101. Which of the following learner character-

istics are likely to influence the effective-
A. Cross communication
ness of teaching aids and evaluation sys-
B. Vertical communication tems to ensure positive results?
C. Corporate communication
NA
A. Learner’s family background, age and

D. Horizontal communication habitation.
97. Identify the important element a teacher B. Learner’s stage of development, social
has to take cognizance of while addressing background and personal interests.
students in a classroom. C. Learner’s maturity level, academic per-
A. Fixed posture formance level and motivational disposi-
tions.
B. Voice modulation
D. Learner’s parentage, socio-economic
C. Repetitive pause
background and performance in learning
D. Avoidance of proximity of the concerned subject.
93. D 94. D 95. D 96. D 97. B 98. D 99. D 100. D 101. C 102. A
102. Internal and external factors that affect C. the self, selected methods of communi-
message reception by the students in the cation and the message.
classroom are referred to as
D. the communication channel, other com-
A. noise municators, and external factors.
B. feedback
104. As a good classroom communicator, you
C. fragmentation are supposed to know your
D. channelization
A. silent cues
103. A teacher in a classroom has immediate
control over B. artful pauses
M
A. the audience, the noise and the recep- C. audience emotions
tion.
D. counter arguments
B. the feedback, the technology and the
RA
audience experience.
E
RE
I SH
JA
103. C 104. B
ER
21. Educational movement
GD
AN
CH
1. Syed Ahmad khan felt it absolute necessary A. Conformism
to undertake a reform in order to make
B. Conservatism
take its rightful place in the country.
C. Activism
A. Muslim Community
D. Extremism
B. Religious Community
N
5. What were the main bases of Syed Ahmad,s

C. Secular Community
appeal to Muslims of his time?
D. Ethnic Community
YA
A. Religious
2. Syed Ahmad khan realized that the Mus-
lims should be taught the virtues of and B. Ethnic
self-reliance. C. Conventional
RA
A. Self-realization D. Developmental
B. Self-image 6. The Movement of Aligarh was the element
C. Self-help of.
D. Self-sufficiency A. Reconciliation & rapprochement
NA
3. What was the greatest and of time for Mus- B. Education & Religion
lims in the times of Syed Ahmad khan?
C. Politics & Religion
A. Sense of self-pride and devotion
D. Compromise & Religion
B. Sense of self-religion and traditions
7. After the failure in war of 1857,the Mus-
C. Sense of self-help and removal of fatal- lims realized that English were adamant to
ism their educational system.
D. Sense of self-reliance and discipline
A. Promote
4. The Muslims of that time were suffering
from lethargy and B. Nullify
1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. A 6. A 7. C
304 Chapter 21. Educational movement
C. Abolish 13. On which lines he founded education better

and encouraging for Muslim youth?
D. Establish
8. The policy of English men for the Muslims A. Religious
was malicious and B. Conventional
A. Forgiving C. Western
B. Lenient D. Eastern
C. Vindictive 14. According to European educational histo-
rian,N.N Law,in such steps were taken
D. Gracious through the resources of East India com-
M
9. The attempt to regenerate the Muslim company that had the main purpose to prepare
munity was known as Movement. subcontinent the education of Bible.
A. Religious A. 1602
RA
B. Aligarh B. 1604
C. Secular C. 1600
D. 1614
D. Holy
15. The era of modern education started in
10. When the culture and traditions of Mus-
when Sir Charles Grant wrote a maga-
lims were neglected Muslims boycotted the
E zine on the topic of diffusion of knowledge
modern neglected,Muslims boycotted the
and presented it to the directors of the com-
modern educational system,not for English
pany.
RE
language but for the Western educational
system that was entirely based on A. 1880
A. Modernism B. 1797
B. Secularism C. 1799
SH
C. Christianity D. 1881
16. In which year and where a committee was
D. Conventionalism formed for better diffusion and advance-
11. When Sir Syed was transferred to Benares? ment of learning among the Mohammedans
of India?
A. 1876
A. In 1880 at Benares
B. 1879
I
B. In 1870 at Benares
C. 1877
JA
C. In 1867 at Dehli
D. 1867
D. In 1885 at Allahabad
12. The choice of Aligarh as the birthplace of
a new movement was due to some reasons 17. Sir Syed was elected as the of his com-
such as. mittee.
A. Secretary
A. Aligarh was in itself a dear name
B. President
B. Muslims gave donations in support of
this place C. Executive
C. Mohammedans population and Mo- D. Chief Executive
hammedans feudal aristocracy surrounded 18. The Muslims rejected Western educational
it system for a number of reasons One of
them is.
D. Both A and C
8. C 9. B 10. C 11. D 12. A 13. C 14. D 15. B 16. B 17. A 18. D
A. Cultural traditions A. Time

B. Religious traditions B. Hour
C. National traditions C. Muslims
D. Political traditions D. Political traditions
19. The English tried to discourage Muslims 24. Sir Syed was a leading educationist as well
ER
politically socially and as a ?
A. Religiously A. Religious leader
B. Traditionally B. Leader
GD
C. Morally C. Politician
D. Mentally D. Practitioner
25. Who was the right hand of Sir Syed Ahmad
20. Who introduced a new trend in educational
Khan?
system that Muslims should adopt Western
AN
lines? A. Lord Lytton
A. Ameer Ali B. Muhammad Qasim
B. Shibli C. Ahmad Khan
D. Sameeullah Khan
CH
C. Muhammad Ali Johar
D. Sir Syed 26. Which year proved to be a turning point in
the history of education?
21. Muslims should overwhelm English lan-
guage and Should be well aware of English A. 1835
culture. For this reason a rule was passed B. 1806
for the institute.
N
C. 1802
A. Admission must be given only to Mus-
lim students D. 1800
YA
27. The Muhammad Anglo-Oriental College

B. Both Hindu and Muslim can take admis-
was started at Aligarh on ,as a primary
sion there
school.
C. Only English will teach there
RA
A. 24th May, 1875

D. The Principal two professors and head
B. 24th May,1876
of the school should be English
C. 25th May,1875
22. The general aim of the college committee
was to popularise and promote the study D. 23rd May,1877
NA
of and literature among the Muslims. 28. When did Sir Syed Ahmad Khan resign the
A. European sciences government service?
B. Political science A. in 1877
C. Religious sciences B. in 1879
D. Religion C. in 1876
23. Sir Syed believed that education and learn- D. in 1875

ing should be in accordance with the needs 29. When and by whom foundation of Muham-
of the mad Anglo-Oriental College was laid?
19. C 20. D 21. D 22. A 23. A 24. C 25. D 26. A 27. A 28. C 29. B
A. 1876 Sir Syed 35. An important institution run by the ex-

B. 1877,Lord Lytton students of the college was “The Brother-
hood”founded by in 1891.
C. 1877 Sameeullah Khan
A. Bech
D. 1878 Morrison
30. A famous lawmaker,Lord McCauley,Presented B. Lord Lytton
his historical memorandum.In its light,on C. Morrison
7th March 1835,a press statement of an
D. Sir Syed
educational policy was accepted that is
called 36. According to a survey in 1871 out of
M
2141 officers of Bengali Government: 1338
A. Western Resolution
were Europeans,711 were Hindus and only
B. McCauley,s Resolution were Muslims.
C. Bentinck,s Resolution
RA
A. 190
D. Educational Resolution B. 225
31. said:”The ceremony. . . constitutes an
epoch in the social progress of the Mo- C. 300
hammedans in India under British rule. D. 92
A. Sir Syed 37. was the first person who worked on
B. Beck
E solid bases to lend Muslims an identity of
a nation after the western Colonization.
C. Lord Lytton
RE
A. Sir Syed
D. None of these
32. When did the government of India draw B. Shibli
the attention of local governments to the C. Shah Waliullah
condition of the Mohammedans in educa-
tion? D. Shan Abdul Aziz Muhaddas Dehlvi
SH
A. In August,1871 38. On which thing the members of”The Broth-

erhood”agreed upon?
B. in August, 1873
A. To give free coaching after school
C. in May, 1870
B. To establish a committee that will bring
D. in July,1872
new prospects of their success
33. Who remained the principal of Aligarh Col-
I
lege from 1884 to 1899? C. To contribute one per cent of their in-
JA
come to the college

A. Lord Lytton
D. To encourage Muslims to Study English
B. Beck
C. Sir Syed
39. The Siddons Union Club was patterned
D. Shibli after
34. In November 1890,Aftab Khan founded the A. The Cambridge University Union Club
institution,known as “The Dury”to for
the education of poor Muslims. B. Government Education
A. Raise funds C. Western Lines
B. Open more schools D. Religious Literature
C. Run movement 40. The Cricket Club provided an opportunity
for the students to mix freely In
D. Gather teachers
30. C 31. C 32. A 33. B 34. A 35. C 36. D 37. C 38. C 39. A 40. D
A. Religious Society A. 8,000

B. Hindu Society B. 10,000
C. Mohammedans,Society C. 9,000
D. English Society D. 18,000
41. Who gave a practical shape to the thoughts 46. What was the defect in Sir Syed,s ideology
ER
of Shah Waliullah and initiated a war move- and programme?
ment against the Muslim enemy forces?
A. He wanted Muslims to join Congress
A. Syed Ahmad Shaheed & Shah Ismail
Shaheed B. He wanted Muslims to go to England
GD
B. Shah Abdul Aziz & Shah Ismail Shaheed C. He opposed opening up of large number
of small schools and to spread elementary
C. Syed Ahmad Shaheed & Shah Ismail English among Muslims
Shaheed
D. He preferred ideas of Deo Band Move-
D. Shah Abdul Aziz & Shan Abdul Aziz
AN
ment
Muhaddas Dehlvi
47. The Muslims of the century inherited
42. The aim of Mohammedans, College in bn- a traditional Islam which was tainted by
nging together students from all parts of many evils.
the country was bound to remove and
CH
to develop a strong communal spirit among A. 18th
them. B. 17th
A. Political differences
C. 19th
B. Westernisation
D. 20th
C. Mutual discord
48. The establishment of a religious school at
N
D. Mutual harmony Deo Band was a new phase of the culmina-

tion of philosophy put into practice.
43. From which year the Mohammadan Col-
YA
lege started sending regular batches of stu- A. Maulana Nanutvi,s

dents to England?
B. Maulana Ishaque,s
A. 1882
C. Shah Waliullah,s
RA
B. 1881
D. Sir Syed,s
C. 1888
49. Sir Syed strongly attacked the of Islam
D. 1880 who preached and propagated unwise con-
ventions,corrupt customs and evil ways of
NA
44. Maulana Qasim Nanutvi opened a small

chool Deo Band in a village mosque in life.
A. 1882 A. Preachers
B. 1881 B. Practitioners
C. 1867 C. Propagandists
D. 1870 D. Blind followers
45. Deo Band education institute had produced 50. Sir Syed felt the necessity of in every
almost authors,teachers,preachers and age and requested the scholars to under-
Muslim jurists. take it.
41. A 42. C 43. D 44. C 45. D 46. C 47. C 48. C 49. D 50. D 51. A
A. Jehad 56. When was the Deo Band Academy

B. Mutahid founded?
A. in 1867
C. Itehad
B. in 1866
D. Ijtehad
51. The ex-supervisor of the institute said C. in1868
that it is not a mere institute but a constant D. in 1877
movement and a school of thought. 57. Sir Syed was not enslaved to the author-
A. Deo Band ity of Hadith while interpreting Islam he
rejected all those notions which were in
M
B. MAO School conflict with
C. Nadvat -ul-Ulma A. Life and practice
D. Jamia Millia Islamia B. Life and nature
RA
52. When Muhammad Ishque the new Imam
C. Nature and logic
or leader of the movement reorganized his
compatriots on the basic of the Hanafi re- D. Science and logic
ligion and to seek co-operation of the Ot- 58. The Deo Band Academy was a revival of
toman Empire? religious school founded by Shah Waliullah
on
A. In 1840
E A. May 7th 1731
B. In 1841
B. May 5th 1731
C. In 1842
RE
C. May 5th 1730
D. In 1852
D. May 6th 1731
53. Muhammad Ishaque transferred his head-
quarters from to further strengthen his 59. How many principles did Maulana
relations with the Ottoman Empire. Nanutvi,the guiding soul of the religion-
political venture,lay down?
SH
A. Allahabad to Mecca
A. 3
B. Medina to Mecca
B. 5
C. Delhi to Mecca
C. 8
D. Aligarh to Mecca
D. 7
54. The Delhi branch of the organization car-
60. The attempt to regenerate the Muslim com-
I
ried on its work till

munity has come to be known as the
JA
A. 1875 Movement.
B. 1857 A. Deo Band
C. 1858 B. Religious
D. 1850 C. Shibli,s
55. The Deo Band branch, during Maulana D. Aligarh
Ishaque,s time had accepted the Ottoman 61. The donations of persons who want to re-
Caliph as its leader. main unknown is a source of
A. Religion-political A. Zakah
B. Socio-political B. Fitr
C. Religion-social C. Barakah
D. None of these D. Bakarah
52. C 53. C 54. B 55. A 56. A 57. C 58. B 59. C 60. D 61. C
62. Fatwas of Kufr were passed against Sir Syed 67. The religious manifesto was to speak the
and he was declared as truth with full liberty of conscience to
strengthen ties with the and to create
A. Heresy
a discipline and unity among them.
B. Profane
A. Muslim folks
C. Hereto
B. Congress
ER
D. Heretic
C. Politics
63. One of the drawbacks of Deo Band Move-
ment was. D. Muslim League
A. The syllabus of the institute was very 68. Who was the first bona fide student of Deo
GD
short and could not meet the requirements Band?
of that time
A. Maulana Nanutvi
B. Students got more bend of mind towards
Congress B. Maulana Rashid Ahmad
AN
C. The syllabus of institute was quite long C. Maulana Mahmoodul Hasan
as it was aimed to be crammed with all of D. Muhammad Qasim
the educational traditions and qualities stu-
69. Deobandis,social outlook was based on the
dents had to spend a long span of their life
fact that on one hand they defended and
to complete it
on the other hand they opposed compul-
CH
D. Both A and B sory education for girls.
64. Deo Band Movement could not succeed in.
A. Polytheism
A. Preaching Islam all over the subconti-
B. Polygon
nent
C. Ploygany
B. Protecting Muslims against the attack
N
of English culture D. Polygamy

C. Enabling Muslims to adopt Arabic lan- 70. was the first Muslim leader of Indo-Pak
YA
guage subcontinent who,after Freedom War of

D. Both A and C 1857 decided to run a movement for the
betterment of political economical and so-
65. After the death of Shah Waliullah who ran
cial conditions of Muslims.
the administration of his Movement?
RA
A. Shibli
A. Shah Abdul Aziz
B. Sir Syed
B. Maulana Ishaque
C. Maulana Nanutvi C. Waqarul Maluk
NA
D. Amir Imdadullah D. Mohsanul Mulk

66. The basic principle of the Deo Band 71. Who organizes Deo Band institute?
Movement was that anyone joining the A. Government
academy and movement should accep the
programme and of the organization. B. Educational Department
A. Law C. Advisory Committee
B. Curriculum D. Maulvis
C. Manifesto 72. When the Deobandis joined the All India
National Congress?
D. None of these
62. D 63. C 64. B 65. A 66. C 67. A 68. C 69. D 70. B 71. C 72. C
A. in 1886 78. Which profession Sir Syed advised the Mus-

lims to take up?
B. in 1887
A. Art and craft
C. in1885
B. Engineering
D. in 1880
73. Which party the Deobandis later opposed? C. Architecture
A. Religion-political D. Agriculture and trade

79. When did the Government of India pass a
B. All India National Congress
resolution on realizing the backwardness
M
C. Muslim League of the Muslims in the modern education?
D. Socio-political A. Maulana Shibli
74. Name of the scholar who wrote the expla- B. Hazrat Sheikh Al Hind
nation of Holy Quran consisting on seven
RA
books was. C. Maulana Shabeer Ahmad Usmani
A. Shibli D. Haji Imdadullah Makki

80. used to say that the object behind the
B. Maulana Hali
creation of Deo Band institute was not to
C. Shah Fazaul-ur Rehman Usmani produce a group of Maulvis but to prepare
D. Sir Syed Ahmad khan a team of freedom fighters who will fight
E
against the British.
75. What strategy Deobandis followed when
the Congress adopted such policies and puT A. Maulana Shibli
RE
forth demands which were openly against B. Hazrat Sheikh Al Hind
the Muslims?
C. Maulana Shabeer Ahmad Usmani
A. Still remained with Congress
D. Haji Imdadullah Makki
B. Left Congress
SH
81. was the root cause of most of the evils

C. Joined Muslim League of the Muslim society.
D. Applied new policies A. Lethargy
76. When did the All India National Congress B. Idleness
appear in its true Hinduised colour?
C. lliteracy
A. in 1930
I
D. Fatalism
B. in 1935
JA
82. On which point Sir Syed was different form

C. in 1932 Deo Bandis?
D. in 1931 A. Muslims should not rely on the Gov-
77. In Sir Syed,s opinion three basic factors ernment for the establishment of education
were responsible for prevailing evils in the institutions
Muslim world the Hindu influence the cor- B. Rich Muslims should not give any help
rupt and evil beliefs and practices and the
absence of C. Rich people should contribute towards
such a noble cause
A. Modern education
D. Both A and C
B. English language
83. Sir Syed devoted himself from to bring
C. Western ways of life about a political rapprochement between
D. Religious trends the rulers and the ruled.
73. C 74. D 75. A 76. B 77. A 78. D 79. B 80. B 81. C 82. D 83. B
A. 1858 to 1870 90. Why Shibli joined Nadva?

B. 1858 to 1869 A. To join Deo Band and Aligarh
C. 1859 to1870 B. To join Congress and Muslim League
D. 1850 to 1869 C. To educate Muslims
84. Sir Syed,s ideology was to remain loyal to
the English but did not believe in D. To serve the cause of Islam
ER
A. Dictatorship 91. The fundamental difference between Deo
Band and Aligarh was that of only
B. Democracy nature.
C. Equalitarianism
GD
A. Religious
D. Social Equality
B. Political
85. What was Sir Syed,s concept of a nation?
C. Socio-political
A. The entire humanity is one nation
D. Social
B. People living on one land comprise one
AN
nation 92. Shibli left on the pretext that there was
no revival of Islam.
C. None of the above
A. Deo Band
D. Both A and C
86. What was the aim of Shibli? B. Aligarh
CH
A. To follow Deo Band C. Congress
B. To follow Congress D. Nadva
C. To promote Aligarh 93. Shibli was a supporter of the and was
D. To bridge the gulf between Aligarh and critical of Sir Syed,s attitude towards it.
N
Deo Band A. Muslim League

87. When did Shibli join the Nadvatul Ulema?
B. Azamghar
YA
A. In 1894
C. Congress
B. In 1895
D. Deo Band
C. in 1884
94. The establishment of a religious school
RA
D. in 1890 at Deo Band was culmination of

88. The first meeting of Nadva held on philosophy put into practice.
April at Kanpur.
A. Shah Waliullah,s
A. 23rd,24th and 25th
B. Syed Amir Ali,s
B. 23rd 24th and 26th
NA
C. Maulana Shibli,s
C. 22nd 23rd and 24th
D. Sir Syed,s
D. 21st 22nd and 23rd
89. Sir Syed remained the Honorary member 95. Syed Amir Ali was born in at Hugli in
of. West Bengal.
A. Congress A. 1857
B. Muslim League B. 1858
C. Deo Band Movement C. 1855
D. Royal Asiatic Society D. 1847
84. A 85. D 86. D 87. A 88. C 89. D 90. D 91. A 92. B 93. C 94. A 95. D 96. B
96. His monumental works such The Spirit of A. Lord Lytton

Islam or The life and teachings of Muham-
B. Maulvi Samiullah
mad were published in
C. Sir Syed
A. 1900
D. Siddons
B. 1902
103. By which university M.A.O high school
C. 1901 had been affiliated after some time?
D. 1910 A. Bombay University
97. Who was Syed Akbar Shahabuddin?
B. Allahabad University
M
A. A great poet
C. Azamghar University
B. A revolutionist
D. Calcutta University
C. A journalist 104. In which year the first meeting of All In-
RA
D. Both A and C dia Mohammedan Educational Conference
98. The aim of Aligarh Movement was to ex- was held?
plicate religious topics A. 1888
A. Elaborately B. 1886
B. Truly C. 1889
E
C. Scientifically D. 1887
D. Harmoniously 105. When did All India Muslim League came
RE
99. The Aligarh Movement was in fact a part into being?
of A. 1905
A. Muslim League B. 1902
B. Congress C. 1906
SH
C. British Government D. 1904

D. Pakistan Movement 106. M.A.O College Aligarh was a boarding
100. Another aim of the movement was to se- house in which students used to live.
cure Muslim culture in languages. A. 30
A. Foreign B. 25
I
B. Urdu and English C. 40

JA
C. All D. 95
D. Arabic and Persian 107. Who and when laid the foundation of
101. According to There should be a physi- Congress?
cal and spiritual relationship between reli- A. A.O Hume in 1885
gious and worldly education.
B. Siddons in 1886
A. Syed Amir Ali
C. Maulana Jauhar in 1884
B. Sir Syed Ahmad khan
D. Lord Lytton in 1882
C. Sayed Akbar Shahabuddin
108. Keeping in view Hindu Muslim uprisings
D. Shibli Sir Syed realized that Muslims and Hindus
102. The first principal of M.A.O high school could never live together so he advised Mus-
was lims to stay away from
97. D 98. C 99. D 100. D 101. B 102. D 103. D 104. B 105. C 106. B 107. A
108. D
A. Muslim League A. Ali Garh Movement

B. Deo Band Movement B. Congress
C. Hindus C. Muslim League
D. Congress D. All India Muhammaden Educational
109. It was who raised the slogan of Mus- Conference
ER
lim nation and two nation ideology that 115. Sir Syed wrote the explanation of Bible,for
later became the cause of Pakistan,s Cre- which he had to learn.
ation.
A. Preaching
A. Quaid-e-Azam
B. Method
GD
B. Allama Iqbal
C. Christiantiy
C. Liaquat Ali khan
D. Yiddish Language
D. Sir Syed Ahmad Khan 116. Magazine,”Tehzeeb-ul-Ikhlaq” became the
110. One of the prominent outcomes of Aligarh part of Ali Garh Institute Gazette in.
AN
Movement was.
A. 1997
A. The educational backwardness of Mus-
B. 1998
lims
C. 1899
B. Acquirements of Government jobs
CH
D. 1897
C. Disputes between Muslims,and English
117. Edinburgh University granted Sir Syed the
D. Both A and C honorary degree of in 1889.
111. Sir Syed created a complete school of
A. Ph.D
thought from point of view.
B. Doctorate
A. Religious
N
C. Masters
B. Literary
D. Post Graduate
C. Political
YA
118. A famous saying of that era goes,one who

D. Educational joined Deo Band,he lost world one who
112. Who requested Maulana Hali to joined Ali Garh he lost religion and one
write””Mussadas-e-Hali? who joined jamia Millia,he lost.
RA
A. Shibli A. Religion
B. Maulvi Samiullah khan B. World
C. Sir Sayed Ahmad khan C. Both religion and world
NA
D. Amjad Ali Shah D. Knowledge

113. Name of the British historian who wrote 119. Who directed the attention of Hindus to-
a book, “Life of Muhammad” full of preju- wards British education,a long time ago?
dices was.
A. Sir Syed
A. Lord Byron
B. Lord Lytton
B. William Moore
C. Raja Ram Mohan
C. N.N. Law
D. Darbal Ram Mohan
D. Charles Grant 120. Name of the person who laid the founda-
114. Nadavat-ul-Ulma used the platform of. tion of M.A.O school was.
109. D 110. D 111. B 112. C 113. B 114. D 115. D 116. D 117. B 118. C 119. C
120. D
A. Sir Syed Ahmad khan A. April 1896

B. Lord Lytton B. April 1893
C. Shah Waliullah C. May 1893
D. Maulvi Samiullah khan D. June 1899
127. Where when the first meeting of Nadavat-
121. Sir Syed assigned a Hindu Minister the
ul-Ulma was held?
patron of Scientific Society for its better-
ment. A. 1896 Bombay
A. Raja Ram Mohan B. 1899 Hyderabad
M
B. Duke Argule C. 1894 Madras
C. Partal Singh D. 1895 Lucknow

128. Nadavat-ul-Ulma became famous due to
D. J Kishan Daas
RA
the association of with it and the stu-
122. Education of the Holy Quran became the dents started taking interest in poetry and
part of the course of M.A.O college in. literature rather than in religion.
A. 1880 A. Munshi Ehtasham Ali
B. 1881 B. Syed Suleman Nadvi
C. 1882 C. Maulana Shibli Naumani
E
D. 1887 D. Maulana Muhammad Ali
129. Maulana Abul Hassan Nadvi Impressed
123. Who presided the meeting in which the
RE
Arabian countries besides Indo-Pak conti-
decision of the creation of Mohammedan
nent and Bangladesh with his
Educational Conference was taken?
A. Revolutionary strategies
A. Sir Syed Ahmad khan
B. Arabic % Urdu writings
B. Maulvi Abdul Haqq
SH
C. Educational policies
C. Shah Waliullah
D. Educational theories
D. Maulvi Samiullah khan 130. provided the bases for Muslim revival
124. Secretary of Mohammedan Educational movements in Hindustan.
Conference was. A. Maulana Shibli Naumanai
A. Liaquat Ali khan
I
B. Maulana Ali Maugiri

B. Sir Syed Ahmad khan
JA
C. Shah Waliullah
C. Maulana Zakaullah D. Maulana Samiullah Nadvi
D. Maulana Nazir Ahmad 131. Jamia Millia Islamia was a very beneficial
and interesting one among the other ed-
125. Muslim University Ali Garh came into be-
ucational institutes of Indo-Pak Muslims
ing in.
whose foundation was laid by.
A. Jan 1921
A. Liaquat Ali khan
B. Jan 1922 B. Quaid Azam
C. Jan 1920 C. Maulana Muhammad Ali Johar
D. Feb 1919 D. Maulana Shibli Naumani
126. Maulana Muhammad Ali Kanpuri gave the 132. Jamia Millia Islamia was very much under
idea of Nadavat-ul-Ulma in. the domination of.
121. B 122. D 123. D 124. B 125. A 126. B 127. D 128. C 129. B 130. C 131. C
132. D
A. Muslim League A. M.A

B. Deo Band Movement B. Ph.D Doctorate
C. Aligarh Movement C. B.Sc
D. Indian National Congress
D. Cambridge University
133. The main objective of the Jamia Millia Is-
lamia was. 135. The main motivation behind all move-
ER
A. To surpass Aligarh and Deo Band ments for the recognition of Indo-Pak Mus-
lims was.
B. To produce harmony between religious
and worldly knowledge A. Religion
GD
C. To promote only religious education B. Culture
D. Both A and C C. Traditions
134. Education traditions of research prospered
by Jamia Millia Islamia and the researchers D. Nationality
were granted the degrees of.
AN
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
133. B 134. B 135. D

JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
22. Educational policies
GD
AN
CH
1. Since how long,efforts have been taken to C. Lahore
get Islamization in the educational system?
D. Ali Garh
A. 1949 5. Who says that the most important ting
B. 1947 about education is its spiritual element?
C. 1940
N
A. Liaquat Ali khan

D. 1956 B. Gandhi
2. Who did preside the Educational Confer-
YA
C. Quaid-e-Azam
ence 1947,held in Karachi?
D. Maulana Fazl-ur-Rehman
A. Quaid-e-Azam
6. According to whom,the second object of
B. Maulana Fazl-ur-Rehman education is the training of citizenship?
RA
C. Sir Syed Ahmad khan A. Gandhi

D. Liaquat Ali khan
B. Liaquat Ali khan
3. What kind of education was,near Quaid the
basis of a nation,s progress? C. Sir Syed Ahmad khan
NA
A. Religious D. Mualana Fazl-ur-Rehman
B. Worldly 7. How illiteracy can be diminished?
C. Character Building A. Through Awareness
D. Both A and C B. Through knowledge

4. Where the first meeting of the Educational C. Through Media
Committee held?
D. Through Education for Adults
A. Karachi 8. When the National Education Commission
B. Multan was established?
1. B 2. B 3. D 4. D 5. D 6. D 7. D 8. D
318 Chapter 22. Educational policies
A. 1956 A. llliterate
B. 1957 B. Backward
C. 1954 C. Non-religious
D. 1958 D. Both A and B
9. What was considered as the important part 15. What wass designed for the physical Edu-
of higher Education? cation?
A. Research A. Course Camp
B. Study B. Games Ground
M
C. Revolution C. New Syllabus
D. New Strategies D. National Cadet Course
10. What was the duration of BA/BSC, accord- 16. How we can understand the universe and
RA
ing to the Education Commission? get benefit out of it?
A. 4yrs A. Through Awareness
B. 5yrs B. Through Knowledge
C. 3yrs C. Through Science Knowledge
D. 2yrs D. Through Research
11. To what thing,the changes in the syllabus
E
17. In which sense Islam invites to explore the
correspond? world?
RE
A. Research A. In Positive Sense
B. Modern Education B. For being God,s Creation
C. New Additions C. In Religious Terms
D. All of these D. Both A and C
SH
12. What was suggested to students for the 18. What kind of education Islam preaches?
summer vacations,so they could recognize A. Worldly
the greatness of work?
B. Religious
A. Holidays,Homework
C. Scientific & Religious
B. Written Work
D. Both A and B
I
C. Research 19. What was neglected in the designed goals

JA
D. Work Camp of the Educational Commission?

13. Why a great stress was laid on Female Ed- A. Religious Knowledge
ucation?
B. Scientific Knowledge
A. To encourage females to study
C. Technical Knowledge
B. To make people aware of Female Educa-
D. Knowledge of Arts
tion
20. From which level,the report of commission
C. To lessen the shortage of female teach- starts?
ers at schools
A. Primary
D. Both A and B
B. Basic
14. Which people are needed to get education
in the agricultural and rural areas of Pak- C. Higher
istan? D. Secondary
9. A 10. C 11. D 12. D 13. C 14. D 15. D 16. C 17. A 18. D 19. A 20. C
21. According to Educational Policy 1970, till A. In 1970

which level the Primary Education was as- B. In 1974
signed?
C. in 1973
A. 5
D. in 1972
B. 6 28. When all of the colleges were taken under
C. 8 government?
ER
D. 7 A. In 1972
22. What was suggested for the employees of B. in 1973
factories regarding education?
C. in 1970
GD
A. Education Course D. in 1962
B. Primary Education 29. How many teachers were there in 1972?
C. Basic Knowledge A. 1 Lac & 60 Thousands
D. Technical Knowledge B. 1 Lac & 80 Thousands
AN
23. What should be the proportion of scientific C. 80 Thousands
and simple education at secondary level?
D. 60 Thousands
A. 40:60 30. What would be done to make public get
B. 40:70 expensive and good books easily?
CH
C. 30:60 A. To establish National Book Foundation
D. 60:70 B. To open public libraries
24. Which kind of education according to the C. To make books cheaper
Educational Policy 1970,should be intro- D. To provide free books at school
duced to secondary and higher level? 31. On which thing the success or failure,in
N
A. Scientific annual examinations of a student depends

on?
B. Technical
YA
A. Hard Work
C. Religious
B. Research
D. Both A and C
25. What is the important factor to establish a C. Potentials
RA
fair and democratic society? D. Memory

A. Religious Education 32. What should be broadcasted on TV and Ra-
dio?
B. Scientific Education
A. Scientific Inventions
C. Technical Education
NA
B. New Trends in Education

D. Education of Arts
C. Technical Knowledge
26. Which subject should be added to all levels?
D. Recitation of Holy Quran
A. Mathematics
33. According to UNESCO,how much of GNP
B. Physical Education fund should be spent on education?
C. Science A. 2%
D. English B. 4%
27. When the education was announced as C. 5%
free?
D. 6%
21. C 22. A 23. A 24. B 25. A 26. B 27. D 28. A 29. A 30. A 31. D 32. D 33. B
34. A
34. What was the main object of the Educa- A. Zulfiqar Ali khausa
tional Policy 1979?
B. Iftikhar Ahmad Dhaloan
A. To make people feel the bond between
C. Syed Ghaus Ali Shah
Islam and Pakistan
D. Ishaq Daar
B. To make people aware of the need of
education 40. What would be the educational expenditure
according to the Educational Policy 1998?
C. To spread religious knowledge to every
nook and corner A. 2.2%
D. Both A and C B. 4%
M
35. Who wished for the first Educational Con- C. 4.5%
ference to be held?
D. 6%
A. Liaquat Ali khan
RA
41. In which policy,more facilities were an-
B. Ghulam Muhammad nounced for the teachers?
C. Ayyub khan A. 1959
D. Quaid-e-Azam B. 1974
36. Which name has been designated to the
C. 1972
Educational Policy 1969?
E
D. 1970
A. The Educational Policy of Yahya khan
42. Who presented the Educational Commen-
B. The Educational Policy of Nur khan
RE
dations in 1969?
C. The Educational Policy of Ayyub khan
A. Yahya khan
D. The Educational Policy of M sharif
B. Asghar khan
37. According to 1972-1980 Educational Pol-
C. Air Marshall Nur khan
SH
icy,what was done to make education com-

mon? D. None of these
A. The establishment of People,s Open Uni- 43. Who made the Educational Policy
versity 1998,broadcasted on TV?
B. The establishment of National Educa- A. The Educational Minister
tion Foundations
B. Chief Minister
I
C. The establishments of schools both in

JA
cities and villages C. Prime Minster
D. Both B and C D. Secretary of Education

38. Which university was given the level of a 44. Under whose government M Sharif Educa-
complete university? tional Commission was established?
A. People,s Open University A. Yahya khan
B. Punjab University B. Ghulam Muhammad

C. Bahaud-din-Zakrya University C. Ayyub khan
D. Jamia Islamia Bahawalpur D. Bhutto
39. What was the name of the Educational Min- 45. What would be the proportion of educa-
ister,who supervised the preparation of the tion of Science and Arts according to the
Educational Policy 1998-2010? Educational Policy 1998?
35. D 36. B 37. A 38. D 39. C 40. B 41. C 42. C 43. C 44. B 45. B
A. 40:60 A. Zia-Ul-Haqq
B. 50:50 B. Ayyub khan
C. 30:70 C. Yahya khan
D. 20:80 D. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto
46. Till now,how many National Educational 52. During whose government the policy
ER
Policies have been designed? to nationalize educational institutes was
adopted?
A. 3
A. Yahya khan
B. 2
GD
B. Ayyub khan
C. 4
C. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto
D. 5
47. On which Report Of Educational Commis- D. Nawaz Sharif
sion western emphasis was very obvious? 53. What is highly emphasized in the Educa-
AN
tional Policy of 19998?
A. M Sharif Educational Commission
A. To Increase the Literacy Rate
B. The Educational Policy 1998
B. Educational is must for All
C. The Educational 1959
C. The Derail of llliteracy
D. The Educational Policy 1972
CH
48. Which Educational Policy had the longest D. To Open More Schools
tenure? 54. Which Educational Policy has the main
qualities of Islamic foundations and Urdu
A. 1954
as a source of education?
B. 1972
A. The Educational Policy 1972
N
C. 1998
D. 1979
YA
C. The Educational Policy 1992

49. In which Educational Policy the dual edu-
cational system was severely denied? D. The Educational Policy 1998
55. Who compiled the Educational Policy 1972?
A. The Educational Policy 1959
RA
A. Air Marshall Nur khan

B. Zia-ul-Haqq
C. The Educational Policy 1969
C. Fakhr Imam
D. The Educational Policy 1998
D. M Sharif
NA
50. Which Educational Policy gave more im-

portance to the recitation and translation 56. In which policy,it was firmly undertaken to
of Quran? increase the literacy rate to 100%?
A. 1972 A. The Educational Policy 1959
B. 1992 B. The Educational Policy 1972
C. 1998 C. The Educational Policy 1992
D. 1951 D. The Educational Policy 1998
51. In which government,the National Educa- 57. Who is the in charge of the Educational
tional Policy was presented? Department?
46. B 47. A 48. C 49. B 50. C 51. A 52. C 53. C 54. A 55. C 56. C 57. A 58. A
A. The Education Minster A. Chief Minster

B. Secretary of Education Dept B. Educational Minster
C. Chief Minster C. Secretary of Educational Dept
D. Additional Secretary D. Deputy Secretary Of Education
58. What is the main target of the Educational 64. Who is the Official manager of the Educa-
Policy 1998? tion Department?
A. To make the nation get rid of the dark- A. Educational Minster
ness of illiteracy
B. Secretary of Educational Dept
M
B. To increase the educational capabilities
of the teachers C. Chief Minster
C. To change the course books D. None of these
RA
65. Who is responsible for the posting transfer
D. None of the above mentioned
and promotion of the educational officers
59. How many new Primary Schools are sug- of 17 to 20 grades?
gested to be opened?
A. Educational Minster
A. 20 Thousand
B. Chief Minster
B. 30 Thousand
C. Deputy Secretary of Education
C. 10 Thousand
E
D. Secretary of Educational Dept
D. 40 Thousand
66. When and where,the first Islamic Educa-
RE
60. How many new Middle Schools will be
tion Conference was held?
opened?
A. 1997 Macca
A. 7 Thousand
B. 1976 Medina
B. 15 Thousand
SH
C. 1977 Lohore
C. 18 Thousand
D. 20 Thousand D. 1977 Riyadh
61. How many new Secondary Schools will be 67. What kind of institute was considered au-
opened? thentic as an educational centre in a Muslim
society?
A. 9 Thousand
A. Mosque Schools
I
B. 10 Thousand
B. Primary
JA
C. 7 Thousand
C. Secondary
D. 4Thousand
D. Both B and C
62. According to the Educational Policy 1998,
what should be the qualification of teachers 68. In the Education Policy 1978-80 which say-
of primary schools? ing of the Holy Prophet was made the basis
for the adult education?
A. Matric
A. 12 Thousand
B. BA
B. 14 Thousand
C. FA
C. 15 Thousand
D. MA
63. Who is the managing director of the Edu- D. 13 Thousand
cational Department? 69. Who work under the Deputy Secretary?
59. D 60. B 61. C 62. C 63. C 64. B 65. D 66. A 67. A 68. D 69. A
A. Section Officer A. 1973

B. Director B. 1982
C. DPI C. 1979
D. None of these D. 1990
70. How many secretaries work under the Sec- 76. Who supervises the high school at district
retary of Education?
ER
level?
A. 3 A. Education Directer
B. 4 B. District Edu Officer Secondary
C. 5
GD
C. Deputy District Edu Officer
D. 7
D. Ass Education Officer
71. To whom,the Additional Secretaries give
help? 77. Who attest the ACR of the District Educa-
tion Officers?
A. Provincial Educational Minster
AN
A. Director Education Secondary
B. Secretary of Education
B. Deputy Director Education
C. Federal Education Minster
C. Deputy District Edu Officer
D. Deputy Secretary
72. In the Education Policy of 1978-80 how D. Ass Education Officer
CH
many female teachers were planned to be 78. In the Education Policy 1972-80 how many
appointed for female education? seats were added to the Hihger Education
Institutes?
A. 40 Thousand
B. 50 Thousand A. 1 lac
C. 30 Thousand B. 2 lac
N
D. 10 Thousand C. 50 lac
73. In the Education Policy 1972-80 how many D. 1 & half lac
YA
additional seats foe science were assigned 79. During Which Education Policy, the Na-
on intermediate level? tional Institute of Pakistan Studies was es-
A. 156000 tablished?
RA
B. 166000 A. The Education Policy 1972-80

C. 177000 B. The Education Policy 1970
D. 186000 C. The Edu. Conference 1947
74. IN the Education Policy 1972-80 which sub-
NA
D. The Edu. Commission 1959

ject was regarded must for Metric to Degree
classes? 80. During Which Education policy, permit
was given to make student committees?
A. Arabic
A. The Education Policy 1947
B. English
B. The Education Policy 1959
C. Islamiat
C. The Education Policy 1970
D. Education
75. When the administrative structure of D. The Education Policy 1972-80
schools was separated from that of col- 81. How much duration was assigned to 1st
leges? part of LLB?
70. C 71. D 72. C 73. A 74. D 75. B 76. B 77. A 78. A 79. A 80. D 81. A
A. 2 yrs A. Research
B. 3 yrs B. Technical Education
C. 1 yr C. Vocational Education
D. 6 yrs D. None of these
82. Under whose administration General Yahya 87. In the Education Policy 1978-80 the teach-
Khan established the Education Commit- ing of which subject was considered neces-
tee? sary in every department of education?
A. Fazal-ur-Rehman A. Pak studies
M
B. S M Sharif B. Islamiat
C. Air Marshall Nur Khan C. English
RA
D. All of these D. Mathematics
83. Which Education Policy was not followed 88. In which way, the Secondary Education will
at all? change into?
A. The Education Policy 1970 A. Higher Education
B. The Education Policy 1972-80 B. Degree level
E
C. Both A and B C. According to time and conditions
D. The Edu Commission 1959 D. Both A and B
RE
84. What kind of schools will be opened for the 89. Why all universities are suffering from fi-
children who have either left their educa- nancial crisis?
tion incomplete or have not taken admis-
A. Federal Government does not have re-
sion at all?
sources to fulfil their needs
SH
A. Rural Workshop Schools

B. Provincial Government does not have
B. Primary Schools sources to fulfil their needs
C. Adult Education Schools C. The Higher Education Commission is
running out of funds
D. Mosque Schools
D. None of the above mentioned
85. In the Education Policy 1978-80 Which say-
I
ing Prophet Mohammad (PBUH) was used 90. What should be done as regards teachers
JA
as the basis? of the Universities?

A. Get Knowledge though you have to go A. To make them get high qualification
to china
B. To grant them higher pay so they can
B. To get knowledge is the duty of every get training
Muslim man and woman
C. To make them get free training
C. Get Knowledge from the cradle to the
D. To grant them leave so they can get
grave
training from the country or abroad
D. All of the above mentioned
91. In Which Education Policy, it was sug-
86. In the Education Commission 1959, Which gested to use the rooms of union coun-
thing was considered the necessary part of cil and community Centres for educational
education? purposes?
82. C 83. B 84. A 85. B 86. A 87. B 88. C 89. B 90. D 91. A 92. B
A. The Education Policy 1972-80 B. The selected books of important should

be translated into Urdu
B. The Education Policy 197
C. The scientific and Professional abilities
C. Nur Khan Edu. Commission
should be introduced in Urdu
D. The Edu. Conference 1947
D. All of the above
92. What should be done to make the educa-
97. What Kind of Education initiates the pas-
ER
tion of science and Technology common
sion of patriotism, discipline national unity
among the public?
and international awareness?
A. Free lectures must be delivered on the
A. Scientific
respective subjects
GD
B. Religious
B. The establishment of a National Centre
C. Physical
C. Free training should be given in the re-
spective fields D. International Affairs
D. Both A and C 98. Why second shift in schools was suggested
AN
93. What should be done for the higher educa- in the Education Policy 1972-80?
tion of females? A. To get rid of new expenditure
A. More facilities B. To not let education common
B. Enactment of Post Graduate Classes C. To make most of the population literate
CH
C. Funds D. All of the above mentioned
D. Establishment of more universities 99. Which University is more beneficial and
94. How the objective, of making the individ- more suitable for adult education?
uals get the religious awareness, can be A. Punjab University
gained?
N
B. Allama Iqbal Open University

A. By inculcating in them the ideology of
C. Bhaud-din-Zakriya University
Pakistan
YA
D. Jamia Islamia Bahawalpur

B. By promoting the education of islamiat
and Arabic 100. According to the Education Policy 1979,
What should be done as regards the educa-
C. By giving them free education of Is-
tion and welfare of special people?
RA
lamiat
A. To establish the National Communica-
D. Both A and B
tion Committee
95. How many Arabic centres were established
B. To establish an Expert Committee
to promote it as a language?
NA
C. To make arrangements for the habitat

A. 30
of special people
B. 20
C. 10
101. What steps would be taken to harmonize
D. 15 the course books with Islamia values and
96. What steps were taken to make urdu an Pakistan’s ideology?
official language? A. To recompile the syllabus
A. Books of Science, Professional and tech- B. To consistent book will be designed for
nical subjects should be produced in Urdu the first 2 classes
93. B 94. B 95. A 96. D 97. C 98. A 99. B 100. D 101. D 102. A
C. A Book analysis committee will be A. 6yrs

established that will review the present
B. 7yrs
course books
C. 3yrs
D. 5yrs
102. How much money as demanded for the im-
plementation of the Education Policy 1970? 107. What would be the duties of the National
Education Council?
A. 3 Hundred Million & 40 lac
A. It would analyse the performance in dif-
B. 4 Hundred Million
ferent fields of education
M
C. 6 Hundred Million & 50 lac
B. It would suggest changes in educational
D. 7 Hundred Million Programmes according to ever changing
conditions and needs of the country
103. What steps should be taken to make the
RA
examination system better? C. It would analyse the curriculum and its
outcomes
A. Internal exams will be taken to test the
abilities of the students D. All of the above mentioned
B. The mutual performance, the mutual be- 108. When tye 8th Educational Policy was im-
haviour and approach will be analysed as plemented?
regards their progress
E
A. 27 March 1998
C. Both A and B
B. 28 March 1999
RE
D. Outer exams will be taken
C. 27 March 2000
104. According to the Education Policy 1979,
D. 27 April 1998
what steps should be taken as regards the
welfare of the students? 109. Why the 8th Educational Policy is pre-
SH
ferred over the other ones?

A. The hostel seats for the students of col-
leges and universities will be increased A. It was publicized the most
B. The bus fair will be minimized the books B. Many of its goals were brought to light
would be cheaper and book banks would before it preparation and implementation
be established
C. Its preparation was started many
I
C. The scholarships and loan without in- months back

terest would be assigned for intelligent and
JA

brilliant students
110. What was the name of the Prime Minister,
who advised to reorganizes the 49 pages
105. In Which Education Policy, it was sug- manuscript, issued in the very beginning
gested to give free education till Matric? of the 8th Educational Policy?
A. The Education Policy 1970 A. Zulfiqar Ali Bhutto
B. The Edu Conference 1947 B. Benazir Bhutto
C. The Edu Commission 1959 C. Nawaz Sharif
D. The Education Policy 1972-80 D. None of the above
106. What would be the tenure of the National 111. How many pages had the recompiled
Education Council? manuscript?
103. C 104. D 105. D 106. D 107. D 108. A 109. D 110. C 111. D 112. A
A. 170 117. What was introduced in the 8th Educa-

tional Policy, as regards the examination
B. 100
system?
C. 69
A. Internal Exams
D. 169
B. External Exams
112. What were the first words of the 8th Edu-
C. Semester System
ER
cational Policy?
D. Six Months Exams
A. Education is the basic human right
118. What kinds of teacher’s were preferred in
B. Education should be religious the 8th Educational Policy?
GD
C. Education is must be free A. Male
D. All of the above mentioned B. Female
113. What degree was introduced to the Na- C. Highly Qualified
tional Institute of Science and Technology? D. Well Trained
AN
A. B.ED 119. Who will be assigned to work for welfare
B. MA of the students and organize their activities
in universities?
C. MSC
A. Principle
D. PhD
B. Teacher
CH
114. According to the 8th Educational Policy,
C. Member of Union Council
What new thing should be introduced to
the religious institutes? D. Dean
120. Which grade will be assigned to the Uni-
A. The subjects of Science, English Math-
versity teachers?
ematics, General Science etc, will be Intro-
duced to the religious institutes A. 17
N
B. The government will take the religious B. 14

institutes under its authority C. 18
YA
C. Both A and B D. 21
D. Nonce of these 121. What kind of library was suggested to pro-
mote the habit of reading?
115. Till which year, Pakistan had promised
RA
the International Brotherhood, to double A. Home Library

the literacy rate? B. College Library
A. 2006 C. Mobile Library
B. 2020 D. Public Library
NA
C. 2010 122. To which institute, all the libraries of the

country will be connected via internet?
D. 2000
A. Allama Iqbal Open University
116. What would promote the programmes of
PTC and CT for teacher’s training? B. Punjab University
C. Pakistan’s National LIbrary
A. Provincial Government
D. Mobile Library
B. Central Government
123. Who would pay the half of the expendi-
C. Federal Government ture to build stadiums for 3.000 people and
D. Allama Iqbal Open University gymnasiums for 500 people?
113. A 114. A 115. C 116. D 117. D 118. B 119. D 120. C 121. C 122. C 123. A
A. Federal Government of first 3 classes?

B. Central Government A. 3
C. Provincial Government B. 4
D. Board of inter Education C. 5
124. Which scheme was introduced for the stu- D. 2
dents who could not afford their studies? 126. In the 8th Education Policy,what was
A. Free Education Scheme highly denied as regards education?
B. Loan without interest A. Absentees
M
C. Scholarships B. Holidays
D. Education Card Scheme C. Disorder
125. According to the 8th Education Policy,how
RA
D. Politics
many books will be included in the course
E
RE
I SH
JA
124. D 125. D 126. D

ER
23. Elementary education in early history Islam
GD
AN
CH
1. the value set upon education in Islam is 4. Islam raised the Arabs to a higher level
indicated by certain Hadith which reflect of and at the same time introduced
the ideals of Islam in its early days and amongst them the elements of education in
represent the prevailing views for the first which they had till then been rather defi-
generations. cient.
N
A. Religious A. Education
B. Education B. Knowledge
YA
C. National C. Training
D. Institutional D. Civilization
2. It is better that a man should secure for 5. The Holy Prophet (PBUH)attached con-
his child than that he bestows a say in his
RA
siderable importance to attaining knowl-

charity. edge maybe inferred from the conditions
A. Property on which he released prisoners of war after
his first victory at.
B. Legacy
NA
A. Mecca
C. Education
D. Heritage B. Arafat
3. It is regarded as a praiseworthy deed to ed- C. Hudaibiya

ucate a slave-girl than set her free and give D. Badr
her to.
6. Quraish as a people engaged in Com-
A. Family merce,had naturally more occasions to
B. Institute practice writing than the date-planters and
herdsmen of.
C. Her Parents
A. Medina
D. Husband
1. B 2. C 3. D 4. D 5. D 6. A
330 Chapter 23. Elementary education in early history Islam
B. Mecca 12. The poet kumait and commander Hajaj bin

C. Badr Yusuf were
D. Banu Umayya A. Leaders

7. The art of reading and writing which ex- B. Sardars
isted to a limited extent on Arabia before
C. School Teachers
Islam increased,after the advent of Islam
and especially with the expansion of. D. Head Masters
A. Islam 13. Later on Hajaj bin Yusuf chose career.
B. Muslims A. Teaching
M
C. Empire B. Writing
D. Territories C. Industrial
RA
8. In the early stages after the spread of Islam D. Political
teachers in the elementary places of Instruc-
tions were mainly non-Muslims especially 14. Zubair bin Hayya taught in a school at Taif
Jews and. before being appointed administrator of Is-
fahan in.
A. Buddhists
A. Greece
B. Atheists
B. Mecca
C. Christians
E
C. Medina
D. Monotheists
RE
9. When young Muslim Community,had been D. Iran
constituted system of education embrac- 15. In AD 723 Dahhaq bin Muzahim kept Ele-
ing at least the bare elements of knowl- mentary School in
edge,was set on foot.
A. Medina
A. Primitive
SH
B. Basra
B. Elementary
C. Kufa
C. Contemporary
D. None of the Above
D. Islamic
16. Bedawi of the tribe of Rujah settled as a
10. In the early period the attested notices of
mu,allim in Basra in the 2nd Century A.H
the Schools and the Mu,allims (Teach-
and conducted a school for.
I
ers)are found.
JA
A. Free
A. Islamic
B. Jewish B. Payment
C. Elementary C. Poor
D. Christian D. Islam
11. Elementary Education seems to have been 17. A system of Muslim education had taken
thoroughly established in Islam by the root in the land of after being conquered
early period. by Muslims.
A. Quraish A. Iraq
B. Primitive B. Medina
C. Islamic C. Basra
D. Umayyad D. Badr
7. C 8. C 9. A 10. C 11. D 12. C 13. D 14. D 15. C 16. B 17. A
18. The education of young princes at Court 23. advised the parents”Teach your chil-
had reached a high standard of excellence dren to swim and throw darts,change them
in the early period of. that they must be able to mount a horse
securely and make them recite verses.
A. Quraish
A. Caliph Omar
B. Abbasid
B. Caliph Abu Bakr
C. Islam
ER
C. Caliph Usman
D. Umayyah
D. Caliph Ali
19. The development of scientific knowledge
under in the 2nd Century A.H naturally 24. Caliph advised his son,s tutor”Teach
GD
carried with it a corresponding advance in them to swinm,and accustom them to sleep
preparatory education. little.
A. Umayyah A. Caliph Usman

B. Caliph Abdal Malik
B. Quraish
AN
C. Caliph Abu Bakr
C. Abbasids
D. Caliph Omar
D. None of these
25. The child is to be sent to school and the
20. It is on the record that the deserving pupils teacher must begin to instruct him system-
of Elementary Schools were rewarded by. atically in the Quran,at the age of.
CH
A. Being carried through streets on camels A. 4
B. Having almonds thrown to them B. 6
C. Giving scholarship to them C. 9
D. Both A and B D. 7
N
21. The Fatimid administration,now estab- 26. Simultaneously with exercises in reading
lished in Egypt,toot steps towards founding and writing from the Quran,the pupils were
academies in where theological tenets taught basics of.
YA
of the Shi,iti School as well as writings of

A. Geography
the Greeks and the Persians were studied.
B. Science
A. Syria
C. Arithmetic
RA
B. Afghanistan
D. Philosophy
C. Cairo
27. In spreading the knowledge of the
D. Mecca teacher should have no other design than
22. When the Fatimid dynasty was over- that of doing a work well-pleasing to God
NA
thrown,the Ayyubids superseded their and thereby attaining nearness to Him.

academies by high schools conducted A. Divine Things
on principles and the wide spaces of
B. Islamic Teachings
the mosques were utilized for teaching pur-
poses. C. Verses of Quran
A. Shi,iti D. Science
B. Islamic 28. Bukhari writes a saying ascribed to
”Nothing has a better right to be re-
C. Sunni warded than instruction in the Book of
D. Teaching God.”
18. D 19. C 20. D 21. C 22. C 23. A 24. B 25. D 26. C 27. A 28. C
332 Chapter 23. Elementary education in early history Islam
A. Ibn Khaldun 34. In relations of teacher to student,the basic

B. Ibn Abi Talib principle was.
C. Ibn Abbas A. The just and equal treatment of all schol-

ars
D. Ibn Zaifa
B. The payment of salary in time
29. The payment of teachers became the rule
actually recognized in practice by. C. Punctuality
A. Muslim Law D. Both B and C
B. Christian Law 35. Laith bin Mujahid affirms that at the Day
M
of Judgement God will subject the school-
C. Jewish Law
master to a special interrogation as to a spe-
D. Umayyad Law cial interrogation as to whether he main-
30. The teacher must look upon his wages,not tained strict impartiality between pupil and
RA
as a professional emoluments but as. pupil and that if he is found guilty in this
respect,he will be set beside.
A. A salary that government pays
B. A gift Divinely bestowed upon him A. Evil Ones
C. A fee that parents pay after their afford- B. Workers of Inequity

ability C. Devilish Minded
D. Both A and C
E
D. Workers
31. The most important thing for the teacher 36. It was not permissible to employ a student
RE
is purpose.He must devote himself to in the private service f the teacher,s house-
the work from purely spiritual motives and hold without the express permission of.
without any worldly considerations what-
ever. A. Parents
A. Outward B. Principle
SH
B. Inward C. Student
C. Moral D. Society
D. Spiritual 37. were not to be used for private service
32. The teacher was not supposed to of the teacher under any circumstances.
receive without the knowledge of par- A. Poor
I
ents or guardians.
B. Orphans
JA
A. Salary
C. Pupils
B. Guidance
D. Needy Ones
C. Presents
38. Islam prescribes that all teachers should
D. Training be and work of elementary teaching
33. As far as School Administration in Mus- must be done in a specially appointed pub-
lim Education was concerned treats in lic place within in the sight of the people
great deal. and not at the teacher,s residence.
A. Muslim Literature A. Well Educated
B. Scientific Research B. Expert
C. Islamic Teachings C. Married
D. Technical knowledge D. Technical
29. A 30. B 31. B 32. C 33. A 34. A 35. B 36. A 37. C 38. C
39. The schools remained closed on and 41. The corporal punishment was considered
also for a period of from one to three days a rule rather than.
and after Eid festivals.
A. Inclusion
A. Saturday and Sunday B. Exception
B. Monday and Friday C. Reprimanding
ER
C. Monday and Tuesday D. Apology
D. Thursday and Friday 42. To protect the children from undue severity
40. The student was no the whole or partial Muslim jurists Canctioned Corporal pun-
holiday whenever he completed his study ishment should be limited between
GD
of Holy Quran and the occasion was cele- light strokes.
brated called Iqlaba or Takhrifa. A. Three and Ten
A. On Eid B. Three and Five
B. On Friday C. Five and Ten
AN
C. Same day D. Five and Eight
D. In Feast
CH
N
YA
RA
NA
39. D 40. D 41. B 42. A

JA
I SH
RE
E
RA
M
ER
24. Islamic education
GD
AN
CH
1. The concept of was not for the early A. Awareness
Muslims but a complete system of life
B. Knowledge
drawn from the Howly Quran and Tradi-
tions of the Prophet(PBUH). C. Worship
A. Secularism D. Wisdom
N
B. Monotheism 5. Scientific research as well as agriculture

commerce industry and appreciation of the
C. Atheism
beauty in the universe are all
YA
D. Scepticism
A. Belief in God
2. The concept of means adherence to the
word of God. B. Worship
RA
A. Secularism C. Piety
B. Atheism D. Parts of Islam
C. Prophethood 6. included teachings and Sharia his-
D. Monotheism tory geography mathematics astronomy
NA
medicine and engineering and others all

3. In olden times, an all-encompassing matter
that is done is the name of God.
that covered all kind of human activity was.
A. Worship
A. Worship
B. Education B. Monotheism
C. Good Behaviour C. Atheism
D. Service to Mankind D. Islamic Education

4. Seeking God in every deed and thought and 7. The Islamic school with all its different de-
feeling and adherence to God,s world is the grees was a house for education in addition
of the Muslim. to.
1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. D 7. D
336 Chapter 24. Islamic education
A. Knowledge 13. In order to turn our educational system

B. Training into Islamic one,attention must be paid to
consulting the religious sentiment in the
C. intuition Quranic way,i.e,drawing the attention of
D. Worship the people towards the sings of God in the
8. The school at that time was not isolated universe and consequently urging people
from the rest of the society in fact it fixed worship God without
the values by which society lived and com- A. Doubt
pleted and developed those values on the
basis of. B. Partner
M
A. Islam C. Misconception
B. Knowledge D. Hesitation
C. Science 14. Other must be taught as tools we use
RA
to realize the divine plan in everything on
D. Experiences
earth for the benefit of man.
9. The other sciences taught in those schools
were not divorced from religious sciences A. Religions
in the curricula or from the religious spirit B. Knowledge
pervading all education and
C. Things
A. Research
E
D. Sciences
B. Society
15. The Muslim student has to be constantly
RE
C. Training reminded of the message entrusted to him
D. Institute by God and is the means to realize it.
10. The students were required to know reli- A. Science
gious matters on the one hand and to know
the on the other hand. B. Religion
SH
A. Traditions C. Knowledge
B. Culture D. Wisdom
C. Rules 16. Books pertaining to sciences must be
purged of traces of ignorance and to
D. Sharia
make them conform to the spirit of Islam.
11. A knowledge of is not an end itself
I
but its purpose was to bring up successive A. Monotheism

JA
generations on the basis of sound religion. B. Atheism

A. Sharia C. Scepticism
B. World D. Vice
C. Life Hereafter 17. Sociology defines a Nation as a group
D. Religions of people united by a correct belief in
12. The Muslim is committed to utilize the fruit God,despite differences of race,language or
of according to the work of God. history etc.
A. Science A. lgnorant
B. Knowledge B. Atheist
C. Religion C. Islamic
D. Teachings D. Monotheist
8. C 9. B 10. D 11. D 12. A 13. B 14. D 15. A 16. B 17. C
18. Sociology teaches phenomena as hu- 23. Different of education emphasize differ-
man behaviour corresponding with and in ent aspects of life but Islam blends all the
conformity with the dictates of God and systems in its own one which gives promi-
the divine system. nence to inner purity social consciousness
and attainment of any skill which the per-
A. Atheistic
son chooses for himself.
B. Sceptic
A. Aspects
ER
C. Neither A nor B
B. Branches
D. Monotheistic
C. Kinds
19. science of history teaches the history
D. Philosophies
GD
of humanity on the basis that the mission
of Man is the material development on the 24. Old schools of education existed
earth and to realize himself through con- in which was the centre of all Islamic
quest and mastery by any means whatso- activities students students studying and
ever. teachers teaching in such schools remained
part of the society.
AN
A. Islamic
A. Madrisas
B. Monotheistic
B. Vales
C. Ignorant
C. Grounds
D. Secular
CH
D. Mosques
20. Islamic history must be rewritten in a
25. There was very close relationship in Is-
completely manner without the traces
lamic schools and moral and spiritual guid-
of Jewish and Christian Orientalists who
ance was easily available to the students.
intentionally spoiled it with the aim of con-
cealing its great achievements and high- A. Parent-Teacher
lighting its deviations.
N
B. Student-Teacher
A. New C. Parent-Student
YA
B. Islamic D. None of these

C. Modern 26. The evaluation of the student was not done
only on the basis of knowledge and under-
D. Scientific
standing of the subject but also on his
21. Islamic education is naturally based on
RA
and moral conduct in different walks of life.

Holy Quran and
A. Piety
A. Hadith
B. Performance
B. Practice
C. Wisdom
NA
C. Teachings
D. Knowledge
D. Prophethood 27. The education of Muslim children in
22. Islam propagates to adopt the mid-way in old schools of Islamic education was
all walks of life The same is true about with as core subjects which they
its read,recited.and memorized.
A. Teachings A. Religions
B. Education B. Rituals
C. Traditions C. Islam
D. Rules D. Holy Quran
18. D 19. C 20. B 21. A 22. B 23. D 24. D 25. B 26. A 27. D
28. The fundamental knowledge of Islam has A. Central

been revealed in Holy Quran and B. Main
present practical examples for living a life
of true Muslim. C. Moral
A. Socialism D. Subsidiary
34. In Islamic schools the able and studious
B. Teachings
were allowed to move forward at their own
C. Traditions speed and they were not restricted by a
D. Preaching fixed curriculum nor they were kept in the
same
29. The old schools known as Maktabs and
M
Madrasas were generally attached with A. Environment
A. Educational System B. School
C. Age Group
RA
B. Mosques
C. Nizaam D. System
35. In old Muslim schools it was usual prac-
D. Traditions
tice that the brilliant students understood
30. The highest and oldest seat of higher ed- and appreciated the difficulties and merits
ucation known as Jamia Al-Azhar of of the dull students and the dull students
was located in the mosque. learnt easily from them in comparison of
E
A. Mecca their
B. Median A. Age Group
RE
C. Bhutan B. Class Fellows
D. Cairo C. Parents
31. The old Islamic schools had features in D. Teachers
those days,which are advocated as features 36. Students from all classes of society sat to-
SH
of a good modern system. gether at the feet of the same Only by

A. Islamic their contribution to the activities of the
group were they distinguished.
B. Education
A. Group
C. Scientific
B. System
D. Knowledge
I
32. The schools did not hold any annual or C. Scholar

JA
half year examination for the promotion of D. Organization

the students The teachers who taught the 37. Teaching was not a profession acquired by
subjects continuously did the assessment a mere certificate awarded by a Govern-
of the students. ment body,but something achieved by real
A. Islamic ability and true vocation a statement by.
B. Scientific A. Ata-ur-Rehman
C. Old B. M.A.Zaki Badwai
D. Western C. Hayat Khan

33. In Islamic schools each student was free D. Prof Saleem Ahmad
to attain his ultimate level in any of his in- 38. In Islamic schools teaching of Arabic lan-
terest without being held back because of guage and literature was one of the impor-
difficulties in disciplines. tant requirements of
28. C 29. B 30. D 31. B 32. A 33. D 34. C 35. D 36. C 37. B 38. A
A. Curriculum 44. Probably the absence of teaching of science

B. Religion in those schools was responsible for not
producing any and inventor.
C. Educational Institute
A. Scholar
D. System
39. The main drawback of the old Muslim B. Researcher
schools was that those schools gave more
ER
C. Muslim Scientist
emphasis on factual information and mem-
orization and neglected D. Science Teacher
A. Assessment 45. It would be sufficient if Muslims as group
were deeply religious and the would
GD
B. Examination
not misuse science as to strike the bound-
C. Understanding ary of Islam.
D. Semester System A. Government
40. Law,theology,mysticism and rituals were
B. Scientist
AN
based on Holy Quran and
A. Piety C. Nation
B. Guidance D. World
C. Hadith 46. The harmony between religious education
CH
D. Traditions and different disciplines was the need of
41. After completing education in Islamic the in accordance with the needs of the
schools the students used to learn about students.
medical profession based on the system A. Science
called
B. Nation
A. Unani
N
C. Time
B. Islamization
C. Organization D. Educational System
YA
D. Scientific 47. There is no other religion or culture ex-

42. which is considered the mother of all cept Islam who had considered the ba-
sciences was very popular among the Mus- sic need of man.
RA
lims in those days. A. Religion

A. Biology B. Training
B. Physics
C. Education
C. Mathematics
NA
D. Guidance
D. Philosophy
48. According to Islam,education is based on
43. One of the basic deficiencies in Traditional
basic elements that create a beautiful
Islamic Institutions was that was not
harmony between education and training
given proper place but was considered as
of man.
contrary to Islamic education.
A. Mathematics A. Four
B. Science B. Five
C. Philosophy C. Three
D. Sociology D. Six
39. C 40. D 41. A 42. C 43. B 44. C 45. B 46. C 47. C 48. A
49. is the first stage of Islamic education 54. Knowledge of comes when a person
so the perfect education should reach peo- gets awareness of religion through under-
ple inn its original form and people would standing recitation,and sanctification and
believe in its genuineness. becomes able to decide according to reli-
A. Revision gion to get his God,s approval.
B. Belief A. Wisdom
C. Memorization B. Recitation
D. Recitation C. Islamic Culture
50. The second aspect of Islamic education is
M
D. None of these
the knowledge of Book so people would
become well aware of the meaning of Holy 55. According to Islamic education there is no
Book and would understand the elements separation between this world and here-
after and it supports the unity of and
RA
like belief in unity of God,Prophethood and
religion.
A. Traditions A. Man
B. Life Hereafter B. Society
C. Worldly Life C. World
D. Islamic Knowledge
E
D. None of these
51. The third aspect of Islamic educa-
tion,Sanctification means. 56. According to Islam,it is necessary to get
RE
education through wisdom and
A. To harmonize
A. Knowledge
B. To protect
C. To purify B. Awareness
D. Both A and B C. Perception

SH
52. Sanctification includes understanding and D. Senses

recitation of Holy Quran as well as total
57. Laith bin Mujahid affirms that at the Day
submission to God through knowledge of.
of Judgement God will subject the school-
A. Religion master to a special interrogation as to a spe-
B. Duties cial interrogation as to whether he main-
tained strict impartiality between pupil and
I
C. Right and Wrong

pupil and that if he is found guilty in this
JA
D. Rules and Regulations respect,he will be set beside.

53. Knowledge of is a very important part
A. Evil Ones
of Islamic education.
A. Traditions B. Workers of Inequity
B. Wisdom C. Devilish Minded

C. World D. Workers
D. Life Hereafter
49. D 50. B 51. C 52. C 53. B 54. A 55. C 56. D 57. B

Education PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Education PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

NA

I will develop this draft from time to time

Published by Narayan Changder

First printing, September 2019

The aim of this publication is to sup-

3 Child development and pedagogy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

4 Histry of education in subcontinent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

8 Educational sociology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

9 Principle of teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

10 Psychological disorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

11 Secondary education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

12 Environmental studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

13 Higher education system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

15 Modern history of education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191

17 Research methodology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

18 School and classroom management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

19 Teaching and research aptitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

20 Teaching aptitude in education . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

21 Educational movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

23 Elementary education in early history Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

D. Achievement A. Punish the student

development”, was said by

C. David Ausubel whose mental age is 16?

8. Which of the following are the characteris- A. Their experiences

9. The concept of ‘SUPW’ was elucidated by A. Science

B. Dr. K. L. Shrimali D. 44th Amendment

C. Concurrent list is affected the most by

B. Classical Conditioning 19. Which of the following situations would

C. Pavlovian Conditioning the best for maximum transfer of learning?

D. All of the above 29. What is the main purpose of punishment

C. Generating interest in subject C. Man must control and change environ-

ways of learning for students? 40. Why is ‘learning by doing’ important?

B. Speed of learning is same for all students B. Keeps children busy

41. For a teacher teaching a class wit large

D. All children immediately follow strength, which of the techniques is best?

D. Suggest each other the effective ways A. Indisciplined students

of man in changing his environment? B. When the instruction have ended

B. Biology D. Only at the end of major units of instruc-

47. Why is teacher training necessary?

A. They are easier to interpret A. Reprimand them

C. The sampling content can be wider C. Give a command seeking attention

D. Article 45 D. Iswar Bhai Patel Committee

A. Piaget - Moral Development 73. undertook the innovative project ‘Lok

C. Presence of distractions in the class D. Rank students for selection

B. Their desire for freedom C. Kothari Commission Report

A. A material to teachers to base teaching

A. To aid teachers 86. What is the importance of having devel-

C. To act as a guidance for the unit tests A. To achieve happiness

D. Income generated by the occupation

84. is suitable to slow learners. B. Publicly demand an apology

A. Flexibility of time to learn A. Edgar Dale

C. The one exercising strict control over A. By friend’s counselling

D. The one who understands the problems C. By guardian’s counselling

the year? with below average students?

B. 1988 B. Won’t pay any attention

C. 1989 C. Same as with other students

D. 1990 D. Won’t allow them in the next class

A. National Liberty Mission A. Froebel

108. The statement by the then Prime Minister

D. 1997 D. Understanding, imagination and work-

D. Gautam Buddha B. Travel allowance and family pensions

A. Learning an education should cater to D. Raja Ram Mohan Roy

C. Education is purely a matter of mental B. End of nineteenth century